Spectra T950 Library

User Guide

SpectraLogic.com
 Copyright Copyright © 2007 - 2021 Spectra Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. This item and the
information contained herein are the property of Spectra Logic Corporation.

Notices Except as expressly stated herein, Spectra Logic Corporation makes its products and
associated documentation on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, BOTH OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. In no
event shall Spectra Logic be liable for any loss of profits, loss of business, loss of use or
data, interruption of business, or for indirect, special, incidental or consequential
damages of any kind, even if Spectra Logic has been advised of the possibility of such
damages arising from any defect or error.
Information furnished in this manual is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no
responsibility is assumed by Spectra Logic for its use. Due to continuing research and
development, Spectra Logic may revise this publication from time to time without notice,
and reserves the right to change any product specification at any time without notice.

Trademarks BlackPearl, BlueScale, CC, RioBroker, Spectra, SpectraGuard, Spectra Logic, StorCycle,
TeraPack, TFinity, and TranScale are registered trademarks of Spectra Logic Corporation.
Eon Protect and SeeVault are trademarks of Spectra Logic Corporation. MigrationPass is a
service mark of Spectra Logic Corporation. All rights reserved worldwide. All other
trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Part Number 90940000 Revision W

Revision
History Revision Date Description
Q November 2016 Update for BlueScale12.7.01.
R June 2017 Update for BlueScale12.7.02.
S February 2018 Update for BlueScale12.7.06.
T August 2018 Update for BlueScale12.7.06.01.
U August 2019 Update for BlueScale12.7.06.02.
V March 2021 Updated for BlueScale12.8.05
W May 2021 Updated Declaration of Confomity.

Notes:  To make sure you have the most current version of this guide
check the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal at
support.spectralogic.com/documentation/user-guides/.
 To make sure you have the release notes for the most current
version of the BlueScale software, check the Spectra Logic
Technical Support portal at support.spectralogic.com/
documentation/release-notes/.
 You must sign into the portal before viewing Release Notes.
The release notes contain updates to the User Guide since the
last time it was revised.

2
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 End User 1. READ CAREFULLY
License YOU SHOULD READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE
Agreement ACCEPTING THIS END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA"). THIS EULA
IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOUR ORGANIZATION, THE END
USER, AND SPECTRA LOGIC CORPORATION ("SPECTRA") FOR THE
SPECTRA SOFTWARE PRODUCT WHICH INCLUDES COMPUTER
SOFTWARE AND MAY INCLUDE ASSOCIATED MEDIA, PRINTED MEDIA,
AND "ONLINE" OR ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTATION (COLLECTIVELY,
"SOFTWARE PRODUCT"). BY INSTALLING, COPYING, OR OTHERWISE
USING THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE
TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS
EULA, YOU MAY NOT INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD OR USE THE
SOFTWARE PRODUCT. YOU AGREE THAT YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE
ACKNOWLEDGES THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT,
UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND
CONDITIONS.
2. OWNERSHIP
It is understood and agreed that Spectra Logic Corporation, a Delaware
corporation with offices at 6285 Lookout Road, Boulder, CO 80301 ("Licensor") is
the owner of all right, title and interest to the Software Product, regardless of the
media or form of the original download, whether by the World Wide Web, disk or
otherwise. You, as licensee ("Licensee") through your downloading, installing,
copying or use of this product do not acquire any ownership rights to the
Software Product.
3. GENERAL
The Software Product is licensed, not sold, to you by Spectra for use only under
the terms of this EULA. The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and
international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and
treaties. The rights granted herein are limited to Spectra's and its licensors'
intellectual property rights in the Software Product and do not include any other
patents or intellectual property rights. The terms of this EULA will govern any
software upgrades provided by Spectra that replace and/or supplement the
original Software Product, unless such upgrade is accompanied by a separate
license in which case the terms of that license will govern.
4. SOFTWARE PRODUCT
The Software Product, as used in this EULA, means, collectively and/or as
applicable:
 The Software Product package;
 Any and all contents, components, attachments, software, media, and code with which
this Agreement is provided and delivered;
 Any and all images, photographs, art, art work, clip art, fonts or other artistic works
(the "Art Work");
 Related explanatory written materials and instructions, and any other possible
documentation related thereto ("Documentation"); and
 Upgrades, modified versions, updates, additions and copies of the Software Product
(the "Upgrades"), if any, licensed to by Spectra under this EULA.

3
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 5. GRANT OF LICENSE AND RESTRICTIONS
A. Spectra grants you a non-exclusive, non-transferable End-User license
right to install the Software Product solely for the purpose for which it was
created.
B. Unless provided otherwise in the Documentation or by prior express
written consent of Spectra, you shall not display, modify, reproduce and
distribute any Art Work, or portion(s) thereof, included with or relating to
the Software Product, if any. Any such authorized display, modification,
reproduction and distribution shall be in full accord with this EULA.
Under no circumstances will your use, display, modification, reproduction
and distribution of the Art Work give you any Intellectual Property or
Proprietary Rights of the Art Work. All rights, title, and interest belong
solely to Spectra.
C. Except for the initial loading of the Software Product, you shall not,
without Spectra's express written consent:
 Copy or reproduce the Software Product; or
 Modify, adapt, or create derivative works based on the Software
Product or any accompanying materials.
6. DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS
A. Spectra will provide you with support services related to the Software
Product ("Support"). Such Support will be provided in accordance with
the Spectra Master Support Agreement, available for download and
viewing on the Spectra Corporate Web site. Use of Support is governed by
this EULA and Spectra's Master Support Agreement.
B. Any supplemental software, code, content, or media provided to you in
the course of Support shall be considered part of the Software Product and
subject to the terms and conditions of this EULA.
C. Spectra retains all right, title, and interest in and to the Software Product,
and any rights not granted to you herein are reserved by Spectra. You
hereby expressly agree not to extract information, reverse engineer,
disassemble, decompile, or translate the Software Product, or otherwise
attempt to derive the source code of the Software, except to the extent
allowed under any applicable law. In the event that such activities are
permitted by applicable law, any information you, or your authorized
agent, discover shall be promptly disclosed to Spectra and shall be
deemed the confidential information of Spectra.
D. You shall not modify, sublicense, assign, or transfer the Software Product
or any rights under this EULA, except as expressly provided in this EULA.
Any attempt to sublicense, assign, or transfer any of the rights, duties, or
obligations will be void.
E. You may permanently transfer all of your rights under this EULA,
provided you retain no copies. The other party must agree to accept the
terms and conditions of the EULA.
7. ALL RESERVED
All rights not expressly granted herein are reserved by Spectra.

4
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 8. TERM
A. This License is effective until terminated. Licensee may terminate it at any
time by destroying the Software Product with all copies, full or partial,
and removing all of its component parts.
B. Your rights under this EULA will terminate automatically without notice
from Spectra if you fail to comply with any term(s) or condition(s) of this
EULA. In such event, no notice shall be required by Spectra to effect such
termination.
C. Upon termination of this EULA, you shall cease all use of the Software
Product and destroy all copies, full or partial, together with all backup
copies, modifications, printed or written materials, and merged portions
in any form and remove all component parts of the Software Product.
9. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS
A. Spectra shall retain all right, title, and interest in the Software Product and
to any modifications or improvements made thereto, and any upgrades,
updates or Documentation provided to End User. End User will not obtain
any rights in the Software Product, its updates, upgrades, and
Documentation, as a result of its responsibilities hereunder.
B. B. End User acknowledges Spectra's exclusive rights in the Software
Product and that the Software Product is unique and original to Spectra
and that Spectra is owner thereof. Unless otherwise permitted by law, End
User shall not, at any time during or after the effective Term of the
Agreement, dispute or contest, directly or indirectly, Spectra's exclusive
right and title to the Software Product or the validity thereof.
10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Product and related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that
term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of "Commercial Computer
Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms
are used in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as
applicable. The Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer
Software Documentation are being licensed to U.S. Government end users (a)
only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other
End Users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. Unpublished rights
reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
11. EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES
You may not use or otherwise export or re-export the Software Product except as
authorized by United States law and the laws of the jurisdiction in which the
Software Product was obtained. In particular, but without limitation, the Software
Product may not be exported or re-exported (a) into (or to a nation or resident of)
any U.S. embargoed countries or (b) to anyone on the U.S. Treasury Department's
list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Department of Commerce
Denied Persons List or Entity List. By installing or using any component of the
Software Product, you represent and warrant that you are not located in, under
control of, or a national or resident of any such country or on any such list.

5
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 12. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE
SOFTWARE PRODUCT IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK
AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND
EFFORT IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, AND EXCEPT AS MAY BE STATED IN THE SPECTRA
MASTER SERVICE AGREEMENT, THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED
"AS IS," WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
AND SPECTRA AND SPECTRA'S AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED
TO AS "SPECTRA" FOR THE PURPOSES OF SECTIONS 12 AND 13) HEREBY
DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE PRODUCT, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR
CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, OF
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET
ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS.
SPECTRA DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR
ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT THAT THE FUNCTIONS
CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE
SOFTWARE PRODUCT WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY SPECTRA OR A SPECTRA
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR LIMITATION ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A
CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU.
13. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO
EVENT SHALL SPECTRA, ITS AFFILIATES OR LICENSEES, BE LIABLE FOR
ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS
OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS
INFORMATION, OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT OR THE
PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES, EVEN IF
SPECTRA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
IN ANY CASE, SPECTRA'S ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION OF
THIS EULA SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU
FOR THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT; PROVIDED HOWEVER, IF YOU HAVE
ENTERED INTO A MASTER SUPPORT AGREEMENT, SPECTRA'S ENTIRE
LIABILITY REGARDING SUPPORT SERVICES SHALL BE GOVERNED BY THE
TERMS OF THAT AGREEMENT. BECAUSE SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
14. CONTROLLING LAW AND SEVERABILITY
This EULA will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the
State of Colorado, as applied to agreements entered into and to be performed
entirely within Colorado between Colorado residents. This EULA shall not be
governed by the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. If for any reason a
court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision, or portion thereof, to be
unenforceable, the remainder of this EULA shall continue in full force and effect.

6
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Contacting Spectra Logic
To Obtain General Information
Spectra Logic Website: https://spectralogic.com
United States Headquarters European Office
Spectra Logic Corporation Spectra Logic Europe Ltd.
6285 Lookout Road 329 Doncastle Road
Boulder, CO 80301 Bracknell
USA Berks, RG12 8PE
Phone: 1.800.833.1132 or 1.303.449.6400 United Kingdom
International: 1.303.449.6400 Phone: 44 (0) 870.112.2150
Fax: 1.303.939.8844 Fax: 44 (0) 870.112.2175
Spectra Logic Technical Support
Technical Support Portal: https://support.spectralogic.com
United States and Canada Europe, Middle East, Africa
Phone: Phone: 44 (0) 870.112.2185
Toll free US and Canada: 1.800.227.4637 Deutsch Sprechende Kunden
International: 1.303.449.0160 Phone: 49 (0) 6028.9796.507
Email: [email protected]
Mexico, Central and South America, Asia, Australia, and New Zealand
Phone: 1.303.449.0160
Spectra Logic Sales
Website: https://shop.spectralogic.com/
United States and Canada Europe
Phone: 1.800.833.1132 or 1.303.449.6400 Phone: 44 (0) 870.112.2150
Fax: 1.303.939.8844 Fax: 44 (0) 870.112.2175
Email: [email protected] Email: [email protected]
To Obtain Documentation
Spectra Logic Website: https://support.spectralogic.com/documentation

7
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Contents
About This Guide 18
INTENDED AUDIENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
PRODUCT STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
RELATED INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Chapter 1 – Library Overview 22

LIBRARY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
BlueScale Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Library Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Interior Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Main and Drive Expansion Frame Rear Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Media Expansion Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Bulk TAP Media Expansion Frame Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Operator Panel and Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
TeraPack Access Ports (TAPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Spectra Library Control Modules (LCM and RCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Exporting Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
BlueScale Vision Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
TERAPACK CARTRIDGE HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
LIBRARY EXPANSION AND UPGRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
DISCONTINUED COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Chapter 2 – Architecture Overview 57

MEDIA POOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
LIBRARY PARTITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Storage Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Cleaning Partitions and Auto Drive Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
DRIVE AND MEDIA FRAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
COMPONENT IDENTIFIERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
RIM and F-QIP Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Drive Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

8
 Contents

CONNECTIVITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Robotic Controller Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Drive Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
HIGH-AVAILABILITY CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Redundant Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Global Spare Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Redundant Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Chapter 3 – Introducing the

BlueScale User Interface 83
OVERVIEW OF THE BLUESCALE USER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Access Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
User Interface Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Library Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
USING THE BLUESCALE USER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Log Into the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Log Off or Switch Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Enter Information on Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Chapter 4 – Configuring the Library 103

CONFIGURING LIBRARY USERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Understanding User Groups and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Add a New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Modify an Existing User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Delete an Existing User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
ACCESSING THE SYSTEM SETUP SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
ENABLING BLUESCALE SOFTWARE SUPPORT, OPTIONS, AND UPGRADES . 110
Enter Activation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Add Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
CONFIGURING THE GLOBAL SYSTEM SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Configure the System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Configure Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Configure Mail Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Enable Email for the Auto Configuration Save File . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Set the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

9
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Contents

CONFIGURING OPTIONAL LIBRARY SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Install a Security Certificate and Authentication Key . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Configure Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Enable and Configure SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Configure Controller Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Configure Barcode Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Configure a Package Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Modify Auto Download Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Configure Rotation Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
BACKING UP THE LIBRARY CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Use Automatic Backup of the Library Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Use Manual Backup of the Library Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
SETTING THE CAMERA IP ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Edit the Camera IP Address - White . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Edit the Camera IP Address - Black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Chapter 5 – Operating the Library 162

CONTROLLING THE LIBRARY POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Power On the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Power Off the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
MONITORING YOUR LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Check and Respond to Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Use Performance Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
View Robot Utilization Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
View Drive Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
View a Partition’s World Wide Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Use the BlueScale Vision Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
USING A USB DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Continuing Backups While Using a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Connect a USB Device to the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Chapter 6 – Configuring and Managing Partitions 186

PARTITION CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Partition Types and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
PREPARING TO CONFIGURE PARTITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
CREATING A CLEANING PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Define the Initial Cleaning Partition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Configure the Chambers for the Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

10
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Contents

CREATING A STORAGE PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Define the Initial Storage Partition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Configure Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Enter Storage Partition Name and Media Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Select the Robotic Control Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Assign Global Spare Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Allocate Chambers and Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Select the Encryption Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Configure the Drive Fibre Channel Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Specify the Partition Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Configure the Robotic Path Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Configure Drive Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Configure the Port Addressing for the Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
CONFIRMING AND SAVING THE PARTITION SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
CONFIGURE ADVANCED PARTITION SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Configuring Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Enable Time-based Access Order System (TAOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
MODIFYING AN EXISTING PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
DELETING A PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Delete a Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Chapter 7 – Importing and Exporting Cartridges 231

PREPARING CARTRIDGES FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Cartridge Guidelines and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Prepare the Cartridges for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
M8 Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
IMPORT AND EXPORT OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
IMPORTING INTO A STORAGE OR CLEANING PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Import Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Prepare the Storage Partition or the Cleaning Partition . . . . . . . . . 240
Import the Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Prepare the Entry/Exit Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
EXPORTING OR EXCHANGING MAGAZINES AND CARTRIDGES . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Prepare for the Export or Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Export Magazines from a Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Exchange Magazines or Cartridges in a Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Export or Exchange Expired Cleaning Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

11
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Contents

USING THE ADVANCED IMPORT/EXPORT OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Manually Create a Move Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Upload a Move Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Start the Moves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
UPDATING THE STORAGE MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE INVENTORY . . . . . . . 268

Chapter 8 – Using the Cartridge Inventory 269

UNDERSTANDING THE CARTRIDGE INVENTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
VIEWING AND DOWNLOADING THE CARTRIDGE INVENTORY . . . . . . . . . . . 270
View the Cartridge Inventory for a Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Download the Cartridge Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
LOCATING A SPECIFIC CARTRIDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
MOVING CARTRIDGES WITHIN A PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Move Cartridges Using the BlueScale Inventory Screen . . . . . . . . . 278
Move Cartridges Using an ASCII Move File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle

Management 289
BLUESCALE MEDIA LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Spectra Certified MLM-Enabled Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Automatic Media Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Media Tracking and Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
MLM PreScan and PostScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Additional MLM Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
ENABLING MLM AND CONFIGURING GLOBAL SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Enable MLM and Configure Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Configure How Storage Capacity Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Configure PostScan Blackout Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
USING MEDIA LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Add Cartridges to the MLM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Discover Cartridges Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Stop the Discovery Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
USING PRESCAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
USING POSTSCAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Operational Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Address Requirements for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Enable PostScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Request a Manual PostScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Pause the PostScan Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

12
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Contents

USING MLM REPORTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Generate MLM Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Save an MLM Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Override a Poor Cartridge Health Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
MANAGING THE MLM DATABASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Back Up the MLM and DLM Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Verify the Database Backup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Delete MLM Records From the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Download the MLM Database for Analysis and Archival . . . . . . . 335

Chapter 10 – Using Drive Lifecycle Management 336

BLUESCALE DRIVE LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
MONITORING DRIVE HEALTH USING DLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Using the Drive Health Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Viewing and Saving a Detailed Drive Health Report . . . . . . . . . . . 341
DOWNLOADING THE DLM DATABASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Chapter 11 – Configuring and Using AutoSupport 345

AUTOSUPPORT OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
CONFIGURING AUTOSUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Configure Mail Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Configure AutoSupport Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Configure Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Configure Log Set Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
USING AUTOSUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Create New Support Tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Update Existing Support Tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Chapter 12 – Library Troubleshooting 362

TROUBLESHOOTING LIBRARY PROBLEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
TROUBLESHOOTING LIBRARY INITIALIZATION ISSUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
TROUBLESHOOTING BLUESCALE USER INTERFACE ISSUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
TROUBLESHOOTING MLM ISSUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
TROUBLESHOOTING ENCRYPTION ISSUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
RESOLVING OPERATIONAL ISSUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
USING BLUESCALE HARDWARE HEALTH MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Respond to HHM Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
View Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
CAPTURING TRACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

13
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Contents

RESETTING THE LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

RESETTING COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Reset the LCM or RCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Reset a RIM or F-QIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Reset the Power Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
DISCOVERING AND SETTING THE BLUESCALE VISION CAMERA IP
ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Configure the BlueScale Vision Camera - White . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Configure the BlueScale Vision Camera - Black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
TESTING THE ROBOTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
RESTORING THE LIBRARY CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Restore From an Auto Configuration Save File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Restore the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration . 404
Restore the MLM and DLM Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Chapter 13 – Drive Troubleshooting 408

RESETTING A DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
USING A GLOBAL SPARE DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Use the Global Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Undo the Global Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
RETRIEVING A DRIVE TRACE OR DRIVE DUMP FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Use the Drive Traces Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Use the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to Retrieve a
Drive Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Use the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
TROUBLESHOOTING DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Identify the Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Interpret the Detailed Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
USING DLM TO TEST A DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Requirements for Using the Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Run the DLM Drive Health Verification Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Chapter 14 – Maintaining the Library 442

UPDATING, SERVICING, OR MOVING THE LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
RENEWING THE BLUESCALE SOFTWARE SUPPORT KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

14
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Contents

UPDATING THE BLUESCALE SOFTWARE AND LIBRARY FIRMWARE . . . . . . . 446

Check the Library BlueScale Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Check Component Firmware Versions (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Check the Currently Released BlueScale Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Download the BlueScale Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Prepare for the BlueScale Package Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Install the Update Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Manage Update Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
REPLACING THE AIR FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
INSTALLING CORD LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
CALIBRATING THE TOUCH SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Chapter 15 – Maintaining the Drives 471

CLEANING A DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Determine Whether Cleaning is Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Prepare the Library for Drive Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Determine the Cleaning Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Manually Cleaning a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Track Cleaning Cartridge Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
UPDATING DRIVE FIRMWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Prepare for the Update Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Update Using ITDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Update Using Drive Update through Package Update . . . . . . . . . 486
Update Using the Drive Firmware Update Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Update Using the Update Drive Firmware Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
UPDATING DRIVE DEVICE DRIVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
ADDING OR REPLACING A DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Add a Drive to the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Replace a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

Chapter 16 – Technical Support 504

ACCESSING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT PORTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Create an Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Log Into the Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
OPENING A SUPPORT TICKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
RETURNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

15
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Contents

Appendix A – Best Practices 511

MLM BEST PRACTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Implementation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Usage Policy Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Disaster Recovery Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
BACK UP AND PROTECT THE LIBRARY METADATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Back Up the Library Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Verify and Protect the Metadata Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
USING CARTRIDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Labeling Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Handling Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Storing Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Using Cartridges in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Cartridge Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

Appendix B – Media & Upgrades 527

MEDIA AND MEDIA ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Spectra Certified Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Media and Media Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
How To Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
LIBRARY SUPPORT AND UPGRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Service Contract Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
BlueScale Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Library Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
How to Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

Appendix C – Specifications 534

LIBRARY SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Data Storage Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Size and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Service Access Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Shipping and Storage Size and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Shock and Vibration Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
INTEROPERABILITY AND SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

16
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Contents

INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

Component Interface Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Network Interface Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
NDMP Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
TAPE DRIVE AND MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
LTO Tape Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
TS11xx Technology Tape Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Drive-Based Encryption Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Tape Media Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Barcode Label Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

Appendix D – Regulatory & Safety Standards 561

EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
EMISSION STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
FCC NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
SAFETY STANDARDS AND COMPLIANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Laser Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
NEMKO ACCREDITATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Waste of Electronic and Electrical Equipment (WEEE) Directive . 566
Restriction of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic
Equipment (RoHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Measures for the Administration of the Control of Pollution by
Electronic Information Products (China) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Recycling Your Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
CONFLICT MINERALS POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

Index 569

17
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 About This Guide

This guide describes how to configure, use, maintain, and troubleshoot the
Spectra® T950 and T950B libraries. Unless otherwise specified, the
information is the same for both libraries and “T950” is used to describe
both libraries.

INTENDED AUDIENCE
This guide is intended for data center administrators and operators who
maintain and operate backup systems. The information in this guide
assumes a familiarity with SCSI and Fibre Channel command protocols, as
well as with network connectivity protocols such as Fibre Channel and
Ethernet. It also assumes a knowledge of technical tasks such as
configuring operating systems and installing drivers.

PRODUCT STATUS
The Spectra Logic® Technical Support portal provides information about
which products are currently supported and which are considered
discontinued. To view information about discontinued products, log into
the portal (see Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 504) and
navigate to Documentation > Product Life Cycle Information.

RELATED INFORMATION
This section contains information about this document and other
documents related to the T950 and T950B libraries.

BlueScale User Interface Screens

The BlueScale® interface changes as new features are added or other
modifications are made between software revisions. Therefore, the screens
on your library may differ from those shown in this document.

18
About This Guide Related Information

Additional Publications
For additional information about the Spectra T950 library and its drives,
refer to the publications listed in this section.

Spectra T950 Library

This guide and the following documents related to the Spectra T950
Library are available as PDF files on the Spectra Logic website at:
support.spectralogic.com/documentation.
 The Spectra T950 Library Quick Reference Guide provides a quick
reference for the user interface and instructions for performing day-to-
day library operations such as powering on and off, and preparing,
importing, and exporting media.
 The Spectra T950 Library Site Preparation Guide provides information
about preparing your site for the installation of the T950 library.
 The Spectra BlueScale Vision Camera User Guide provides detailed
information about installing and using the white BlueScale Vision
Camera and software.
 The Vivotek FD8361 Fixed Dome Network Camera User’s Manual provides
detailed information about installing and using the black BlueScale
Vision Camera and software.
 The Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide provides detailed
information about using BlueScale Encryption Standard and
Professional Edition, the Spectra SKLM Encryption key management
system, and KMIP Encryption key management. It also provides useful
information about encryption best practices and recycling encrypted
media.
 The Spectra Tape Libraries SCSI Developer’s Guide provides detailed
information about the SCSI and Fibre Channel commands used in the
library.
 The Spectra Tape Libraries XML Command Reference provides detailed
information about using the XML interface with the T950 library.
 The Spectra Tape Libraries Warnings document provides all of the
warnings found in Spectra tape libraries documentation, in English and
27 other languages.
The following document is available after logging into your Support portal
account at: support.spectralogic.com.
 The T950 Library Release Notes and Documentation Updates provides the
most up-to-date information about the T950 library, drives, and media.

19
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
About This Guide Related Information

LTO Ultrium Tape Drives

The following documents provide information that is applicable to all IBM
LTO tape drives.
 IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and User’s Guide
Note: This guide also provides information about using the IBM Tape
Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to troubleshoot drive problems.
 IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive: SCSI Reference (LTO-1 through
LTO-4)
 IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive: SCSI Reference (LTO-5 and
later)
For drive-specific information, search for the product name (for example,
LTO 5) on the documentation page on the IBM website. You can also search
the IBM Support Portal at: https://ibm.com/support/home/

TS11xx Technology Drives

The following documents provide information that is applicable to TS11xx
technology drives.
 IBM System Storage Tape Drive 3592 SCSI Reference
 IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide
Note: This guide also provides information about using the IBM Tape
Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to troubleshoot drive problems.

Spectra SKLM Server

For additional information that can assist you during the installation and
configuration of your server, see the following website:
IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager welcome page.

KMIP
See the documentation specific to your server.

20
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
About This Guide Related Information

Typographical Conventions
This document uses the following conventions to highlight important
information:

Read text marked by the “Warning” icon for information you must know to avoid
WARNING personal injury.

Read text marked by the “Caution” icon for information you must know to avoid
Caution damaging the library, the tape drives, or losing data.

Important Read text marked by the “Important” icon for information that helps you complete
a procedure or avoid extra steps.

Note: Read text marked with “Note” for additional information or

suggestions about the current topic.

21
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 CHAPTER 1
Library Overview
The Spectra T950 library is an enterprise-class, highly scalable library. It
provides fast, affordable storage that meets the stringent requirements for data
integrity, data security, and high reliability in the enterprise environment.
This chapter provides an overview of the T950 library features and
components.

Topic
Library Features this page
BlueScale Software page 23
Library Components page 27
Interior Components page 31
Main and Drive Expansion Frame Rear Components page 33
Media Expansion Frames page 39
Bulk TAP Media Expansion Frame Components page 40
Operator Panel and Touch Screen page 41
TeraPack Access Ports (TAPs) page 42
Spectra Library Control Modules (LCM and RCM) page 44
Exporting Controllers page 48
Tape Drives page 52
BlueScale Vision Camera page 54
TeraPack Cartridge Handling page 55
Library Expansion and Upgrades page 56
Discontinued Components page 56

LIBRARY FEATURES
This section provides an overview of the features that make the T950
library a highly versatile enterprise storage solution. The library’s unique
modular design lets you tailor the library to suit your current data
requirements and easily expand it in the future. Keep up with data growth
and technology changes by adding storage capacity and incorporating new
drive technologies as they become available.

22
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

BlueScale Software
The library’s BlueScale software lets you set configuration options, view
library and drive information and metrics, manage cartridges, and monitor
library operations. You can access the BlueScale interface using either of
the following methods:
 The BlueScale operator panel interface — via the touch screen on the
library’s operator panel.
 The BlueScale web interface — via the Remote Library Controller (RLC)
using a standard web browser.
See Chapter 3 – Introducing the BlueScale User Interface, beginning on
page 83, for detailed information about the features and controls provided
by the BlueScale user interface.

Important Many of the features described in this user guide require your library to be running the
most current version of the BlueScale software. Spectra Logic recommends that you
keep your library’s BlueScale software and component firmware up-to-date at all times.
If you are using a previously released BlueScale package, upgrading to the current
release is strongly recommended. See Updating the BlueScale Software and Library
Firmware on page 446 for detailed information.

The BlueScale software includes the following features (listed in

alphabetical order).

Auto Configuration Save

The Auto Configuration Save feature automatically generates a weekly
backup file and replaces the previous backup file on the memory card in
the LCM. The backup file contains the library configuration and the MLM
and DLM databases, as well as the encryption configuration and any
BlueScale encryption keys. A backup file is also automatically generated
and saved whenever a partition is created or modified. See Use Automatic
Backup of the Library Configuration on page 151 for more information.
If desired, the library can email the automatically generated backup file
each time it is created. Having an external copy of the backup file ensures
that you can recover the library configuration, as well as the MLM and
DLM databases, in the event of a disaster and is highly recommended.

Auto Drive Clean

Auto Drive Clean provides library-based cleaning of drives without user
intervention. Automated drive cleaning results in fewer failed tape read/
write operations and is the recommended method for cleaning drives.
The Auto Drive Clean feature uses a dedicated cleaning partition for storing
cleaning cartridges. The cleaning partition can be shared by multiple storage
partitions and is used by the library to automatically clean drives whenever
necessary. See Cleaning Partitions and Auto Drive Clean on page 62.

23
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

AutoSupport
AutoSupport configures the library to automatically contact configured
users with messages when specific events occur. It can also be used to open
or update a support ticket and send it to a specified email recipient or to
Spectra Logic Technical Support. See Chapter 11 – Configuring and Using
AutoSupport, beginning on page 345 for detailed information.

Complex Passwords
The library can be configured to require complex passwords. See Enable
Complex Passwords on page 121 for more information.

Controller Failover (RIMs and F-QIPs)

Controller failover configures two Robotics Interface Modules (RIMs) or
two Fibre Channel Quad Interface Processors (F-QIPs) as a failover pair.
RIMs and F-QIPs can be mixed in a failover pair. A RIM2 can only be in a
failover pair with another RIM2. One member of the pair (the primary
controller) provides the robotic control path in the partition. The other
controller (the secondary) is designated as the spare. In the event that the
secondary controller detects an internal problem with the primary
controller, it automatically takes over all robotics control operations to
provide uninterrupted operation. See Controller Failover on page 79 for
more information.
Note: Drives used to provide the robotic control path cannot be
configured with controller failover; however, you can select
multiple drives as controllers, and export the same changer
interface over the drives to provide redundancy, as long as your
software can support this.

Diagnostics and Utilities

Diagnostics and utilities are available through the BlueScale interface.
Selecting a diagnostic or utility displays additional information, including
whether or not it can be run while the library is operating.

Important In general, the library diagnostics and advanced utilities are only for use under the
direction of Spectra Logic Technical Support.

Drive Lifecycle Management

BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) helps you identify drives
that are experiencing high error rates or other problems. DLM is
automatically enabled when Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) is
enabled. See Chapter 10 – Using Drive Lifecycle Management, beginning
on page 336 for detailed information.

24
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Encryption Key Management

The Spectra T950 library can encrypt data and manage encryption keys,
using BlueScale key management, the Spectra SKLM key management
system, or KMIP encryption key management.
Spectra SKLM and KMIP encryption run on a stand alone server and
provide centralized encryption key management. BlueScale encryption key
management is tightly integrated into the BlueScale environment.
Encryption is performed through encryption-enabled drives. See the
Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for detailed information.

EnergyAudit Reporting
The BlueScale EnergyAudit feature lets you display actual power
consumption. See View Power Consumption Statistics on page 173 for
information.

EtherLib
Beginning with BlueScale12.4.0, multi-frame libraries using Spectra
Library Server (Spectra LS) control modules (see Spectra PC and Spectra
LS Components on page 45) can take advantage of the BlueScale EtherLib
feature to reduce the time for some library tasks. After installing Ethernet
cables, and a switch, if necessary, tasks such as firmware updates and trace
gathering complete much faster. See Spectra Library Control Modules
(LCM and RCM) on page 44 for information about the dedicated EtherLib
port.

Global Spare
The Global Spare feature provides a way to remotely replace a failed drive
in the library. You simply configure an installed drive as a designated spare
for other drives in the library. This drive can then be substituted for a failed
drive in any partition that is configured to use the Global Spare drive.
When a drive fails, you simply log into the BlueScale web interface from
any location, select the Global Spare option for the failed drive, and
continue normal operations. You can then physically replace the failed
drive at your convenience. See Assign Global Spare Drives on page 202 and
Using a Global Spare Drive on page 410 for more information.

Hardware Health Monitoring

BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) tracks maintenance
thresholds for key robotic components and notifies you when a
maintenance threshold is reached. You can click the maintenance icon on
the status bar to send the AutoSupport Log (ASL) file to Spectra Logic
Technical Support so they can review the log file and determine if any
maintenance tasks are needed. See Using BlueScale Hardware Health
Monitoring on page 372 for more information.

25
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Media Lifecycle Management

BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) helps you manage your
tape media by giving you tools to proactively determine potential media
errors before they happen. See Chapter 6 – Configuring and Managing
Partitions, beginning on page 186 and Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using
Media Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 289 for detailed
information about configuring and using the MLM features.

Remote Support
The remote support feature uses a remote web access application,
WebEx™, to facilitate remote problem diagnosis. Remote support
preserves your organization’s site and data security, giving Spectra Logic
Technical Support limited access to your library. With WebEx, Technical
Support can “drive” the library, taking enough control to gather the data
required to speed understanding of the problem. See Remote Support Icon
on page 93 for more information.

Shared Library Services (SLS) Partitioning

The library uses Shared Library Services (SLS) virtualization technology to
partition the library into virtual libraries. SLS partitioning is an option you
can add to the library by purchasing an activation key from Spectra Logic.
See Library Partitions on page 59 for detailed information about how
partitions function in the library. See Chapter 6 – Configuring and
Managing Partitions, beginning on page 186 for detailed information about
configuring and using partitions.

Soft Power Control

The Soft Power option disables the front panel power button and instead
enables a “soft power” button on the General Status screen of the BlueScale
user interface. Enabling the Soft Power option prevents unauthorized users
from powering the library off using the front panel power switch. See Use
the Soft Power Feature on page 165 for more information.

Time-based Access Order System (TAOS)

Time-based Access Order System (TAOS) is a way to reduce the time it
takes to read several data segments from a single tape. The intent of TAOS
is to minimize the re-positioning the drive must do between reads of
multiple locations on the tape, to improve the overall read time and reduce
drive and media wear by limiting the total travel amount of the media
within the drive. This feature is supported for LTO-7 and later generation
drives. See Enable Time-based Access Order System (TAOS) on page 214
for more information.

26
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Thin Provisioning
The Thin Provisioning option allows automatic library partition resizing as
a partition requires greater slot count, without reconfiguring the library or
host software. Using Thin Provisioning, it is possible for the combined
number of storage slots configured in all library partitions to exceed the
licensed or physically available number of slots. Empty slots are included
in, but inaccessible to, all partitions until you import a TeraPack magazine
into one partition. At that time, the library makes the slots accessible to
only the partition into which the magazine was imported. You can import
additional magazines into any of the thin provisioned partitions until the
inventory reaches the licensed or physical capacity. Thin Provisioning is
enabled with a purchased activation key.

XML Command Interface

The XML command interface provides a set of commands for use in
customer-generated programs used for viewing the library’s status,
inventory, and configuration information, and performing BlueScale
package updates and other operations without using the BlueScale user
interface. See the Spectra Tape Libraries XML Command Reference for detailed
information.

Library Components
The following sections show the locations of and briefly describe the major
front panel, internal, and rear panel components of the library’s main,
drive expansion, and bulk TeraPack® Access Port (TAP) expansion frames.

Front Panel Components

Figure 1 shows the front components of a multi-frame T950 library and
Figure 2 on page 29 shows a T950B library. The figures also show the relative
locations of the main frame and the expansion frames. The bulk TeraPack
Access Port (TAP) and expansion frames are optional.

27
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

T950 main frames have an offset center TAP and operator panel and T950
media expansion frames have a filter and fan assembly on the front at the
bottom.

Window Bulk Operator Center Drive and media

panel TAP panel TAP expansion frames

Bulk TAP Main frame Air filter and fans

expansion frame (behind cover panel)

Figure 1 T950 library with optional bulk TAP, drive, and media expansion frames.

28
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

T950B main frames have a centered center TAP and operator panel and
T950B media expansion frames do not have a filter and fan assembly on the
front at the bottom.

Window Bulk Operator Center Drive and media

panel TAP panel TAP expansion frames

Bulk TAP Main frame Air filter and fans

expansion frame (behind cover panel
of drive expansion frames)

Figure 2 T950B library with optional bulk TAP, drive, and media expansion frames.

29
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

The following table describes each of the components shown in Figure 1 on

page 28 and.

Component Description
Window Panels The window panels on the outer side of the right- and left-most frames let you
view the inside of the library and provide access to the interior components.
The window panels are equipped with safety interlocks that power down the
library robotics when removed.
Main Frame The main frame houses the library control module (LCM), the main robotics
control module (RCM), the operator panel, the TeraPack Access Port (TAP),
controllers (RIMs or F-QIPs), power supplies, the EtherLib switch (optional),
and drives. It also provides cartridge storage.
Operator Panel The operator panel on the main frame includes a color LCD touch screen and
library power button. To learn more, see Operator Panel and Touch Screen on
page 41. A stylus for making selections and typing entries on the touch screen
is conveniently stored near the screen.
TeraPack Access The TeraPack Access Ports (TAPs) act as entry/exit ports that let you import
Ports (TAPs) media into or remove media from the library. The library has two types of
TAPs:
 The center TAP lets you import or export a single magazine. The two TAP
chambers alternate to provide increased throughput.
 The optional bulk TAP lets you import or export up to 14 TeraPack magazines
in a single operation.
To learn more about the TAPs, see TeraPack Access Ports (TAPs) on page 42.
Expansion Frames Expansion frames make it possible to increase media storage capacity or the
number of drives in the library. See Drive and Media Frames on page 63 for
more information.
Air Filters and Fans The air filters on the front of the main frame, drive frames, and service frames
prevent particulate contaminants from being pulled into the library by the air
circulation system. Redundant fans in the main and drive frames ensure
positive pressure inside the library, keeping dust out, and circulate clean air for
climate control inside the library.
Doors (not shown) Lockable doors on the back of the main, drive expansion, and bulk TAP
expansion frames enclose the drives and cable connections to prevent
unauthorized access.

30
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Interior Components
Figure 3 shows the interior components of the library.
Note: The interior components are shown for reference only. They are
not accessible during normal operation.

LED light bars Top horizontal axis (HAX)

Vertical axis (VAX column)

Cartridge picker with

barcode reader

Drives (rear only)

and media
storage

Transporter

Bottom horizontal
Front of library Rear of library axis (HAX)

Figure 3 Library interior components.

31
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

The following table describes each of the components shown in Figure 3 on

page 31.

Component Description
LED Light Bars The LED light bars, mounted at the top of the main frame and each expansion
frame, illuminate the interior of the library.
Note: Depending on your library, the light bars may be different from those
shown in Figure 3.
Transporter The transporter and the Vertical Axis (VAX) column make up the robotics used
to move a TeraPack magazine from one location to another in the library.
The transporter, which is mounted on the VAX column, retrieves the magazine
from the source chamber and holds it while the VAX column moves to its
destination. The cartridge picker then removes the requested individual
cartridge from the magazine and inserts it into a drive. When the drive is
finished using the cartridge and ejects it, the cartridge picker retrieves the
cartridge and places it in a magazine. The VAX column then moves the
transporter to return the magazine to a storage chamber.
The VAX column moves along the horizontal axis (HAX) and the transporter
moves up and down the VAX column to perform all media movement within
the library. The barcode reader mounted on the cartridge picker reads the
barcode labels on TeraPack magazines and individual cartridges. The library
uses the barcode label information to maintain an inventory of the media
currently stored inside the library.
Media Storage All of the media in the library is stored in TeraPack magazines, each of which
contains ten slots for LTO media or nine slots for TS11xx technology media. The
magazines are placed in TBAs or on shelves, which are divided into chambers.
Each chamber provides storage for one TeraPack magazine.
The number of slots in a frame depends on the type and configuration of the
frame (see Drive and Media Frames on page 63). All frames have media storage
chambers at both the front and the rear of the frame. The maximum media
storage capacity of the library depends on the type of media, the number of
drives installed, and the number of drive and media expansion frames installed
(see Data Storage Capacity on page 535).

32
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Main and Drive Expansion Frame Rear Components

The components on the library’s rear panel depend on the type of frame.
Figure 4 shows the rear panel components of the library’s main frame.
Except where noted in the following descriptions, the same components
are present in each drive expansion frame.
Note: Any bays that do not contain components must have covers
installed to maintain proper air circulation throughout the
library and to protect the internal components.

Tool storage
Controller bay with a
controller installed
BlueScale Vision (either an F-QIP or a RIM)
camera connector

Media storage chambers

(behind cover panel)

Flex bay for either a

TBA or DBA (3)
or Shelves

TeraPack Bay Assembly (TBA)

or Shelves (behind cover panel) Empty drive bay
(cover removed)

Empty controller bay

(cover removed)

Drive Bay Assembly (DBA) Drives

Power supply module

bays (5/12 VDC)
Library Control Module (LCM) Power Control
Robotics Control Module (RCM) Module (PCM)

Robotics power supply AC power module

modules (24 VDC)

Figure 4 Library rear components (main frame, doors removed).

33
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

The following table describes each of the components shown in Figure 4 on

page 33.

Component Description
Tool Storage The compartment above the media storage area in the main frame provides
space for storing the tool kit and documentation that accompanies the library.
BlueScale Vision The dedicated Ethernet port for the BlueScale Vision camera lets you connect
Camera Connector the camera to an Ethernet network and use the web-based BlueScale Vision
software to monitor the interior of the library. Each frame that contains a
camera has an Ethernet connector. See BlueScale Vision Camera on page 54 for
information about the BlueScale Vision camera.
Notes:
 The BlueScale Vision camera connector is not present if a frame does not have
a BlueScale Vision camera installed.
 In media expansion frames, the connector is in a similar location.
Media Storage All of the media in the library is stored in TeraPack magazines, each of which
Chambers contains ten slots for LTO media or nine slots for TS11xx technology media. The
magazines are placed on shelves divided into chambers. The number of
chambers at the back of a frame depends on the type of frame and its
configuration (see Drive and Media Frames on page 63).
Flex Bays (older Three flex bays make it possible to configure the frame to increase media
libraries only) storage capacity or data throughput. The flex bays accommodate either three
Drive Bay Assemblies (DBAs) or three TeraPack Bay Assemblies (TBAs).
Note: T950B and TS11xx technology main and drive frames always include
DBAs or shelves in place of the flex bays.
TeraPack Bay Each TBA contains four chambers, each of which accommodates a single
Assemblies (TBAs) magazine. If the frame has only three DBAs installed, TBAs occupy the flex bays.
(older libraries Note: In newer T950B drive and main frames, shelves replace TBAs to provide
only) additional storage chambers.
Drive Bay Newer T950B main frames can have one, three, or six DBAs installed. Drive
Assemblies (DBAs) expansion frames can have three or six DBAs installed. Shelves for media
storage are installed in the remaining space where DBAs could be installed.
In older libraries, a main or drive frame can have either three or six DBAs
installed. When only three DBAs are present, up to three additional DBAs can
be installed in the flex bays, replacing the TBAs.
Each DBA provides the electrical and internal interface connections for up to
four full-height drives. See Tape Drives on page 52 for information about the
drives used in the library. Each DBA also includes a controller bay for a RIM,
F-QIP, or EtherLib switch to the right of the drives.
Note: Any drive or controller bays that do not contain components must have
covers installed to maintain proper air circulation throughout the library and to
protect internal components.

34
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Component Description
LCM and RCM Dedicated on-board library control modules run the BlueScale software that
controls all aspects of library operation. Depending on where the module is
installed, it functions as the Library Control Module (LCM) or the Robotics
Control Module (RCM). To learn more, see Spectra Library Control Modules
(LCM and RCM) on page 44.
Note: Drive expansion frames only have an RCM, they do not include an
LCM. A cover over the opening maintains proper air circulation throughout the
frame. Media frames do not have either module.
24 VDC Robotics Two 24 VDC power supply modules in the main frame provide redundant power
Power Supply for the library robotics and motors, the fans, and the interior LED light bars.
Modules

DC power AC power
status status
Figure 5 The 24 VDC power supply LEDs.
Each 24 VDC power supply module has two indicator LEDs, one for DC power
status and one for AC power status. The color of the LED indicates the power
supply status:
 Green — The power is on and functioning normally.
 Orange — The power supply has a fault condition.
 Off — The power is not on or the power supply module is not functioning
normally.
Notes:
 Drive expansion frames do not include 24 VDC power supply modules.
 If the second 24 VDC power supply module is not installed, a cover over the
opening maintains proper air circulation throughout the frame.
 24 V Power supplies are labeled A and B from top to bottom.
F-QIP or RIM One F-QIP or RIM can be installed in each of the vertical controller bays to the
right of the drives in a DBA (see Figure 4 on page 33). A RIM, F-QIP, or LTO-5
or later generation tape drives can be used to provide the robotic control path
for the library. To learn more, see Exporting Controllers on page 48.
Note: Unless otherwise specified, the features of both RIM and RIM2 are the
same and “RIM” is used to refer to both.

35
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Component Description
Drives The library accommodates multiple generations of high-performance, high-
capacity, full-height and half-height LTO drives, or TS11xx technology drives,.
The drives are installed in DBAs, with each DBA accommodating up to four
drives. Drives are hot-swappable to provide uninterrupted operation. To learn
more, see Tape Drives on page 52.
Note: Any drive bays that do not have drives installed must have covers
installed to maintain proper air circulation throughout the frame and to protect
internal library components.
5/12 VDC Power The 5/12 VDC power supply modules convert AC input to provide the 5 VDC
Supply Modules and 12 VDC power used by the drives in the frame. In the main frame, these
power supplies also provide power to the controller bays, the LCM, the RCM,
and the LCD operator panel. With the exception of its voltage rating, the 5/12
VDC power supply module closely resembles the 24 VDC robotics power
supply module shown on page 35.
There are two different power supplies available depending on the age and
configuration of the library. The number of supplies required by a library is
calculated by Spectra Logic based on the number and type of drives in the
library. Extra supplies provide redundancy and failover protection. The new
and old supplies can be mixed in a power control module and older supplies
can always be replaced by a newer supply. However, newer supplies cannot
always be replaced by an older supply. Contact Spectra Logic Technical
Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7) for more information.
Power Supply 1
Each power supply module has two indicator LEDs, one for AC power status
and one for DC power status. The color of the LED indicates the status.
 Green — The power is on and functioning normally.
 Orange — The power supply has a fault condition.
 Off — The power is not on or the power supply module is not functioning
normally.
Note: Any bays that do not have power supply modules installed must have
covers installed to maintain proper air circulation throughout the frame.
Power Control
Power supply modules Module (PCM)

DC power
status Reset
button
AC power
status

Figure 6 The 5/12 VDC power supply modules and the PCM.

36
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Component Description
5/12 VDC Power Power Supply 2
Supply Modules Each power supply module has three indicator LEDs, one for AC power status,
(continued) one for 5-volt power status, and one for 12-volt power status. The color of the
LED indicates the status.
 Green — The power is on and functioning normally.
 Amber — The supply is operating with a Current/Temperature Limit.
 Red — There is a fault that prevents the supply from operating.
 Off — The power is not on or the power supply module is not functioning
normally.
Note: Any bays that do not have power supply modules installed must have
covers installed to maintain proper air circulation throughout the frame.

Power Control
Power supply modules Module (PCM)

Status
LEDs

Reset
button

Figure 7 The 5/12 VDC power supply 2 modules and the PCM.
Power Control The PCM supplies power to the power supplies when you press the power
Module (PCM) button on the front panel of the main frame. It monitors the power supply
modules in the frame for output voltage, output current, power supply fan
operational status, and power supply operational temperature. The PCM uses
the voltage and current data to calculate the library power usage that is
displayed through the BlueScale user interface.

37
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Component Description
Dual AC Power The dual AC power module provides surge protection for the library power
Module system and monitors the primary AC input power to determine whether it is
present and of adequate voltage. If the primary AC input fails or drops too low,
the dual AC power module handles the failover to the redundant, secondary
AC input until the primary input is restored.
Each dual AC power module includes both primary and secondary AC power
connectors and two breaker switches. There are three types of dual AC power
modules: dual AC, dual AC with convenience outlet, and dual AC 2. Dual AC
with convenience outlet and dual AC 2 power modules include a 200-240 VAC
convenience outlet. The dual AC convenience outlet is rated at 5 A. The dual
AC 2 convenience outlet is rated at 2 A.
Dual AC Power Module and Dual AC Power Module with Convenience Outlet
LEDs indicate the status of the primary and secondary AC inputs.
 Primary and Secondary Input Power LED States:
 Green - Good/Active
 Orange - Under Voltage
CAUTION! If the power sources for the AC inputs for a frame using the dual AC
or dual AC with convenience outlets are not on the same phase, damage to the
library could result.

Primary and secondary Primary and secondary Primary and secondary

status LEDs AC breaker switches AC inputs
Figure 8 Dual AC power module.

Convenience outlet Secondary AC breaker, Primary AC breaker,

and fuse input, and status LEDs input, and status LEDs
Figure 9 Dual AC power module with convenience outlet.

38
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Component Description
Dual AC Power Dual AC 2 Power Module
Module LEDs indicate the status of the primary and secondary AC inputs and the
(continued) overall dual AC 2 module.
 Primary and Secondary Input Power LED States:
 Green - Good/Active
 Blue - Good/Not Active
 Orange - Bad/Active, cannot switch to secondary source
 Red - Under Voltage Lockout
 Off - Not Present
 Dual AC 2 Status LED States:
 Blinking Green - Good Status
 Solid Red - Over Temperature, > 100C
Notes:
 The dual AC 2 does not require the power sources for the AC inputs for a
frame to be on the same phase.
 The convenience outlet is powered by the primary AC input. If the primary
input fails, the convenience outlet does not function.

Convenience outlet Secondary AC breaker, Primary AC breaker,

and fuse input, and status LEDs input, and status LEDs
Figure 10 Dual AC 2 power module.
EtherLib Switch Multi-frame libraries using Spectra LS control modules may have a switch
(not shown) installed in a controller bay to use the BlueScale EtherLib feature which reduces
the time for some library tasks such as firmware updates and trace gathering.
Doors (not shown) Doors on the back of each frame protect the cabling connections. The doors are
equipped with safety interlocks that cause the library robotics to operate at a
reduced speed while the doors are open.

Media Expansion Frames

Media expansion frames are for media storage only and do not include any
active front or rear panel components or a door. See Data Storage Capacity
on page 535 for more information.

39
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Bulk TAP Media Expansion Frame Components

The bulk TeraPack Access Port (TAP) media expansion frame is used to
import or export up to 14 magazines in a single operation. See TeraPack
Access Ports (TAPs) on page 42 for detailed information about how the
bulk TAP operates.

TAP carousel filled

with magazines

Door release
button Media storage

Door

Bulk TAP
Service Control
Module (SCM)

Figure 11 The front of the bulk TAP media frame. Figure 12 The back of the bulk TAP media
frame (doors removed).

40
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

The following table describes each of the components shown in Figure 11

and Figure 12.

Component Description
TAP Carousel The TAP carousel accommodates up to 14 TeraPack magazines.
Door Release An LED in the button indicates the current state of the TAP carousel. Pressing the
Button button, when the carousel is ready to be loaded or unloaded, opens the door.
 Solid green — The carousel is ready to be loaded or unloaded.
 Flashing green — An import or export operation is in progress.
 Red — The carousel is in an error state.
 Off — The carousel is empty and there are no unprocessed import or export
requests.
Door The door locks to prevent unauthorized access to the carousel.
Media Storage The bulk TAP frame has 91 LTO media storage chambers or 77 TS11xx media
storage chambers. Each chamber accommodates a single TeraPack magazine.
See Drive and Media Frames on page 63 for additional information.
Bulk TAP Service The bulk TAP service control module (SCM) provides the control logic for the
Control Module bulk TAP carousel and door.

Operator Panel and Touch Screen

The operator panel touch screen on the main frame provides local access to
the BlueScale user interface through the Library Control (LC) server. You
can select options and enter information by touching the appropriate
location on the screen. For detailed information about using the BlueScale
user interface through the touch screen, see Chapter 3 – Introducing the
BlueScale User Interface, beginning on page 83.

LCD touch screen Power button

Figure 13 The library operator panel displaying the General

Status screen of the BlueScale user interface.

41
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

The operator panel includes the following features:

Component Description
LCD touch screen The LCD touch screen lets you monitor library operations and select
configuration options using the BlueScale user interface.
Power Button The power button provides front panel on/off control of the library.
Stylus (not shown) A stylus for making selections and typing entries on the touch screen is
conveniently stored near the screen using the included holder.
USB Port The USB port can be used to connect a USB device to the library for transferring
(T950B only) BlueScale encryption keys, saving configurations, and uploading software
packages. You can also connect a USB keyboard to the USB port.

TeraPack Access Ports (TAPs)

The TeraPack Access Ports (TAPs) act as entry/exit ports that let you import
magazines into or export magazines from the library. A magazine can
contain one or more cartridges or it can be empty.
Notes:  To import or export individual cartridges, they must be
placed in a magazine.
 All import and export requests are issued through the
Import/Export screen of the BlueScale front panel user
interface or by using the XML command interface.
The library features two types of TAPs:
 The center TAP lets you move TeraPack magazines into or out of the
library one at a time. During import or export operations involving
multiple magazines, the TAP doors alternate so that the operation
completes more quickly.
 The carousel in the bulk TAP media frame lets you move up to 14
magazines into or out of the library in a single operation.
Using the TAP to move cartridges into and out of the library provides these
key advantages:
 Data Security — Media is never stored in the TAP. A newly inserted
TeraPack magazine is automatically moved into the library and placed
in a storage chamber. A magazine already in the library is only moved
to the TAP when you request an export operation through the user
interface. Data security and backup integrity are enhanced because the
media stored in the library can only be accessed using the password-
protected BlueScale user interface or XML interface.
 Convenience — Instead of individually importing or exporting single
cartridges as you would with a traditional entry/exit port, using a TAP
lets you handle multiple cartridges in a single operation, thus reducing
the time spent on import and export tasks.

42
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Center TAP
The center TAP lets you move a single TeraPack magazine into and out of
the library. When you use the center TAP, one of the two TAP doors opens
so that you can insert or remove a magazine. During import or export
operations involving multiple magazines, the TAP doors alternate so that
the operation completes more quickly.

TeraPack
magazine

TAP door 1 (open)

TAP door 2 (closed)

Figure 14 The center TAP with a TeraPack magazine loaded.

See Chapter 7 – Importing and Exporting Cartridges, beginning on

page 231 for details on how the center TAP is used to import and export
TeraPack magazines.

43
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Bulk TAP
The optional bulk TAP frame lets you import or export up to 14 TeraPack
magazines in a single operation.

TAP carousel filled

with magazines

Door release
button

Door

Figure 15 The bulk TAP carousel.

See Chapter 7 – Importing and Exporting Cartridges, beginning on

page 231 for details on how the bulk TAP is used to import and export
TeraPack magazines.

Spectra Library Control Modules (LCM and RCM)

The library uses multiple control modules called the Spectra LS and,
previously, the Spectra PC. These dedicated computers run the library’s
BlueScale software, which controls and manages all aspects of the library
operation. Depending on where the module is installed in the library, it
functions as either the Library Control Module (LCM) or the Robotics
Control Module (RCM).

44
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Spectra PC and Spectra LS Components

The Spectra LS replaces the previous generation controller module, the
Spectra PC. The Spectra LS provides the same functionality as the Spectra
PC and includes features that allow for new functionality in the future. The
Spectra LS also contains a hard drive that is used for storing log files used
for troubleshooting the library. Both the Spectra PC and the Spectra LS can
be used in the same library.
Notes:  The main frame has both an LCM and an RCM; drive
expansion frames only have an RCM.
 The LCM and the RCM in the main frame do not provide
failover redundancy for each other in the event that one of
the modules fails.
 Media expansion frames do not contain any library control
modules.
Figure 16 shows the external components on the Spectra PC; Figure 17
shows the Spectra LS.
Note: When the control module is functioning as an RCM, the
connectors are only used for troubleshooting and diagnostic
purposes under the direction of Spectra Logic Technical Support.
Keyboard Compact flash memory
connector Reset Monitor connector card (behind cover) Fan

Mouse USB port Ethernet port

connector
Figure 16 The connectors and components on the Spectra PC.

SD memory card
Reset Monitor connector (behind cover) Fan

USB ports (4) Ethernet Dedicated

port EtherLib port
Figure 17 The connectors and components on the Spectra LS.

45
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

The following table describes the components shown in Figure 16 and

Figure 17.

Component Description
PS/2 Keyboard and For convenience, you can connect a PS/2 mouse and keyboard to the
Mouse Connectors appropriate connectors on the LCM and use them when interacting with the
(Spectra PC only) BlueScale user interface. This connection provides access to all of the options
available from the library’s front panel touch screen.
USB Ports (1 on the The USB ports on the LCM can be used to connect a USB device for transferring
Spectra PC, 4 on BlueScale encryption keys, saving configurations, and uploading BlueScale
the Spectra LS) packages. You can also connect a USB keyboard and mouse to the USB ports on
the LCM and use them when interacting with the BlueScale user interface. This
connection provides access to all of the options available from the library’s front
panel touch screen.
Note: Use the USB port(s) on the RCM to update the firmware on the RCM
during BlueScale package update or under the direction of Technical Support
for capturing motion traces that are used for troubleshooting.
Monitor Connector You can connect a monitor to the LCM and use it to view the BlueScale user
interface instead of using the library’s front panel.
Note: The monitor connector on an RCM is only used by service personnel.
Ethernet Port The Ethernet port on the LCM connects the library to an Ethernet network and
is used to access the library through the BlueScale web interface using the
Remote Library Controller (RLC). The BlueScale web interface provides access
to all of the options available from the library’s operator panel except those that
require physical interaction with the library (for example, importing or
exporting media).
Notes:
 Beginning with BlueScale12.3.0, the right-most Ethernet port on a Spectra LS
is dedicated for EtherLib. See Dedicated EtherLib Port below.
 When the module is functioning as the RCM, the left-most Ethernet port is
only used for troubleshooting by service personnel.
 The Spectra PC has a 10/100BaseT connection.
 The Spectra LS has a 10/100/1000BaseT connection.
Dedicated EtherLib With BlueScale12.3.0 and later, the right-most Ethernet port on the Spectra LS is
Port configured as a dedicated EtherLib port. EtherLib uses this dedicated port to
(Spectra LS only) speed communication between components in the library.
Note: This port cannot be used to access the library through the BlueScale web
interface.

46
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Component Description
Memory Card The memory card in each module stores information related to its functional
(behind cover) role in the library. When the library control module is installed in the library
and powered on for the first time, the library determines the location and then
activates either the LCM or RCM code on the memory card. Once this is done,
the module performs only the functions defined by the activated code on the
memory card. In addition to the code that determines the module’s role in the
library, the memory card is used to store the following:
 In the LCM, it stores the library’s configuration information, activation keys,
system settings, and partition settings. It also stores the MLM and DLM
databases and information related to the current system status.
 In the RCM it stores the library’s configuration information, system logs, and
inventory.
Notes:
 The Spectra PC uses a Compact Flash (CF) memory card. The Spectra LS uses
a Secure Digital (SD) memory card.
 Two extra memory cards come standard with new libraries for error
recovery.
RS-232 and CAN These connectors are only used for troubleshooting by service personnel.
Connectors

LCM and RCM Functionality

The functionality provided by the control module is determined by where
the module is installed and the information on the memory card installed
in the module.

Library Control
Module (LCM)

Robotics Control
Module (RCM)

Figure 18 Identifying the LCM and the RCM (Spectra LS shown).

 When installed in the top bay of the main frame, the module functions
as the Library Control Module (LCM).
Note: Drive expansion frames do not have an LCM. A cover over the
opening where the LCM would be installed maintains proper air
circulation throughout the frame.
 When installed in the bottom bay of the main frame or in a drive expansion
frame, the module functions as the Robotics Control Module (RCM).

47
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

The following table describes the functions of each control module:

Control Module Function

Library Control Runs the BlueScale software, which provides the BlueScale user interface that is
Module (LCM) used to perform all configuration, import/export, and management functions
for the library. The BlueScale user interface is accessed locally through the
library’s touch screen. In addition, an embedded web server provides remote
access to the BlueScale web interface and to the XML command interface using
a standard web browser.
In addition to providing the user interface, the BlueScale software running on
the LCM generates and maintains the MLM database, BlueScale encryption
keys, system logs, and other information related to the current system status. It
also handles email operations such as sending a backup file and AutoSupport
logs to preconfigured recipients.
Robotics Control Processes media changer commands from the hosts and storage management
Module (RCM) software to control the operation of the robotics. The RCM also stores all of the
information relating to the location and status of each element in the library, as
well as the raw media inventory in its non-volatile memory. This functionality
allows the library to continue performing backup/restore operations, even
when the user interface provided through the LCM is unavailable.

Exporting Controllers
Either a direct-attached LTO-5 or later generation drive, a RIM, or an F-QIP
is required to provide the control path for the library’s robotics. When
configuring a storage partition, the device you select to provide the robotic
control path is referred to as the “exporting controller” for the partition.
Note: Unless otherwise specified, the features of both RIM and RIM2
are the same and “RIM” is used to refer to both.
The controller is the bridge between an external Fibre Channel or SAS
connection from the host and the internal interface used by the library. It
provides the control path for the media changer commands sent from the
host to the library. The controller relays the commands to the RCM, which
processes the commands and uses them to control the robotics in the
library.

48
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

A minimum of one controller is required to connect the library’s robotics to

the host network. To learn more about the role the controller plays in the
library, see Robotic Controller Connectivity on page 69.
Notes:  An LTO tape drive can only provide the control path for one
partition. A RIM or F-QIP can provide the robotic control
path for up to eight partitions. A RIM2 can provide the
robotic control path for up to 16 partitions.
 For libraries using BlueScale12.6.3 through 12.6.45.3, the
library is limited to six drive exporters. If there are fewer than
six drive exporters, additional partitions can have RIM or F-
QIP exporters until you reach the partition limit.
 For BlueScale12.7.01 through BlueScale12.7.06.03, the
maximum number of exporting controllers (QIPs, RIMs, and
drives) supported by the library is six.
 For BlueScale12.8.05 and later, the maximum number of
exporting controllers (QIPs, RIMs, and drives) supported by
the library is 12.
 A TS11xx technology drive cannot provide the robotic
control path. TS11xx technology partitions must use a RIM.
 RIMs and F-QIPs can be configured for controller failover.
RIMs and F-QIPs can be mixed in a failover pair; a RIM2 can
only be in a failover pair with another RIM2.
 If desired, you can configure multiple exporting controllers
(drives or RIMs) for a partition, and export the same changer
interface over the drives to provide redundancy, as long as
your backup software can support this. These multiple paths
cannot be used at the same time.
 The RIM replaces the F-QIP and the E-QIP, which are no
longer available for purchase.
 F-QIPs can provide encryption capability using BlueScale
encryption. See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User
Guide for more information.
 In addition to providing the connectivity for the robotics, the
F-QIP can also provide Fibre Channel connectivity for SCSI
drives. The drives and F-QIP must be in the same DBA.
 The RIM does not provide connectivity for SCSI drives, nor
does it provide any encryption capability.

49
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

RIMs and F-QIPs are mounted in the vertical controller bay located along
the right side of each DBA (see Figure 4 on page 33).

USB ports
Reset

Fibre Channel Fibre Channel

ports ports

Fibre Channel Activity LEDs

ports
Reset Reset

Figure 19 The Robotics Figure 20 The Robotics Figure 21 The Fibre Channel
Interface Module 2 (RIM2). Interface Module (RIM). F-QIP.

The following table describes the controllers supported by the library.

Controller Description
RIM2 The RIM2 has two dual-channel 8-Gbps Fibre Channel ports (Port A and Port
B), which can be used to provide connections to two separate Fibre Channel
arbitrated loops or fabrics. The two ports can also be used to provide redundant
control paths to the robotics from a single Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or
fabric.
Controller failover can be configured using a second RIM2.
The USB ports (4) can be used to connect a USB device for updating the RIM2
during a library package update.
Important: Only direct-attached Fibre Channel drives can be used when a
RIM2 is used to provide the robotic control path. If you have SCSI drives, you
must use an F-QIP or E-QIP to provide the robotic control path as well as
connectivity for the drives.
Notes:
 The Ethernet ports on the RIM2 are reserved for future use.
 The CAN port, RS-232 port, and monitor port on the RIM2 are for
troubleshooting only.

50
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Controller Description
RIM The RIM has two dual-channel 4 or 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports (Port A and
Port B), which can be used to provide connections to two separate Fibre
Channel arbitrated loops or fabrics. The two ports can also be used to provide
redundant control paths to the robotics from a single Fibre Channel arbitrated
loop or fabric.
Controller failover can be configured using a second RIM or an F-QIP.
Important: Only direct-attached Fibre Channel drives can be used when a RIM
is used to provide the robotic control path. If you have SCSI drives, you must
use an F-QIP or E-QIP to provide the robotic control path as well as connectivity
for the drives.
Notes:
 The Ethernet port on the RIM is reserved for future use.
 The Diag port on the RIM is for troubleshooting only.
F-QIP The F-QIP has two integrated dual-channel ports (Port A and Port B), which can
be used to provide connections to two separate Fibre Channel arbitrated loops
or fabrics. They can also be used to provide redundant control paths to the
robotics from a single Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric. In addition to the
robotics connectivity, the two ports each provide any-to-any connectivity for up
to four drives in the DBA where the controller is installed.
Controller failover can be configured using a second F-QIP or a RIM.
An additional feature of the F-QIP is the ability to encrypt data before it is
written to tape. This capability is useful if the SCSI drives installed in the
library cannot perform encryption themselves. Encryption key management is
provided through the library’s BlueScale user interface (see the Spectra Tape
Libraries Encryption User Guide).
One set of activity LEDs indicates SCSI bus activity (data transfer to or from the
attached drives). The other set of activity LEDs indicates whether the data
passing to the attached drives is being encrypted or decrypted by the F-QIP.
Notes:
 The Ethernet port on the F-QIP is not used.
 The Diag port on the F-QIP is for troubleshooting only.
 The RS-232 port on the F-QIP is for troubleshooting only.
 The encryption performed by the F-QIP is not compatible with the drive-
based encryption available with LTO-4 and later generation drives. Data
encrypted by the F-QIP cannot be decrypted by an encryption-enabled LTO-4
or later drive and vice versa.
Tape Drive (LTO-5 The commands to control the motion of the robotics within the partition are
and later sent from the host to the exporting drive’s logical unit number 1 (LUN 1). The
generation) motion control commands are then routed to the robotics using the exporting
drive’s Automation/Drive Interface (ADI).

51
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

Tape Drives
The T950B supports LTO-5 and later generation Fibre Channel full-height
drives, LTO-7 and later generation half-height Fibre Channel and SAS
drives, and TS11xx technology drives. T950 libraries also support SCSI and
Fibre Channel LTO-4 full-height Fibre Channel drives. The drives are
mounted in drive sleds, which are installed in DBAs in the main and drive
expansion frames. Each DBA can accommodate up to four drives. Drives
are hot-swappable to provide uninterrupted operation.
Notes:  SCSI drives require an F-QIP to be installed in the DBA where
they are installed to provide host connectivity.
 Beginning with BlueScale12.7.06, the library supports half-
height LTO-7 and later generation, Fibre Channel and SAS
drives in full-height drive sleds.

Fibre Channel Fibre Channel

connectors (1 or 2) Drive sled connectors (2) Drive sled

Status and Lock Status Lock

Power LEDs release LED release

Figure 22 The Fibre Channel drive Figure 23 The Fibre Channel drive
sled (LTO-5 - LTO-9). sled (LTO-4).

SCSI terminator Drive sled Drive sled

Status Lock Fibre Channel Status and Lock

LED release connectors (2) power LEDs release

Figure 24 The SCSI drive sled. Figure 25 The TS11xx technology

drive sled.

52
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

The following table describes the drive components.

Component Description
Drive Sled The drive sled provides the electrical and logical connections to the library,
as well as the connections to the host Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric.
The drive sled firmware assigns an identifier to the drive based on its location
in the library (see Drive Identifiers on page 67). This identifier is used by the
library to identify the drives in the BlueScale and XML interfaces.
See Drive Connectivity on page 74 for additional information about the
Fibre Channel connectivity provided by the drive sled.
Fibre Channel Each Fibre Channel drive sled has two multi-mode optical SFP LC
Connectors connectors (Port A and Port B) that are used to connect the drive directly to
a Fibre Channel network. The two ports let you connect two separate fiber
optic cables to each drive.
Note: For half-height drives in a full-height sled, only port A is available.
SAS Connector Each SAS drive sled has a single, unshielded, single-port SFF-8088 serial
connector that provides the Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connectivity for the
drive.
SCSI Terminator Each SCSI drive sled has one Ultra-3 SCSI “LVD” 68-pin Micro D female
connector. An LVD SCSI terminator is installed on the connector.
Note: SCSI drives require an F-QIP to provide the Fibre Channel
connectivity to the host.
Status LED Indicates the operational status of the drive sled (not the drive).
 Flashing green — The drive sled is functioning normally.
 Flashing red/orange — The drive sled experienced an error.
 Alternating flashing green and red/orange (TS11xx technology and
LTO-5 and later generation drives) — The drive is ready for replacement
(see Replace a Drive on page 503).
 Flashing red (LTO-4 and earlier generation drives) — The drive is ready
for replacement (see Replace a Drive on page 503).
Drive Power LED Indicates whether the drive is powered on.
(TS11xx technology
and LTO-5 and later
generation drives)
Lock Release The drive sled automatically locks into place when it is installed in the DBA
to keep it from being accidentally pulled out of the library. The lock release
disengages the lock.
Ethernet and USB Ports These ports are typically unused, however, they may be used by service
(TS11xx technology personnel to perform drive firmware updates.
and LTO-5 and later
generation drives)

53
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Features

For more information about the drives in the library, see:

 LTO Ultrium Tape Drives on page 20 for a list of documents that
provide information that is applicable to all IBM LTO tape drives.
 TS11xx Technology Drives on page 20 for a list of documents that
provide information that is applicable to TS11xx technology drives.
 Creating a Storage Partition on page 196 for information about creating
storage partitions that use the drives.
 LTO Tape Drive Specifications on page 546 for information about the
transfer rates and storage capacities of LTO drives.
 TS11xx Technology Tape Drive Specifications on page 551 for
information about the transfer rates and storage capacities of TS11xx
technology drives.
 Component Interface Connectors on page 545 for cabling requirements
for host connections to the drives.

BlueScale Vision Camera

The BlueScale Vision camera lets you view the interior of the library while
it is operating. The main frame usually contains a camera. In multi-frame
libraries, additional cameras can be installed in the expansion frames to
provide monitoring of the entire library. Each camera can view the interior
of the frame where it is mounted and a portion of one frame to either side.

Figure 26 White BlueScale Vision Figure 27 Black BlueScale Vision

camera. camera.
The BlueScale Vision camera is mounted at the top rear of a frame. The
camera lets you observe import and export operations, tape mounts,
cartridge moves, and robotic operations in real time. The ability to view the
interior of the library without removing the side panels provides an
additional level of monitoring for your library.
Note: The LED lights mounted at the top of each frame provide
illumination for the camera.
For information about using the BlueScale Vision camera, see Use the
BlueScale Vision Camera on page 179.

54
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview TeraPack Cartridge Handling

TERAPACK CARTRIDGE HANDLING

The library optimizes space usage by storing media on horizontal shelves.
This horizontal storage provides very high density by using space within
the library instead of the limited space provided by the vertical library
walls. Each horizontal shelf is divided into multiple equal-sized media
storage chambers. Each chamber accommodates a single TeraPack
magazine.
The library uses TeraPack magazines to import and export cartridges
through the TAPs and to store cartridges inside the library. Each magazine
holds up to ten LTO cartridges or nine TS11xx technology cartridges. The
magazine has guides along each side and grooves on the bottom to ensure
proper alignment when it is inserted into the TAP.

Figure 28 TeraPack magazine with barcode labeled cartridges and plastic dust
cover (LTO shown).

Storing and handling cartridges in TeraPack magazines helps eliminate

errors resulting from mishandling individual tapes, which is the leading
cause of tape damage. When inside the library, TeraPack magazines are
stored in semi-enclosed chambers. When not in the library, an optional
clear plastic dust cover snaps onto the magazine to protect the cartridges.
The cartridges are continually protected by the TeraPack magazine, both
inside and outside of the library.
Using TeraPack magazines offers the following advantages:
 Barcode labeling All of the cartridges in a TeraPack magazine, as well
as the magazine itself, are barcode labeled for easy identification.
 Grouped media The cartridges in a TeraPack magazine are treated as a
single unit during import and export operations. This grouped media
handling simplifies media management tasks by eliminating the need
to import or export cartridges one by one.

55
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 1 — Library Overview Library Expansion and Upgrades

LIBRARY EXPANSION AND UPGRADES

The T950 library is designed to transform and expand to meet a data
center’s changing storage requirements, as well as to achieve storage
consolidation goals. See Appendix B – Media & Upgrades, beginning on
page 527 for additional information.

Capacity on Demand (CoD)

The library's capacity-on-demand feature (CoD) lets you purchase a library
that suits your current needs and then purchase additional capacity later as
required. CoD reduces up-front costs, because you only pay for what you
currently need. As more capacity is required, it can be added in increments
by purchasing activation keys to license additional chambers in the library.
You can then import additional TeraPack magazines to fill the licensed
chambers.

Modular Expansion
The modular design makes it possible to increase media storage capacity
or number of drives in the library to meet storage and performance needs
as they evolve within an organization. Additional expansion frames can be
added to the basic single-frame T950 library to increase the tape slot and
drive capacities. See Drive and Media Frames on page 63 for more
information.

DISCONTINUED COMPONENTS
The following components are no longer available for purchase and are not
described in this user guide. If your library includes these components,
refer to the documentation that accompanied your library when you
received it for information about using these components when you
configure partitions.
 E-QIPs and FQIPs were replaced by a Fibre Channel Robotics Interface
Module (RIM) and are no longer available for purchase. If your library
uses SCSI drives, you can continue to use them as long as you have an
F-QIP to provide network connectivity for the drives. Otherwise, you
must use a RIM or LTO-5 or later generation drive to provide the
robotic control path
 LTO-3 - LTO-5 and TS1140 and TS1155 drives are also no longer
available for purchase.
To view information about other discontinued products, log into the
Technical Support portal (see Accessing the Technical Support Portal on
page 504) and navigate to Documentation > Product Discontinuance
Information.

56
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 CHAPTER 2
Architecture Overview
The T950 library is designed to provide maximum flexibility and ease of
use in an enterprise-class system. To take full advantage of the library’s
versatility, read this overview of the library’s software and hardware
architecture.

Topic
Media Pools this page
Library Partitions page 59
Storage Partitions page 61
Cleaning Partitions and Auto Drive Clean page 62
Drive and Media Frames page 63
Component Identifiers page 65
RIM and F-QIP Identifiers page 67
Drive Identifiers page 67
Connectivity page 68
Robotic Controller Connectivity page 69
Drive Connectivity page 74
High-Availability Configurations page 78
Redundant Connectivity page 78
Global Spare Drives page 81
Redundant Power Supplies page 82

MEDIA POOLS
Inside the library, magazines, and the cartridges they contain, are logically
grouped through the use of pools. These pools are made up of chambers,
each of which accommodates a single magazine. The library has three
different types of pools: the free pool, one or more entry/exit pools, and
one or more storage pools. Figure 29 on page 60 shows how the entry/exit
and storage pools are related to partitions in the library.

57
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Media Pools

Free pool Chambers that are not assigned to a partition are in the free
pool. These chambers can be assigned to a storage partition or a cleaning
partition. The chambers in the free pool cannot be accessed through the
BlueScale user interface or the storage management software until they are
added to a partition.
Entry/Exit pool The chambers in a storage partition’s entry/exit pool
provide an interim storage location for cartridges during import and
export operations. Together, the entry/exit pool and the TAP function as a
configurable entry/exit port for the library.
You specify the number of entry/exit pool chambers when you create a
storage partition. Cleaning partitions do not have an entry/exit pool.
A cartridge is in the entry/exit pool for one of the following reasons:
 It was ejected from the storage pool by the storage management
software or moved manually using the BlueScale user interface. To
remove the cartridges from a library, the operator uses the library’s
BlueScale user interface to initiate the export process.
 A magazine containing one or more cartridges was imported into the
library using the TAP. From the entry/exit pool, the cartridges can be
imported into the storage partition’s storage pool either by the storage
management software or manually through the BlueScale user
interface.
 A magazine containing one or more special-purpose cartridges was
imported into the library using the TAP. These cartridges may be used
for cleaning a drive using the DLM Drive Test feature, or for updating
drive firmware using a code load tape.
Storage pool The chambers in a storage partition’s storage pool provide
the cartridge storage for a partition. You specify the number of chambers
assigned to the storage pool when you create a partition. See the next
section, Library Partitions, for detailed information about how the storage
pool is used in partitions.
 Each storage partition has its own storage pool containing at least one
chamber. The cartridges in the storage pool are available for use by the
host storage management software that accesses the partition.
 A cleaning partition has at least one chamber in its storage pool and can
be shared by multiple storage partitions if they all use the same type of
cleaning cartridge. The cleaning cartridges stored in the cleaning
partition are only accessible when the library is configured to use the
Auto Drive Clean feature. They are not accessible to the storage
management software.

58
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Library Partitions

LIBRARY PARTITIONS
Partitions divide the library logically so that it appears as one or more
physical libraries — one library per configured partition. Partitioning
simplifies storage consolidation through the creation of virtual libraries,
each with its own drives and media. Each partition:
 Has exclusive access to the tape drives and media storage assigned to it.
 Can control the robotics to move media within the partition.
The library supports two types of partitions, storage partitions and
cleaning partitions. You can configure a maximum of 16 partitions. One or
more cleaning partitions can be configured in a single library. A single
cleaning partition can be associated with multiple storage partitions.
Cleaning partitions do not count against the partition maximum.
Notes:  Libraries running BlueScale software versions earlier than
BlueScale12.6.3 and using RIMs or QIPs to export the
partition, are limited to eight storage partitions.
 For libraries using BlueScale12.6.3 through 12.6.45.3, the
library is limited to six drive exporters. If there are fewer than
six drive exporters, additional partitions can have RIM or F-
QIP exporters until you reach the partition limit described
above.
 For BlueScale12.7.01 through BlueScale12.7.06.03, the
maximum number of exporting controllers (QIPs, RIMs, and
drives) supported by the library is six.
 For BlueScale12.8.05 and later, the maximum number of
exporting controllers (QIPs, RIMs, and drives) supported by
the library is 12.
 A tape drive can provide the control path for one partition. A
RIM or QIP can export up to eight storage partitions. A RIM2
can export up to 16 partitions.
 The more partitions in a library, the longer each move can
take. If move requests can be sent to several partitions at
once, you may need to increase the timeout setting in your
storage management software.
 Partitions with greater than 930 slots, or spanning more than
one frame, should use a RIM for the robotic control path.
Exceeding this number may cause an inventory operation to
time out in your data storage software.

59
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Library Partitions

Figure 29 shows a conceptual illustration of a library configured with two

storage partitions and a shared cleaning partition. Each storage partition
has an entry/exit pool and a storage pool.

Partition 1
storage pool chambers
(each loaded with a
TeraPack Magazine)
Partition 1
Entry/Exit pool chambers
(each with an empty
TeraPack Magazine)
Partition 2
Entry/Exit pool chambers
(each with an empty
TeraPack Magazine)

Cleaning partition
shared by Partition 1
and Partition 2

Partition 1 drives

Partition 2 drives

Partition 2
storage pool chambers
(each loaded with a
TeraPack Magazine)

Figure 29 A library with two storage partitions and one shared cleaning partition.

60
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Library Partitions

Storage Partitions
Overview The library requires, at a minimum, one storage partition. This
is the default configuration. Each storage partition must have at least one
drive and one chamber in its storage pool. Drives and chambers can only
be assigned to one storage partition at a time; they cannot be shared by
multiple partitions.
When additional partitions are needed, the library uses Shared Library
Services (SLS) virtualization technology to create the additional partitions.
SLS support is an option you can add to the library by purchasing an
activation key from Spectra Logic.
In some environments, using multiple storage partitions is crucial to data
center efficiency and growth. For example, multiple partitions are
extremely useful in the following situations:
Multiple Storage Management Software Packages If groups within your
company use different storage management software packages, each
software package requires its own dedicated library. Instead of
maintaining multiple physical libraries — one per backup package — the
data center can use a single Spectra Logic library with multiple partitions,
in which each partition appears to the software as a dedicated library.
Multiple Databases If your company uses multiple databases, partitioning
the library preserves the backup processes associated with each type of
database.
Shared Resources If each department in the company must keep their
data segregated, partitioning the library supplies this segregation, as well
as the subsequent integrity of the data set. Each partition can only access
the drives and cartridge locations assigned to it. Data from other partitions
cannot become intermixed with the data stored on the media in the
partition’s inventory.
Multiple Drive Generations If your data center uses multiple generations
of LTO drives, Spectra Logic strongly recommends configuring separate
partitions for each generation to ensure read/write compatibility between
the drives and cartridges.
Encryption If you want to encrypt some, but not all of your backup data,
you can partition the library into an encryption partition and non-
encryption partition to segregate the two types of data.

61
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Library Partitions

Cleaning Partitions and Auto Drive Clean

Overview The cleaning partition provides permanent storage for cleaning
cartridges inside the library when the Auto Drive Clean feature is enabled.
This special-purpose partition does not have an entry/exit pool or any
drives associated with it. A single cleaning partition can be shared by
multiple storage partitions.
Auto Drive Clean uses the cleaning cartridges in the cleaning partition to
provide library-based cleaning of drives with minimal user intervention.
Automated drive cleaning results in fewer failed tape read/write
operations and is the preferred method for cleaning drives.
Drives in a partition with Auto Drive Clean enabled are cleaned no more
than once in any 12 hour period. The library posts a message if an Auto
Drive Clean does not occur because of the 12 hour restriction. If you want
to clean the drive immediately, you can initiate a manual cleaning.
Note: Software-initiated drive cleaning operations cannot use the
cleaning cartridges stored in a cleaning partition; the cartridges
are not accessible to the storage management software.
Requirements The Auto Drive Clean feature requires a cleaning partition
to be associated with the storage partitions that contain the drives you
want to clean. Cleaning partitions are created separately and then assigned
to one or more storage partitions (see Creating a Cleaning Partition on
page 194 and Allocate Chambers and Drives on page 204).
Cleaning cartridges used in a cleaning partition must be stored in specially
labeled Maintenance TeraPack magazines. The cartridges themselves must be
identified with “CLN” at the beginning of the barcode on their labels. The
library prevents you from importing cleaning cartridges and magazines that
are not properly labeled into a cleaning partition.
Auto Drive Clean Operation The drives that are in a storage partition with
an associated cleaning partition are cleaned automatically when cleaning is
required. When a drive is unloaded in response to a host request and the
data cartridge is moved to its storage location, the library queries the drive
to determine if it needs cleaning. If cleaning is required, the library delays
notifying the host that the SCSI move command for the unloaded data
cartridge is complete while it performs an automatic drive cleaning.
During the delay, the library retrieves a cleaning cartridge from the
cleaning partition and inserts it into the drive. When the cleaning is
complete, the library returns the cleaning cartridge to the cleaning
partition and notifies the host that the SCSI move command for the
unloaded data cartridge is complete. The library then posts a system
message that the cleaning was successful.
In addition to automatic cleaning, you can use the BlueScale user interface
to initiate a manual cleaning operation using a cleaning cartridge stored in
the cleaning partition. Only drives in a storage partition that has an
associated cleaning partition can be cleaned using this method.

62
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Drive and Media Frames

Expired Cleaning Cartridges When an expired cleaning cartridge is loaded

into a drive, it is immediately ejected without attempting the cleaning. The
library flags the cleaning tape as expired and generates system messages to
notify you of the expired cleaning tape and the failed drive cleaning. It
marks the cleaning cartridge as expired in its inventory and does not
attempt to use it for subsequent cleanings. These cartridges have an “x”
next to the slot number when viewed on the Inventory screen.
If the cleaning partition contains another, good cleaning cartridge, a
cleaning that failed because the cleaning cartridge is expired is reattempted
the next time the host unloads a data cartridge from the drive.
MLM Tracking of Cleaning Cartridges When you enable the BlueScale
Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) feature and use MLM-enabled
cleaning cartridges, the library stores usage information, including the
number of cleans remaining and the cartridge health (good, near expiration
or expired), in the MLM database. This information is retained in the MLM
database even when a cleaning cartridge is exported from the library.
When a cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life, the library notifies you
so that you can replace the cartridge. This early notification helps prevent
failed cleanings resulting from using an expired cleaning cartridge.
The library does not store any information about non-MLM cleaning
cartridges in the MLM database. However the library does mark an
expired cleaning cartridge and does not attempt to use it again as long as it
remains in the library. If an expired non-MLM cartridge is exported and
then reimported into the library, it is identified as expired the next time it is
loaded into a drive.
Note: TS11xx technology cleaning tapes are always treated as MLM-
enabled by the BlueScale software.
See Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management,
beginning on page 289 for detailed information about MLM.

DRIVE AND MEDIA FRAMES

The T950 library’s modular design makes it possible to increase media
capacity or the number of drives in the library to meet storage and
performance needs as they evolve. Expansion frames can be added to the
basic single-frame library for a maximum of eight frames.
As viewed from the front of the library, the main frame must be positioned
as the left-most frame or the frame immediately to the right of the bulk
TAP. Up to four drive expansion frames can be located immediately to the
right of the main frame. Media frames can be located to the right of the
main frame and any drive frames.

63
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Drive and Media Frames

The following table shows the number of media storage chambers, slots,
and drives in each type of frame in the T950 library.
Frame Type Number of Number of slots Maximum
Chambers a Number of Drives
LTO Library
T950 main
 3 DBAs/3 TBAs 95 950 12
 6 DBAs 83 830 24
T950B main
 1 DBA/shelves 100 1000 4
 3 DBAs/3 TBAs or shelves 92 920 12
 6 DBAs 80 800 24
T950B main with a bulk TAP
 1 DBA/shelves 110 1100 4
 3 DBAs/3 TBAs or shelves 98 980 12
 6 DBAs 80 800 24
Drive expansion (optional)
 3 DBAs/3 TBAs 101 1010 12
 3 DBAs/shelves 107 1070 12
 6 DBAs 89 890 24
Media expansion (optional) 130 1300 None
Bulk TAP expansion (optional) 91 910 None
TS11xx Technology Library
T950B main
 1 DBA/shelves 82 738 4
 3 DBAs/shelves 76 684 12
 6 DBAs/shelves 66 594 24
T950B main with a bulk TAP
 1 DBA/shelves 90 810 4
 3 DBAs/shelves 81 729 12
 6 DBAs/shelves 66 594 24
Drive expansion (optional)
 3 DBAs/shelves 90 810 12
 6 DBAs 75 675 24
Media expansion (optional) 110 990 None
Bulk TAP expansion (optional) 77 693 None
a. A single magazine is stored in each chamber. Each LTO magazine contains 10 slots. Each TS11xx technology magazine contains 9 slots.

64
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Component Identifiers

COMPONENT IDENTIFIERS
The library’s BlueScale user interface and the XML command interface use
component identifiers for each drive, RIM, and F-QIP. These identifiers
also appear in system messages. The component identifier is based on the
component’s location relative to the frame and drive bay assembly (DBA)
where it is installed.
The relationships between the DBAs and the locations of the drives and
controllers are the same in each main frame and drive expansion frame. In
a multi-frame library, the frames are numbered sequentially from left to
right when viewed from the front, beginning with the left-most frame
(FR1).
Notes:  All component identifiers are numbered consecutively by
type, starting at 1.
 DBAs are numbered from the bottom up, with DBA 1 being
the bottom-most.
 Drives are numbered from left to right and bottom to top in a
DBA, as viewed from the back of the library. Each DBA can
hold up to four full-height drives.
 If the frame contains 3 DBAs and 3 TBAs, DBAs 3, 4, and 5
become TBAs.
 If the frame contains DBAs and shelves, the DBAs are installed
from top to bottom with shelves below.

65
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Component Identifiers

Figure 30 shows the relationship between the DBAs and the locations of
the drives and controllers in the main frame.

Frame n (FRn)

Drive 3 Drive 4
RIM DBA 6
Drive 1 Drive 2 6

Drive 3 Drive 4 RIM

DBA 5
Drive 1 Drive 2 5

Drive 3 Drive 4 RIM

DBA 4
Drive 1 Drive 2 4

Drive 3 Drive 4 RIM

DBA 3
Drive 1 Drive 2 3

Drive 3 Drive 4 RIM

DBA 2
Drive 1 Drive 2 2

Drive 3 Drive 4 RIM

DBA 1
Drive 1 Drive 2 1

Controller (RIM) bays

Figure 30 The relationship between the DBA, the component locations, and the
identifiers in the BlueScale and XML interfaces (main frame with RIMs shown).

66
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Component Identifiers

RIM and F-QIP Identifiers

RIMs and F-QIPs can be installed in any controller bay in the main frame or
drive expansion frames. The component identifier for a RIM or F-QIP is
based on its location relative to the frame and the DBA where it is installed.
The component identifier for a RIM or F-QIP is shown as
FRx/DBAx/F-QIPn, where:
 FRx is the number of the frame from left to right when viewed from the
front of the library.
 DBAx is the number of the DBA where the RIM or F-QIP is installed (see
Figure 30 on page 66). The main frame and each drive expansion frame
accommodates up to six DBAs.
 F-QIPn is the interface type (Fibre Channel) of the RIM or QIP and the
number of the controller bay where it is installed. Because each DBA
contains only one controller bay, n is always 1.
Note: The component identifier for a RIM shows it as an F-QIP. For
example, Figure 31 shows the component identifier for the RIM
installed in DBA 4 in Frame 1 (FR1/DBA4/F-QIP1) on the
Controllers screen. The device descriptor (8-Gbps FC RIM2)
indicates that the controller is a RIM2.

Figure 31 The Controllers screen showing the component

identifier for a RIM.

Drive Identifiers
The firmware in the drive sled that houses each drive assigns an identifier
to the drive based on its location in the library. This identifier is shown in
the BlueScale user interface and is used in the XML command interface.
The identifier is also used to generate the World Wide Name (WWN) that
the library reports for the drive (see World Wide Names for Drives on
page 75). Because the identifier is location-based, it remains constant even
if the physical drive is replaced by a new drive. The new drive assumes the
location-based identifier.

67
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Connectivity

The component identifier for each drive is based on its location relative to
the frame and the DBA where it is installed, as viewed from the back of the
library (see Figure 30 on page 66). The component identifier for a drive is
shown as FRx/DBAx/xTYPE-DRVx, where:
 FRx is the number of the frame from left to right when viewed from the
front of the library.
 DBAx is the number of the DBA containing the drive.
 xTYPE is the interface (x= f for Fibre Channel, s for SAS, and blank for
SCSI) and drive type (LTO for an LTO drive or TS11x0 for a TS11xx
technology drive).
 DRVx is the number of the drive bay in the DBA, as viewed from the
back of the library. A is added to the end for half-height drives.
For example, Figure 31 shows the component identifier for a Fibre Channel
LTO drive installed in drive bay 1 of DBA 3 in Frame 2
(FR2/DBA3/fLTO-DRV1A) on the Drives screen. The Drive Type descriptor
indicates that the drive is an IBM LTO-8 half-height Fibre Channel drive.

Figure 32 The Drives screen showing the component

identifier for a drive.

CONNECTIVITY
The library’s robotics and the library’s drives connect to the host system
over a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric, a SAS fabric, or, less often,
over a SCSI bus. These connections carry two types of information:
 The commands from the storage management software that control the
robotic motion and the read/write operations of the drives.
 The data being transferred to and from a drive by the host.
The following sections describe connectivity for the library’s robotics and
the drives.

68
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Connectivity

Robotic Controller Connectivity

The library requires either an LTO-5 or later generation drive, a RIM, or an
F-QIP to provide the robotic control path. When configuring a storage
partition, the device you select to provide the robotic control path is
referred to as the “exporting controller” for the partition. The exporting
controller makes the partition accessible to the hosts as a media changer (a
library). It receives the media changer commands sent from the host to the
library and relays them to the RCM, which in turn processes them into the
motion commands used to control the robotics.
You can select multiple exporting controllers (drives or RIMs and F-QIPs)
for a partition and use your host software to export the same changer
interface over the controllers to provide redundancy.
 When a RIM or an F-QIP is not present, a direct-attached Fibre Channel
or SAS drive provides the robotic control path, as described in Control
Path Through a Direct-Attached Drive, below.
 When a RIM or an F-QIP is present, it can be used to provide the robotic
control path, as described in Control Path Through a RIM or F-QIP on
page 70.

Control Path Through a Direct-Attached Drive

In a direct-attached drive configuration, one or more drives in a storage
partition are designated as the exporting drive (also know as the exporting
controller). The commands from the host to control the motion of the
robotics within the partition are routed to the exporting drive’s logical unit
number 1 (LUN 1). Commands to control the operation of the exporting
drive are sent from the host to LUN 0 of the drive.
Notes:  Using a drive to provide the robotic control path for a
partition is supported in BlueScale12.6.3 and later.
 If you have multiple storage partitions, you must designate
an exporting drive for each partition.
 A drive can only provide the robotic control path for the
partition to which it is assigned.
 You can select multiple drives as controllers, and export the
same changer interface over the drives to provide
redundancy, as long as your storage management software
can support this. These multiple paths cannot be used at the
same time.
 Assigning multiple drive exporters to one partition reduces the
total number of partitions that can be configured in the library.

69
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Connectivity

Figure 33 shows an example of a partition with two Fibre Channel drives

providing the robotic control path. LUN 1 on the drives provides the
robotic control path over which the commands to the robotics are received
from the host.

Figure 33 An example of a partition with two direct-attached Fibre Channel drives providing the
robotic control path.

Control Path Through a RIM or F-QIP

In a RIM- or F-QIP-based configuration, a RIM or an F-QIP is the exporting
controller for the partition. This controller provides the bridge between the
external Fibre Channel interface from the host and the internal interface
used by the library to communicate with the robotics.
A RIM or F-QIP can support up to eight partitions; a RIM2 can support up
to 16 partitions. Each partition has full control of the robotics. For example,
if the library contains two partitions, a single RIM can provide the robotic
control path for both partitions.

70
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Connectivity

If the library contains two RIMs or F-QIPs, it can be configured to use the
BlueScale Controller failover feature. This feature configures the two
controllers as a failover pair to provide a redundant control path to the
robotics (see Controller Failover on page 79 for additional information).
If desired, you can configure multiple RIMs and F-QIPs as exporters for the
same partition and use your host software to export the same changer
interface over the RIMs to provide redundancy. These multiple paths
cannot be used at the same time.
Figure 34 shows an example of a partition with direct-attached Fibre
Channel drives and a RIM or F-QIP. Port A on the RIM provides the robotic
control path over which the commands to the robotics are received from
the host.

Figure 34 An example of a RIM or F-QIP in a partition with direct-attached Fibre Channel drives.

71
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Connectivity

World Wide Names for Fibre Channel Partitions

The World Wide Name (WWN) displayed for each partition on the Shared
Library Services screen is the WWN of the controller (RIM, F-QIP, or drive)
that provides the robotic control path for the partition (the exporting
controller). The WWN is based on the physical location of the controller in
the library and remains constant even if the controller is replaced. The new
controller assumes the location-based WWN.
Note: If multiple exporting controllers are configured in a partition,
there are multiple WWNs for the partition. Click Summary to
display the Partition Settings screen, which lists all of the
WWNs.

Figure 35 The WWN assigned to the partition.

For Partitions with F-QIPs or RIMs as the Exporting Controller

 The partition WWN is actually the World Wide Node Name (WWNN)
for the exporting controller.
 If multiple partitions use the same Fibre Channel port on the RIM or
QIP, all of the partitions have the same WWNN and the same World
Wide Port Name (WWPN). However, the partitions will have different
LUNs under those controllers, starting at LUN zero (0).
 If you create two partitions and configure one partition to use Port A
and another to use Port B, the WWNN/WWPN of port A will start with
21 and the WWNN/WWPN of port B will start with 22. In this case the
ports are independent. However, both of the partitions will show the
WWN for Port A only.
 If you export the same partition out both port A and port B on a RIM or
QIP, the WWNN will be the same for both ports but the WWPN will be
different. This scenario is a type of redundant path to the robotics.
 For more information about WWNs, log on to the portal (see Accessing
the Technical Support Portal on page 504), open the Knowledge Base,
and in the KBA field, enter 01764 to access the article Spectra Library
World Wide Names (WWNs) for QIPs (the article discusses F-QIPs; the
concepts are the same for a RIM).

72
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Connectivity

For Partitions with a Drive or Drives as the Exporting Controller

 The partition WWN is the same as the WWN for the drive. The
commands to control the motion of the robotics within the partition are
sent from the host to the exporting drive’s logical unit number 1
(LUN 1). Commands to control the operation of the exporting drive are
sent from the host to LUN 0 of the drive.
 See World Wide Names for Drives on page 75 for more information
about WWNs for drives.

Fibre Channel Port Configurations

One or both of the external ports on the exporting controller can be used to
provide the network connectivity for the robotics.
Single Port Connectivity The simplest configuration uses only one of the
interface ports on the exporting controller. This configuration works well
when only a single host is connected to the library. When multiple hosts
are connected to the same port, they must share this single communication
path to the robotics. This type of configuration requires the hosts to use
device sharing application software to handle the arbitration for use of the
robotics.

A
SAN
B
Controller

Figure 36 Single port network connectivity to the exporting

controller.

Dual-Path Connectivity (RIMs and F-QIPs only) A slightly more complex

configuration uses both interface ports on the exporting controller with
each connected to a different library partition. Each port is used as an
independent communications path. From a host perspective, each port is
viewed as a unique, independent path to a partition. The two ports can be
connected to the same or possibly different storage area networks (SANs).
The library processes the motion commands and relays them to the
partitions in the order that they are received. This is a way to provide
limited visibility between the partitions. If you have more than two
partitions you can use additional controllers to provide additional
isolation between partitions.

73
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Connectivity

Dual-Port Connectivity As an alternative to the configurations that use a

single port for each partition, dual-port configurations use both interface
ports as a single communications path to the same partition. The ports can
be connected to the same or different SANs. The hosts on the network can
use either port to communicate with the robotics. A dual-port
configuration allows a host to have an alternate, redundant, path to reach
the partition. Not all host software can support this type of configuration.
Notes:  The two ports cannot be used simultaneously.
 This type of configuration cannot be used in combination
with the Controller Failover feature (see Controller Failover
on page 79).

SAN A
B
Controller

Dual-path connection to the same SAN

—OR—

SAN1
A
B
Controller
SAN2

Dual-port connection to different SANs

Figure 37 Examples of a dual-path and dual-port
configurations.

Drive Connectivity
The drives in the library have either a Fibre Channel interface, a SAS
interface, or a SCSI bus interface.
 Fibre Channel drives connect directly to the host using a Fibre Channel
arbitrated loop or fabric.
 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) drives connect directly to a SAS HBA.
 SCSI drives use an F-QIP to provide the Fibre Channel connectivity, as
described in Partitions Using QIP-Attached SCSI Drives on page 76.
The F-QIP acts as a bridge to connect SCSI drives in the DBA to a Fibre
Channel fabric or arbitrated loop. The terminator for each SCSI bus in
the DBA is installed on the drive’s external LVD SCSI connector.
Keep in mind that all of the drives on an arbitrated loop must share the
data transfer capacity (bandwidth) of the interface. Having multiple
devices on the same loop can negatively impact the performance of all the
devices.

74
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Connectivity

World Wide Names for Drives As part of providing network connectivity,

the drive sled firmware assigns a location-based WWN for the drive it
houses. This WWN is displayed on the Drive Details screen and can be
used by the host software to address the drive. Because this WWN is
location-based, it remains constant even if a drive is replaced by a different
one of the same type. The new drive assumes the location-based BlueScale
identifier and WWN.
Note: The WWN displayed on the Drive Details screen is actually the
WWPN for port A on the drive sled. The WWPN for port B is the
same as the one for port A except that the second digit from the
left is 2 instead of 1.

Figure 38 The WWN assigned to a Fibre Channel drive.

75
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Connectivity

Partitions Using QIP-Attached SCSI Drives

When a partition includes SCSI drives, an F-QIP is required to provide the
connectivity to the host. Each F-QIP has two external ports and provides
connectivity for up to four SCSI drives. If a partition contains more than
four drives, additional F-QIPs are required to provide the connectivity for
those drives.
Notes:  An F-QIP used for drive connectivity can also be used to
provide the robotic control path.
 The Controller Failover feature is not supported for any
F-QIP that has SCSI drives connected to it. The F-QIP pair
configured for Controller Failover can only be used to
provide the robotic control path.
The F-QIP acts as a bridge to connect SCSI drives in the DBA to a Fibre
Channel fabric or arbitrated loop. Figure 39 is a simple representation of
how the drives and robotics in a library with a single F-QIP-based partition
are connected to a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric through a switch
or hub.

Figure 39 An example of a QIP-based partition with

QIP-attached drives connected to a SAN.

76
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview Connectivity

In the example shown in Figure 39, the SCSI drives in the partition are
connected to the Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric through Port A of
the F-QIP in each DBA. Port B of F-QIP 3 also provides the path over which
SCSI commands to control the robotics are sent from the host.
As illustrated in Figure 40, an F-QIP provides any-to-any connectivity to
the SCSI drives it controls. Every drive (target) is potentially visible to
servers through both ports on the F-QIP. This permits flexibility in
configuring which servers can access which drives (target visibility).

Drive Bay Assembly (DBA)

Drive 3 Drive 4

QIP

Drive 1 Drive 2

Internal cabling
Fiber port (Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet)

Figure 40 QIP-attached SCSI drive connectivity.

For example, a QIP-based partition can be configured so that Drive 1 and

Drive 2 are only accessible through Port A and Drive 3 and Drive 4 are only
accessible through Port B. In this configuration, Drive 1 and Drive 2 can
only be accessed by the host connected to Port A; Drive 3 and Drive 4 can
only be accessed by a host connected to Port B. In a more complex
configuration, the F-QIP can be configured so that all drives are visible
through both ports. Such a configuration is typically used in a shared
storage environment or an environment with failover capabilities.

Important If drives are visible to multiple servers, your storage management software must
support this visibility. Otherwise server contention for a single drive can create
network and system problems.

77
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview High-Availability Configurations

HIGH-AVAILABILITY CONFIGURATIONS
In high-availability enterprise environments, keeping the library operating
even in the event of a network connection failure or component failure is
extremely important. The following sections describe the high-availability
features of the T950 library.

Redundant Connectivity
In a high-availability environment, the ability to maintain communications
between the host systems and the library and its drives in the event of a
connection failure is essential.
 The library can be configured to use two controllers (RIMs or F-QIPs)
and the BlueScale Controller Failover feature to provide redundant
connectivity to the media changer functionality of the library. See
Configure Controller Failover on page 136 for information about
configuring controller failover.

Important The controllers must be running the same firmware version. If you install the
second controller after you update the BlueScale software, the BlueScale versions
for the two controllers may be different. Update the BlueScale software as
described in Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware on page 446 to
correct the reported firmware mismatch.

Important Drives used to provide the robotic control path cannot be configured with
controller failover, however you can export the same changer interface over
multiple drives in the partition to provide redundancy as long as your software can
support this. These multiple paths cannot be used at the same time. Assigning
multiple drive exporters to one partition reduces the total number of partitions
that can be configured in the library.

Important Controller failover is not supported on 4 GB Fibre Channel F-QIPs. If you have 4 GB
Fibre Channel F-QIPs, the Failover button does not display on the Controllers
screen.

 The servers and switches used to access the full-height Fibre Channel
drives in the library can use failover software to provide redundant
connectivity through the two ports on each drive.

78
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview High-Availability Configurations

Controller Failover
The BlueScale Controller Failover feature uses two RIMs or F-QIPs that are
configured as a failover pair. RIMs and F-QIPs can be mixed in a failover
pair; a RIM2 can only be in a failover pair with another RIM2.
One controller in the pair is the primary controller and the other is the
secondary controller. From the host perspective, the primary controller is
the only controller present. The secondary controller is not visible to the
host.
Figure 41 shows a simplified view of how the failover pair operates. Port A
on each controller in the pair is connected to the same Fibre Channel
switch. Both ports have the same configuration, except that the primary
operates in target mode and the secondary is not active.

Primary Controller
SAN
Secondary Controller

Before failover

A
B
Primary Controller
SAN
A
B
Secondary Controller

After failover
Robotic control path (target port)
Internal communication bus (mirror inventory & partner monitor)

Figure 41 Paired controllers configured to provide failover

redundancy.

During normal operation, the active Fibre Channel port (port A) on the
primary controller receives and processes the media changer commands
sent from the host. The active port on the secondary controller does not
receive or process the media changer commands from the hosts.
Note: The paired ports on each controller can be connected to separate
SANs and used simultaneously. A failure of the primary
controller causes both connections to failover to the secondary
controller.

79
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview High-Availability Configurations

The two controllers use the library’s internal communication bus to

monitor each other and to maintain a cache of the library’s inventory
database.
A failover event occurs when the secondary controller detects that the
primary controller is no longer communicating on the library’s internal
communication bus. After sending a query to the primary controller to
confirm that it is no longer communicating, the secondary controller takes
over the exact configuration of the primary controller and begins receiving
and processing the media changer commands sent from the host.

Important Only the secondary controller (acting as primary) is functional after the failover. A
failure on this controller disrupts communications with the hosts. Troubleshoot the
cause of the failover and reconfigure Controller Failover as soon as possible.

BlueScale Controller Failover allows backups to continue in the event that

library communication to the primary controller is disrupted. Because both
controllers are connected to the same Fibre Channel switch and maintain a
synchronized image of the library’s inventory database, the failover occurs
without manual intervention. You can then troubleshoot the failed
controller at your convenience.
After you resolve the problem, the controller that originally caused the
failover becomes the secondary controller in the failover pair. The failover
pair reverts to the original primary/secondary relationship the next time
the LCM restarts.
The BlueScale Controller Failover feature only affects the operation of the
library’s controllers. Controller Failover does not detect if the controller is
accessible by the host. To take advantage of the feature, the host must be
configured to retry failed commands. This ensures that commands that fail
when the library connection to the primary controller is disrupted get re-
issued after the connection to the secondary controller is established. The
retry timing must be configured to allow for the time lag inherent in the
process of disabling the host’s connection to the primary controller and
enabling the connection to the secondary controller.

Exporting Drive Redundancy

As an alternative to controller failover or for drives, which cannot be
configured with controller failover, you can select multiple drives or RIMs
as controllers for a single partition, and export the same changer interface
over them to provide redundancy, as long as your data storage software
can support this.
Note: Assigning multiple drive exporters to one partition may reduce
the total number of partitions that can be configured in the
library.

80
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview High-Availability Configurations

Drive Connectivity Failover

The full-height Fibre Channel drives used with the library are equipped
with two Fibre Channel ports. The two Fibre Channel ports cannot be used
simultaneously to provide redundant data paths between the hosts and the
drive. However, they can be used to provide failover capability in the event
that communication to the port currently in use is interrupted. This
failover can be accomplished several ways, including:
 Manually disconnect the fiber optic cable from the failed port and
connect it to the other port. You may need to reconfigure your host
software to recognize the alternate port.
 Connect each port on the drive to a separate Fibre Channel HBA in the
host. You can also use a dual-port Fibre Channel HBA. Configure one
HBA (or HBA port) as the primary connection and the other HBA (or
HBA port) as the failover connection. Install failover software on the
host computer to control the transfer of I/O from one HBA to the other
in case of a failure. You may also need to configure your storage
management software to correctly recognize both ports. Refer to your
failover software, HBA, and storage management software
documentation for instructions.
Note: Tape drives sold by Spectra Logic do not support MPIO.

Global Spare Drives

The BlueScale Global Spare feature provides a way to remotely substitute
an available TS11xx technology or Fibre Channel LTO-4 or later generation
drive in the library for a failed drive of the same type. The feature lets you
configure an installed drive as a designated spare for other drives in the
library. This drive can then be substituted for a failed drive in any partition
that is configured to use the Global Spare drive. When a drive fails, you
simply log into the BlueScale web interface from any location, select the
Global Spare option for the failed drive, and continue normal operations.
You can then physically replace the failed drive at your convenience. See
Assign Global Spare Drives on page 202 and Using a Global Spare Drive on
page 410 for more information.
Note: SAS drives are not supported for Global Spare drives.

81
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 2 — Architecture Overview High-Availability Configurations

Redundant Power Supplies

The library requires one 5/12 VDC power supply per DBA with an
installed drive. Installing an optional N+1 power supply, where N is the
number of DBAs with drives installed, provides redundancy and failover
protection in the event that a single power supply fails. In a library with
three DBAs, if four or more power supply modules are installed, up to two
power supplies can fail. The surviving power supplies load-share in order
to provide sufficient power to the DBAs to allow backups to continue until
the failed power supplies are replaced.
The library main frame requires one 24 VDC power supply to provide
power for the library robotics, motors, fans, and interior LED light bars. An
additional 24 VDC supply can be installed to provide redundancy.
The main frame and each drive frame have both a primary and a
secondary AC power input. When using a redundant AC power
configuration, each input for a frame is connected to a separate branch
circuit, which allows for failover in the event of a power failure in one of
the circuits. When using a dual AC power module or dual AC power
module with convenience outlet, the two AC inputs for each frame must be
on the same phase, and the voltages must be the same within a few volts. If
these requirements are not satisfied, there may be problems switching
between the two AC power sources. The dual AC 2 does not require the
power sources for the AC inputs for a frame to be on the same phase. See
Input Power Requirements on page 539 for more information.

If the power sources for the AC inputs for a frame using the dual AC or dual AC with
Caution convenience outlets are not on the same phase, damage to the library could result.
This does not apply to a frame using the dual AC 2.

82
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 CHAPTER 3
Introducing the
BlueScale User Interface
The BlueScale user interface is used for configuring, monitoring, and
maintaining the T950 library. The user interface displays on a color touch
screen on the front of the library. It can also be displayed remotely through
a standard web browser using the Remote Library Controller (RLC) or on a
monitor connected directly to the LCM.
Note: The XML command interface can also be used to perform many
of the functions provided by the BlueScale user interface. See the
Spectra Tape Libraries XML Command Reference for detailed
information about using the XML command interface.
This chapter describes the BlueScale user interface and how it is used.

Topic
Overview of the BlueScale User Interface page 84
Access Options page 84
User Interface Features page 86
Library Management page 94
Using the BlueScale User Interface page 95
Log Into the User Interface page 95
Log Off or Switch Users page 100
Enter Information on Screens page 101

83
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Overview of the BlueScale User Interface

OVERVIEW OF THE BLUESCALE USER INTERFACE

The BlueScale user interface lets you set configuration options, view
library and drive information and metrics, manage media, monitor library
operations, and perform maintenance operations.

Figure 42 The BlueScale user interface General Status screen.

Access Options
The BlueScale user interface is accessed using either the touch screen on
the library operator panel or through the BlueScale web interface.

Operator Panel Touch Screen Interface

The touch screen on the operator panel of the main frame is the library’s
local BlueScale user interface. You select options and enter information by
simply touching the appropriate location on the screen with a stylus or
your finger. The touch screen interface includes a soft keyboard that you
can use to enter alphanumeric characters into text fields. This soft
keyboard can be accessed from the keyboard icon that displays whenever
text input is required.
In addition to using the touch screen, you can access the local user interface
using a monitor, keyboard, and mouse connected directly to the LCM (see
Figure 16 and Figure 17 on page 45). This method of accessing the local
BlueScale user interface provides the same functionality that is available
from the touch screen.

Important Do not use the Enter key on your keyboard when making selections in the BlueScale
user interface. It can cause inconsistent behavior in the BlueScale interface.

84
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Overview of the BlueScale User Interface

BlueScale Web Interface

The BlueScale web interface lets you use a standard web browser to access
the library through the Remote Library Controller (RLC). Simply enter the
library’s IPv4 or IPv6 address into a browser running on a computer that
can access the Ethernet network to which the library’s LCM is connected.

Important  When accessing the library remotely through a web browser, do not use the
Enter key on your keyboard when making selections in the BlueScale user
interface. Various web browsers handle the Enter key differently, causing
inconsistent behavior in the BlueScale interface.
 Always use your mouse to make selections and click the buttons in BlueScale
screens instead of using your keyboard.
 Do not use the browser’s “back” button to return to a previously viewed
BlueScale screen. Always use the BlueScale toolbar and buttons on the screen
to navigate the BlueScale web interface.
 Using a keyboard command (for example, F5) to refresh the browser when
connected to the BlueScale web interface can cause unpredictable results.

The BlueScale web interface provides access to the same features and
functions that are available through the touch screen, excluding functions
that involve physical interaction with the library (for example, using the
TAP to import or export a TeraPack magazine).
When using the web interface, keep the following requirements in mind:
Number of Sessions The BlueScale web interface supports up to eight
simultaneous connections to the library. If you attempt to establish more
than eight simultaneous web interface connections, the existing connection
with the longest idle time is terminated.
Supported Browsers Remote access to the library through the web
interface is only supported using the following web browsers:
 Microsoft® Internet Explorer®
 Mozilla® Firefox®
 Google® Chrome™
 Apple® Safari®
Additional browsers were not fully tested with the BlueScale web
interface. Using an unsupported browser may result in the BlueScale web
interface not displaying or operating as expected.

85
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Overview of the BlueScale User Interface

User Interface Features

The following sections describe the common features that appear in all
screens in the user interface.

Current
toolbar

Additional
toolbars

Status bar

Figure 43 The BlueScale user interface features.

Toolbars
The toolbar panel appears along the left edge of each screen (see Figure 43)
and lets you navigate through the available toolbars to select options.
Clicking on a toolbar expands it to display the available options. The
screen for the previously selected option remains displayed until you select
another option, either from the same toolbar or another one.

86
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Overview of the BlueScale User Interface

Option Overview
The following table provides an overview of the options available under
each toolbar. Figure 44 on page 90 shows the sequence of the screens under
each option.

Toolbar Available Options

General The General toolbar (shown in Figure 43 on page 86) provides access to the
most frequently used library screens and controls:
 General Status — Displays the current status for all of the major library
components for the selected library partition. Moving the cursor over the
name of a component highlights the component in the system graphic.
 Click Drives to display the Drives screen for more detailed information
about the status of the drives (see View Drive Status Information on
page 175). The Drives screen can also be accessed from the Configuration
toolbar (see Configuration on page 88).
 Click Robotics to display the Robotics Status screen, which provides access
to the Tools and Usage tabs. Select the Tools tab to access the Run All
Motion Basic Tests diagnostic (see Testing the Robotics on page 396). Select
the Usage tab to access the Robot Utilization feature (see View Robot
Utilization Information on page 174).
 Click Media to display the Inventory screen, which is also accessed from
the Inventory option on the General toolbar.
 Click Filled Capacity to display the Media Lifecycle Management Report
screen, which is also accessed from the Media Lifecycle Management
option on the General Status screen.
 Inventory — Displays the Inventory screen, which shows the library’s media
inventory information. Use the controls on the Inventory screen to locate
individual cartridges and move magazines and cartridges from one location
in the library to another. See Chapter 8 – Using the Cartridge Inventory,
beginning on page 269, to learn about the options available from this screen.
 Import/Export — Displays the Import/Export screen, which provides controls
for importing, exporting, and exchanging magazines and cartridges. See
Import and Export Overview on page 236 to learn about using the options
available from this screen.
Note: The Import/Export option is not available when accessing the library
remotely using the BlueScale web interface.
 Metrics — Displays screens that show the metrics for drive performance,
power consumption, and storage density for the media types in the library.
See Use Performance Metrics on page 171 for information about viewing the
metrics available for the library.
 Media Lifecycle Management — Displays the Media Lifecycle Management
Report screen, which provides controls for generating media lifecycle
reports. See Using MLM Reporting on page 321 to learn about using the
options available from this screen.

87
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Overview of the BlueScale User Interface

Toolbar Available Options

Configuration The Configuration toolbar provides access to controls for configuring all
aspects of the library’s operation:
 Partitions — Displays the Shared Library Services screen, which provides
information about the currently selected partition and lets you define new
partitions or modify existing partitions. See Chapter 6 – Configuring and
Managing Partitions, beginning on page 186, to learn about configuring and
using both storage and cleaning partitions in your library.
 Drives or DLM — Displays the Drives screen, which lists all of the drives
installed in the library. Depending on the library configuration, the screen
offers options for performing different types of operations on each drive.
If Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) is enabled, the Drives icon in the
Configuration toolbar changes to DLM. The Drives screen changes to include
a DLM status icon next to each drive. This icon provides at-a-glance
information about the general health of the drive. See View Drive Status
Information on page 175 and Chapter 10 – Using Drive Lifecycle
Management, beginning on page 336, to learn about using the options
available from the Drives screen.
Note: DLM is automatically enabled when you enable Media Lifecycle
Management (MLM).
 Controllers — Displays the Controllers screen, which provides information
about the RIMs and F-QIPs installed in the library and lets you configure a
failover pair using two controllers. See Configure Controller Failover on
page 136) for detailed information about configuring and using the Controller
Failover feature.
Note: The Controllers screen may not have any entries if the library is using
direct-attached drives to provide the robotic control path for partitions.
 System — Displays the System Setup screen, which provides controls for
enabling purchased library options and configuring the library’s system-wide
operating parameters. See Chapter 4 – Configuring the Library, beginning on
page 103, to learn about the options available from the System Setup screen.
 Media Lifecycle Management — Displays the Media Lifecycle Management
Setting screen, which provides controls for enabling MLM and configuring
global settings for MLM. See Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media
Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 289, to learn about using the
options available from the Media Lifecycle Management Setting screen.

88
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Overview of the BlueScale User Interface

Toolbar Available Options

Maintenance The Maintenance toolbar provides access to maintenance and troubleshooting
options for the library and drives.
 Package Update — Displays the Package Update screen, which shows the
version of the BlueScale software the library is using and provides controls
for updating the BlueScale software and the firmware for individual library
components, managing update packages, and configuring and managing
package servers. See Configure a Package Server on page 144 and Updating
the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware on page 446, to learn about
using the options available from the Package Update screen.
 Tools — Displays the Maintenance Tools screen. From this screen you can
access the Utilities, System Traces, and EtherLib Status screens which provide
tools used during maintenance and troubleshooting procedures. See
Chapter 12 – Library Troubleshooting, beginning on page 362, and
Chapter 14 – Maintaining the Library, beginning on page 442, to learn about
using the options available from the Utilities, Traces, and EtherLib Status
screens.
 Diagnostics — Displays the Diagnostics screen, which provides access to
diagnostics used for testing the library during troubleshooting procedures.
These tests are performed under guidance from Spectra Logic Technical
Support.
 AutoSupport — Displays the AutoSupport screen, which provides controls for
creating and maintaining AutoSupport profiles, opening and updating
support tickets, and configuring AutoSupport features. See Chapter 11 –
Configuring and Using AutoSupport, beginning on page 345, for detailed
information about configuring and using AutoSupport.
 Media Lifecycle Management — Displays the Media Lifecycle Management
Tools screen, which provides access to controls for using MLM features. See
Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management, beginning
on page 289, to learn about using the options available from the Media
Lifecycle Management Tools screen.
Security The Security toolbar provides access to options for managing users and for
configuring and using the Encryption feature for your library.
 Switch User — Displays the main BlueScale Login screen, which logs the
current user out of the library and lets a different user log in. See Log Off or
Switch Users on page 100 for information about using this option.
 Edit Users — Displays the Edit Users screen, which provides tools for adding,
editing, and deleting users. See Configuring Library Users on page 104, to
learn about using the options available on the Edit Users screen.
 Encryption — Displays the Encryption Login screen. You must log into the
encryption feature before you can enable and configure the encryption
options, including the library’s built-in BlueScale encryption key
management. See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for
information about configuring and using encryption with the library.
Note: BlueScale Encryption Standard Edition capability is included with the
library. You can purchase an activation key for either BlueScale Encryption
Professional Edition, the Spectra SKLM Encryption key management system, or
KMIP Encryption key management to access additional encryption capabilities.

89
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Overview of the BlueScale User Interface

Map of Options Available from the Toolbar

General General (Cont.) Configuration Configuration (Cont.) Configuration (Cont.)

General Status O, A, S Metrics O, A, S Partitions (Cleaning or Storage) A, S Drives (DLM) A, S System (Cont.) A, S

General Status Metrics Shared Library Services Drives System Setup—Other Settings
ƒ
Partition Selection ƒ
Metric ƒ
New ƒ
Drive Traces 5 ƒ
Library Name
– Drives Status > Drives screen – Power Consumption ƒ
Summary ƒ
Drive Performance ƒ
Web Server Port
– Media Status > Inventory screen – Drive Write Performance ƒ
Edit ƒ
Drive Firmware Update ƒ
Refresh Rate
ƒ
Robotics Status – Drive Read Performance ƒ
Delete ƒ
Drive n ƒ
Auto Logout Timeout
– Run All Motion Basic Tests – Storage Density ƒ
Global Spare 8 – Add 1
ƒ
Online Access to Spectra Logic
– Robot Utilization by Hour ƒ
Target – Global Spare Usage – Remove 1
ƒ
Drive Performance Monitoring
ƒ
Power Status Name and Media Type – Replace 1
ƒ
Power Consumption Monitoring
ƒ
Fans Status Media Lifecycle ƒ
C/S: Name – Clean
ƒ – Detail ƒ
Enable Automatic Power-Up
TAPs Management O, A, S ƒ
C/S: Media Type
ƒ – DLM Report After Power Failure
Power Usage ƒ
S: Advanced
ƒ
Density Media Lifecycle Management – Test ƒ
Enable SSL
– Emulation
Report – Enable TAOS – Reset ƒ
Enable SNMP Agent
Inventory O, A, S ƒ
Partition S: Robotic Control Path – SNMP Settings
ƒ
Report S: Spare Drives 8 (Global Spares) Controllers A, S ƒ
Enable Soft Power
Inventory
ƒPartition
– Media Health
Controllers ƒ
Syslog Server IP Address
– Remaining Capacity Chambers and Drives
ƒSource (for media move) ƒ
C/S: Storage Chambers ƒAdd 1 ƒ
BlueScale Vision IP Address
– Load Count ƒ
ƒDestination (for media move) ƒ
S: EE Chambers ƒRemove 1 Network Settings
– Write Errors
ƒMove Queue (defined moves) ƒ
S: Drives ƒReplace 1 ƒ
Mail Users
– Cleans Remaining
ƒView Source Slot ƒ
S: Cleaning Partition ƒ Failover ƒ
Auto Configuration Save
– Born on Date
ƒFind by Barcode ƒ
Routine Maintenance
– Exported Media S: MLM Media Verification
ƒStart Moves (defined moves) System A, S ƒ
Date and Time
– Last Write Time ƒ
PreScan
ƒStart in Background (defined moves)
– Last Read Time – Enable PreScan System Setup—Option Enablement
ƒAdvanced Media Lifecycle
ƒ
Save Report ƒ
PostScan 4, 7, 8 ƒ
Hardware ID
– Upload Moves
ƒ
Barcode Filter – FullScan 5, 7 ƒ
Key Management A, S
– Download Inventory
– QuickScan – Save
Import/Export 1 Media Lifecycle Management
O, A, S – QuickScan using Global ƒ
Currently Installed Keys Settings
Spare 5, 7, 8
Import/Export TeraPack Magazines
– Scan After Time (Days) ƒ
Enable MLM
ƒ
Storage Partition Go to Configuration (Cont.) ƒ
Enable Alerts for Non-MLM
– Scan After Write
Storage Pool Media
– Scan After Read
– Import ƒ
Enable Alerts for Load Count
– Export/Exchange S: Encryption
(Encryption user logged in) Discrepancies
Entry/Exit Pool
– BlueScale 4 ƒ
Minimum Cleaning Passes
– Import
– Export/Exchange (Full Chambers) – BlueScale Pro version 3, 4 Before Warning
– Export/Exchange (Pop. Chambers) – Spectra SKLM 3, 5, 7 ƒ
Maximum Tape Loads Before
Recycle Encrypted Media – KMIP 3, 6, 7 Warning
ƒ
Cleaning Partition S: Fibre Channel Loop IDs (Drives) ƒ
Enable Media Auto Discovery
– Import S: Partition Users ƒ
Minimum Idle Minutes Before
– Export/Exchange S: Robotic Path Visibility Auto Discovery
– Export/Exchange Expired ƒ
Convert to Broadcast Hours
3 S: Exporting F-QIP Configuration (RIM)
ƒ
Rotation Manager ƒ
Override Broadcast Bit Rate
ƒAddress
ƒ
Advanced ƒ
ƒFibre Mode PostScan Blackout Periods
– Advanced Import/Export
C/S: Save Library Configuration
Go to General (Cont.) C/S: Save Partition

Go to Configuration (Cont.)

Maintenance Maintenance (Cont.) Security Status Bar

Package Update AutoSupport Switch User Refresh

A, S A, S O, A, S

ƒ
Library Controller: Login HHM Notification (when maintenance
Begin Library Update Send Log Set
threshold is reached)
Begin Drive Update ƒ
Select Profile to Send Log Set
Edit Users ƒSend AutoSupport Ticket > Send Log Set
ƒ
Select Ticket Type A, S
Manage Packages System Status
ƒ
Profile Summary Library Users
Manage Package Servers ƒ
Confirm and Submit Ticket ƒUsers ƒ
System Messages
Auto Download Options Manage Profiles – Delete Remote Support 2
ƒ
New Profile – Edit
BlueScale Vision Camera (when enabled)
Tools A, S
ƒ
Remove ƒAdd/Update User
– User Auto Download Notification (when a new
Utilities ƒ
Edit Profile
– Password package is downloaded)
ƒBasic Utilities List Configure Alarms Last Refresh (time and date)
– User Type
ƒUpload Backup Configuration
Log Forwarding BlueScale Software Version
ƒAdvanced Utilities List 9 Encryption S 1
– Save MLM Database Network Settings Icon
– Restore MLM Database Media Lifecycle Management A, S Encryption User Login –OR–
– HHM: View Data Media Lifecycle Management Tools Encryption Configuration Library Name 2
EtherLib Status ƒ
Discover Media ƒConfigure
– Select Partition – Single User Mode Notes:
Traces – Multi-User Mode (BlueScale 1) Available at the library’s front panel touch screen only.
ƒ
Stop Discovery (only visible when
ƒ
System Traces Encryption Pro only) 3
Discover Media is running) 2) Available through remote access only.
ƒ
Component Traces ƒSpectra SKLM 3, 5, 7
ƒ
Pause PostScan (only visible when 3) Only available with a purchased key.
PostScan is running) ƒ KMIP 3, 6, 7
Diagnostics A, S
ƒCheck Key Files 4) Available for LTO-4 or later generation drives.
ƒ
Manual PostScan
Motion Diagnostics ƒ
Delete MLM Records ƒImport Key 5) Available for LTO-5 or later generation drives.
ƒ
Motion Diagnostics List ƒ
Download MLM Database 2 ƒAdd Key 6) Available for LTO-6 or later generation drives.
ƒ
Previous Results ƒ
Download DLM Database 2 – Moniker 7) Available for TS11xx technology drives.
ƒExport Key
8) Requires Fibre Channel drives.
Go to Maintenance (Cont.) ƒDelete Key
9) Do not use any Advanced Utilities except those listed here unless instructed
to do so by SpectraGuard® Support.

Letters indicate the features available to each user type:

S) Superuser
A) Administrator
O) Operator

Note: The BlueScale user interface changes as features are

added or modified. Check
Spectra T950 Library BlueScale Toolbar Option Map for the latest version of this option map.

Figure 44 Map of the options available from the BlueScale Toolbar.

90
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Overview of the BlueScale User Interface

Status Bar
The status bar is located along the bottom edge of most screens. The
information and icons displayed on the status bar depend on the status of
the system and whether you are using the operator panel or the BlueScale
web interface.
Note: See Additional Status Bar Icons on page 92 for additional icons
that can also appear on the status bar.

System
Status

Refresh Last refresh time BlueScale version Network Settings icon

display and date (or library name)
Figure 45 The BlueScale status bar.

Refresh Display Button Refreshes (updates) the information currently

displayed on the user interface. If you set a long interval for the refresh rate
or disabled the automatic screen refresh by setting the refresh rate to zero
(see Refresh Rate on page 115), you can refresh the screen manually by
clicking the refresh display button.

Important Do not use keyboard commands (for example, F5) to refresh the browser when
connected to the BlueScale web interface. These keyboard commands can cause
unpredictable results.

System Status Icon Indicates the status of library components. The

BlueScale user interface uses the following icons to indicate the status of
library components. Click the status icon to view system messages (see
Check and Respond to Messages on page 168 for information about these
messages).
Note: These status icons also display next to the major system
components shown on the General Status screen (see Figure 43
on page 86).

Icon Description Meaning

A check mark () in a All system components are functioning correctly.
green circle

An i in a blue circle An informational message about a system component is available.

Check messages to determine the component.

An exclamation point A system component requires attention. Check messages to

( ! ) in a yellow triangle determine the component.

An X in a red circle A system component experienced an error condition. Check

messages to determine the component.

91
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Overview of the BlueScale User Interface

Last Refresh Time and Date Shows when the displayed information was
last updated. The library refreshes different screens at different rates,
depending on the type of data displayed. The screen refresh rate can be set
for a specific interval or disabled (see Refresh Rate on page 115). The
displayed information can be refreshed manually by clicking the refresh
display button.
BlueScale Version Shows the BlueScale software version currently being
used by the library.
Network Settings Icon or Library Name Shows the Network Settings icon
or name for the library. If you are managing the library from the touch
screen operator panel, the Network Settings icon displays on the status bar.
Click the icon to go to the Network Settings screen. If you are using the
BlueScale web interface, the library’s name is shown instead of the
Network Settings icon.
Note: If you are using the BlueScale web interface and you did not set
the library name, the right-hand side of the status bar is blank.
If you need to view or set the library’s IP address or name, see Configure
Network Settings on page 121 and Library Name on page 115, respectively.

Additional Status Bar Icons

The status bar can also include the following additional icons.
Auto Download Icon If one or more package servers are configured to
automatically download firmware packages (see Configure a Package
Server on page 144) and a new package was downloaded, the Auto
Download icon (a wrench in a yellow circle) displays to indicate that an
update package is ready for installation. Click the icon to navigate to the
Package Update screen. See Updating the BlueScale Software and Library
Firmware on page 446 and Updating Drive Firmware on page 479 for
information on installing the update.

Auto Download icon

Figure 46 The Auto Download icon in the BlueScale status bar.

92
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Overview of the BlueScale User Interface

Remote Support Icon Provides you with online access to the support
section of the Spectra Logic website where you can search the Knowledge
Base, access the Product Documentation, and download BlueScale update
packages and drivers. If you need additional assistance, contact Spectra
Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

Remote support
Figure 47 The Remote Support icon in the BlueScale status bar.

The remote support icon is also used to activate secure remote access
capabilities using Cisco WebEx technology. This remote access helps
Spectra Logic Technical Support provide faster resolution of support calls.
This capability is only enabled on an as-needed basis during a support call.
Notes:  The remote support icon is only visible when you are
accessing the library through the BlueScale web interface.
 When Spectra Logic Technical Support needs to launch a
WebEx session to access your library, they send you a link via
email.
HHM Icon When the library or one of its components reaches its
maintenance threshold, the Hardware Health Monitor (HHM) notification
icon appears on the status bar. As with the system message icon, the color
of the icon indicates the urgency of the notification.
You can click the icon to view information about the notification and send
a Hardware Health Monitor ticket to a contact person within your
organization or to Spectra Logic Technical Support. They can then review
the logs and determine if any maintenance tasks are needed (see Using
BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring on page 372).
Note: The HHM icon only displays if an HHM threshold is reached. After
any required tasks are complete, the threshold can be reset. The
HHM icon disappears until the next threshold is reached.

HHM icon
Figure 48 The HHM icon in the BlueScale status bar.

93
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Overview of the BlueScale User Interface

Camera Icon If one or more BlueScale Vision cameras are installed in the
library and their IP addresses are entered into the BlueScale user interface (see
BlueScale Vision IP Address on page 119), up to three camera icons appear
on the status bar. Click the icon to launch the web-based network camera
viewer and use it to observe the interior of the library over an Ethernet
network or the Internet (see Use the BlueScale Vision Camera on page 179).
Note: The Camera icon only appears on the BlueScale web interface; it
does not appear on the front panel touch screen interface.

Camera icon
Figure 49 The Camera icon in the BlueScale status bar.

Progress Bar
When the library is busy processing a command, a horizontal progress bar
displays above the status bar. Do not use the touch screen (or the BlueScale
web interface) until the progress bar disappears.

Library Management
The library management features in the BlueScale user interface provide
maximum configurability and ease of use for the T950 library. To take full
advantage of the library’s versatility, read the following overview of the
library’s management features.

Automatic Email Alerts

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) lets users receive library status
information via email. When the library generates messages through the
library controller, it automatically sends email notifications to users who
are configured to receive them. Information included in the notification
consists of the message number, severity, details, remedy, and the time it
was generated. Message types are Information, Error, Warning, and Fatal
(see System Messages on page 167). You can select the types of messages
each library user receives (see Configure Mail Users on page 124).

AutoSupport
AutoSupport guides you through the process of sending email regarding
library problems — along with library logs and configuration
information — directly to internal support personnel or Spectra Logic
Technical Support. See Chapter 11 – Configuring and Using AutoSupport,
beginning on page 345 for detailed information.

94
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Using the BlueScale User Interface

Online Access to Spectra Logic

When the library is set up with access to the Internet, the bottom portion of
the user interface web page displays technical tips, allows one-click access to
Spectra Logic’s Knowledge Base, streamlines the online ordering of media
and capacity, and more. Online access can be enabled or disabled during any
browser session (see Disable Online Access to Spectra Logic on page 116).
The setting of online access to Spectra Logic does not affect AutoSupport.

User Security
Library users are assigned to one of three groups, each with its own set of
pre-defined library privileges (also known as permissions). These privileges
determine the type of operations a user can perform on the library and are
the primary means for configuring library security. See Configuring Library
Users on page 104 for detailed information about users.
Note: An additional, separate password must be entered to access the
encryption features. See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User
Guide for information about the encryption user.

USING THE BLUESCALE USER INTERFACE

The library’s BlueScale user interface lets you set configuration options,
view library and drive information and metrics, manage media, and
monitor library operations.
Note: Unless otherwise specified, references to the user interface screens
apply to both the touch screen on the library operator panel and
the screens presented through the BlueScale web interface.

Log Into the User Interface

Before you can manage or configure the library, you must log into the
BlueScale user interface.
After the library completes its power-on sequence, the Library Initialization
screen displays. This screen lists the required initialization steps and current
status of the library’s major components (Robotics, RCM, and LCM). Text
boxes provide descriptions about the currently active tasks.
Notes:  If your library has a static IP address, you can access the
library using the BlueScale web interface (RLC) as soon as the
Library Initialization screen displays

95
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Using the BlueScale User Interface

 If the library cannot complete the initialization process, it

generates system messages and enters maintenance mode.
Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for assistance.

Active task

Completed task

Task description(s)

Task not started

Figure 50 The Library Initialization screen.

After the library completes initialization of configured components, the

Library Controller: Login screen displays on the library operator panel.
This Login screen also displays when you access the library remotely using
the BlueScale web interface (RLC), as well as when you switch users or
when the library automatically logs out the current user if auto-logout is
enabled.

Figure 51 The Library Controller: Login screen.

96
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Using the BlueScale User Interface

If there is no interaction with the operator panel within 30 seconds after the
Login screen displays, the Login screen is replaced by the pre-login
General Status screen. This General Status screen provides at-a-glance
status for the library and its components without requiring you to log into
the library. You can view the status of the entire library or a specific
partition.
Note: The pre-login General Status screen does not display when you
access the library remotely through the BlueScale web interface.

Touch to display the Library

Controller: Login screen

Figure 52 Log in from the pre-login General Status screen.

Use the following steps to log into the library:

1. Connect to the library. The method depends on how you are accessing
the library.
Using the front panel touch screen or a direct connection to the LCM
 If the Login screen is displayed, skip to Step 2 on page 99.
 If the pre-login General Status screen is displayed, touch or click
select here to login at the bottom of the screen to display the Login
screen and then skip to Step 2 on page 99.
Note: If the soft keyboard is open and covering the bottom of the pre-
login General Status screen, touch the keyboard icon to close the
soft keyboard or use the scroll bar on the right side of the screen
to scroll down to the bottom of the screen.

97
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Using the BlueScale User Interface

Connecting to the library remotely using the BlueScale web interface

Enter the IP address of the T950 library in the address bar of a web
browser on a computer on an active network that has access to the
library. The steps you use depend on whether SSL is enabled or not.

If SSL is... Use the following steps...

Not enabled (the 1. Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address configured for the library in the format:
default setting) http(s)://[library IP address] (see Configure Network Settings on
page 121).
2. The BlueScale Login screen displays (see Figure 51 on page 96). Proceed to
Step 2 on page 99.
Enabled 1. Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address configured for the library in the format
https://[library IP address] See Enable SSL on page 117 for
information about enabling SSL.
Important: When using SSL, you must prefix the IP address with https://
instead of just entering the IP address.
2. If you receive a warning about the website’s security certificate, choose to
ignore or resolve the warning.
Notes:
 The security warning only appears if you did not resolve the security
certificate warning, either by storing a valid security certificate on the library
(see Install a Security Certificate and Authentication Key on page 129) or by
creating a security exception for the library on the browser (method depends
on the browser you are using).
 If you do not resolve the warning, you receive the warning about the security
certificate each time you access the BlueScale web interface.
3. The BlueScale Login screen displays (see Figure 51 on page 96). Proceed to
Step 2 on page 99.

98
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Using the BlueScale User Interface

2. Select the User text box. A cursor appears in the box.

Note: When using the touch screen on the library operator panel,
touch the keyboard icon on the Login screen to activate the soft
keyboard on the library’s touch screen. Use the stylus or your
finger to select fields and to type information using the soft
keyboard.
Touching the keyboard icon again closes the soft keyboard.

Touch the keyboard icon

to open the soft keyboard.

Touch the icon with the stylus to

switch between letters and numbers.
Figure 53 Log into the library using the Library Controller: Login screen.

3. Type your user name (su is the default user name for a superuser).
See Understanding User Groups and Security on page 104 for
information about the three types of user groups and the options and
controls accessible to each user group.
4. Type your password in the Password text box. If you log in as one of the
default users, there is no password (unless you configured one).
Note: By default, passwords are not required to log into the library. If
you want to password-protect access to the library, set
passwords for each user as described in Configuring Library
Users on page 104.

99
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Using the BlueScale User Interface

5. Click Login. The library’s General Status screen displays.

Note: If you just powered-on or reset the library, there may be a delay
after you click Login while the library completes its initialization.
When the initialization is complete, the General Status screen
displays.

Figure 54 The BlueScale user interface General Status screen.

6. If you want to enable encryption or configure encryption settings or

keys, select Security > Encryption to log into the Encryption feature
(see the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for detailed
instructions).

Log Off or Switch Users

1. If a screen other than the Login screen is displayed, select the Security
toolbar to display the Security options.

Security toolbar

Switch User

Figure 55 The Security toolbar.

2. Select Switch User to log out the currently logged in user and redisplay
the Login screen.
3. If desired, log in again using the same or a different user name and
password.

100
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Using the BlueScale User Interface

Enter Information on Screens

Entering information on a user interface screen requires using one of the
following methods.

BlueScale Web Interface

The BlueScale web interface lets you use your computer keyboard to enter
information into the user interface and a mouse to navigate through the
user interface screens (see BlueScale Web Interface on page 85). Using the
web interface is the most convenient way to enter large amounts of
information when you are configuring the library.

Important When accessing the library remotely through a web browser, do not use the Enter
key on your keyboard when making selections in the BlueScale user interface.
Various web browsers handle the Enter key differently, causing inconsistent
behavior in the BlueScale interface.
Always use your mouse to make selections and click the buttons in BlueScale
screens instead of using your keyboard.

Note: Functions that require physical interaction with the library (for
example, importing or exporting magazines) are not available
when using the BlueScale web interface.

Soft Keyboard
When using the touch screen on the operator
panel, select the keyboard icon in the lower right
corner of any screen to activate the on-screen keyboard. When the
keyboard is extended, an icon in the lower right corner lets you select
between alphabetic or numeric characters. Use a stylus or your finger to
select fields and enter alphanumeric information using the keyboard.
Touching the keyboard icon again closes the keyboard.
Note: The soft keyboard can also be used to access several
troubleshooting features provided through the BlueScale
software (see Troubleshooting BlueScale User Interface Issues on
page 364).

101
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 3 — Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Using the BlueScale User Interface

External Keyboard and Mouse

If you cannot use the BlueScale web interface, using an external keyboard
and mouse connected to the library is useful when you need to enter large
amounts of information. The user interface options available when you use
an external keyboard and mouse are the same as when you use the library’s
touch screen operator panel.

Important Not all characters on a USA-type keyboard are supported in the BlueScale user
interface. If a character does not appear on the soft keyboard, then its use is not
supported.
When accessing the library using an external keyboard connected to the library, do
not use the Enter key on your keyboard when making selections in the BlueScale
user interface. Doing so may cause inconsistent behavior in the BlueScale interface.

 If your library uses the Spectra PC module, you can connect a USA-type
PS/2 keyboard and mouse to the respective connectors on the LCM (see
Figure 16 on page 45).
 If your library uses the Spectra LS module, you can connect a USA-type
USB keyboard and USB mouse to the LCM (see Figure 17 on page 45).
Note: If using a non-USA type keyboard, you need to find the
equivalent for some characters like the back slash or forward
slash.
 When using a keyboard and mouse connected directly to the library, it
may also be useful to connect a monitor to the monitor port on the
LCM. The monitor displays the same information as the touch screen.

Feedback Required Screens

When the BlueScale software needs you to make a selection or perform an
action it displays a Feedback Required screen. If you do not respond to the
Feedback Required screen within 10 minutes, the request times out and the
action fails.

102
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 CHAPTER 4
Configuring the Library
When it was installed, your library was configured according to your
initial requirements. This chapter describes the procedures for configuring
the library’s system settings, including the users, the network connections,
and optional features.
Note: For instructions on how to operate the library, see:
 Chapter 5 – Operating the Library, beginning on page 162
 Chapter 6 – Configuring and Managing Partitions, beginning
on page 186
 Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle
Management, beginning on page 289
 Chapter 10 – Using Drive Lifecycle Management, beginning
on page 336
 Chapter 11 – Configuring and Using AutoSupport,
beginning on page 345

Topic
Configuring Library Users page 104
Understanding User Groups and Security page 104
Add a New User page 105
Modify an Existing User page 107
Delete an Existing User page 108
Accessing the System Setup Screen page 108
Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and page 110
Upgrades
Enter Activation Keys page 112
Add Options page 113
Configuring the Global System Settings page 114
Configure the System Settings page 115
Configure Network Settings page 121
Configure Mail Users page 124
Enable Email for the Auto Configuration Save File page 126
Set the Date and Time page 127

103
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Library Users

Topic
Configuring Optional Library Settings page 129
Install a Security Certificate and Authentication page 129
Key
Configure Routine Maintenance page 132
Enable and Configure SNMP page 133
Configure Controller Failover page 136
Configure Barcode Reporting page 139
Configure a Package Server page 144
Configure Rotation Manager page 148
Backing Up the Library Configuration page 150
Use Automatic Backup of the Library page 151
Configuration
Use Manual Backup of the Library Configuration page 151
Setting the Camera IP Address page 155

CONFIGURING LIBRARY USERS

Overview Each library user is assigned to one of three user groups, each
with its own set of pre-defined library privileges (also known as
permissions).
User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser privileges can
add, modify, or delete users.

Understanding User Groups and Security

Before you begin, read this section to understand the three types of user
groups and what types of privileges each has.
Note: You must enter an additional password to access the encryption
features. See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for
information about the encryption user.

104
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Library Users

The following table describes the three user groups and the privileges of
each. By default, passwords are not required for any of the three default
users.
User Group Type Description Default User
Name
Superuser Controls all aspects of the library’s configuration and su
operation, including defining other library users and
assigning them to a user-privilege group.
Notes:
 The library requires a minimum of one superuser. You
cannot delete the last member of the Superuser group.
 Only a user with superuser privileges can add, modify,
or delete users.
 Only a user with superuser privileges can access and
configure encryption features.
 Only a user with superuser privileges can use the Soft
Power feature.
 Only a user with superuser privileges can enable or
disable the Enable Automatic Power-Up After Power
Failure feature.
Administrator Configures and uses the library. With the exception of administrator
creating or modifying library users, accessing the
encryption features, enabling Automatic Power-Up After
Power Failure, and using the Soft Power feature, users in
the Administrator group have the same privileges as users
in the Superuser group.
Operator Performs day-to-day operations. Users assigned to the operator
Operator group can move media, and import and export
media using EE slots, but cannot access the more sensitive
library operations such as configuration, diagnostics, and
security.

Add a New User

Use the following steps to add a new library user and assign that user to a
user group.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser privileges (see Log Into the
User Interface on page 95).

105
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Library Users

2. From the toolbar menu, select Security > Edit Users. The Library Users
screen displays.

Figure 56 The Library Users screen.

3. Complete the information in the Add/Update User panel.

Note: User names and passwords can contain any combination of the
numbers 0-9, lower and upper case alphabetic characters (a-z and
A-Z), and the at symbol (@), dash (-), underscore (_), period (.),
forward slash (/), and space characters. There is no limit to the
length but Spectra Logic recommends lengths of less than 2048
characters.

For this field... Enter...

User The username for the user.

106
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Library Users

For this field... Enter...

Password A password for the user and then retype the password to confirm. If Complex
Retype Password Passwords is enabled (see Enable Complex Passwords on page 121), the
password must meet the following requirements:
 Minimum length 12 characters
 Minimum of two characters of each: lower case letters, upper case letters,
numbers, and special characters
Note: Valid special characters: @`~!#$%^&*()-_=+[]{}\|;:'",.<>/?
 Maximum of three in a row of any character
 Cannot reuse any of the previous 24 passwords
 Must be changed every 90 days
 Cannot be changed within two days of a previous password change
Notes:
 For security, the text in the Password and Retype Password fields is shown as
asterisks (*).
 Though highly recommended, unless Complex Passwords is enabled,
passwords are not required for any of the three user types.
User Type Select the group to which the user belongs.
Note: See Understanding User Groups and Security on page 104 for
descriptions of the user groups and privileges associated with each.

4. Click Save. The new user name and group assignment is added to the
list of users.
5. Repeat Step 3 and Step 4 for each additional library user.

Modify an Existing User

Important If you change the passwords for the default users, make sure that you keep a record
of the new passwords. The passwords cannot be reset if you forget them.

Use the following steps to change settings for an existing user.

1. Log into the library as a user with superuser privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Security > Edit Users. The Library Users
screen displays (see Figure 56 on page 106), showing a list of library
user names.
3. Find the user’s name, then click Edit next to the name.
4. Change the user’s name, password, group, or any combination of these
as required.
5. Click Save to save your changes.

107
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Accessing the System Setup Screen

Delete an Existing User

Use the following steps to delete an existing user.

Important If you delete the default users, make sure that you keep a record of at least one
superuser name and password.

Note: The library requires there to be a minimum of one user assigned

to the superuser group. You cannot delete the last member of the
superuser group.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Security > Edit Users. The Library Users
screen displays (see Figure 56 on page 106), showing a list of library
user names.
3. Locate the name of the user to delete, then click Delete next to that
user’s name.
When the screen refreshes, the user list no longer includes the user
name you just deleted.

ACCESSING THE SYSTEM SETUP SCREEN

Overview All of the settings for the library’s general configuration options
are accessed through the System Setup screen. The screen is divided into
two panes. You may need to use the scroll bar to see the entire screen.
 Option Enablement pane — Used for entering the activation keys
for any purchased options, including BlueScale Software Support,
licensed capacity (chambers), and Shared Library Services (SLS).
This panel also lists all of the currently licensed options.

Figure 57 The System Setup Option Enablement pane.

108
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Accessing the System Setup Screen

 Other Settings pane — Used for configuring the operational

parameters for the library.
Note: The Other Settings pane can have up to three BlueScale
Vision IP address fields depending on the size of the
library.

Figure 58 The Other Settings pane of the System Setup screen.

User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator

privileges can access the System Setup screens to enable new options or
change system configuration settings. See Configuring Library Users on
page 104 for information about the three types of user groups and what
types of privileges each has.
Access the System Setup Screen Use the following steps to access the
System Setup screen when you want to enable a new option or change a
configuration setting.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges
(see Log Into the User Interface on page 95).
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > System. The System
Setup screen displays (Figure 57 and Figure 58 show the two panes of
the screen).

109
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades

ENABLING BLUESCALE SOFTWARE SUPPORT, OPTIONS, AND

UPGRADES
Overview Activation keys are required to enable the BlueScale Software
Support license and any library options and upgrades you purchase. These
activation keys are tied to the library serial number (the hardware ID). The
library ships with paper copies of the activation keys for the initial
BlueScale Software Support license, the initial licensed slot capacity, and
any additional options you purchased with the library. You must enter the
activation key for the BlueScale Software Support license and each option
into the library to make the option available for use.
Requirements for updating the library BlueScale software A valid
BlueScale Software Support key is required in order to update the library’s
BlueScale software and component firmware. When you renew or extend
your service contract, you receive an activation key that must be entered
into the System Configuration screen to enable continued BlueScale
updates.

Important Your initial library purchase includes a BlueScale Software Support key that is valid
for the duration of the warranty period, or for the duration of any uplifted or
extended service contract you purchased with the library, whichever is longer.
When you renew or extend your service contract, you must generate a new
BlueScale Software Support key and enter the new key into the library to allow
continued access to BlueScale upgrades (see Obtain the Option Activation Key on
page 114). If you have questions about your service agreement, contact Spectra
Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

110
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades

Standard and upgraded options for the library The default library
configuration includes a basic set of options that lets you start using the
library immediately. These options do not require activation keys to enable
them. When you purchase upgraded options or additional Capacity on
Demand (CoD), you receive an activation key that must be entered into the
System Configuration screen to enable the options. See Library Support
and Upgrades on page 529 for information about the available upgrade
options.

Option The default library configuration Upgrade if you need...

includes...
Partitions Support for using a single storage Additional storage partitions. Purchase a
partition. Shared Library Services (SLS) activation
key. See Library Partitions on page 59 for
information about how SLS provides
partitioning in the library.
Encryption BlueScale Encryption Standard More advanced encryption management
Edition. capabilities. Purchase either BlueScale
Encryption Professional Edition, the
Spectra SKLM encryption key
management system, or the KMIP
encryption key management system
using HPE ESKM.
See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption
User Guide for information.
CoD Capacity The licenced number of chambers Additional capacity. Purchase a CoD
you purchased with the library. activation key for the additional
Notes: chambers you need. See Library Support
and Upgrades on page 529 for more
 Each chamber accommodates
one TeraPack magazine. Each information.
magazine contains ten slots for Notes:
LTO media or nine slots for  You must create or modify a partition
TS11xx technology media. to make use of the added capacity. See
 The licensed chambers must be Chapter 6 – Configuring and Managing
enabled by entering the Partitions, beginning on page 186 for
activation key into the System instructions.
Configuration screen (see Enter  If the CoD capacity you purchase
Activation Keys on page 112). exceeds the number of chambers that
are present in the library, the extra
licensed chambers cannot be used
unless you also purchase either a TBA
or shelves (depending on the age of
your library) to replace a DBA in an
existing frame or an expansion frame.

111
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades

Enter Activation Keys

Notes:  Paper copies of the activation keys for the initial BlueScale
Software Support license and the options you purchased
with the library are included with the library when shipped.
 The activation keys for the initial BlueScale Software Support
license and the options you purchased with the library are
entered during the installation of the library. Compare the
paper copies of the activation keys with information in the
Option Enablement pane of the System Setup screen and
enter any missing keys as described in this section.
 If you purchase options after the initial library installation,
you are provided an activation key for each option as
described in Add Options on page 113.
 If you receive activation keys by email, it is helpful to use the
BlueScale web interface (RLC) to access the System Setup
screen. You can then cut and paste keys from the email
containing the keys into the System Setup screen instead of
typing them.
Use the following steps to enter a new BlueScale Software Support key or
the activation key for a new option into the library.
1. Have on hand the activation key for the BlueScale Software Support
license or other option (see Obtain the Option Activation Key on
page 114).
2. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen
on page 108).
The Option Enablement pane at the top of the screen lists the currently
licensed options.

Enter a new activation key

Figure 59 Enter the keys in the Option Enablement pane of

the System Setup screen.

3. Enter the activation key for the option you want to enable in the Key
field.
Note: The activation keys are not case-sensitive.

112
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades

4. Click Save. The System Setup screen refreshes and displays the new
activation key and its description in the list of keys. The option is
available for immediate use.
Note: Keep a record of all activation keys listed on the Option
Enablement pane of the System Setup screen. You need to
re-enter them if the library is reset to factory defaults.

Add Options
This section describes how to determine the Hardware ID and obtain
activation keys for new options after the initial installation. See Renewing
the BlueScale Software Support Key on page 444 if you need to renew or
extend your service contract, which includes the BlueScale Software
Support key.

Important The BlueScale Software Support key and all option activation keys are tied to the
library serial number. If you have multiple libraries, you need separate activation
keys for each library.

Determine the Library Serial Number

The library serial number (Hardware ID) is required for renewing or
extending your service contract, which includes the BlueScale Software
Support key, and for purchasing additional Capacity on Demand (CoD) or
other upgrade options.
Use the following steps to determine your library’s serial number.
1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen
on page 108).
2. Make a note of the library’s serial number (Hardware ID), which is
needed to generate the activation keys.

The library’s hardware ID

Figure 60 Locate the library’s serial number (Hardware ID).

113
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring the Global System Settings

Obtain the Option Activation Key

1. Contact your Spectra Logic sales representative to order the desired
options (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
2. When your order is processed, the Spectra Logic Customer Care team
contacts you with instructions for generating the activation key for each
option.
3. Enter each activation key into the Option Enablement pane of the
System Setup screen (see Enter Activation Keys on page 112).

CONFIGURING THE GLOBAL SYSTEM SETTINGS

This section describes how to modify the library’s general configuration
settings. To change the current value for any of these settings, access the
System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen on page 108),
then scroll down to the Other Settings pane. The following sections
describe using this screen to configure the library.

Figure 61 The Other Settings pane of the System Setup screen.

114
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring the Global System Settings

Configure the System Settings

The following table lists the system settings that are configured through
the Other Settings pane of the System Setup screen, describes how to
change each setting, and provides the default value for each setting, if
applicable.

Setting Description Default

Library Name Set the name used to identify the library in messages it blank
sends to mail recipients. (no name set)
1. Type a name for the library. Use a name that helps
identify the library to a remote user.
2. Click Save.
Web Server Port Set the port number for the dedicated Ethernet port used to 80
access the library’s embedded web server.
1. Enter a port number from 0 to 65,535.
The default port number is 80, which is appropriate for
most installations and is strongly recommended. If you
use a port number other than 80, the port number must
be explicitly entered into the web browser when
accessing the library remotely.
Important: Do not set the web server port to 443. Using
this port number causes the front panel display to
become unstable.
2. Click Save.
3. Reset the library to enable the new web port number
setting (see Resetting the Library on page 381).
Refresh Rate Set how frequently the information on the BlueScale user 60 seconds
interface screens is refreshed.
1. Use the Refresh drop-down list to select a scheduled
interval time.
2. Click Save.
Notes:
 You can manually refresh the displayed information at
any time by clicking the refresh display button located at
the left end of the status bar (see Status Bar on page 91).
 If you want to disable automatic refreshing of the display,
set the refresh rate to off.
 If you configure a setting other than the default refresh
rate or disable automatic refreshing, you must configure
the refresh rate every time you log into the library.

115
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring the Global System Settings

Setting Description Default

Auto Logout Set how long the current connection to the BlueScale user 0 (zero) minutes
Timeout interface is idle before the current user is logged out. (Disabled)
1. Enter the number of minutes for the timeout.
2. Click Save.
Note: Setting the timeout value to zero disables auto
logout.
Disable Online Disable or enable displaying links to the Spectra Logic Cleared
Access to Spectra website at the bottom of each BlueScale screen when the (Enabled)
Logic library has a connection to the Internet.
1. Select the Disable Online Access to Spectra Logic check box
to disable the option (or clear the check box to enable it).
2. Click Save.
Enable Drive Enable or disable the option to monitor the performance of Cleared
Performance the drives in the library (see View Drive Performance (Disabled)
Monitoring Statistics on page 171).
CAUTION: Make sure that the drives do not contain
media before you enable or disable Drive Performance
Monitoring. If you enable or disable this option when a
drive contains a cartridge, the drive is reported as empty
and backups may fail.
1. Select the Enable Drive Performance Monitoring check box
to enable the option (or clear the check box to disable it).
2. Click Save.
Enable Power Enable or disable the option to monitor the amount of Selected
Consumption power your library is using through the Power (Enabled)
Monitoring Consumption Monitor (EnergyAudit) feature (see View
Power Consumption Statistics on page 173).
1. Select the Enable Power Consumption Monitoring check box
to enable the option (or clear the check box to disable it).
2. Click Save.
Note: When you disable and then re-enable power
consumption monitoring, the library does not begin
capturing data again until you power cycle the library.
Enable Automatic Enable or disable the option to automatically power on the Cleared
Power-Up After library after a power failure (see Use the Automatic Power- (Disabled)
Power Failure Up After Power Failure Feature on page 164).
1. Select the Enable Automatic Power-Up After Power Failure
check box to enable the option (or clear the check box to
disable it).
2. Click Save.
Note: The Enable Automatic Power-Up After Power Failure
feature can only be enabled or disabled by a superuser.

116
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring the Global System Settings

Setting Description Default

Enable SSL Enable or disable Secure Socket Layer (SSL) access to the Cleared
BlueScale web interface. (Disabled)
Important: Enabling SSL configures the BlueScale web
interface to use a secure Internet connection. You must
prefix the IP address with https:// instead of just entering
the IP address when accessing the BlueScale web
interface.
Note: Beginning with BlueScale 12.7.06.01, the library uses
TLS 1.2.
1. Select the Enable SSL check box to enable the option (or
clear the check box to disable it).
2. Click Save.
3. Click OK in response to the notification about resetting
the web server.
4. Wait for the web server to reset (approximately 2 to
3 minutes), and then log back into the library.
5. If desired, Install a Security Certificate and
Authentication Key as described on page page 129.
Enable SNMP Enable or disable the SNMP agent and configure SNMP Cleared
Agent settings. (Disabled)
1. Select the Enable SNMP check box to enable the option (or
SNMP Settings clear the check box to disable it).
2. Click Save.
3. If you enabled SNMP, click SNMP Settings to configure
the SNMP options. See Enable and Configure SNMP on
page 133 for detailed information and instructions.
4. Click Save to save the SNMP settings and return to the
System Setup screen.
Notes:
 The option to edit the SNMP Settings is only present after
you select Enable SNMP Agent and click Save.
 Spectra Logic libraries use SNMPv2c.
Enable Soft Power Enable or disable the Soft Power feature. See Use the Soft Cleared
Power Feature on page 165 for information about the Soft (Disabled)
Power feature and instructions for using it.
1. Select the Enable Soft Power check box to enable the
option (or clear the check box to disable it).
2. Click Save.
Note: The Soft Power feature can only be enabled or
disabled by a superuser.

117
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring the Global System Settings

Setting Description Default

Syslog Server IP Enter the IP address of an external Syslog server used to Cleared
Address collect the system messages posted by the library. See Use (Disabled)
Syslog on page 169 for information about what the Syslog
messages contain.
1. Enter a valid IPv4 or IPv6 address for the Syslog server.
Do not include http: or https:. To disable a server do one
of the following:
 For BlueScale12.7.02 or earlier, set the IP address to
0.0.0.0
 For BlueScale12.7.06 or later, clear the IP address.
2. Click Save.
The library immediately begins forwarding all system
messages to the server at the specified IP address.

118
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring the Global System Settings

Setting Description Default

BlueScale Vision IP Enable the BlueScale Vision camera icon for the camera at Cleared
Address the specified IP address. If you have not yet set the IP (Disabled)
(up to three address for the camera, see Setting the Camera IP Address
BlueScale Vision IP on page 155. For each IP address you enter, up to three, a
address fields camera icon displays on the status bar (see Figure 49 on
display depending page 94). See Use the BlueScale Vision Camera on page 179
on the size of the to learn about using the camera.
library) 1. Enter a valid IPv4 or IPv6 address for the camera. Do not
include http: or https:. To remove a link to a camera do
one of the following:
 For BlueScale12.7.02 or earlier, set the IP address to
0.0.0.0
 For BlueScale12.7.06 or later, clear the IP address.
1.
2. Click Save.
3. If desired, repeat these steps to enable up to two
additional camera icons.
Notes:
 It is not necessary to enable the camera icon to connect to
the BlueScale Vision viewer for a camera. After connecting
an Ethernet cable to the BlueScale Vision camera connector
on the back of the library (see Figure 83 on page 155),
enter the camera’s IP address in your web browser.
 If your network uses DHCP or if you do not know the
current fixed IP address for the camera, see Discovering
and Setting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address on
page 386 for information about how to determine what
the current IP address is and make any desired changes.
 To remove a camera icon from the Status bar, clear the IP
address.
 Read the BlueScale Vision Camera User Guide for detailed
information about configuring and using the white
camera and Vivotek FD8361 Fixed Dome Network Camera
User’s Manual for information about configuring and
using the black camera.
 The order of the BlueScale Vision IP Address fields in the
System Setup screen does not necessarily have any
relationship to the position of the cameras in the library.
Note: The software included with the black camera
requires ActiveX® to view the streaming video and
controls. You must use Internet Explorer or see Streaming
video and camera controls do not work for the library
camera on page 372 for alternate solutions.

119
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring the Global System Settings

Setting Description Default

Network Settings Set the IP addressing for the LCM Ethernet port. You can Dynamic
also configure up to two DNS IP addresses for use with the
NTP service. See Configure Network Settings on page 121
for detailed information and instructions.
Note: Depending on how you are accessing the library, the
status bar shows:
 The Network Settings icon when you access the library
using the touch screen or a direct connection to the LCM.
 The library’s name, if set, when you are accessing the
library using the BlueScale web interface through a web
browser connection.
Mail User Configure recipients for emails containing system autosupport@
messages, traces, and diagnostic results generated by the spectralogic.com
library. See Configure Mail Users on page 124 for detailed
information and instructions.
Auto Configuration Enable or disable sending the Auto Configuration Save file Cleared
Save to a previously configured mail recipient. See Enable Email (Disabled)
for the Auto Configuration Save File on page 126 for
detailed information about this option and instructions for
configuring it.
Note: The Auto Configuration Save file is always
generated, regardless of the setting for this option. See Use
Automatic Backup of the Library Configuration on
page 151 for information about the Auto Configuration
Save file.
Routine Enable or disable the routine maintenance option for the Cleared
Maintenance LCM operating system. See Configure Routine (Disabled)
Maintenance on page 132 for detailed information about
this option and instructions for configuring it.
Date And Time See Set the Date and Time on page 127 for detailed Date and time
information and instructions for setting the date and time. for the Mountain
time zone (US
and Canada)

120
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring the Global System Settings

Setting Description Default

Enable Complex Click Edit and then enable of Disable complex passwords Cleared
Passwords for library users. Complex passwords have the following (Disabled)
requirements:
 Minimum length 12 characters
 Minimum of two characters of each: lower case letters,
upper case letters, numbers, and special characters
Note: Valid special characters: @`~!#$%^&*()-
_=+[]{}\|;:'",.<>/?
 Maximum of three in row of any character
 Cannot reuse any of the previous 24 passwords
 Must be changed every 90 days
 Cannot be changed within two days of a previous
password change

Configure Network Settings

Overview Spectra Logic highly recommends that you configure your
library for network access. Without network access, you are unable to
perform any of the following operations:
 Access the BlueScale web interface for remote management of the
library using a standard web browser.
 Open support incidents from the library front panel or send ASLs
(AutoSupport Logs) on demand to Spectra Logic Technical Support for
troubleshooting.
 Automatically email system messages or reports to configured mail
users.
 Automatically send a notification to a specified recipient when certain
critical events occur.
 Download the latest BlueScale package from Spectra Logic’s Support
portal directly to the library.
Using Dynamic Addressing By default, the IPv4 address for the Ethernet
port on the LCM is set automatically using the Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) and the IPv6 address is set through
dynamic address assignment.
Notes:  If you select Dynamic addressing, the LCM must be
connected to an Ethernet network that has a DHCP server to
obtain an IP address.
 Do not select Dynamic addressing if your network does not
have a DHCP server.

121
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring the Global System Settings

Using Static IP Addressing If your network does not use DHCP, or if you
want the library to use a fixed IP address, you can configure a static (fixed)
IP address. Using a static IP address ensures that the IP address for the
library remains constant and is highly recommended.
Configuration Process Use the following steps to configure the library for
network access.
1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen
on page 108).
2. Click Edit next to Network Settings. The Network Settings screen
displays.

Figure 62 The BlueScale12.7.02 and earlier Figure 63 The BlueScale12.7.06 and later
Network Settings screen. Network Settings screen.

3. Decide which type of addressing you want the library to use.

 Dynamic (DHCP) — The library is issued an IPv4 address by the
DHCP server and for BlueScale12.7.06 and later, an IPv6 address
through address assignment. Both are displayed on the Network
Settings screen.
 Static (highly recommended) — The library uses fixed IP addresses.
If you select static addressing, enter the following information:
Note: Do not include http: or https: when entering IP addresses.
For BlueScale12.7.02 or earlier:

For this field... Enter...

Address A valid IPv4 address.
Subnet The subnet mask. The subnet mask must be a valid IPv4 address.
Gateway A valid network gateway IPv4 address. Enter 0.0.0.0 for the Gateway if your
network does not use a gateway.

122
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring the Global System Settings

For BlueScale12.7.06 or later:

For this field... Enter...

If the IPv4 check box is selected:
(if the IPv4 check box is not selected, the IPv4 address defaults to 127.0.0.1 and is effectively disabled)
Address A valid IPv4 address.
Subnet The subnet mask. The subnet mask must be a valid IPv4 address.
Gateway A valid network gateway IPv4 address. Leave the field blank if the network
does not use a gateway.
If the IPv6 check box is selected:
Address A valid IPv6 address. The library compresses the IPv6 address when saved.
Prefix Enter an integer between 1 and 128 to indicate the portion of the IPv6 address
that indicates a group of IP addresses on the same network.
Gateway A valid network gateway IPv6 address. Leave the field blank if the network
does not use a gateway.

4. Optionally, enter the IPv4 address for a Domain Name Server.

If you plan to use NTP to automatically set the library’s date and time,
you must enter a valid IPv4 address for at least one DNS server used by
the NTP service (see Set the Date and Time on page 127).
Note: To delete an already saved DNS setting, do one of the following:
 For BlueScale12.7.02 or earlier, set the IP address to 0.0.0.0.
 For BlueScale12.7.06 or later, clear the IP address.
5. Click Save to save the IP addressing.
Notes:  If you are connected to the library through the BlueScale web
interface and you change the addressing, the library’s IP
address changes as soon as you click Save. As a result, you
lose the connection to the library.
 If you are using the operator panel, select any option on the
toolbar menu to leave the Network Settings screen.

123
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring the Global System Settings

Configure Mail Users

Overview The library can send email messages with system messages,
traces, and diagnostic results to selected recipients. These recipients can be
configured to receive messages automatically as they are generated by the
library, or on demand when traces are run, reports are generated, or the
library's configuration data is backed up. Recipients can also be configured
to receive AutoSupport messages.
Notes:  The library must be connected to a network with Internet
access before you configure mail recipients.
 You must configure the SMTP server used by the
[email protected] mail user if you want to open an
AutoSupport ticket directly from the library (see
Chapter 11 – Configuring and Using AutoSupport,
beginning on page 345). This mail user is also used to send
the ASL and HHM files that the library generates to Spectra
Logic Technical Support when troubleshooting a problem.
Add or Modify Mail Users Use the following steps to add or modify mail
recipients.
1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen
on page 108).
2. Click Edit next to Mail Users. The Mail Recipients screen displays.

Figure 64 The Mail Recipients screen.

3. To modify an existing recipient, click Edit next to the desired recipient

in the Recipients pane. The Add/Update Recipient pane refreshes to
show the current information for the selected recipient.

124
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring the Global System Settings

4. Enter the information for a new recipient or update the information for
an existing recipient in the Add/Update Recipient pane.
For this field... Do the following...
To Enter the email address of the recipient. Be sure to use the full address using the
standard email format, including the @ symbol.
Important: The email address cannot contain spaces or other non-
alphanumeric characters (for example, an ampersand, &). To include multiple
addresses, leave a space between each address.
From Enter an alphanumeric string to uniquely identify the library (for example, the
name or location of the library).
Important: The string cannot contain spaces or non-alphanumeric characters
(for example, the & or the @ symbols).
SMTP IP Address Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of your SMTP server in the SMTP IP Address
field. Do not include http: or https:.
Receive Select the type(s) of messages that the user receives by selecting one or more of
the message types listed.
 Fatal — An error occurred that prevents the library from continuing operation.
Immediate attention is required.
 Error — An error occurred that impacts the operation of the library. Determine
the cause of the error and remedy it as soon as possible.
 Warning — The library detected conditions that may impact operation.
Determine the cause of the problem and remedy it as soon as possible.
 Informational — Activities that generate system messages occurred.
Notes:
 Selecting a message type automatically sends all messages of that type to the
recipient as they are generated by the library.
 If no message type is selected, the library does not automatically send
messages to the recipient. However, messages can still be sent to the recipient
on an individual basis when traces or diagnostics are run.
 Do not select message types for the [email protected] mail
recipient. This mail recipient is only used to receive AutoSupport ticket
requests or ASL and HHM files that are generated by the library.

5. Click Save. The screen refreshes to show the new or updated mail
recipient in the Recipients portion of the Mail Recipient screen
(Figure 64 on page 124).
6. If desired, select Send Test next to the newly added mail recipient to
send a test email.
7. Repeat Step 2 on page 124 through Step 6 on this page to configure or
modify additional email recipients.
8. Click Previous to return to the System Setup screen.

125
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring the Global System Settings

Enable Email for the Auto Configuration Save File

Overview Having a current backup of the library‘s metadata (the library
partition configuration, the MLM and DLM databases, and any BlueScale
encryption keys) is an essential component of any disaster recovery plan.
For more information about protecting the library metadata, see Back Up
and Protect the Library Metadata on page 515.
In the event that you need to restore the library configuration, you can use
either the automatically saved configuration backup file from the LCM or
the emailed copy (see Restore From an Auto Configuration Save File on
page 399).
Auto Configuration Save Process The library generates an Auto
Configuration Save backup file once a week and every time you create or
modify a partition. This backup file contains the current library
configuration, the MLM and DLM databases, and any BlueScale
encryption keys stored in the library.
Notes:  The time for generating the weekly Auto Configuration Save
backup file is based on the first time the file was generated.
 The library does not generate an Auto Configuration Save
backup file when you make configuration changes other than
creating or modifying a partition.
Auto Configuration Save Email Process Configuring the library to
automatically send the Auto Configuration Save backup file as an email
attachment to a previously configured email recipient is highly
recommended. The library sends the email whenever it generates the Auto
Configuration Save backup file. The email includes instructions for using
the attached file to restore the library.

Important To use this automatic email option, you must first configure the user to whom you
want the backup file sent as a mail recipient (see Configure Mail Users on page 124).

126
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring the Global System Settings

Configure Automatic Email Option Use the following steps to configure

the automatic email option for the Auto Configuration Save backup file.
1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen
on page 108).
2. Click Edit next to Auto Configuration Save in the Other Settings pane.
The Automatic Configuration Save Setup screen displays.

Figure 65 The Automatic Configuration Save Setup screen.

3. Select the Email Configuration check box, and then use the drop-down
list to select the desired recipient from the list of previously configured
mail recipients.
Note: Do not use the default [email protected] email
recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed configuration files.

Set the Date and Time

1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen
on page 108).
2. Click Edit next to Date And Time in the Other Settings pane. The Date
and Time screen displays showing the method currently selected for
setting the date and time.

127
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring the Global System Settings

3. Select the method you want to use for setting the date and time.
Note: Changing the method of setting the library time and date from
Automatic Time and Date Settings (NTP) to Manual Time and Date
Settings or the other way around requires an LCM reboot to
enable the new setting.

If you select... Then...

Automatic Time If not already displayed, the Date and Time screen refreshes to show options
and Date Settings for configuring a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server.
(NTP)

Figure 66 Configure the settings for using NTP.

1. Enter the NTP Hostname for the NTP server you want to use. Do not include
!@#$^&*()> and < in the NTP hostname (for information about NTP, see
https://support.ntp.org/bin/view/Main/WebHome).
2. Select the Time Zone you want to use (typically the one corresponding to the
location of the library).
3. Click Save. As soon as you click Save, the library reboots to start using the
new settings.
Notes:
 Because the NTP server is addressed using a hostname instead of an IP
address, you must configure at least one DNS server before you can use NTP
(see Configure Network Settings on page 121).
 After you configure NTP, it can take up to an hour for the time to synchronize
with the NTP server.

128
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

If you select... Then...

Manual Time and If not already displayed, the Date and Time screen refreshes to show options
Date Settings for manually setting the date and time.
(Default)

Figure 67 Configure the settings for manually setting the

date and time.
1. Use the Date and Time + and – buttons to select the month, day (date), year,
hour, and minute values.
Note: The values in the Date & Time counters do not wrap. For example, to
change the month from December to January, click and hold the – button to
decrement the month.
2. Click Save. Click Previous to return to the System Setup screen.

CONFIGURING OPTIONAL LIBRARY SETTINGS

This section describes optional configuration settings that you may select
to use for your library and operating environment.

Install a Security Certificate and Authentication Key

If you enabled SSL (see Enable SSL on page 117), use the following steps to
obtain and install a security certificate and private key.
Note: Beginning with BlueScale 12.7.06.01, the library uses TLS 1.2.
1. Obtain a security certificate and private key using one of the following
methods:

Important The ssl.crt and ssl.key files can only contain ONE certification or key. The BlueScale
software does not support multiple keys (chaining keys) in the key or certificate
files. If there are multiple keys in the files, they are all considered invalid.

Important When generating a self signed certificate using openssl, use the -x509 command
line option. Loading a file without this option may cause the LCM to hang.

129
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

Important When generating a self signed certificate or a certificate signing request using
openssl, use the -nodes command line option to prevent the key from being
encrypted.

 Create a Self-Signed Certificate

For example, to create a self-signed certificate and authentication
key using openssl, use the following command.
openssl req -x509 -nodes -days 365
-newkey rsa:2048 -keyout ssl.key -out ssl.crt
The openssl req command is a certificate request and certificate
generating utility. The following parameters are used in the
example:
 -x509 - This option outputs a self signed certificate instead of a
certificate request.
 -nodes - This option specifies that the private key not be
encrypted.
 -days n - When the -x509 option is also used, this option specifies
the number of days (n) that the certificate is valid.
 -newkey rsa:nbits - Generates an RSA key nbits in size. The
Library supports RSA keys in bits of 512, 768, 1024 and 2048.
 -keyout filename - This option specifies the private key file
name.
 -out filename - This option specifies the certificate file name.
After entering the command, you are prompted to provide the
following information. Sample responses are shown.
 Country Name (2 letter code) [AU]: US
 State or Province Name (full name) [Some-State]: Colorado
 Locality Name (eg, city) []: Boulder
 Organization Name (eg, company) [Internet Widgits Pty Ltd]:
Spectra Logic
 Organizational Unit Name (eg, section) []: DVT Test
 Common Name (e.g. server FQDN or YOUR name) []:
[email protected]
 Email Address []: [email protected]

130
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

 Request a Certificate Using a Certificate Signing Request

Request a security certificate and the authentication key from your
signing authority and process the key for use in with the BlueScale
software.
a. Request a certificate from verisign.com, instantssl.com,
letsencrypt.org or another SSL certificate vendor to obtain the
certificate. For example, to generate a certificate signing request
using openssl, use the following command:
openssl req -newkey rsa:2048 -nodes
-subj "/C=US/ST=Colorado/L=Boulder/O=Spectra/CN=DVT-
T950" -out ssl.csr -keyout ssl.key
The openssl req command is a certificate request and certificate
generating utility. The following parameters are used in the
example:
 -newkey rsa:nbits - Generates a new certificate signing request
and a new RSA private key nbits in size. The Library supports
RSA keys in bits of 512, 768, 1024 and 2048.
 -nodes - This option specifies that the private key not be
encrypted.
 -subj "arg" - This option provides the answers to many of the
prompts shown in the example above.
 -keyout filename - This option specifies the private key file
name.
 -out filename - This option specifies the certificate signing
request file name.
b. Send the certificate signing request to the signing authority. A
certificate named ssl.crt and a key named ssl.key will be
returned.
2. The BlueScale web server must use an RSA private key and cannot use
a key with a passphrase. If the private key does not include BEGIN RSA
PRIVATE KEY in the header or uses a passphrase, rename the key to
original_ssl.key and issue the following command.
openssl rsa -in original_ssl.key -out ssl.key
If the key has a passphrase, issuing this command prompts you for the
passphrase.
3. Save the security certificate file (ssl.crt) and the private key (ssl.key) in
the root folder of a USB device.
Note: The security certificate file must be named ssl.crt and the private
key must be named ssl.key.
4. Connect the USB device to a port on the LCM (see Figure 16 and
Figure 17 on page 45) or the T950B front panel and wait for the device
to mount.

131
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

5. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrative

privileges (see Log Into the User Interface on page 95).
6. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance
Tools screen displays.
7. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
8. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.
9. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced
utilities.
10. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select the Load SSL
Certificate and Key from USB utility.

Figure 68 Use the Load SSL Certificate and Key from USB utility
to load the security certificate onto the library.

11. Click Run Utility to copy the security certificate and private key to the
T950 library web server.
Notes:  The SSL keys are not stored as part of the library
configuration. If you replace the SD card, you will have to
reload these keys.
 To change or update the SSL keys, you must first manually
delete the old keys from the LCM. Contact Spectra Logic
Technical Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra
Logic on page 7).

Configure Routine Maintenance

Overview The Routine Maintenance option configures the library to
automatically reset (reboot) the LCM once a week. Using this option is not
required as part of normal library operation and should be left disabled
unless you are requested to enable this by Spectra Logic Technical Support
in the course of troubleshooting or problem resolution.

Important Do not enable this option unless specifically instructed to do so by Spectra Logic
Technical Support.

132
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

Enable the Routine Maintenance Option Use the following steps if Spectra
Logic Technical Support instructs you to enable the Routine Maintenance
option.
1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen
on page 108).
2. Click Edit next to Routine Maintenance in the Other Settings pane. The
Routine Maintenance Configuration screen displays.

Figure 69 The Routine Maintenance Configuration screen.

3. Select Enable to enable the Routine Maintenance option.

4. Use the Day of Week and Hour drop-down lists to select when you want
the automatic reboot to occur.
Notes:  When the library automatically resets, all data storage
operations currently in progress fail. Spectra Logic
recommends that you select a time when you are not
performing data storage operations.
 The reboot occurs sometime within the specified hour, not
necessarily at the exact time shown.
5. Click Save to finish. Click Previous to return to the System Setup screen.

Enable and Configure SNMP

Overview Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol for
monitoring the health and welfare of your library by using integrated
alerts. When SNMP is enabled, the Other Settings pane in the System Setup
screen includes options for enabling the SNMP agent and configuring
SNMP settings.
Note: Spectra Logic libraries use SNMPv2c.
Network-Based Library Management If you are using a network-based
library monitor/management application other than the library’s BlueScale
user interface, you may need to identify the library’s SNMP settings to the
application. These settings include the read, write, and broadcast
community strings.

133
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

Configure SNMP Use the following steps to enable and configure SNMP.
1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen
on page 108) and scroll down to the Other Settings pane.
2. Select Enable SNMP Agent to enable SNMP in the library and click Save.
The System Setup screen refreshes to include an option for editing the
SNMP settings.
The agent returns information contained in the library’s Management
Information Base (MIB) to the workstation used to manage the
network. The MIB defines what information is available from the
library over the network. The MIB file is available for download from
the Downloads > Tools page of the support portal.
3. Click Edit next to SNMP Settings. The SNMP Settings screen displays.

Figure 70 The SNMP Settings screen.

134
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

4. Enter the following information on the SNMP Settings screen.

Field Description
System Contact Maps to the value for system.4 (sysContact) object in the MIB. Enter the
informations and click Save.
System Location Maps to the value for system.6 (sysLocation) object in the MIB. Enter the
informations and click Save.
Valid Query Lists all SNMP communities to which the library currently belongs. The library
Communities only responds to SNMP queries from members of these communities. The
default valid query community is public.
 Click Edit next to the setting you need to modify. The current settings display
in the corresponding Add/Update section of the screen. Click Save in the
corresponding Add/Update section of the screen after you make your
changes.
Important: Community strings are case sensitive. If the library is configured to
include the community called “OurCommunity,” it answers to queries from
OurCommunity but not from a community called “ourcommunity.”
 Click Delete to remove a setting.
Trap Destinations Lists all the currently configured trap destinations (IPv4 or IPv6 addresses) to
which the library sends SNMP traps. There are no default trap destinations
configured.
Note: Only one community at a time may contain IPv6 addresses.
 Click Edit next to the setting you need to modify. The current settings display
in the corresponding Add/Update section of the screen. Click Save in the
corresponding Add/Update section of the screen after you make your
changes.
 Click Delete to remove a setting.

5. Click Previous to return to the System Configuration screen.

135
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

Configure Controller Failover

Overview The library supports using two RIMs or F-QIPs to provide a
redundant connection to the robotics. A single controller can be configured
as the failover controller for multiple partitions. See Controller Failover on
page 79 for information about how controller failover functions.
To use the controller failover feature, you must assign a failover partner to
the controller you selected to provide the partition’s robotic control path to
the robotics.
Notes:  RIMs and F-QIPs can be mixed in a failover pair; a RIM2 can
only be in a failover pair with another RIM2.
 Drives used to provide the robotic control path cannot be
configured with controller failover, however you can export
the same changer interface over multiple drives in the
partition to provide redundancy as long as your software can
support this. You cannot use multiple paths at the same time.
 If desired, you can configure multiple RIMs for the same
partition and export the same changer interface over them to
provide redundancy as long as your software can support
this.
 The Controller Failover feature is not supported for any
F-QIP that is connected to SCSI drives. The F-QIP pair
configured for Controller Failover can only be used to
provide the robotic control path.
 Controller failover is not supported on 4 Gb/second F-QIPs.
If you have 4 Gb/second Fibre Channel F-QIPs, the Failover
button does not display on the Controllers screen.
 If you configure controller failover before you create storage
partitions, the secondary controller in the failover pair is not
available for use as the exporting controller for the partitions.
User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator
privileges can configure controller failover. See Understanding User
Groups and Security on page 104 for information about the three types of
user groups and what types of privileges each has.

136
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

Configure Controller Failover Use the following steps to enable and

configure controller failover.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Controllers to display
the Controllers screen.

Figure 71 The Controllers screen before the failover

controller is selected.

3. Identify the controller that you configured to provide the robotic

control path in a partition (see Select the Robotic Control Path on
page 200). This controller is the primary controller in the failover pair.
Note: If you have not yet configured partitions, identify two
controllers (RIMs or F-QIPs). Both controllers must be at the
same firmware version. If one is a RIM2, both must be RIM2s.
4. Click Failover next to the controller you want to be the primary
controller in the failover pair. The Controller Failover screen displays
with a list of the other RIMs or F-QIPs in the library that can be used as
the failover partner.
Notes:  The component identifiers for the RIMs show them as F-QIPs.
See RIM and F-QIP Identifiers on page 67 for more
information.
 If you are configuring Failover for a RIM2, only other RIM2
controllers are listed as possible failover partners.

Figure 72 The Controller Failover screen.

137
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

5. Select the controller that you want to use as the failover partner for the
primary controller. This controller is the secondary controller in the
failover pair.

Important Make sure that the controller you select is not already being used to provide the
robotic control path for another partition.

Notes:  To disable controller failover, select None. This is the default

setting.
 When you select None or if you select a different controller as
the failover partner, the controller previously configured as
the failover partner is once again available for use in a
partition.
6. Click OK to complete the assignment. The Controllers screen redisplays
to show the two controllers configured as a failover pair.
For example, in Figure 73 the RIM identified as FR2/DBA1/F-QIP1 is
the primary controller in the failover pair and provides the robotic
control path for any partitions in which it is used. The RIM identified as
FR3/DBA1/F-QIP1 is the secondary controller in the failover pair and
automatically takes over for the primary controller if it detects a
problem.

Primary
controller

Secondary
controller

Figure 73 The Controllers screen after configuring controller failover.

To use the configured failover pair in a partition, select the controller

that is the primary controller (see Step 3 on page 137) as the exporting
controller (see Select the Robotic Control Path on page 200).

138
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

Configure Barcode Reporting

Overview The Spectra Logic tape libraries support barcode data strings
consisting of a start character; from 1 to 16 characters, including
alphanumeric characters and an optional checksum character; and the stop
character. Quiet zones precede and follow the start and stop characters.
By default, the library:
 Expects barcode labels with checksums (that is, it treats the right-most
character as a checksum character).
 Does not use the checksum character to validate the barcode.
 Reports up to 16 characters but does not report the checksum character.
Notes:  With the exception of the checksum, the barcode labels
typically show the human-readable character that each
barcode character represents. The checksum character is not
considered human-readable.
 If you change the barcode options for a partition, the library
will report a tape mismatch error when tape cartridges
previously discovered by MLM are loaded into a drive.
Modifying Barcode Reporting If your environment has any of the
following:
 Labels without a checksum character
 A requirement to validate the barcode using the checksum
 Storage management software with specific barcode requirements
then you may need to modify the default settings used by the library.

Important  Proceed with caution when changing the library’s default barcode reporting
settings. Any changes that you make affect every partition in the library. Before
making changes, make sure that the changes do not adversely affect others
using the library.
 If you modify the barcode reporting settings, you should do so before using any
cartridges in the library. If you change the barcode reporting settings after the
cartridges were used by the storage management software, the software may
no longer recognize those cartridges. In general, it is best to leave the library set
to its defaults and make any reporting modifications on the software side if that
is an option.
 Never mix cartridges with checksummed and non-checksummed labels in the
library.

139
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

Barcode Reporting Mismatch Errors Unexpected behavior can occur if the

library’s barcode reporting configuration does not match the type of
barcode labels that are being used and what the storage management
software expects. The most common problems that occur are:
 The library is configured to expect a checksum character in barcodes,
but the barcode labels do not have a checksum character. In this case,
the barcode reported by the library is “missing” the right-most
character. This is because the library treats the last character in the
barcode as a checksum character, which it does not report, when the
character is actually part of the barcode.
 The library is configured to use barcode labels that do not include a
checksum, but the barcode labels include a checksum character. In this
case, the library treats the checksum character as part of the barcode
and therefore reports a seemingly random “garbage” character as the
last character of the barcode.
 The library is configured to use barcodes that include a checksum and
perform checksum verification, but the barcode labels do not have a
checksum character. In this case, the library reports a verification error
on every barcode label because the character it is using to perform the
checksum verification is not a checksum character.
User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator
privileges can modify barcode reporting. See Understanding User Groups
and Security on page 104 for information about the three types of user
groups and what types of privileges each has.

Changing the Library Barcode Reporting Configuration

Note: If you are unsure whether your labels include a checksum
character, see Determining the Barcode Label Type on page 142.
If necessary, use the following steps to change the library’s barcode
reporting configuration to disable the use of checksum characters, enable
or disable the verification of the checksum character, or modify what
portion of the actual barcode is reported to the host.

Important After the utility completes, the LCM reboots. After the library completes its
initialization, it rescans the barcode labels of all media in the library. This rescan
takes up to 45 minutes per frame to complete.

1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator

privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance
Tools screen displays.
3. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
4. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.

140
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

5. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced
utilities.
6. Select the Modify Barcode Reporting utility. The screen refreshes to show
information about the utility. Figure 74 shows the default settings.

Figure 74 Use the Modify Barcode Reporting utility to change

how the library handles barcode labels.

7. Change the barcode reporting as required for your environment.

Use this parameter If...
Non-check- Your labels do not include a checksum.
summed barcodes
Check-summed Your labels include a checksum and you want the barcode verified against the
barcodes checksum when it is read. Verification is not generally required, but adds extra
confirmation that the barcode label was read correctly by the barcode reader.
Ignore check-sum Your labels include a checksum character but you do not want the barcode
barcodes verified against the checksum when it is read. This is the default setting.

141
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

Use this parameter If...

Report left-hand You want the library to report only the left-most x characters in the barcode,
characters where x is any number from 1 to 16.
For example, if the barcode is 1234567L2 and you configure the library to report
only the five left-most characters, the library reports the barcode as 12345.
Important: Be careful when specifying the number of left-most characters to
report. You may end up with duplicate barcodes reported. For example,
12345XXXL2 and 12345ABCL3 are both reported as 12345.
Report right-hand You want the library to report only the right-most x characters in the barcode,
characters where x is any number from 1 to 16. This is the default setting.
For example, if the barcode is 1234567L2 and you configure the library to report
the 5 right-most characters, the library reports the barcode as 567L2.
Important: Be careful when specifying the number of right-most characters to
report. You may end up with duplicate barcodes reported. For example,
1234567L2 and ABCD567L2 are both reported as 567L2.

8. If you want to specify the number of barcode characters the library

reports, enter a number from 1 to 16 in the Select the number of
characters to report field. If your labels include a checksum, the number
you enter includes the checksum character. The default number of
characters is 16.
9. Click Run Utility. When the utility completes, the LCM reboots. After
the library completes its initialization, it rescans the barcode labels of all
media in the library. This rescan takes up to 45 minutes per frame to
complete.

Determining the Barcode Label Type

A checksum character is an “invisible” character — readable by the barcode
reader, but not shown in the human-readable text on the label. Its function
is similar to a parity check.
See Barcode Label Specifications on page 556 for detailed information
about the required physical characteristics of barcode labels.

If you have... The barcode labels...

Spectra Certified data Have a barcode with eight human-readable characters followed by a
cartridges with standard checksum character that is not human-readable. The last two
barcode labels human-readable characters indicate the media type (for example L5
indicates LTO-5 media and JC indicates TS11xx technology media).
Spectra Certified data Are designed to a user’s specification. Custom labels support up to
cartridges with custom 16 characters including an optional checksum character.
barcode labels

142
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

If you have... The barcode labels...

Barcode labels purchased Must always either include or not include a checksum. When
from different vendors ordering labels, make sure that you always specify the same type of
barcodes (always include or always do not include a checksum).
Important: Never mix media with checksummed and non-
checksummed labels in the library.

Use the following steps to determine if the barcode labels on your

cartridges include a checksum character.

Important After the utility completes, the LCM reboots. After the library completes its
initialization, it rescans the barcode labels of all media in the library. This rescan
takes up to 45 minutes per frame to complete.

1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator

privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance
Tools screen displays.
3. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
4. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.
5. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced
utilities.
6. Select the Modify Barcode Reporting utility. The screen refreshes to show
the details for the utility.
7. Make sure that the options for the utility are set as follows:
For this field... Make sure it is set to...
Select checksummed behavior Ignore check-sum barcodes
Select Right or Left Report right-hand characters
Select the number of characters to 16
report: (1 - 16)

8. Examine each barcode label you want to test and make a note of the
human-readable text on each.
9. Import the cartridges into a storage partition, then view the partition
inventory, either on the BlueScale Inventory screen (see View the
Cartridge Inventory for a Location on page 271) or through your
storage management software.
 If the reported barcode exactly matches the human-readable text
you recorded, then the barcode includes a checksum character.
 If the reported barcode is missing the right-most character, then the
barcode does not include a checksum character.

143
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

10. See Changing the Library Barcode Reporting Configuration on

page 140 to configure the barcode reporting to match your barcodes.

Configure a Package Server

Overview Configuring a package server is optional. A local package
server can be used to store BlueScale packages downloaded from Spectra
Logic for updating the BlueScale software or library component firmware.
Update packages can also be downloaded directly from the Spectra Logic
website to the memory card in the library’s LCM or to a USB device.
Note: For additional information about BlueScale packages and how to
use them, see Updating the BlueScale Software and Library
Firmware on page 446.
User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator
privileges can configure a package server.
Configure a Package Server Use the following steps to configure, modify,
or delete a local package server.
1. Identify the server or servers you want to use for storing BlueScale
packages. Make sure that these servers can access the Internet and that
they are on the same network as the libraries you want to update.
Note: Both Microsoft’s Internet Information Services (IIS) and the
Unix-based Apache server work as package servers.
2. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
3. Select Maintenance > Package Update. The Package Update screen
displays.

Figure 75 The Package Update screen.

144
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

4. Click Manage Package Servers. The Manage Package Servers screen

displays, and provides the following information for each currently
configured package server:
 Server name — Name assigned to the server when it was added.
 Server configuration settings — Includes the IP address of the
package server, the port, the IP address of the proxy server (if
configured), and the directory where BlueScale packages are stored.
 Auto Download setting — Indicates whether Auto Download is
configured. If configured (See Add a package server on page 146),
the library checks the package server once a week for a library
update package and drive firmware package newer than what the
library is currently running. If a new package is available, the
library downloads it, generates a system message, and displays an
icon on the status bar to indicate the update is available (see Auto
Download Icon on page 92). To modify auto download options, see
Modify Auto Download Options on page 147.

Figure 76 The Manage Package Servers screen.

145
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

5. Click the correct button to add, delete, or edit a package server.

Task Procedure
Add a package 1. Click Add. The Configure Package Server screen displays.
server

Figure 77 The Configure Package Server screen.

2. Fill in the requested information:
 Required — Name and IP Address. If no Proxy is set, the IP Address can be an
IPv4 or an IPv6 address. If a Proxy is set, the IP Address must use IPv4.
 Optional — Port, Proxy, and Directory fields use default values if nothing is
entered. The Proxy, if set, must use IPv4.
3. Select or clear Automatically Download Latest Package.
 If selected, the library checks the package server once a week for a library
update package and drive firmware package newer than what the library is
currently running. If a new package is available, the library downloads it,
generates a system message, and displays an icon on the status bar to indicate
the update availability.
 If cleared, you must check for updates manually.
4. Click Save. The screen refreshes and adds the new server to the list of available
package servers.
Note: If you specify the directory, make sure you include the full path to the
directory where the BlueScale packages are stored.
Edit a package 1. Click Edit next to the server’s name and details. The Configure Package Server
server screen displays, with the appropriate fields completed.
2. Edit the server information as necessary.
3. Click Save.
Delete a Click Delete next to the server’s name and details.
package Important: There is no confirmation requested when you delete a package
server server. After you click Delete, the server is immediately removed from the list of
available package servers. However, the packages on the server are not deleted.

146
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

Modify Auto Download Options

Overview When auto download is enabled for a package server (see Add
a package server on page 146) you can configure when the library sends
notification of a new downloaded package update or drive firmware
update, and whether the download is automatically staged to library
devices capable of staging.
Note: For additional information about BlueScale packages and how to
use them, see Updating the BlueScale Software and Library
Firmware on page 446.
User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator
privileges can configure auto download options.
Configure Auto Download Options Use the following steps to configure or
modify auto download options.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. Select Maintenance > Package Update. The Package Update screen
displays.

Figure 78 The Package Update screen.

147
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

3. Click Auto Download Options. The Auto Download Options screen

displays showing the current auto download settings.

Figure 79 The Auto Download Options screen.

4. If you want to delay the notification about a new package, enter the
number of days to delay in the Delay Announcement field.
5. Enable or disable auto-staging of component firmware by selecting or
clearing Auto-stage library component firmware. The library does not
apply the firmware until you initiate a library update. Enabling auto-
staging decreases the time required to complete a library update.
6. Click Save to save the new settings.

Configure Rotation Manager

Overview If your site uses NetBackup™ Vault Manager or Symantec™
NetBackup, you can purchase the Rotation Manager option to simplify
identifying tapes moved off site. With Rotation Manager installed, the
library sends an email for each magazine that is exported (ejected) from the
library to a specified email recipient. The email includes the barcode
information for the magazine and an attachment that contains the barcode
information for the cartridges it contains.

148
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Configuring Optional Library Settings

Administrators can follow the instructions in the email they receive to

import identifying information for every barcode labeled cartridge and its
off-site location into the storage management software. Because the
cartridge barcodes are associated with the barcode of the magazine
containing the cartridges, groups of cartridges can be located using a single
barcode. Refer to the documentation that accompanied your software for
information about using the vltcontainers command to manage the
off-site magazines and cartridges.
Note: Before you can use Rotation Manager, you must enter the
activation key to enable it as described in Enter Activation Keys
on page 112.
User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator
privileges can configure Rotation Manager. See Understanding User
Groups and Security on page 104 for information about the three types of
user groups and what types of privileges each has.
Configure Rotation Manager Use the following steps to configure the
Rotation Manager.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. If necessary, obtain the activation key for Rotation Manager and enable
it as described in Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and
Upgrades on page 110.
3. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import Export > Rotation
Manager. The Rotation Manager Configuration screen displays.

Figure 80 The Rotation Manager Configuration screen.

4. Symantec NetBackup is the only vendor supported by Rotation Manager

and is selected automatically.
Note: NetBackup Vault Manager was acquired by Symantec and
continues to be supported by Rotation Manager even though it is
not listed on the Rotation Manager Configuration screen.

149
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Backing Up the Library Configuration

5. Select the Mail To email address to use for sending notifications.

Only previously configured mail recipients are listed. To send the
notification to someone who is not already listed as a library user, you
must first configure that person as an email recipient (see Configure
Mail Users on page 124).
6. Click Save.

BACKING UP THE LIBRARY CONFIGURATION

Overview Keeping valid backup copies of your library’s configuration, the
MLM and DLM databases, and BlueScale encryption keys ensures that you
can easily restore the library in the event of a disaster. Having a backup of
the library’s configuration is also extremely useful if problems require you
to replace the LCM or the memory card in the LCM. After the replacement
procedure is complete, you can use the saved configuration to restore the
library’s settings, including the partitions, instead of having to manually
re-enter all of the information.

Important Backing up the library configuration also backs up any BlueScale encryption keys
that are stored in the library at the time the file is created.

Important The backup configuration can only be used to restore the library that generated the
backup. The configuration is tied to the Hardware ID of the library and cannot be
transferred to another library.

Note: If the MLM database contains a large number of MLM and DLM
records, generating the Auto Configuration Save file can take
several minutes.
Options The library provides two methods for backing up the configuration:
 Automatic — See Use Automatic Backup of the Library Configuration
on page 151.
 Manual — See Use Manual Backup of the Library Configuration on
page 151.
If you have valid backups of the library’s configuration and MLM
database, you can use them to restore the library (see Restoring the Library
Configuration on page 398).
See Back Up and Protect the Library Metadata on page 515 for additional
information about backing up the library’s configuration information, the
MLM database, the DLM database, and any BlueScale encryption keys.

150
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Backing Up the Library Configuration

Use Automatic Backup of the Library Configuration

The Auto Configuration Save feature, which operates automatically, saves
a backup of the library configuration, the MLM and DLM databases, and
any stored BlueScale encryption keys to a time-stamped zip file on the
memory card in the LCM. The zip file is named <date-time>cfg.zip,
where <date-time> is the time stamp for when the backup was created.
The library generates the Auto Configuration Save backup file once a week
and whenever a partition is created or modified.
Note: The library does not generate an Auto Configuration Save
backup file when you make configuration changes other than
creating or modifying a partition.
As an extra security measure, you can configure the library to automatically
email the time-stamped zip file to a previously configured email recipient
each time the backup file is created. Saving an external copy of the
automatically generated configuration backup file ensures that you can
recover the library configuration, the MLM and DLM databases, and the
BlueScale encryption keys stored in the library in the event of a disaster.
When the recipient receives the email, they should verify the backup as
described in Verify the Configuration Backup on page 154 and Verify the
Database Backup File on page 332.
For detailed information about configuring a mail recipient for the Auto
Configuration Save file and using it to restore the library, see:
 Enable Email for the Auto Configuration Save File on page 126
 Restore From an Auto Configuration Save File on page 399

Use Manual Backup of the Library Configuration

Overview Whenever you make a configuration change to the library that
does not result in the library automatically generating a configuration
backup file (for example, you entered activation keys after the creation
date of the most current automatically generated backup file), you can
manually back up the library configuration as described in this section.
Notes:  The Save Library Configuration utility described in this
section does not back up the MLM database or the DLM
database.
To back up the MLM and DLM databases, use the Save MLM
Database utility, as described in Back Up the MLM and DLM
Databases on page 330. After you create the backup, be sure
to verify it as described in Verify the Database Backup File on
page 332.
 Backing up the library configuration also backs up any
BlueScale encryption keys that are stored in the library at the
time the file is created.

151
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Backing Up the Library Configuration

User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator

privileges can create a manual backup of the library configuration. See
Understanding User Groups and Security on page 104 for information
about the three types of user groups and what types of privileges each has.

Back Up the Library Configuration

1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. If you want to save the configuration to a USB device, connect the
device to a USB port on the LCM or the front panel (T950B only) and
wait for the device to mount before continuing.
Note: The save library configuration to USB option is only available if
you connect a USB device to the library before you access the
utilities screen (see Connect a USB Device to the Library on
page 184).
3. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays a
list of Basic Utilities.

Figure 81 The Utilities screen.

152
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Backing Up the Library Configuration

4. Select the Save Library Configuration utility. The screen refreshes to

show the details for the utility.

Figure 82 The Save Library Configuration utility.

5. Use the Select the destination drop-down list to select where you want
to save the file.
Note: Do not use the check boxes at the top of the screen. They act on
the Utility Results message, not the configuration file.
Select... To...
save library Save the library configuration file to the USB device connected to a USB port on
configuration to the LCM or front panel (T950B only). The backup file is stored in a folder called
USB SavedConfigs\<date-time>, where <date-time> is the time stamp for
when the backup was created. The folder contains multiple configuration files
with the format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is a number between 0 and 9.
mail library Send the library configuration file as a zip file attached to an email addressed to
configuration to a previously configured mail recipient (see Configure Mail Users on page 124).
[mail recipient] Note: Do not mail the file to [email protected] unless Spectra Logic
Technical Support specifically requested the file for troubleshooting.

6. Click Run Utility.

After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays, showing that the
configuration file was either saved or sent.
7. Confirm that the backup was successful, as described in Verify the
Configuration Backup.

153
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Backing Up the Library Configuration

Verify the Configuration Backup

After creating a backup of your library configuration, use one of the
methods described in the following sections to verify that the backup was
successful as soon as possible after you create it.

When Saved to a USB Device

1. Plug the USB device into a USB port on an available computer.
2. Examine the list of files on the USB device and locate the
\SavedConfigs folder.
3. Open the \SavedConfigs folder and verify that a folder with a name
corresponding to the date and time you created the backup is present.
4. Open the time-stamped folder and confirm that it contains several
configuration files named using the format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is a
number between 0 and 9. Make sure the files are more than 0 bytes in
size.
5. If the configuration files are present and are more than 0 bytes in size,
the backup was successful. Store the USB device in a safe location.
Note: You can zip the files in the folder and email the zip file to others
or make additional copies of the folder for safekeeping.
6. If the configuration files are not present, or if any of the files are 0 bytes
in size, repeat the backup process (Use Manual Backup of the Library
Configuration on page 151) using a different USB device.

When Sent as an Email Attachment

1. Open the email and confirm that it contains a zip file attachment.
2. Open the zip file and confirm that it contains several configuration files
named using the format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is a number between
0 and 9. Make sure the files are more than 0 bytes in size.
3. If the configuration files are present and are more than 0 bytes in size,
the backup was successful. Save the zip file attachment to a safe
location from which you can copy it to a USB device, if needed.
Note: If desired, rename the zip file to indicate the date of the backup.
4. If the email attachment does not contain the configuration files or if one
or more of the files are 0 bytes in size, repeat the backup process (Use
Manual Backup of the Library Configuration on page 151) to send the
email again.
Read Back Up and Protect the Library Metadata on page 515 for additional
information about backing up the library’s configuration information, the
MLM and DLM databases, and BlueScale encryption keys (this
information is collectively referred to as the library metadata).

154
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Setting the Camera IP Address

SETTING THE CAMERA IP ADDRESS

Each BlueScale Vision camera requires a unique IP address. The camera IP
addresses are separate from the IP address used for communications with
the library.
1. Connect an Ethernet cable from the BlueScale Vision camera connector
on the back of the frame containing the camera directly to a computer
or to a network that is accessible to the computer that will be used to
configure the camera. The BlueScale Vision camera connector is located
at the top left of each frame that contains a camera.
Notes:  When you perform the initial IP address configuration for the
camera, it may be helpful to connect a computer directly to
the BlueScale Vision camera connector for one camera at a
time instead of using a connection over a network.
 Depending on how the computer you are using is
configured, you may need to temporarily change the
computer’s network settings so that it can access the camera.
The factory default settings for all cameras are:
IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway
10.10.10.11 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1

Note: In order to comply with EMC requirements, use a shielded

Ethernet cable to connect the camera to your network.

Main or Drive Expansion Frame

BlueScale Vision
camera connector

Media Expansion Frame

BlueScale Vision
camera connector

Figure 83 Location of the camera Ethernet port.

155
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Setting the Camera IP Address

2. Start a web browser session on the computer you will use to configure
the camera.
Note: The software included with the black camera requires ActiveX to
view the streaming video and controls. You must use Internet
Explorer or see Streaming video and camera controls do not
work for the library camera on page 372 for alternate solutions.
3. Enter the camera’s current IP address in the browser’s Address field.
The start page for the BlueScale Vision viewer opens.
Notes:  If this is the first time you are connecting to the camera, your
browser may indicate that an add-on is required.
 If you do not know the current IP address for the camera and
the default IP address does not work, see Discovering and
Setting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address on page 386.

Figure 84 The white BlueScale Vision camera Figure 85 The black BlueScale Vision camera
viewer start page. viewer start page.

4. Using Figure 84 and Figure 85, determine the type of BlueScale vision
camera you have, and use the appropriate section to configure the
camera.
 If you have the white BlueScale vision camera, use Edit the Camera
IP Address - White on page 157.
 If you have the black BlueScale vision camera, use Edit the Camera
IP Address - Black on page 160.

156
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Setting the Camera IP Address

Edit the Camera IP Address - White

1. On the start page, click Administration.

Figure 86 The white BlueScale Vision camera viewer start

page.

2. Log in using administrator (all lower case, case-sensitive) for the user
name; leave the password field blank, and click OK.

10.10.10.11

Figure 87 The Administration

login screen.

157
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Setting the Camera IP Address

3. On the System Settings screen, If desired, change the Camera Name to

something that helps you identify it in your environment. The default
device name for the camera is SLnnnnnn, where nnnnnn are the last 6
digits of the camera’s 12 digit hexadecimal MAC address.

Figure 88 The BlueScale Vision System Settings screen.

158
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Setting the Camera IP Address

4. Select Network. The network connections configuration screen displays.

Figure 89 Configure the camera IP addressing.

5. Select either Obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP) or Use the

following IP address.
If you select Use the following IP address, enter the desired IPv4
address, subnet mask, and default gateway addresses as required for
your network and click Save. The factory defaults are:

IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway

10.10.10.11 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1

6. After saving the new camera configuration verify the settings by

attempting to access the camera at the new IP address (see Using a Web
Browser on page 180).
7. If the library contains multiple cameras, repeat Step 1 on page 157
through Step 6 for each camera. Make a record of the IP address for
each camera and the frame in which each camera is located.

Important If you set the camera to use a fixed IP address, record that address for later
reference. If you do not know the camera’s IP address, you must reset the camera to
use DHCP addressing before you can connect to it. The reset process requires
physically accessing the camera. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for
assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

159
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Setting the Camera IP Address

Edit the Camera IP Address - Black

1. Click Configuration to see the options for configuring the camera.

Figure 90 The viewing software home page.

2. Select System > General settings. The System General Settings screen
displays.

Figure 91 Enter a Host name and set the date if necessary.

3. On the System General Settings screen, enter the following information:

 If desired, change the Host name for the camera so that you can
easily identify it. The default hostname is “BlueScale Vision”. This
name displays at the top of the screen. In general, a hostname
should not contain a space.
 Select to Keep current date and time, Synchronize with computer time,
set the time manually, or set the time automatically by entering the
IP address or domain name for an NTP server.
4. Click Save.

160
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 4 — Configuring the Library Setting the Camera IP Address

5. Select Network > General settings. The Network General Settings

screen displays.

Figure 92 The Network General Settings screen.

6. On the Network General Settings screen, select Get IP address

automatically (DHCP) or Use fixed IP address.
If you select Use fixed IP address, configure the IPv4 or IPv6 address for
the camera. The factory defaults are:

IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway

10.10.10.11 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1

Notes:  The Primary DNS address is required in order to use the

email alert or to access the camera by hostname.
 The Secondary DNS is optional. If provided, it is used if the
Primary DNS is unavailable.
7. Click Save.
8. After saving the new camera configuration verify the settings by
attempting to access the camera at the new IP address or hostname (see
Using a Web Browser on page 180).
9. If the library contains multiple cameras, repeat Step 1 on page 160
through Step 8 for each camera. Make a record of the IP address for
each camera and the frame in which each camera is located.

161
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 CHAPTER 5
Operating the Library
This chapter describes the following procedures for day-to-day operation
of your library:

Topic
Controlling the Library Power page 163
Power On the Library page 163
Power Off the Library page 165
Monitoring Your Library page 167
Check and Respond to Messages page 168
Use Performance Metrics page 171
View Robot Utilization Information page 174
View Drive Status Information page 175
View a Partition’s World Wide Name page 178
Use the BlueScale Vision Camera page 179
Using a USB Device page 183
Continuing Backups While Using a USB page 183
Device
Connect a USB Device to the Library page 184
Controlling the Interior Lights page 185

162
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Controlling the Library Power

CONTROLLING THE LIBRARY POWER

The library power is controlled using the operator panel power button or
the BlueScale Soft Power feature.

Power On the Library

Before powering on the library, make sure that all of the library’s power
cables are plugged into AC outlets and that the AC breaker switches
corresponding to each cable, on the back of the main frame and each drive
expansion frame, are set to the on (up) position.

Important For redundant AC power configurations, connect the primary and secondary input
for each frame to a separate branch circuit, which allows for failover in the event of
a power failure in one of the circuits (see Power Specifications on page 539 for
additional requirements).

Secondary AC input Primary AC input

and breaker switch and breaker switch

Figure 93 Connect the AC inputs and set the breaker switches to

the on position (dual AC2 shown).

163
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Controlling the Library Power

Use the Front Panel Power Button

1. Press and hold the front panel power button until the button’s LED
illuminates and the LCD operator panel turns on.

Power button

Figure 94 Press and hold the front panel power button.

2. Wait while the library completes its power-on sequence. After the
library completes its power-on sequence, the Library Initialization
screen displays (see Figure 50 on page 96). This screen lists the required
initialization steps and current status of the library’s major components
(Robotics, RCM, and LCM). Text boxes provide descriptions about the
currently active tasks.
3. After initialization is complete, the BlueScale login screen displays (see
Log Into the User Interface on page 95).
Note: If the library cannot complete the initialization process, it
generates system messages and enters maintenance mode.
Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for assistance (see
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

Use the Automatic Power-Up After Power Failure Feature

The Automatic Power-Up After Power Failure feature lets you configure
the library to power on without user intervention after a power failure.
Notes:  The Automatic Power-Up After Power Failure feature must
be enabled on the System Setup screen (see Enable
Automatic Power-Up After Power Failure on page 116).
 The library does not automatically power on if it was powered
off using the front panel power button or the Soft Power feature.

164
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Controlling the Library Power

Power Off the Library

Before powering off the library, use the following steps to prepare for shut-
down.
1. Use your storage management software to stop any backups running to
the library.
2. Pause PostScan if it is running (see Pause the PostScan Process on
page 319). Any tapes currently being scanned are returned to their
storage locations.
3. Power off the library using one of the methods described in the
following sections.
Note: If you intend to leave the library powered down for an extended
length of time, set the AC breaker switches on the back of the
library (see Figure 93 on page 163) to the off position after you
power off the library.

Use the Front Panel Power Button

To power off the library, press and hold the front panel power button for
approximately 5 seconds (the button’s LED starts flashing). The library
begins its power-off sequence, which allows the BlueScale software and
components to shut down gracefully.

Use the Soft Power Feature

The Soft Power feature disables the physical power button on the library
front panel and enables the soft power button on the General Status screen.
Using the Soft Power feature gives users with superuser privileges
exclusive control over powering the library off; other types of users cannot
power off the library, either by using the physical power button on the
library front panel or the Soft Power button on the General Status screen.
Notes:  The Soft Power feature is only available from the library’s
front panel touch screen interface; it is not available through
the BlueScale web interface (RLC).
 When you click the Soft Power button, you must respond to a
confirmation message before the library is powered off.
 The Soft Power feature must be enabled on the System Setup
screen before you can use it (see Enable Soft Power on
page 117).
 The feature can only be enabled or disabled by a superuser.
Follow these steps to power off the library using the Soft Power feature.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser privileges (see Log Into the
User Interface on page 95).
2. From the toolbar, access the General Status screen.

165
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Controlling the Library Power

3. Using the stylus, touch the blue power button on the picture of the
library.

Soft power
button

Figure 95 The Soft Power button on the General Status screen.

When the cursor comes near the button, it changes to a pointing finger,
as shown in Figure 95.
4. When you touch the button, the Soft Power Shutdown confirmation
screen displays after a brief delay. Click Continue to power off the
library.

Figure 96 The Soft Power Shutdown confirmation screen.

166
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library

MONITORING YOUR LIBRARY

Overview The BlueScale user interface provides a number of tools for
monitoring the health and performance of the library, its components, and
its media. The quickest way to obtain important information is to check the
icons and bar graphs on the General Status screen (see Status Bar on
page 91). They provide at-a-glance information about the status of major
system components and resource usage, respectively. The icons on the
status bar provide additional system-level status information.
The following table lists where to find additional information about the
health and performance of the library, its components, and its media.

Check... To monitor... For details, see...

System Messages Events that resulted in system messages Check and Respond to Messages
about the library and its operation. below
Performance The performance of your library and its  View Drive Performance Statistics
Metrics drives. on page 171
 View Power Consumption
Statistics on page 173
 View Storage Density Statistics on
page 173
Robot Utilization The percentage of time the robotics are View Robot Utilization Information
Information being used while the library is powered on page 174
on.
Drive Status The operational status, firmware level,  View Drive Status Information on
and cleaning status of the drives. page 175
 Using a Global Spare Drive on
page 410
BlueScale Vision The interior of the library using the Use the BlueScale Vision Camera on
Camera BlueScale vision cameras. page 179
Media Lifecycle The usage and health of MLM-enabled Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using
Management media in the library. Media Lifecycle Management,
(MLM) Note: MLM also provides limited beginning on page 289
health information about media that is
not MLM-enabled.
Drive Lifecycle The usage and health of the LTO drives Chapter 10 – Using Drive Lifecycle
Management (DLM) in the library. Management, beginning on page 336
Hardware Health The health of key library components. Using BlueScale Hardware Health
Monitoring Monitoring on page 372

User Privilege Requirements All users can view system messages, view
performance metrics, and use the BlueScale Vision camera. The user
privileges required to use the other monitoring tools depend on the tool.

167
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library

Check and Respond to Messages

Check the library’s system messages regularly. These messages provide
important information about the library, its operation, and any library
problems. Reviewing the messages is the first step in troubleshooting.
Note: When you configure mail users, you can specify which types of
system messages the library automatically emails to each mail
user. See Configure Mail Users on page 124 for detailed
information.

Use the BlueScale User Interface

Use the following steps to view BlueScale system messages through either
the operator panel or a web browser.
1. Log into the library.
2. Select the System Status icon on the status bar (see Figure 45 on
page 91). The System Messages screen displays.

Figure 97 The System Messages screen.

168
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library

The following table describes the severity ranking for messages.

Message Severity Description Response

Informational The library is working as intended. An No action is required.
event occurred that generated
information about an operation or a
system component.
Example: The utility completed
successfully.
Warning The library is working as intended. An If the event was unexpected,
event occurred that may require attention determine the cause of the event
to keep the library running at 100%. and take remedial steps.
Example: QuickScan did not complete,
but will retry.
Error The library operation is impaired and Determine the cause of the error
requires user intervention. and take remedial steps.
Example: QuickScan did not complete,
and there is a tape stuck in a drive as a
result.
Fatal Error The library experienced an event that Examine any additional
prevents it from continuing operations. information in the message and
Example: The robot is not responding. take the required remedial steps.

3. Read the message(s), and follow any recommended steps.

Note: Some error messages are followed by a series of errors that
provide additional information. To understand the sequence of
events, scroll back to view the first error message that was
produced, then read the others for clarification.
If you need assistance, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
4. When you are finished reading the messages and complete the
appropriate actions, you can select and delete individual messages or
you can delete all of the messages.

Use Syslog
The BlueScale Syslog feature sends all system messages logged by the
library to a previously configured Syslog server using UDP. Syslog is a
standard for forwarding log messages over an Internet Protocol (IP)
computer network. It provides separation of the software that generates
log messages from the system that stores the messages.
Each system message the library sends to the Syslog server contains the
original system message posted by the library and the remedy information
associated with the system message.

169
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library

See Syslog Server IP Address on page 118 for information about entering
the IP address of the Syslog server. Entering a valid IP address enables the
Syslog feature.
When enabled, the BlueScale Syslog feature automatically sends all system
messages posted by the library to a single, previously configured Syslog
server. The library transmits the messages to the Syslog server using the
format:
<Priority>BlueScale_libraryName[PP]:(messageNumber) messageID -
messageText

For example:
<11>Bluescale_LibraryName[0x000001]:(1) 53 - Error Text

where:

Variable Definition
Priority Indicates the priority based on the severity the library assigned to the message.
Priority = Facility * 8 + Level. The Facility for library system messages is always
one.
Library Message Severity Syslog Priority
Informational (Level 6) 14
Warning (Level 4) 12
Error (Level 3) 11
Fatal Error (Level 2) 10
libraryName The name of the library, if configured. If the library name is not configured, this
value is set to “UnknownLibrary.”
Refer to Library Name on page 115 for information about setting the library
name.
PP Indicates the ID number of the process that was being performed by the
library’s BlueScale software when the system message was posted. This ID
number is for internal use only.
messageNumber Indicates the order in which the Syslog server received the messages. The counter
increments each time a message is received, beginning at zero. The counter can be
used to determine whether all messages are arriving at the Syslog server.
messageID Indicates the ID number assigned to the message text.
messageText Shows the actual message posted by the library. Each system message posted by
the library generates two Syslog messages; one for the message text and one for
the remedy text. The two messages have the same message number, which is
included at the beginning of the message.

170
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library

Use Performance Metrics

The library includes the following metrics for monitoring the performance
of your library and its drives.
 View Drive Performance Statistics on this page
 View Power Consumption Statistics on page 173
 View Storage Density Statistics on page 173

View Drive Performance Statistics

The Drive Performance metrics let you monitor the performance of your
drives. This innovative feature helps you optimize drive performance
through load-balancing, tuning your SAN, and identifying performance
bottlenecks.
Note: The Drive Performance Monitoring option is disabled by default.
Enable Drive Performance Monitoring on page 116 provides
instructions for enabling this option.
Use the following steps to view the performance data.
1. Select General > Metrics from the toolbar menu. The screen for the last
metric you viewed displays.
2. Select how you want to view the performance information from the
available options:
 Total Library — The consolidated statistics for all the drives in the
library.
 Partition n — The statistics for the drives in the specified partition.
 Drive n — The statistics for a specific drive.
3. Select either Drive Write Performance or Drive Read Performance from the
Metric drop-down menu.
Note: If you enabled or disabled the Drive Performance Monitor
option when a drive contained a cartridge, the drive is reported
as empty on the Drive Performance screens.

171
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library

4. Click Go. A screen showing the selected metric displays.

Figure 98 The Drive Performance Monitor screen (Write

Performance for the Total Library shown).

5. Alternatively, you can view the Drive Performance metrics by selecting

Configuration > Drives (or DLM) and then clicking Drive Performance.
Note: The Drive Performance button is not present if Drive Performance
Monitoring is not enabled (see Enable Drive Performance
Monitoring on page 116).

Figure 99 The Drives screen.

172
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library

View Power Consumption Statistics

In addition to the Power bar graph on the General Status screen, the
BlueScale EnergyAudit feature provides a configurable graphical display
of the library’s power consumption.
Use the following steps to view the power consumption data for the
library.
1. Select General > Metrics from the toolbar menu. The screen for the last
metric you viewed displays.
2. Select which power consumption metric you want to view from the
Metric drop-down menu:
 Power Consumption (kWh)
 Power Consumption (kWh/Ft2)
 Power Consumption (kWh/Ft3)
 Power Consumption (kWh/TB)
3. Click Go. A screen showing the selected metric displays.

Figure 100 The Power Consumption metrics screen.

View Storage Density Statistics

The Storage Density metrics let you monitor the amount of data your
library is capable of storing based on the number of data cartridges
currently stored in the library.
Use the following steps to view the storage density data for the library.
1. Select General > Metrics from the toolbar menu. The screen for the last
metric you viewed displays.
2. Select Storage Density from the Metric pull-down menu.
3. Select the media type and the unit of measure for the density values.

173
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library

4. Click Go. The Storage Density screen showing the selected metrics
displays.

Figure 101 The Storage Density metrics screen.

View Robot Utilization Information

The Robot Utilization by Hour metric lets you monitor the percentage of
each hour that the library’s robotics are actively operating over the last 24
hours. The data is updated every hour while the library is powered on.
 The Robot Utilization by Hour metric can include up to 24 data points,
one for each hour that data was collected over a 24-hour period. The
first time period begins one full hour after the library is powered on.
Data collected during the first partial hour following power-on is
discarded as invalid data.
 The data is stored in volatile memory and is not retained when the
library is powered off.
Use the following steps to view the robot utilization information.
1. Select General > General Status from the toolbar menu. The General
Status screen displays.
2. Click Robotics to display the Robotics Status screen.

174
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library

3. Select the Usage tab to display the Robot Utilization by Hour metric.

Figure 102 The Robotics Status screen.

View Drive Status Information

The drive status icon on the General Status screen indicates the overall
status of the library’s drives. If the status icon indicates that a drive is
experiencing a problem, view the Drive and Drive Details screens for
detailed information about a specific drive.
The Drive Details screen includes the drive firmware version and the
manufacturer’s serial number, as well as more detailed status information.
From the Drive Details screen you can access the Drive Lifecycle
Management (DLM) report for the drive. See Chapter 10 – Using Drive
Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 336 for detailed information
about DLM.

175
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library

Use the following steps to view information about the individual drives in
the library.
1. Log into the library as a user with administrator or superuser
privileges.
2. Select Configuration > DLM (or Drives if DLM is not enabled) to display
the Drives screen. This screen lists all of the drives in the library, along
with basic information about each drive and the available operations
for each drive.
Note: The operations available for each drive depend on how you are
accessing the BlueScale user interface and whether or not:
 DLM is enabled
 The drive is configured in a partition
 Auto Drive Clean is enabled for the partition

Figure 103 The Drives screen.

3. Click Detail next to the drive for which you want to view detailed
information. The Drive Details screen displays.

Figure 104 The Drive Details screen.

176
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library

The Drive Details screen shows the following information.

This field... Shows...

Drive Health The drive health icon (see Using the Drive Health Icons on page 339).
Drive WWN The Fibre Channel WWN for the drive (see World Wide Names for Drives on
page 75 for detailed information about the WWNs for drives) or the SAS port
identifier for a SAS drive.
Note: This field is not present for SCSI drives.
Spectra Drive SN The location-based serial number for the drive while it is in the library. This
serial number makes it possible to replace one drive with another without
having to reconfigure the storage management software that accesses the drive.
Note: For TS11xx technology drives, the serial number provided in response
to SCSI commands from the host has 00 appended to the end of the number
that displays on the operator panel or is retrieved using XML.
Mfg Drive SN The serial number assigned to the physical drive by the drive manufacturer.
This serial number is required for tracking the drives when they are not inside
the library.
Drive FW The firmware version being used by the drive itself.
DCM FW The firmware version being used by the drive sled that houses the drive.
POST Status Shows the results of the drive’s POST (Power-On Self-Test).
Cleaning Status Shows the status of the drive’s Cleaning Tape Alert flag.
Library-based Shows the last time that the drive was cleaned using the Auto Drive Clean
Clean feature.
Note: This field is only present when a cleaning partition is associated with
the storage partition containing the drive.
LED Status Shows the state of the drive’s front panel status LED (see Interpreting the Status
LED Information on page 424).
Display Character Shows the code displayed on the drive’s single-character display (SCD) or
(SCD) or Display multi-character display (MCD) (see Interpreting the SCD and MCD Codes on
Message (MCD) page 424).
Cartridge Status Indicates whether the drive is configured to compress data as it is written and
whether the drive contains a cartridge.
Note: No tape motion indicates either that the drive is empty or, if the drive
contains a cartridge, that the tape is not moving.

4. From the Drive Details screen click DLM to access the Drive Lifecycle
Management (DLM) report for the drive (see Viewing and Saving a
Detailed Drive Health Report on page 341).
5. Use the information on the Drive Details screen and the DLM report to
troubleshoot drive problems (see Troubleshooting Drives on page 420).
If the drive is in an error state, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

177
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library

View a Partition’s World Wide Name

When monitoring connections to multiple libraries through a Fibre
Channel switch, knowing the World Wide Name (WWN) for a storage
partition is useful for identifying a particular library.
Note: From the Fibre Channel switch, each storage partition defined in
the library appears as an independent library connected to the
Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric.
To view the WWN for each storage partition configured in the library, select
Configuration > Partitions. The Shared Library Services screen displays.
Note: If multiple drives are configured as exporting controllers in a
partition there are multiple WWNs for the partition. Click
Summary to display the Partition Settings screen, which lists all
of the WWNs.

Figure 105 The WWN assigned to the partition.

See World Wide Names for Fibre Channel Partitions on page 72 for
detailed information about the partition’s WWN.

178
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library

Use the BlueScale Vision Camera

The BlueScale Vision camera and web-based BlueScale Vision viewer let
you see the interior of the library to observe import and export operations,
tape mounts, cartridge moves, and robotic operations in real time.
Use the following steps to launch the BlueScale Vision viewer.
1. Connect an Ethernet cable from the BlueScale Vision camera connector
on the back of the frame to an Ethernet network.

Main Frame or Drive Expansion Frame

BlueScale Vision
camera connector

Media Expansion Frame

BlueScale Vision
camera connector

Figure 106 Location of the camera Ethernet port.

2. Connect to the BlueScale Vision viewer.

 Using the Camera Icon
a. Using a remote connection, log into the library’s BlueScale web
interface using a web browser.
Note: The software included with the black camera requires
ActiveX to view the streaming video and controls. You
must use Internet Explorer or see Streaming video and
camera controls do not work for the library camera on
page 372 for alternate solutions.

179
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library

b. Select the camera icon on the status bar.

Notes:  The camera icons used to launch the BlueScale Vision viewer
are not present until you enter the IP address for up to three
cameras in the System Configuration screen (see BlueScale
Vision IP Address on page 119).
 The order of the camera icons corresponds to the IP Address
fields in the System Setup screen and does not necessarily
have any relationship to the physical position of the cameras
in the library. Make sure that you know which frame contains
which camera.

Camera icon
Figure 107 The Status bar showing the Camera icon.

 Using a Web Browser

a. Determine the IP address of the camera you want to use (see
Setting the Camera IP Address on page 155 and Discovering and
Setting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address on page 386).
b. Enter the camera’s IP address in your browser’s address field.
Note: The software included with the black camera requires
ActiveX to view the streaming video and controls. You
must use Internet Explorer or see Streaming video and
camera controls do not work for the library camera on
page 372 for alternate solutions.
3. The start page for the BlueScale Vision viewer opens.
Note: Depending on the firmware of the black camera, you may need
to log into the camera. The default username is root. The default
password is Spectra123.

Figure 108 The white BlueScale Vision camera Figure 109 The black BlueScale Vision camera
viewer start page. viewer start page.

180
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library

4. Using Figure 108 and Figure 109 on page 180, determine the type of
BlueScale vision camera you have, and see the appropriate section for
information on controls for viewing the inside of the library.
 If you have the white BlueScale vision camera, use Using the White
BlueScale Vision Camera.
 If you have the black BlueScale vision camera, use Using the Black
BlueScale Vision Camera on page 182.

Using the White BlueScale Vision Camera

Select View Video on the start page to see the camera’s view of the library’s
interior.

Figure 110 The interior of the library as viewed by the

BlueScale Vision camera.

The buttons on the screen let you control the motion of the camera lens.
Note: There may be a short delay after you click on the icon for the
desired motion. Wait a couple of seconds for the camera to
respond instead of clicking again.
Button Function
Moves the camera lens through the Preset positions in the
sequence defined by the Camera Administrator.
Pan the camera lens from left to right.

Move the camera lens to the Motion Detection Preset position.

Point the camera lens to the position corresponding to the arrow

on the button.

Read the BlueScale Vision Camera User Guide for detailed information about
configuring and using the BlueScale Vision camera. This guide also
describes installing and using the camera’s Viewing/Recording Utility.

181
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Monitoring Your Library

Using the Black BlueScale Vision Camera

The screen displays the camera’s view of the library’s interior.

Figure 111 The interior of the library as viewed by the

BlueScale Vision camera.

The buttons on the screen let you control the viewing area. The following
table describes the most commonly used buttons.
Note: There may be a short delay after you click on the icon for the
desired change. Wait a couple of seconds for the camera to
respond instead of clicking again.
Button Function
Moves the camera view of a zoomed image in the direction
corresponding to the arrow on the button. These button only operate
after the camera view is zoomed in. Click the home button in the
center of the position arrows to return to the default view.
Zooms in and out. Click the home button, in the center of the
position arrows, to return to the default view.
Captures and saves still images. The captured images are
displayed in a pop-up window.

Starts recording a video clip to your computer in MP4 file format.

Ends recording.

Read the Vivotek FD8361 Fixed Dome Network Camera User’s Manual for
detailed information about the remaining buttons and configuring and
using the BlueScale Vision camera.

182
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Using a USB Device

USING A USB DEVICE

You can plug a USB device into the USB port on the library’s operator panel
(T950B only) or into a USB port on the LCM for transferring information
such as backing up or restoring the library configuration, backing up or
restoring the MLM and DLM databases, importing or exporting BlueScale
encryption keys, gathering log files, or to upload BlueScale software
updates to the library.

Important After connecting a USB device, allow time for the device to mount before
continuing.

Important Do not leave a USB device plugged into the library control module indefinitely,
unless specifically directed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support.

One Spectra Logic USB device is shipped with the library, but most types
of USB devices work.

Important The library only recognizes FAT-formatted, not NTFS-formatted, USB devices.
If you are unable to access a USB device from the library, remove it and use a
different one.

Continuing Backups While Using a USB Device

When using a USB device, keep the following requirements in mind:

It is... to continue backups while...

Safe Exporting or importing a BlueScale encryption key to a USB device.
Saving library configurations and other information to a USB device.
Capturing traces and saving the trace results data to a USB device.
Not Safe Restoring a saved library configuration and other information from a USB
device.
Updating the library BlueScale software using an update package on a USB
device.

183
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Using a USB Device

Connect a USB Device to the Library

Important Unless specifically instructed to do so, do not connect a USB device to the USB port
on the RCM.

Notes:  When connecting the USB device to the LCM, make sure that
you do not inadvertently connect it to the RCM. See Figure 18
on page 47 to identify the LCM.
 The library only recognizes FAT-formatted, not NTFS-
formatted, USB devices.
 Not all USB devices are compatible with the library. If you
are unable to access a USB device from the library, remove it
and use a different one. If the LCM stops responding after
you insert an incompatible USB device, reboot the LCM as
described in Reset the LCM or RCM on page 383.
 Plug the USB device into the LCM before beginning a
procedure that reads or writes data to allow time for device
recognition. For many utilities, the option to read from or
write data to a USB device is not available if a USB device
was not plugged into the LCM and allowed enough time to
mount before you select the utility.
Use the following steps to connect a USB device to the library.
1. Locate the USB port you want to use on the T950B operator panel or LCM.
2. Plug the USB device into the USB port and allow time for the device to
mount.

USB port
Figure 112 Location of the USB port on the Spectra PC.

USB ports
Figure 113 Location of the USB ports on the Spectra LS.

184
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 5 — Operating the Library Controlling the Interior Lights

CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR LIGHTS

The LED light panels inside the library can be powered off if you are not
using a BlueScale Vision camera to monitor library operations. Use the
following steps to power-off the interior lights.
1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools to display the
Maintenance Tools screen.

Figure 114 The Maintenance Tools screen.

3. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.

4. Scroll down and select Turn Interior Lights Off. The Utilities screen
refreshes to show a description of the Turn Interior Lights Off utility.

Figure 115 The Utilities screen.

5. Select Run Utility to turn off the LED light panels in the library.
6. To turn the interior lights on again, repeat Step 1 through Step 5, using
the Turn Interior Lights On utility.

185
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 CHAPTER 6
Configuring and Managing Partitions
This chapter describes how to use the BlueScale partition wizard to
configure and manage partitions in the library.

Topic
Partition Configuration Overview page 187
Partition Types and Requirements page 187
Preparing to Configure Partitions page 192
Creating a Cleaning Partition page 194
Define the Initial Cleaning Partition Settings page 194
Configure the Chambers for the Partition page 196
Creating a Storage Partition page 196
Define the Initial Storage Partition Settings page 196
Configure Advanced Settings page 199
Enter Storage Partition Name and Media Type page 199
Select the Robotic Control Path page 200
Assign Global Spare Drives page 202
Allocate Chambers and Drives page 204
Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and page 206
PostScan
Select the Encryption Mode page 209
Configure the Drive Fibre Channel Addressing page 212
Specify the Partition Users page 213
Configure the Robotic Path Visibility page 214
Configure Drive Visibility page 214
Configure the Port Addressing for the page 215
Controllers
Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings page 218
Configure Advanced Partition Settings page 224
Configuring Emulation page 221
Enable Time-based Access Order System page 223
(TAOS)
Modifying an Existing Partition page 224
Deleting a Partition page 229

186
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Partition Configuration Overview

PARTITION CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW

Before you start configuring partitions in your library, it may be helpful to
read the following:
 Media Pools, beginning on page 57, to understand how the storage
chambers in the library are allocated.
 Library Partitions, beginning on page 59, to learn how the library uses
storage partitions to create multiple virtual libraries.
 MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 296 to learn how the MLM
PreScan and PostScan features interact with the storage partitions.

Partition Types and Requirements

The library supports two types of partitions: storage partitions and
cleaning partitions. When configuring partitions, keep in mind the
requirements in the following sections.

Global Considerations
The following information applies to both cleaning and storage partitions.
User Privilege Requirements Only users with superuser or administrator
privileges can create or modify partitions.
Background operations You cannot create, modify, or delete a partition if
the library is actively running a Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or
PostScan operation, or if the library is performing certain other
background processes (for example, importing or exporting magazines
using the bulk TAP or updating drive firmware using the Update Drive
Firmware wizard).
If you do not want to wait for a Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or
PostScan operation to complete, you can stop the Media Auto Discovery or
PreScan operation or pause the PostScan operation. For other background
operations, wait for the process to complete.
 To stop Media Auto Discovery or PreScan, click Stop Discovery on the
Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen (see Stop the Discovery
Process on page 310).
 To pause PostScan for one hour, click Pause PostScan on the Media
Lifecycle Management Tools screen (see Pause the PostScan Process on
page 319).

187
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Partition Configuration Overview

Configuring and Using Cleaning Partitions and Auto

Drive Clean
Cleaning Partition Overview A cleaning partition provides permanent
storage for cleaning cartridges inside the library. This special-purpose
partition is only used when Auto Drive Clean is enabled for one or more
storage partitions and can be shared by multiple storage partitions. The
cleaning partition does not have any drives associated with it.
Configuring a cleaning partition does not require an SLS activation key;
nor does a cleaning partition count against the partition maximum for the
library. If fewer than the physically present chambers are licensed with a
Capacity On Demand (CoD) key, the cleaning partition uses any chambers
that are not licensed. The chambers assigned to the cleaning partition do
not count against the licensed capacity. If all of the physically present
chambers are licensed, the cleaning partition can use any chambers that were
not already assigned to another partition.
Auto Drive Clean Functional Overview Auto Drive Clean uses the cleaning
cartridges stored in the cleaning partition to provide automatic, library-
based cleaning of LTO drives without user intervention. Automated drive
cleaning results in fewer failed tape read/write operations and is the
preferred method for cleaning drives. See Cleaning Cartridge Tracking on
page 295 for information about how Media Lifecycle Management (MLM)
manages the cleaning cartridges in the cleaning partition.
Note: Drive cleaning operations that are initiated by the storage
management software cannot use the cleaning cartridges stored
in a cleaning partition; the cartridges are not accessible to the
storage management software.
When the drive is unloaded in response to a host request and the data
cartridge is moved to its storage location, the library queries the drive to
determine if it needs cleaning. If cleaning is required, the library delays
notifying the host that the SCSI move command for the unloaded data
cartridge is complete while it performs an automatic drive cleaning.
During the delay, the library retrieves a cleaning cartridge from the
cleaning partition and inserts it into the drive. When the cleaning is
complete, the library returns the cleaning cartridge to the cleaning
partition and then notifies the host that the SCSI move command for the
unloaded data cartridge is complete.
Automatic cleaning of drives does not occur more than once in any 12 hour
period. If the next data cartridge load/unload cycle occurs within this
12 hour waiting period, a cleaning is not attempted unless the previous
cleaning attempt failed due to an expired cleaning cartridge. When a
cleaning fails, the cleaning is reattempted the next time the host unloads a
data cartridge from the drive if the cleaning partition contains a good
cleaning cartridge. If you want to clean the drive immediately after you
receive the notification that a cleaning failed, you can initiate a manual
cleaning (see Manually Cleaning a Drive on page 476).

188
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Partition Configuration Overview

Configuration Requirements for a Cleaning Partition and Auto Drive Clean

 Cleaning partitions do not count against the partition maximum.
 A cleaning partition can be shared by multiple storage partitions as
long as the cleaning cartridges are compatible with the drive types in
each storage partition.
 Cleaning partitions use chambers that are not licensed with a Capacity
On Demand (CoD) key. If all of the chambers are licensed, a cleaning
partition uses any chambers that are not already assigned to another
partition.
 Configuring a cleaning partition and assigning it to one or more storage
partitions automatically enables the Auto Drive Clean feature for those
storage partitions (see Creating a Cleaning Partition on page 194 and
Allocate Chambers and Drives on page 204).
 The drives in the storage partitions with an associated cleaning
partition are cleaned automatically when a drive indicates that it needs
cleaning. In addition, you can use the BlueScale user interface to initiate
a manual cleaning. See Manually Cleaning a Drive on page 476.
 The option to perform a manual cleaning operation using a cleaning
cartridge in a cleaning partition is only available for drives that are in
storage partitions associated with a cleaning partition.
 The cleaning cartridges in the cleaning partition are inaccessible to the
storage management software. If your storage management software
supports automated drive cleaning and you plan to use this method to
clean the drives, store a TeraPack magazine (not a Maintenance
TeraPack magazine) containing one or more cleaning cartridges in the
storage partition. The storage management software can then access the
cleaning cartridges when needed.

Important If you store cleaning cartridges in the storage partition, make sure that they are
identified as required by your storage management software to prevent the storage
management software from attempting to use the cartridges for writing or reading data.

 The cleaning cartridges used in a cleaning partition must be stored in

specially labeled Maintenance TeraPack magazines.
 If you do not configure a cleaning partition and associate it with the
storage partitions, you must use your storage management software to
perform the cleaning or use the BlueScale user interface to manually
move a cleaning cartridge to the drive that needs cleaning (see
Manually Cleaning a Drive on page 476).
 If you configure a Global Spare drive for a partition, it is cleaned using
a cleaning cartridge stored in the cleaning partition. If a cleaning
partition is not associated with the storage partition, the Global Spare
drive must be cleaned manually (see Manually Cleaning a Drive on
page 476).

189
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Partition Configuration Overview

Configuring and Using Storage Partitions

 You can configure storage partitions either before or after you configure
cleaning partitions. However, if you know that you want to use Auto
Drive Clean with a storage partition, it is easier to configure the
cleaning partition before you configure the storage partition. If you
choose to create the storage partition before you create the cleaning
partition, you need to modify the storage partition to assign the
cleaning partition to it (thereby enabling Auto Drive Clean for the
partition).
 The library requires, at a minimum, one storage partition to be
configured before you can use the library. Each storage partition must
have a minimum of one chamber assigned to the storage pool. Each
storage partition must also have at least one drive assigned to it.
 When using multiple tape technology generations, Spectra Logic
strongly recommends configuring separate partitions for each
generation.
 When using Fibre Channel, SAS, and SCSI drives in the library, the
different drive interface types must be in separate partitions.
 Chamber Availability — The number of chambers available for a
storage partition depends on how many chambers in the library are
licensed, how many chambers are used by other partitions, and
whether or not Thin Provisioning is enabled.
 If Thin Provisioning is not enabled, the library automatically makes
any licensed chambers that are not already configured for use in
another partition available to be configured in the new partition. If
all of the licensed chambers in your library are already assigned to
existing partitions, you must modify one or more partitions to make
chambers available for creating a new partition (see Modifying an
Existing Partition on page 224). You may also be able to license more
chambers or make hardware upgrades that increase the storage
capacity of the library (see Hardware Expansion and Upgrades on
page 532).
 If Thin Provisioning is enabled, up to a combined total of 20,000
elements, including storage slots (not chambers), entry/exit slots
(not chambers), and drives are available for each partition, no
matter how many chambers are licensed or already assigned to
existing partitions. Using Thin Provisioning, it is possible for the
combined configured number of storage slots in all partitions to
exceed the licensed or physically available number of slots. Empty
slots are inaccessible elements until a TeraPack magazine is
imported into a partition. At that time, the slots are made accessible
to only the partition into which the magazine was imported.

190
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Partition Configuration Overview

 Restrictions on the Number of Partitions — By default, you can only

create a single storage partition. If you need additional storage
partitions, you must purchase a Shared Library Services (SLS)
activation key. Refer to Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options,
and Upgrades on page 110 for information about purchasing and
entering activation keys.
Libraries running BlueScale software versions earlier than
BlueScale12.6.3, are limited to eight storage partitions.
 Libraries using BlueScale12.6.3 or later can have a maximum of 16
storage partitions.
Notes:  Cleaning partitions do not require an SLS activation key and
do not count toward the partition maximum.
 The more partitions in a library, the longer each move can
take. If move requests can be sent to several partitions at
once, you may need to increase the timeout setting in your
storage management software.
 Restrictions on Exporters — Each partition is exported by an F-QIP/
RIM or a drive.
 Libraries using a BlueScale version earlier than 12.6.3 can only use
an F-QIP/RIM to export partitions.
 For libraries using BlueScale12.6.3 through 12.6.45.3, the library is
limited to six drive exporters. If there are fewer than six drive
exporters, additional partitions can have RIM or F-QIP exporters
until you reach the partition limit.
 For BlueScale12.7.01 through 12.7.06.03, the maximum number of
physical exporting devices (drives or F-QIP/RIM) supported by the
library is six. If the library contains RIMs or F-QIPs in excess of the
six exporters, the additional RIMs or F-QIPs can be used for failover
(see Controller Failover on page 79).
 For BlueScale12.8.05 and later, the maximum number of exporting
controllers (QIPs, RIMs, and drives) supported by the library is 12.
 If the library has Thin Provisioning enabled, a single F-QIP or RIM
can export 60,000 elements. A single RIM2 does not have this limit.
 If desired, you can configure multiple exporting controllers of
similar type (RIMs and F-QIPs, or drives) to a single partition and
use your host software to export the same changer interface over the
controllers to provide redundancy.
 A single RIM or F-QIP can export up to eight partitions, but still
only count as one exporter; a single RIM2 can export up to 16
partitions, but still only count as one exporter.

191
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Preparing to Configure Partitions

PREPARING TO CONFIGURE PARTITIONS

Before you begin configuring partitions, gather the information listed in
the following table.
Note: Each chamber holds a single magazine.

Component Description
Media type Determine the type of media (for example, LTO or LTO Clean) to be used in the
partition. You can only select from media types that are compatible with the
drives already installed in the library. If there are multiple drive technologies
installed in the library, the media type you select determines the type of drive
that can be used in the partition. Selecting a “Clean” media type starts the
process of creating a cleaning partition for use with the specified media type.
Note: Only one media type can be used in each partition. Each media type has
its own unique TeraPack magazine and TeraPack barcode.
Cleaning partition: If you plan to use the Auto Drive Clean feature, determine the number of
number of chambers to be used for the cleaning partition. A cleaning partition can be
chambers shared by multiple storage partitions as long as the cleaning cartridges are
compatible with the drives in the storage partitions. See Configuring and Using
Cleaning Partitions and Auto Drive Clean on page 188 for information about
using cleaning partitions.
Entry/Exit pool: Determine the number of chambers to be used for the partition’s entry/exit
number of pool. See Entry/Exit pool on page 58 for information about how the entry/exit
chambers pool is used.
Storage pool: Determine the number of chambers to be used for the partition’s storage pool.
number of See Storage pool on page 58 for information about how the storage pool is used.
chambers
Drives assigned Determine which drives to assign to the partition. Only drives that are already
to the storage installed in the library and are compatible with the media type you select are
partition available. Each storage partition must have at least one drive assigned to it.
Global Spares Determine which drives to designate as Global Spares if you plan to use this
feature. See Assign Global Spare Drives on page 202 for detailed information
about the requirements for using Global Spares.
Important: If you plan to use one of the PostScan features that uses a Global
Spare, one or more Global Spare drives must be configured for the partition.
Note: SAS drives cannot be configured as Global Spares.
PreScan and Decide whether or not you want the library to scan the cartridges in the
PostScan partition for media errors. See Using PreScan on page 310 and Using PostScan
on page 312 for detailed information about the PreScan and PostScan features.
Encryption mode Decide whether or not to encrypt data in the partition and what type of
encryption and encryption key management to use. The Encryption screen
does not display unless you are logged into the library as an encryption user
and have either created one or more BlueScale encryption keys or configured a
Spectra SKLM or KMIP server. See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User
Guide for details.

192
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Preparing to Configure Partitions

Component Description
Robotic control Decide on the exporting controller (LTO-5 or later generation tape drive, RIM,
path or F-QIP) for the library’s robotics.
Important: If the exporting controller is used by other partitions, wait for
any moves in progress to complete, and make the controller offline to all
host applications before creating a new partition.
Notes:
 If you plan to select both ports on the exporting controller, make sure that the
software used with the partition supports using multiple control paths and
that the ports are cabled correctly. Selecting both ports provides redundancy,
but requires software that supports two control paths to the robotics.
 You can select multiple similar exporting controllers (RIMs and F-QIPs, or
drives), and export the same changer interface over them to provide
redundancy, as long as your storage management software supports this.
These multiple paths cannot be used at the same time.
 For libraries using BlueScale12.6.3 through 12.6.45.3, the library is limited to
six drive exporters. If there are fewer than six drive exporters, additional
partitions can have RIM or F-QIP exporters until you reach the partition
limit.
 For BlueScale12.7.01 through 12.7.06.03, the maximum number of physical
exporting devices (drives or F-QIP/RIM) supported by the library is six. If the
library contains RIMs or F-QIPs in excess of the six exporters, the additional
RIMs or F-QIPs can be used for failover (see Controller Failover on page 79).
 For BlueScale12.8.05 and later, the maximum number of exporting controllers
(QIPs, RIMs, and drives) supported by the library is 12.
 A single RIM can export up to eight partitions, but still only count as one
exporter; a single RIM2 can export up to 16 partitions, but still only count as
one exporter.
Controller port If the robotic control path is provided by a RIM or F-QIP, decide what port
addressing addressing (soft addressing or Loop ID) and Fibre mode (Loop, Fabric, or Auto-
negotiate) each port on the controller uses. If you select soft addressing, each
Fibre Channel port is assigned a unique address when it connects to the Fibre
Channel arbitrated loop, fabric, or SAN. If you do not use soft addressing, each
port uses the fixed Loop ID you set.
Note: If the library uses F-QIPs to provide the robotic control path and Fibre
Channel connectivity for SCSI drives, you must separately configure the port
addressing for the F-QIP used to provide the robotic control path and for any
additional F-QIPs used to provide connectivity for the drives (see Configure the
Port Addressing for the Controllers on page 215).
Direct-attached For each Fibre Channel drive, decide whether to use soft addressing or an
Fibre Channel drive assigned Loop ID. If you select soft addressing, each Fibre Channel port is
addressing identified by an address assigned to the drive when it connects to the Fibre
Channel arbitrated loop, fabric, or SAN. If you do not use soft addressing, each
port uses the fixed Loop ID you set.
Note: The library does not support SCSI drives direct-attached to a host. All
SCSI drives attach through an F-QIP (not a RIM) to the host. See Drive visibility
below.

193
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Cleaning Partition

Component Description
Drive visibility If a partition includes SCSI drives, decide whether the drives connected to each
F-QIP are visible (accessible) to external hosts through one or both of the F-QIP
Fibre Channel ports.
Note: If you select both, make sure that the storage management software can
handle server contention over drive use resulting from redundant paths to a
drive.

CREATING A CLEANING PARTITION

The following sections describe using the BlueScale partition wizard to
create a cleaning partition for your library. If you know that you want to
use Auto Drive Clean with a storage partition, it is easier to configure the
cleaning partition before you configure the storage partition(s). If you
choose to create the storage partitions before you create the cleaning
partition, Auto Drive Clean is not enabled until you modify the storage
partitions to assign a cleaning partition to them.
Note: If you want to configure the storage partitions first, skip to
Creating a Storage Partition on page 196.

Define the Initial Cleaning Partition Settings

1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display the
Shared Library Services screen.
 If one or more partitions are already created, the existing partitions
are listed in alphabetical order. Click New to display the Name and
Media Type screen.
Note: If the New button is not displayed then all chambers in the
library are allocated. You need to delete a partition or edit
an existing partition to free up chambers, or make
hardware upgrades that increase the storage capacity of
the library before you can create another partition.

Figure 116 Click New on the Shared Library Services screen to

begin creating the cleaning partition.

194
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Cleaning Partition

 If the library does not currently have any partitions configured,

select Manually create a partition, then click New to display the
Name and Media Type screen.

Important Do not select the Automatically create a partition option. Doing so configures a
storage partition using the majority of the licensed chambers. You then need to
modify the storage partition to make chambers available for a cleaning partition.

Figure 117 Select Manually create a partition.

3. Enter a name for the partition and select LTO Clean or TS11x0 Clean as
the media type.

Figure 118 Enter a name for the partition and select LTO
Clean or TS11x0 Clean to create a cleaning partition.

For this field... Do the following...

Name Enter a unique, descriptive name to identify the partition as a cleaning
partition. Names can be any length and can include @ - _ /. and the space
character. Partition names over 32 characters causes a scroll bar to display on
some screens and are not recommended.
Note: The default name for a cleaning partition is “Cleaning n”, where n is a
number. The partition names are listed alphabetically on many of the BlueScale
screens. If you want the cleaning partitions to be listed after the storage
partitions, precede the name with a “z” or “_”.
Media Type Select LTO Clean or TS11x0 Clean to create a cleaning partition.

195
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

Configure the Chambers for the Partition

1. From the Name and Media Type screen, click Next. The Chambers and
Drives screen displays.

Figure 119 Specify the number of chambers for the cleaning

partition.

2. Enter the number of chambers you want to assign to the cleaning

partition.
3. Proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 218.

CREATING A STORAGE PARTITION

The following sections describe using the BlueScale partition wizard to
create a new storage partition.
Note: If your library uses E-QIPs to provide network connectivity, refer
to the documentation that accompanied your library when you
received it for information about configuring E-QIP-based
storage partitions.

Define the Initial Storage Partition Settings

If you did not yet create any partitions on the library, you can choose to
either have the BlueScale partition wizard automatically create a single
storage partition that uses all or most of the licensed chambers and
installed drives or you can use the wizard to manually create storage
partitions to your own specifications.

Important The drives you plan to use in the partition must be installed in the library before
you start configuring the partition.

Important Components not configured in a partition may not display in the BlueScale
interface for a few minutes after library initialization.

196
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

Automatically Create a Partition Use the following steps to have the

BlueScale partition wizard automatically create a single storage partition.
The partition uses all installed drives, has a single chamber assigned to the
entry/exit pool, and has all or most of the remaining licensed chambers
assigned to the storage pool. If the entire library is licensed, one chamber
per frame is left out of the partition to optimize tape movements.
1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display the
Shared Library Services screen.
3. Select Automatically create a partition from the initial Shared Library
Services screen (see Figure 120 on page 198) and click New.
Notes:  This option is only available if all of the drives in the library
are of the same type (LTO or TS11xx technology) and there
are currently no partitions, including cleaning partitions.
 If you want to use Auto Drive Clean with the partition and
the library does not contain unlicensed chambers, you need
to modify the partition after it is created to remove some of
the chambers assigned to it so that you can create a cleaning
partition.
 If you want to use the Global Spare option with the partition,
you need to modify the partition after it is created to
unassign one or more of the drives that were automatically
assigned to the partition, and then reassign those drives as
Global Spares.
 If you want to use encryption with the partition, you need to
modify the partition after it is created to enable encryption
(see the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide).
 If the library includes a bulk TAP for importing and
exporting magazines, you may want to modify the partition
after it is created to reassign some of the chambers assigned
to the storage pool to provide additional chambers in the
entry/exit pool.
4. Continue with Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on
page 218.
Manually Create a Partition Use the following steps to create a storage
partition using the partition wizard.
1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. If you want
to configure encryption in the partition, you must also log in as an
encryption user (see the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for
more details).

197
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display the
Shared Library Services screen.
 If one or more partitions already exist, the existing partitions are
listed in alphabetical order. Click New to display the Name and
Media Type screen.
Note: If the New button is not displayed, then all chambers in
the library are allocated or the maximum number of
partitions already exist. You need to delete or edit an
existing partition to free up chambers, license more
chambers, or make hardware upgrades that increase the
storage capacity of the library before you can create
another partition.

Figure 120 Click New on the Shared Library Services screen to

begin creating the storage partition.

 If the library does not currently have any partitions configured,

select Manually create a partition and click New to display the Name
and Media Type screen.

Figure 121 Select Manually create a partition on the Shared

Library Services screen when there are no partitions.

198
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

Configure Advanced Settings

If necessary, click Advanced to configure advanced partition settings. See
Configure Advanced Partition Settings on page 221 for a description of the
advanced options and instructions for configuring them.

Advanced partition settings should only be used when recommended by Spectra

Caution Logic Technical Support.

Otherwise, continue with Enter Storage Partition Name and Media Type.

Enter Storage Partition Name and Media Type

Enter a name for the storage partition and select the media type.
Note: If the storage partition media type is grayed out, then all licensed
chambers are assigned to partitions. Edit an existing partition to
free up chambers or purchase a Capacity on Demand key to
increase the number of available storage chambers.

Figure 122 Enter a name for the partition and select the
media type.

For this field... Do the following...

Name Enter a unique, descriptive name to identify the partition. Names can be any
length and can include @ - _ /. and the space character. Partition names over 32
characters causes a scroll bar to display on some screens and are not
recommended.
The default name for a storage partition is “Partition n”, where n is a number.
Note: In many of the BlueScale screens, the partitions are listed alphabetically.
Keep this in mind when naming your partitions.

199
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

For this field... Do the following...

Media Type Select LTO to create a storage partition that uses LTO drives and media. Select
TS11x0 to create a storage partition that uses TS11xx technology drives and
media.
Note: If your library contains a different drive technology, select the media
type that corresponds to that drive technology.

Select the Robotic Control Path

Controllers in the library are used to provide the robotic control path for
the partition. The controller “exports” the partition to the hosts, receiving
and processing the robotic motion commands sent from the host to move
tapes. RIMs, F-QIPs, and LTO-5 or later generation tape drives can act as
controllers.
Notes:  A RIM is identified as an F-QIP in the Robotic Control Path
screen and other screens that reference controllers. See RIM
and F-QIP Identifiers on page 67 for additional information
about the RIM identifier.
 Using an LTO-5 or later generation tape drive for the robotic
control path is supported in BlueScale12.6.3 and later.
Partitions with greater than 930 slots, or spanning more than
one frame, should use a RIM or F-QIP for the robotic control
path. Exceeding this number with a drive providing the
robotic control path may cause an inventory operation to
time out in your data storage software.
 A TS11xx technology drive cannot provide the robotic
control path. TS11xx technology partitions must use a RIM.
 You can select multiple similar exporting controllers
(F-QIPs/RIMs, or drives), and export the same changer
interface over them to provide redundancy, as long as your
storage management software can support this. You cannot
use multiple paths at the same time.
 If a partition uses multiple exporting controllers, the
partition cannot use QuickScan.
 For libraries using BlueScale12.6.3 through 12.6.45.3, the
library is limited to six drive exporters. If there are fewer than
six drive exporters, additional partitions can have RIM or F-
QIP exporters until you reach the partition limit described
above.
 For BlueScale12.7.01 through BlueScale12.7.06.03, the
maximum number of exporting controllers (QIPs, RIMs, and
drives) supported by the library is six.

200
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

 For BlueScale12.8.05 and later, the maximum number of

exporting controllers (QIPs, RIMs, and drives) supported by
the library is 12.
 The library does not support selecting drives and a RIM or
F-QIP to export the partition.
Use the following instructions to select the robotic control path:
1. From the Name and Media Type screen, click Next. The Robotic Control
Path screen displays a list of the controllers currently installed in the
library.

Figure 123 Select the exporting controller.

2. Select the controller(s) to provide the control path for the robotics.

Important If you want to use the controller failover feature for RIMs or F-QIPs (see Configure
Controller Failover on page 136), keep the following requirements in mind:
 You must have at least two controllers (RIMs or F-QIPs) installed in the library.
 If the partition uses SCSI drives, you cannot use the F-QIP that provides
connectivity for the SCSI drives in the failover pair. A minimum of three
controllers are required for this type of configuration.
 If you configured controller failover before you configured the storage partition,
select the primary controller in the failover pair to provide the robotic control path.

Important Do not select more than one drive to provide the robotic control path unless you
know your storage management software can support this.

Important If you select two different generations of drives to provide the robotic control path,
then you are not able to assign a Global Spare to the partition because all drives in a
partition with a Global Spare must match the technology generation of the Global
Spare.

201
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

Assign Global Spare Drives

The Global Spare option lets you remotely substitute a working drive for a
failed one using a spare drive in the library. Having a Global Spare drive in
the library lets you continue your backup operations and replace the failed
drive the next time you are physically present at the library. See Using a
Global Spare Drive on page 410 for instructions on how to use the Global
Spare drive in place of a failed drive.
Requirements Before you can configure the Global Spare option, the
following requirements must be met:
 The partition must use direct-attached Fibre Channel LTO or TS11xx
technology drives. The Global Spare feature is not available for use
with other drive technologies.
 In addition to the drives assigned to the partition for use by the host
software, the library must have direct-attached Fibre Channel drives
available for use as spares in the partition.
 All of the drives in a partition with a Global Spare must match the
technology and generation of the Global Spare.
 The drives that are configured as Global Spares must be connected to
the same Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric as the drives they
would replace. You may need to reconfigure your switch to access the
Global Spare drive.
Partition Requirements When configuring the partition, keep the
following in mind:
 The type of drive you select as the Global Spare determines the type of
drives that you can assign to the partition.
 The library prevents you from selecting drives that cannot be used as
Global Spares, including drives already selected as controllers.
 Although a Global Spare drive can be shared by multiple partitions, the
drive can only be used by one partition at a time. To ensure that each
partition has access to a Global Spare when needed, configure one or
more dedicated Global Spare drives for each partition.
 If you do not currently have a drive that can be used as a Global Spare
installed in the library, but install one later, you can edit the partition to
configure Global Spares.
PostScan Requirements If you plan to use one of the MLM PostScan
features that requires a Global Spare drive, you must configure at least one
Global Spare drive for the partition.

202
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

Keep in mind that when the PostScan process starts, it “owns” the Global
Spare drive it is using until all of the cartridges in the PostScan queue are
processed (unless you pause the PostScan operation as described in Pause
the PostScan Process on page 319). If a shared Global Spare drive is being
used for PostScan it is not available for use as a spare. Configuring one or
more dedicated Global Spare drives for each partition that uses PostScan is
highly recommended.
Note: See Using PostScan on page 312 for information about the
PostScan feature.
Configuration Process Use the following steps to configure one or more
Global Spare drives for the partition.
1. From the Robotic Control Path screen, click Next. The Spare Drives
screen lists the drives that are available for use as Global Spares.
If you do not want to configure spare drives, click Next again and skip
to Allocate Chambers and Drives on page 204.
2. Select one or more of the available drives to be designated as spares.
Drives that cannot be used as spares are grayed out.

Figure 124 Select the drives you want to use as Global Spares.

203
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

Allocate Chambers and Drives

Use the following steps to allocate chambers and drives for the partition.
1. From the Spare Drives screen, click Next. The Chambers and Drives
screen displays.

Figure 125 The Chambers and Drives screen for a Figure 126 The Chambers and Drives screen for a
library without Thin Provisioning enabled. library with Thin Provisioning enabled.

2. Complete the following information in the Chambers and Drives

screen.

For this field... Do the following...

Storage Chambers Enter the number of storage chambers to assign to the storage pool for this
partition. If Thin Provisioning is not enabled in the library, the screen displays
how many chambers are available for the partition. If Thin Provisioning is
enabled, the screen displays how many elements (storage slots + entry/exit slots
+ drives) are allowed.
Notes:
 Each chamber accommodates one TeraPack magazine. Each magazine has
slots for either ten LTO cartridges or nine TS11xx technology cartridges.
 If Thin Provisioning is enabled it is possible for the combined configured
number of storage slots in all partitions to exceed the licensed or physically
available number of slots.
 If Thin Provisioning is not enabled:
 If you plan to create multiple partitions, be sure to reserve enough
chambers to configure the other partitions.
 If you licensed all of the chambers in the library and want to use a cleaning
partition, be sure to reserve enough chambers for the cleaning partition. If
you did not license all of the chambers in the library, the unlicensed
chambers are available for use in cleaning partitions.

204
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

For this field... Do the following...

EE Chambers Enter the number of chambers to assign to the entry/exit pool for this partition.
Notes:
 Some storage management software features require an entry/exit pool.
Spectra Logic recommends assigning at least one entry/exit chamber.
 It is useful for the entry/exit pool to be larger than the expected import/export
operations you plan to do on a daily or weekly basis. If you plan to use a bulk
TAP for importing or exporting multiple magazines, you may want to assign
14 chambers to the entry/exit pool.
 The cartridges stored in the entry/exit pool are not accessible to the storage
management software for writing or reading data.
Drives Select the drives to be dedicated to this partition. The check boxes for any
installed drives that cannot be used in the partition are grayed out. Any drive
already selected as a controller is automatically selected and cannot be cleared.
Notes:
 You cannot use Fibre Channel, SAS, and SCSI drives in the same partition.
 If you enabled Global Spares (see Assign Global Spare Drives on page 202),
you can only select direct-attached Fibre Channel drives of the same
generation as the Global Spare drive assigned to the partition.
 If you plan to mix multiple generations of LTO cartridges in the same
partition, make sure that the drives in the partition are compatible with every
generation of data cartridge in the partition (see LTO Read/Write
Compatibility on page 555 for compatibility information).
Cleaning Partition Select the name of the cleaning partition to be used for the drives in the storage
partition. Associating a cleaning partition with the storage partition enables the
Auto Drive Clean feature for the partition. If you do not want to enable Auto
Drive Clean, select None.
Note: The option to select a cleaning partition is only available if you previously
configured a cleaning partition that uses the same type of media as the storage
partition (see Creating a Cleaning Partition on page 194). If you create a cleaning
partition later, edit the storage partition to associate the cleaning partition with it.

205
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan

When MLM is enabled, you can configure the partition to use the MLM
PreScan and PostScan features. The available features depend on the drive
type used in the partition. See Using PreScan on page 310 and Using
PostScan on page 312 for information about these features.
Notes:  MLM is enabled by default. If you want to use PreScan and
PostScan but do not see the MLM Media Verification screen,
check to see if MLM is disabled (see Enabling MLM and
Configuring Global Settings on page 299).
 If your partition uses a drive technology that does not
support MLM or MLM is not enabled and you do not want to
use the PreScan and PostScan features, skip to Select the
Encryption Mode on page 209.
 If the partition uses SAS drives, the partition cannot use
FullScan or QuickScan with Global Spares.
 If a partition uses multiple exporting controllers, the
partition cannot use QuickScan.
 If you enable PostScan, the options for SKLM or KMIP
Encryption are not available on the Encryption screen.
PostScan:
QuickScan Drive
with Global Firmware
Drive Type PreScan FullScan QuickScan Spares Required
LTO-4, SCSI available unavailable unavailable unavailable 97F9 or later
LTO-4, Fibre Channel available available unavailable unavailable 97F9 or later
LTO-5, Fibre Channel available available available available B170 or later
LTO-6, Fibre Channel available available available available C9T4 or later
LTO-7, Fibre Channel available available available available FA10 or later
LTO-7, SAS available unavailable available unavailable FA10 or later
LTO-8, Fibre Channel available available available available HB82 or later
LTO-8, SAS available unavailable available unavailable HB82 or later
LTO-9, Fibre Channel available available available available N2T0 or later
LTO-9, SAS available unavailable available unavailable N2T0 or later
TS1140 Technology, 3524 or later 3A07 or later 3A07 or later 460E or later see previous
Fibre Channel columns
TS1150 Technology, 4470 or later 460E or later 460E or later 460E or later see previous
Fibre Channel columns
TS1155 Technology, available available available available 47A2 or later
Fibre Channel
TS1160 Technology, available available available available 5515 or later
Fibre Channel

206
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

Use the following steps to configure the PreScan and PostScan features
used in the partition.
1. From the Chambers and Drives screen, click Next. The MLM Media
Verification screen displays.
Note: If you do not want to use the PreScan and PostScan features,
click Next again and skip to Select the Encryption Mode on
page 209.

Figure 127 The Media Verification screen when Figure 128 The Media Verification screen when
the partition uses LTO-4 drives. the partition uses LTO-5 and later generation
drives.

2. Enable and configure the PreScan and PostScan options for the
partition.

Important The automatic PostScan operation configured on this screen only verifies MLM-
enabled cartridges. If your partition uses cartridges that are not MLM-enabled, you
must add them to the PostScan queue manually (see Request a Manual PostScan
on page 317).

Notes:  Selecting any of the PostScan triggers automatically enables

the selected PostScan option for the partition.
 If you enable PostScan, the options for SKLM or KMIP
Encryption are not available when you get to the Encryption
screen.

207
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

The following table describes the PreScan and PostScan options.

Option When selected... Default

Enable PreScan Enables the PreScan feature. When enabled, PreScan replaces the Disabled
more basic Media Auto Discovery process. See Using PreScan on (cleared)
page 310 for information about this option.
FullScan Enables the FullScan feature. When enabled by selecting one or Disabled
more PostScan triggers, FullScan uses a Global Spare drive (no
assigned to the partition to verify all of the data on each cartridge. PostScan
See Using PostScan on page 312 for information about this option. triggers
Note: FullScan is only available if a Global Spare drive is selected)
configured for the partition.
QuickScan Enables the QuickScan feature. When enabled by selecting one or Disabled
more PostScan triggers, QuickScan uses one of the drives in the (no
partition to verify the data on a single wrap, from the beginning PostScan
of the tape (BOT) to the end of the wrap or the end of recorded triggers
data (EOD), whichever comes first. See Using PostScan on selected)
page 312 for information about this option.
Note: QuickScan is only available if the partition uses LTO-5 or
later generation drives or TS11xx technology drives.
QuickScan using Enables the QuickScan using Global Spares feature. When Disabled
Global Spares enabled by selecting one or more PostScan triggers, QuickScan (no
uses a Global Spare drive assigned to the partition to verify the PostScan
data on a single wrap, from the beginning of the tape (BOT) to the triggers
end of the wrap or the end of recorded data (EOD), whichever selected)
comes first. See Using PostScan on page 312 for information about
this option.
Notes:
 QuickScan using Global Spares is only available if a Global
Spare drive is configured for the partition.
 QuickScan using Global Spares is only available if the partition
uses Fibre Channel LTO-5 or later generation or TS11xx
technology drives.
PostScan Triggers Enables PostScan and configures one or more triggers. Disabled
 Verify After Time — Add the cartridges in the partition to the (cleared)
automatic PostScan queue after the specified number of days
pass since the last scan. Enter the number of days in the Days
field.
 Verify After Write — Add a cartridge to the automatic PostScan
queue each time data is written to it.
 Verify After Read — Add a cartridge to the automatic PostScan
queue each time data is read from it.
Note: Selecting any of these triggers automatically enables the
selected PostScan option.

208
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

Select the Encryption Mode

If you are creating a partition or editing a partition that does not currently
use encryption, the Encryption screen only displays if you are logged into
the library as an encryption user and have either created one or more
BlueScale encryption keys, or configured a Spectra SKLM or KMIP server.
If you are not logged into the library as an encryption user and you are
editing a partition with encryption, the Encryption screen does not display,
or displays with all options grayed out depending on your version of
BlueScale software.
Note: If the Encryption screen does not display, proceed to Configure
the Drive Fibre Channel Addressing on page 212. You can
modify the partition to use encryption later, as described in this
section.
Requirements If you created a BlueScale encryption key, you can enable
BlueScale Encryption for the partition and assign an encryption key to it.
 If the storage partition uses LTO-5 or later generation drives or TS11xx
technology drives and you configured a Spectra SKLM server, you can
enable Spectra SKLM encryption key management for the partition.

Important To use Spectra SKLM encryption key management with your library, all LTO-5 drives
in the encrypted partition must use firmware version C7RC or later. LTO-6 and later
drives, and TS11xx technology drives can use any firmware supported by the library.

209
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

 If the storage partition uses LTO-6 and later generation drives or

TS11xx drives and you configured a KMIP server, you can enable KMIP
encryption key management for the partition.

Important To use KMIP encryption key management the library must use BlueScale12.7.01 or
later with LTO drives or BlueScale12.7.02 or later with TS11xx drives. The drives must
have the following firmware:
 LTO-6 drives must use firmware version G352 or later
 LTO-7 drives must use firmware version G5S2 or later
 LTO-8 and later generation drives can use any firmware supported by the library
 TS1140 technology drives must use firmware version 3B0E or later
 TS1150 technology drives must use firmware version 4718 or later
 TS1155 technology drives must use firmware version 47A2 or later
 TS1160 technology drives must use firmware version 5515 or later

Notes:  See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for
detailed instructions about configuring and using encryption
in the library.
 Any options that are not supported for the partition you are
currently configuring are grayed out.
 You can only use one type of encryption in a partition.
 You can only configure KMIP encryption servers or Spectra
SKLM encryption servers, not both.
 If the partition does not contain any F-QIPs, you must use
drive-based encryption.
 If the partition uses F-QIP-attached SCSI drives, you must
use QIP-based encryption.
 KMIP encryption and Spectra SKLM encryption are not
compatible with PostScan. Do not enable PostScan for the
partition if you want to use KMIP encryption or Spectra
SKLM encryption.
 Spectra SKLM key management, KMIP encryption, and
BlueScale encryption are not compatible with each other.
Data encrypted using one type of encryption key
management cannot be decrypted using another.
 BlueScale Encryption is not supported for partitions with
TS11xx technology drives.
 The encryption performed by encryption-enabled drives is
not compatible with the encryption performed by an
encryption-enabled F-QIP.

210
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

Use the following steps to configure encryption in the partition:

1. From the Chambers and Drives screen, click Next. The Encryption
screen displays.

Figure 129 The Encryption screen.

2. Select the type of encryption you want to enable. See the Spectra Tape
Libraries Encryption User Guide for detailed instructions.

Encryption Option Description

No Encryption Turns off encryption. None of the data in the partition is encrypted.
Spectra SKLM Turns on Spectra SKLM Encryption key management for drive-based
Encryption encryption using direct-attached LTO-5 and later generation drives or TS11xx
technology drives.
Note: If PostScan is enabled for the partition, do not select Spectra SKLM
Encryption.
KMIP Encryption- Turns on KMIP encryption key management for drive-based encryption using
Reuse LTO-6 and later generation drives or TS11xx technology drives. The library
(not shown) reuses KMIP encryption keys when tapes are overwritten.
Note: If PostScan is enabled for the partition, do not select KMIP Encryption.
KMIP Encryption - Turns on KMIP encryption key management for drive-based encryption using
No Reuse LTO-6 and later generation drives or TS11xx technology drives. The library
(not shown) does not reuse KMIP encryption keys when tapes are overwritten.
Note: If PostScan is enabled for the partition, do not select KMIP Encryption.

211
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

Encryption Option Description

BlueScale Turns on BlueScale Encryption key management for QIP-based encryption using
Encryption: F-QIP-attached, SCSI LTO-4 drives.
QIP-based All key management tasks are performed through the BlueScale user interface.
Options:
 Enable Compression — Turn on compression.
 Enable Clear File at BOT — Reserve a portion of the media at the beginning
of the tape for unencrypted data.
If you select this option, the tape headers are unencrypted so that any
compatible drive can read the header information on an encrypted tape.
BlueScale Turns on BlueScale Encryption key management for drive-based encryption
Encryption: using direct-attached LTO-4 and later generation drives. All key management
Drive-based tasks are performed through the BlueScale user interface.
Note: If you have BlueScale Encryption Professional edition and multiple
encryption keys configured on the library, select the primary key for the
partition. This key is used when encrypting and decrypting data. Then, select
none, one, or up to eight keys to be associated with the partition for decrypting
data.

Configure the Drive Fibre Channel Addressing

For partitions containing Fibre Channel drives, the Fibre Channel Loop ID
screen configures the Fibre Channel addressing used by each drive in the
partition. In general, you want to select the same type of addressing for
every drive in a partition.
1. From the MLM Media Verification screen (or the Encryption screen),
click Next. The Fibre Channel Loop ID’s screen displays.

Figure 130 Select the type of addressing to be used by the

Fibre Channel drives.

212
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

2. Select Soft Addressing or Hard Addressing for each of the drives listed.
 The drives use soft addressing by default. A drive is assigned a soft
address when it connects to the Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric.
 If you select Hard Addressing, enter a value between 0 and 125 in the
text field. This value is the Loop ID used by the drive when it
connects to the Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric. The ID you
enter must be unique for every device in the loop or fabric.
Notes:  Spectra Logic recommends using soft addressing where
possible for Fibre Channel drives.
 SAS tape drives do not have Loop IDs.

Specify the Partition Users

1. From the Fibre Channel Loop ID’s screen, click Next. The Partition
Users screen displays.

Figure 131 Select which users can access the partition.

2. Select the users who are allowed access to this partition. Only users
who were previously configured can be selected (see Configuring
Library Users on page 104).
Notes:  All of the users who are configured with operator privileges
are listed under Allow only. Select one or more of these users
to enable partition-based security for operators.
 If you did not configure additional Operator level users, you
can do so later and then edit the partition to give them access.
 Superusers and administrators always have full access to all
partitions.

Important If you are using a tape drive to provide the robotic control path, this is the last
partition configuration screen. Skip to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings
on page 218.

213
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

Configure the Robotic Path Visibility

Robotic path visibility determines whether one or both of the Fibre
Channel ports on the exporting controller provide the robotic control path.
Use the following steps to configure the robotic path visibility.
1. From the Partition Users screen, click Next. The Robotic Path Visibility
screen displays.

Figure 132 Select the port on the exporting controller that is

used to communicate with the robotics.

2. Select either one or both ports to provide the robotic control path.
Notes:  Selecting both ports provides a redundant connection to the
robotics, but requires software that supports two control
paths.
 Alternatively, you can use two controllers and configure
controller failover (see Configure Controller Failover on
page 136).
 The WWPN of the Fibre Channel port on the exporting
controller is used as the WWN for the partition. See World
Wide Names for Fibre Channel Partitions on page 72 for
detailed information about the relationship between the
Fibre Channel port on the exporting controller and WWNs
for partitions.

Configure Drive Visibility

Notes:  This section is not applicable if your library does not use
F-QIPs to provide connectivity for SCSI drives. Skip to
Configure the Port Addressing for the Controllers on
page 215.
 The Fibre Channel ports on the F-QIP have an any-to-any
relationship to the SCSI drives in the DBA.

214
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

For each drive connected to the F-QIP, identify the port(s) through which
the hosts communicate with the drive.
1. From the Robotic Path Visibility screen, click Next to display the Drive
Visibility screen.

Figure 133 The Drive Visibility screen (F-QIP with SCSI drives).

2. For each drive, select either one or both ports to provide access
(visibility) to the drive.
Notes:  You can select to make the drive visible through both ports
for redundancy or drive sharing. If they are visible through
both ports, make sure that the software accessing this
partition can handle any server contention over drive use
that can result from multiple paths to a single drive.
 For best performance, split the drives between the two ports.
For example, export drives 1 and 2 out port A and drives 3
and 4 out port B.
 If you previously configured the selected ports, click Skip
Ports.

Configure the Port Addressing for the Controllers

For each F-QIP or RIM in the partition, identify the port(s) through which
the hosts communicate with the components (the robotics or drives)
connected to the controller. If the partition uses multiple F-QIPs there are
separate screens for configuring port addressing:
 The Exporting F-QIP Configuration screen configures the port
addresses for the RIM or F-QIP that you selected to provide the robotic
control path (see Select the Robotic Control Path on page 200). These
settings also apply to any drives connected to the exporting F-QIP.
 A separate F-QIP Configuration screen configures the port addresses
for each F-QIP used to provide connectivity for SCSI drives in the
partition.

215
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

If you previously configured the F-QIP settings for both the exporting
controller and any additional controllers in the partition and do not want
to make any changes, click Next on the F-QIP Configuration screen to
proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 218.
Use the following steps to configure the port addressing for the exporting
controller and any additional F-QIPs used for SCSI drive connectivity in
the partition.
1. From the Robotic Path Visibility or Drive Path Visibility screen, click
Next. The Exporting F-QIP Configuration screen displays.
Notes:  An F-QIP or RIM can export up to eight partitions; a RIM2
can export up to 16 partitions. If a RIM or F-QIP exports
multiple partitions, a confirmation screen warns you that any
changes you make apply to all partitions associated with the
exporting controller.
 If the partition uses multiple F-QIPs and you already
configured the exporting F-QIP, the F-QIP Configuration
screen displays instead of the Exporting F-QIP Configuration
screen.

Figure 134 The Exporting F-QIP Configuration Figure 135 The F-QIP Configuration screen for
screen for robotics. SCSI drives connected to another F-QIP.

2. Select one of the following combinations for the Address and Fibre
Mode:
 Use Soft Address and Fabric.
 Use Soft Address and Auto-negotiate.
 Use Loop ID and Loop. The Loop ID must be between 0 and 125.
 Use Loop ID and Auto-negotiate. The Loop ID must be between 0 and
125.
Note: If you select Loop as the Fibre Mode, the Fibre Channel switch to
which the RIM is connected may override your settings.

216
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Creating a Storage Partition

3. If necessary, configure any additional ports.

If the exporting And... Then...

controller is a...
RIM  You only selected one port on the Robotic Proceed to Confirming and Saving
Path Visibility screen, the Partition Settings on page 218.
— OR —
 You already configured both Fibre
Channel ports,
RIM You selected both ports on the Robotics 1. Repeat the configuration steps in
Visibility screen, this section to configure the other
Fibre Channel port.
2. After you finish configuring the
second port, proceed to
Confirming and Saving the
Partition Settings on page 218.
F-QIP  All of the drives in the partition are Proceed to Confirming and Saving
connected to the exporting F-QIP, the Partition Settings on page 218.
— AND —
You only selected one port on the Robotic
Path Visibility screen,
— AND —
You selected the same port on the Drive
Visibility screen,
— OR —
 You already configured all Fibre Channel
ports,
F-QIP  All of the drives in the partition are 1. Repeat the configuration steps in
connected to the exporting F-QIP, this section to configure the other
— AND — Fibre Channel port on the
exporting controller.
You selected both ports on the Robotic
Path Visibility screen and the Drive 2. After you finish configuring the
Visibility screen, second port, proceed to
Confirming and Saving the
— OR —
Partition Settings on page 218.
 You selected different ports on the
Robotics Visibility and Drive Visibility
screens,
F-QIP Some or all of the drives in the partition are 1. Repeat the configuration steps in
not connected to the exporting F-QIP, this section to configure the ports
on the F-QIP(s) used to provide
connectivity for the drives.
2. After you finish configuring the
remaining ports, proceed to
Confirming and Saving the
Partition Settings on page 218.

217
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings

CONFIRMING AND SAVING THE PARTITION SETTINGS

After you finish configuring a partition, confirm and save the partition
settings to complete the creation process.
Note: If you want to save the configuration to a USB device, connect
the device to a USB port on the LCM (see Connect a USB Device
to the Library on page 184) or operator panel (T950B only) and
allow time for the device to mount before continuing.
1. After you complete the configuration screens for the partition as
described in the previous sections, click Next. The Save Library
Configuration screen displays.

Figure 136 The Save Library Configuration screen.

2. Select whether you want to save the current library configuration.

 Don’t Save Library Configuration — A backup of the changed library
configuration is not saved.
 Save Library Configuration To (highly recommended) — Saves a
backup of the library configuration to the selected destination.
Using this option is highly recommended to ensure that you can
easily restore the previous library configuration, if necessary.
Select whether to save the library configuration file to a USB device
or to email it to an already-configured mail recipient (see Configure
Mail Users on page 124).
Note: Do not use the default [email protected] email
recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed configuration files
unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting.

218
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings

3. Click Next. The Save Partition screen displays.

Note: The Save Partition screen on your library may be different from
the ones shown in Figure 138 and Figure 137. The information
on this screen varies depending on the type of partition you
configured and the options you chose.

Figure 137 The Save Partition screen for a Figure 138 The Save Partition screen for a
cleaning partition. storage partition that uses a Global Spare and a
cleaning partition.

4. Review the information on the screen and confirm that all settings are
correct for this partition’s configuration.
 If the configuration information is correct, proceed to Step 5.
 If the configuration information is not correct, do one of the
following:
 Click Previous to move backward through the configuration
screens until you reach the settings that need correcting. As you
move backward through the configuration screens, the values
reset to their default values. After you reach the desired screen
and make the necessary changes, click Next to advance through
the screens and re-enter the necessary information until you
return to the Save Partition screen.
Note: If the screen requiring the correction is toward the
beginning of the configuration process, it may be easiest
to click Cancel and repeat the entire configuration
process.
 Click Cancel to configure the partition again from the beginning.

219
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings

5. Click Save. The library requires several minutes to create the partition,
after which the Shared Library Services screen redisplays with the
partition you just created added to the list of partitions.

Figure 139 The Shared Library Services showing a cleaning

partition and storage partitions.

Notes:  If you assigned a cleaning partition to the storage partition,

the partition icon changes as shown in Figure 139.
 When you save the partition, the library automatically
generates a configuration backup file and saves it to the
memory card in the LCM. This backup file contains the
library configuration, the MLM and DLM databases, and any
BlueScale encryption keys that are currently stored in the
library.
 If you configured the email option for the automatically
generated backup file, the library sends an email with the
backup file attached to the specified recipient (see Enable
Email for the Auto Configuration Save File on page 126).
6. To configure another storage partition, repeat the entire configuration
process, beginning with Creating a Storage Partition on page 196.
To configure another cleaning partition, repeat the entire configuration
process, beginning with Creating a Cleaning Partition on page 194.

220
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Configure Advanced Partition Settings

CONFIGURE ADVANCED PARTITION SETTINGS

The Advanced Partition Settings screen allows you to enable library
emulation and Time-based Access Order System (TAOS).

Advanced partition settings should only be used when recommended by Spectra

Caution Logic Technical Support.

Configuring Emulation
Overview The library identifies itself as “SPECTRA PYTHON” in
response to a SCSI Inquiry command. If your storage management
software or operating system does not specifically support one of the
Spectra Logic libraries that identifies itself as “SPECTRA PYTHON,” you
can configure one or more partitions to emulate another type of library.
Because most storage management software is certified for one or more of
these libraries, using the emulation mode may allow these applications to
support the library.

Using emulation is not the preferred method of operation and should only be used
Caution when recommended by Spectra Logic Technical Support.

Note: Configuring emulation changes how the partition identifies

itself to the operating system or storage management software.
User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator
privileges can configure emulation. See Understanding User Groups and
Security on page 104 for information about the three types of user groups
and what types of privileges each has.
Configure Emulation Use the following steps to configure a new or
existing partition to emulate another type of library.
1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared
Library Services screen displays.
3. Click Edit to modify an existing partition or New to create a new
partition. The Name and Media Type screen displays (see Figure 122 on
page 199).

221
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Configure Advanced Partition Settings

4. Click Advanced. The Advanced Partition Settings screen displays.

Figure 140 Specifying the emulation type.

5. Select the type of library you want the partition to emulate. You can
either:
 Select a preconfigured emulation from the Use preset drop-down
list.
—OR—
 Create a custom emulation, enter the Vendor and Model for the
library to be emulated. These fields are used in the string that the
library returns in response to a SCSI Inquiry command.
Note: The default setting is SPECTRA PYTHON.
6. If you want the SCSI Read Element Status command response to
include Media Domain, Media Type, Drive Domain, and Drive Type,
select Include tape generation in Read Element Status. See the Spectra
Tape Libraries SCSI Developer’s Guide for more information.
7. Click Next. The Robotic Control Path screen displays listing the RIMs
currently installed in the library.
The Robotic Control Path screen is the beginning of a series of
configuration screens. The sequence of steps and screens matches those
described in Creating a Storage Partition on page 196.

222
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Configure Advanced Partition Settings

Enable Time-based Access Order System (TAOS)

Time-based Access Order System (TAOS) is a way to speed up the time it
takes to read several data segments from a single tape. Given a host-
provided list of proposed reads, the Spectra Logic tape library provides a
list back to the host that has been re-ordered to achieve a minimal total
read time. The intent of TAOS is to minimize the re-positioning the drive
must do between reads of multiple locations, to improve the overall read
time and reduce drive and media wear by limiting the total travel amount
of the media within the drive. This feature is supported for LTO-7 and later
generation drives.

Important TAOS should only be used when recommended by Spectra Logic Technical Support.

Important See the Spectra Tape Libraries SCSI Developer’s Guide for details on the host
interaction with TAOS enabled.

Important TAOS is supported for LTO-7 and later generation drives only.

User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator

privileges can configure TAOS.
Configure TAOS Use the following steps to configure the partition to
respond to Generate Time-Based Access Order System commands and
Receive Time-Based Access Order System commands.
1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared
Library Services screen displays.
3. Click Edit to modify an existing partition or New to create a new
partition. The Name and Media Type screen displays (see Figure 122 on
page 199).

223
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Modifying an Existing Partition

4. Click Advanced. The Advanced Partition Settings screen displays.

Figure 141 Enable TAOS.

5. Select Enable TAOS.

6. Click Next. The Robotic Control Path screen displays.
The Robotic Control Path screen is the beginning of a series of
configuration screens. The sequence of steps and screens matches those
described in Creating a Storage Partition on page 196.

MODIFYING AN EXISTING PARTITION

Overview This section describes how to edit or modify an existing
partition.

Use your storage management software to empty all drives and discontinue host
Caution operations before modifying an existing partition.

Notes:  You cannot modify a partition to change the exporter from an

F-QIP/RIM to a drive.
 You cannot change the media type (and thus the drive type)
specified for the partition.
You might want to modify an existing partition for any of the following
reasons:
 Assign a Cleaning Partition — If you created a cleaning partition and
now want to assign it to the storage partition, you need to modify the
Chambers and Drives screen for the storage partition to add the
cleaning partition.

224
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Modifying an Existing Partition

 Assign a Global Spare Drive — If you want to designate one of the

unassigned drives as a Global Spare, you need to modify the Spare
Drives screen to assign the drive to the partition.
 Make Resources Available to Create a New Cleaning or Storage
Partition — If the existing partitions use all of the licensed chambers in
the library, and you want to create a new partition, you need to reduce
the number of chambers assigned to an existing partition to provide the
chambers needed for the new partition. If you want to create a storage
partition, you may also need to install additional drives or unassign
drives that were previously assigned to other partitions.
 Rename Partition — If you want to rename the partition, you need to
modify it in the Name and Media Type screen.
 Disable PreScan or Change the PostScan Settings — If you want to
change the settings that you chose (to take advantage of a new Global
Spare drive, for example), you need to select a different setting in the
MLM Media Verification screen.
 Enable or Disable Encryption — If you need to modify encryption
settings for the partition, you need to log in as an encryption user and
make the necessary changes.
 Adding Additional Exporting Controllers — If a partition is configured
with one exporting controller, and you want to add additional
controllers to export the library, you need to edit the partition and select
the additional controllers.

225
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Modifying an Existing Partition

Preparation Before making changes to an existing partition, review the

information at the beginning of this chapter to ensure that you address any
requirements (see Partition Types and Requirements on page 187). In
addition, address the following recommendations and requirements:
 Spectra Logic strongly recommends backing up the library
configuration, either to a USB device or as an attachment to an email
sent to a previously configured mail recipient, before you make
changes.
 When reducing the number of chambers assigned to a partition,
physically export any magazines in those chambers, as described in
Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges on page 248, before
you remove chambers from the partition.

Important By default, the library deletes empty chambers from a partition first. However, if all
chambers are full, the library is forced to delete populated chambers. When this
happens, the magazines in the deleted chambers are no longer accessible through
the BlueScale interface or storage management software. You must add these
chambers to either a new or an existing partition before the magazines are accessible
again.

Auto Configuration Save When you make a change to a partition, the

library generates an auto-configuration file and saves it to the memory
card in the LCM. If you configured the email option for the Auto
Configuration Save file, an email containing the updated library
configuration, the MLM and DLM databases, and any BlueScale
encryption keys stored in the library, are sent to the specified recipient (see
Enable Email for the Auto Configuration Save File on page 126).
Note: Do not use the default [email protected] email
recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed configuration files
unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting.
Modify a Partition Use the following steps to modify an existing partition.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. Select Maintenance > Media Lifecycle Management to display the
Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen. If Media Auto Discovery,
PreScan, or PostScan is running (as indicated by the presence of a Stop
Discovery or Pause PostScan button, respectively), do the following:
 Click Stop Discovery to temporarily stop Media Auto Discovery or
PreScan (see Figure 187 on page 310).
 Click Pause PostScan to pause the PostScan for one hour (see
Figure 190 on page 320).

226
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Modifying an Existing Partition

3. If you configured the partition to use encryption or if you want to

enable encryption in a partition that did not previously use it, select
Security > Encryption to log into the encryption feature. The
Encryption User Login screen displays.

Click Encryption to
display the Encryption
User Login screen.

Figure 142 Log into the Encryption feature if you need to

change the encryption setting for the partition.

a. Type the encryption user password, if one is set. Otherwise, leave

the password blank.
b. Click OK to display the Encryption Configuration screen.
After you log into the encryption feature, you can modify the
encryption settings for the partition (see Select the Encryption Mode
on page 209). You can also configure encryption settings and
manage BlueScale encryption keys. See the Spectra Tape Libraries
Encryption User Guide for detailed information about enabling and
configuring encryption for a partition.
4. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to begin the
partition configuration process. The Shared Library Services screen
displays.

Figure 143 The Shared Library Services screen.

227
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Modifying an Existing Partition

5. Click either Summary or Edit. Either option can be used when

modifying a partition.
 If you click Summary next to the partition that you want to edit, the
Partition Settings screen displays, showing summary information
related to the selected partition.

Figure 144 The Partition Settings screen (storage partition).

If you want to make changes or see all of the configuration settings

for the partition, click Edit.
 If you click Edit from either the Partition Settings screen or the
Shared Library Services screen the Name and Media Type screen
displays.

Figure 145 The Name and Media Type screen Figure 146 The Name and Media Type screen
for a cleaning partition. for a storage partition.

6. The Name and Media Type screen is the beginning of a series of

configuration screens. Depending on the type of partition you are
modifying, choose one of the following.
 To modify a cleaning partition, see Creating a Cleaning Partition on
page 194,
— OR —
 To modify a storage partition, see Creating a Storage Partition on
page 196.

228
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Deleting a Partition

DELETING A PARTITION
Overview When you delete a partition, the drives and chambers
previously assigned to that partition are available to be assigned to a new
or existing partition.
Preparation Before deleting an existing partition, review the information
at the beginning of this chapter to be sure that you address any
requirements (see Partition Types and Requirements on page 187). In
addition, make sure you address the following:
 Spectra Logic strongly recommends backing up the library
configuration, either to a USB device or as an attachment to an email
sent to a previously configured mail recipient, before you delete a
partition.
 To ensure that you do not inadvertently mix cartridges from one
storage partition with that from another, use your storage management
software to eject all of the cartridges from the storage partition’s storage
pool. The library moves the media to the partition’s entry/exit pool.
Export the media from the library as described in Exporting or
Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges on page 248.

Important After the partition is deleted, any magazines in the chambers that were assigned to
the partition’s storage and entry/exit pools are not accessible until the chambers
are assigned to another new or existing partition.

 If the storage partition is configured to use BlueScale encryption, make

sure that you export the BlueScale encryption key for any cartridges
that were in the partition (see the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User
Guide). The encryption key is required in order to access the data on the
cartridges at a later date.
 If you plan to delete a cleaning partition, edit any storage partitions that
use the cleaning partition to unassociate the cleaning partition from the
storage partition, otherwise, the delete fails.
Auto Configuration Save When you delete a partition, the library
automatically generates a configuration backup file and saves it to the
memory card in the LCM. If you configured the email option for the Auto
Configuration Save file, an email with the backup file as an attachment is
sent to the specified recipient (see Enable Email for the Auto Configuration
Save File on page 126).
Note: Do not use the default [email protected] email
recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed configuration files
unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting.

229
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 6 — Configuring and Managing Partitions Deleting a Partition

Delete a Partition
Use the following steps to delete an existing partition.
1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. Select Maintenance > Media Lifecycle Management to display the
Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen. If Media Auto Discovery,
PreScan, or PostScan is running (as indicated by the presence of a Stop
Discovery or Pause PostScan button, respectively), do the following:
 Click Stop Discovery to temporarily stop Media Auto Discovery or
PreScan (see Figure 187 on page 310).
 Click Pause PostScan to pause the PostScan for one hour (see
Figure 190 on page 320).
3. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared
Library Services screen displays.
4. Click Delete for the partition you want to delete. A Feedback Required
screen displays.
5. Select whether you want to save the current library configuration.
 Don’t Save Library Configuration — A backup of the changed library
configuration is not saved.
 Save Library Configuration To (highly recommended) — Saves a
backup file of the changed library configuration to either a USB
device connected to the library or as an attachment to an email sent
to a previously configured recipient (see Configure Mail Users on
page 124). Using this option is highly recommended to ensure that
you can easily restore the library configuration if necessary.
Note: If you want to save the configuration to a USB device, connect it
to a USB port on the LCM or the operator panel (T950B only) and
allow time for the device to mount before continuing.
6. Click Ok to confirm that you want to delete the partition.
The screen refreshes and the deleted partition is no longer listed on the
Shared Library Services screen.

230
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 CHAPTER 7
Importing and Exporting Cartridges
This chapter describes importing cartridges into and exporting cartridges
out of the library.
 See Chapter 8 – Using the Cartridge Inventory, beginning on page 269
for information about moving cartridges from one location to another
in a partition.
 See Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management,
beginning on page 289 for information about using MLM to manage
the cartridges in the library.

Topic
Preparing Cartridges for Use page 232
Cartridge Guidelines and Requirements page 232
Prepare the Cartridges for Use page 234
M8 Media page 235
Import and Export Overview page 236
Requirements page 236
Restrictions page 237
Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition page 237
Import Requirements page 238
Prepare the Storage Partition or the Cleaning page 240
Partition
Import the Magazines page 241
Prepare the Entry/Exit Pool page 247
Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and page 248
Cartridges
Prepare for the Export or Exchange page 249
Export Magazines from a Partition page 249
Exchange Magazines or Cartridges in a Partition page 254
Export or Exchange Expired Cleaning page 257
Cartridges

231
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Preparing Cartridges for Use

Topic
Using the Advanced Import/Export Options page 259
Manually Create a Move Queue page 259
Upload a Move Queue page 263
Start the Moves page 266
Updating the Storage Management Software page 268
Inventory

PREPARING CARTRIDGES FOR USE

Before you can load cartridges into the library, you must prepare and load
them into TeraPack or Maintenance TeraPack magazines (referred to as
magazines and maintenance magazines, respectively).

Cartridge Guidelines and Requirements

When preparing cartridges for use, keep the following guidelines and
requirements in mind:
Spectra Certified Media For best performance, use Spectra Certified
Media (both data and cleaning cartridges), which guarantees both media
compatibility and the cartridge itself over its lifetime. Using Spectra
Certified Media also lets you take full advantage of the library’s Media
Lifecycle Management (MLM) features. See Chapter 9 – Configuring and
Using Media Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 289 for detailed
information about using MLM to monitor the health of data and cleaning
cartridges.
Multiple Tape Technology Generations When using multiple tape
technology generations, Spectra Logic strongly recommends configuring
separate partitions for each generation.
TeraPack Magazines Data cartridges are stored in TeraPack magazines
while they are inside the library. Each TeraPack magazine holds either ten
LTO cartridges or nine TS11xx technology cartridges. Similarly, the
cleaning cartridges used in a cleaning partition are stored in Maintenance
TeraPack magazines. Each maintenance magazine holds the same number
of cartridges as a data cartridge magazine.

232
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Preparing Cartridges for Use

Barcode Labels To ensure that the library can properly maintain its media
inventory, make sure that all cartridges and magazines have unique
barcode labels. For your convenience, all Spectra Certified Media is
available pre-labeled with sequential barcode labels. Optional custom
barcode sequences can be ordered, if desired.
 Data Cartridges — The library prevents you from importing tape
cartridges with blank/unreadable barcodes, with duplicate barcodes, or
whose labels indicate that the media type or generation is not
supported by the partition.
 TeraPack Magazines — Barcode labels are required on all magazines.
Maintenance TeraPack magazines are identified by Spectra-unique
labels. For your convenience, the pre-loaded magazines are labeled
with sequential barcode labels. Optional custom barcode sequences can
be ordered, if desired.
 Cleaning Cartridges and Maintenance TeraPack Magazines — If you
plan to use a cleaning partition and the Auto Drive Clean feature, the
cleaning cartridges must be identified with “CLN” at the beginning of
the barcode sequence on their labels. This requirement applies to both
standard and custom barcode labels. The cleaning cartridges must be
stored in Maintenance TeraPack magazines, which are identified by
Spectra-unique labels.
If you plan to store cleaning cartridges in a storage partition, labeling
the cleaning cartridges with “CLN” at the beginning of the barcode
sequence on their labels is highly recommended to help prevent the
storage management software from attempting to use a cleaning
cartridge for writing or reading data.
Write Protection Before loading data cartridges into the library, make sure
that the write-protection switch is properly set. For normal backup
operations, the write protect switch is set to the write-enabled or unlocked
position. The write-protect switch is typically set to the write-protect or
locked position when the cartridge is removed from the library for storage
and during restore operations.

233
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Preparing Cartridges for Use

Prepare the Cartridges for Use

Use the following steps to prepare the individual cartridges to be loaded
into the library.
1. If your cartridges are unlabeled, prepare and affix a barcode label to
each cartridge. Position each label in the indented area on the cartridge,
as illustrated in Figure 147. See Barcode Label Specifications on
page 556 for detailed information about barcode labels.

Do not place labels on any surface of the cartridge except the area shown in Figure 147.
Caution An improperly positioned label can become dislodged and damage the drive.

Important Before importing cartridges into the library, allow them to acclimate to the ambient
environment for 24 hours.

Important If you are using Auto Drive Clean, all cleaning cartridges must be identified with
“CLN” at the beginning of the barcode sequence on their labels. This requirement
applies to both standard and custom barcode labels.

CAUTION: Do not place

labels on any surface of the
cartridge except the front.

Barcode label

Write-protect switch

Figure 147 Attach barcode labels to cartridges and check write-protect

switch setting (LTO cartridge shown.).

2. Depending on whether you plan to write data to a cartridge or restore

data from a cartridge, make sure the write-protect switch on the
cartridge is set for the desired operation.
Note: Cleaning cartridges do not have a write-protect switch.
If the switch... The cartridge is...
Does not cover the opening Write-enabled. Data can be written to or read
from the tape.
Does cover the opening Write-protected. Data can be read from the tape.
Data cannot be written to or erased from the tape.

234
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Preparing Cartridges for Use

3. Insert the prepared cartridges into the magazine. Make sure that the
cartridges are oriented with the hub side toward the front of the
magazine, which has a textured surface on each side.

Important Do not put data cartridges in a Maintenance TeraPack magazine. The Maintenance
TeraPack magazine, with properly labeled cleaning cartridges, can only be used in a
cleaning partition.

Cartridge barcode label

Cartridge hub

Front of TeraPack magazine

(note textured surface on each side)

Figure 148 Insert prepared cartridges into a TeraPack magazine (LTO shown).

M8 Media
When the library loads an unused LTO-7 tape cartridge with a barcode
label ending with “M8” into an LTO-8 tape drive using firmware HB82 or
later, the drive attempts to initialize the tape for M8 density, increasing the
density from 6 TB to 9 TB. Once initialized, the tape can no longer be
written to, or read by, an LTO-7 drive.
To use the M8 feature, make sure that your tape library uses the default
barcode reporting configuration or a configuration that reports the last two
characters, not including the checksum. See Configure Barcode Reporting
on page 139 for details of the default barcode reporting configuration and
instructions for changing the barcode configuration.
If the tape drive determines that the tape cartridge does not meet the
unused criteria, the M8 initialization fails and the tape retains LTO-7
density. If the library or your storage management software reports an M8
initialization failure, Spectra Logic recommends replacing the barcode on
the tape with an L7 barcode.
Note: M8 tapes cannot be read by or written to by LTO-9 drives.

235
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Import and Export Overview

IMPORT AND EXPORT OVERVIEW

Importing cartridges into the library and exporting cartridges from the
library are the primary interactions you have with the physical library. You
import magazines filled with cartridges into the library during your initial
setup, and both import and export cartridges during normal day-to-day
backup operations.
The method you use to import or export cartridges depends on the library
configuration and the number of magazines you need to move.
Center TAP For day-to-day operations involving a small number of
magazines, you can import or export magazines one at a time using the
center TAP located in the main frame. The two TAP doors open alternately.
Bulk TAP When you need to import or export a large number of
magazines, you can use a bulk TAP to process up to 14 magazines at a
time.

Requirements
User Privilege Requirement Any user with operator privileges who is
assigned to the partition and all users with superuser or administrator
privileges can perform import or export operations. Operators can only
import and export media using entry/exit pools. See Specify the Partition
Users on page 213 for information about assigning users to a partition.
Cartridge and Magazine Labeling Make sure that each cartridge and
magazine is labeled with a unique barcode. The barcode labels on Spectra
Certified Media contain information about the media type. To ensure that
the correct type of cartridges are stored in a partition, the library prevents
you from importing the wrong cartridge type into a partition.
TeraPack Magazines Cartridges are always imported and exported using a
TeraPack magazine (or a maintenance magazine for cleaning partitions),
regardless of whether you have an individual cartridge or a group of
cartridges.
 When you want to import a single cartridge, you must first put the
prepared cartridge in a magazine, then import the magazine.
 When you want to export a single cartridge, you must export the
magazine containing the cartridge and remove the desired cartridge
from the magazine. You can then reimport the magazine, if desired.

236
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition

Restrictions
Using the BlueScale Web Interface (RLC) The import and export options
are not available when you access the library using a remote connection to
the BlueScale web interface (RLC). These operations are always performed
from the local BlueScale user interface on the library operator panel.
Background Operations You cannot import, export, or exchange
cartridges or magazines if the library is actively running a background
operation such as Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan.
If you do not want to wait for a Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or
PostScan operation to complete, you can stop the Media Auto Discovery or
PreScan operation or pause the PostScan operation. For other background
operations, wait for the process to complete.
 Click Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen
to stop a Media Auto Discovery or PreScan operation (see Stop the
Discovery Process on page 310).
 Click Pause PostScan on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen
to pause the PostScan operation for one hour (see Pause the PostScan
Process on page 319).
Auto Discovery Media Auto Discovery and PreScan are background
operations that use the drives in a partition to discover newly imported
LTO cartridges and add them to the MLM database. The discovery process
cannot begin while the hosts are actively loading cartridges into or
unloading cartridges from the drives. If you import cartridges during this
time, the library posts a failure message stating that no drives are available
to perform the discovery process.
Either wait until the library is idle before beginning the import or manually
start the discovery process for imported cartridges when the library is idle.
See Discover Cartridges Manually on page 308 for instructions.

IMPORTING INTO A STORAGE OR CLEANING PARTITION

Overview During normal operations, magazines containing data
cartridges are typically imported to a storage partition’s entry/exit pool
and then moved to the storage pool using your storage management
software. This process ensures that the media inventory maintained by the
storage management software is accurate.
An exception is the first time that cartridges are loaded into a storage
partition. Unless your storage management software requires you to use
the software to perform all imports, importing magazines directly into a
storage partition’s storage pool simplifies loading a storage partition for
the first time. After the cartridges are imported into the storage pool, they
are available for immediate use by the storage management software.

237
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition

Import Requirements
Partitions You must have one or more partitions defined before you can
import magazines into the library. See Chapter 2 – Architecture Overview,
beginning on page 57 for information about partitions and pools.
Chapter 6 – Configuring and Managing Partitions, beginning on page 186
provides detailed instructions for creating partitions.
Cartridges and Magazines All cartridges are imported into the library
using magazines. Before beginning, have on hand the cartridges that you
want to import into the partition. If necessary, prepare the cartridges as
described in Preparing Cartridges for Use on page 232.
If you are importing magazines into the storage partition’s storage pool for
the first time, the maximum number of magazines you need equals the
number of chambers assigned to the storage pool for the partition (see
Creating a Storage Partition on page 196). You do not need to fill all slots in
the magazines or all of the chambers in the partition. However, any empty
chambers are inaccessible to the storage management software.
Entry/Exit Pool For daily operations, TeraPack magazines containing data
cartridges are typically imported or exported using a storage partition’s
entry/exit pool. When using the entry/exit pool for importing/exporting,
the following must be true:
 The entry/exit pool must have sufficient empty chambers available for
importing new magazines. If you need to import new magazines and
all of the chambers in the entry/exit pool are full, you must export one
or more magazines to make space for the new magazines (see Export
Magazines from a Partition on page 249).
 The entry/exit pool must have sufficient empty slots available to
accommodate any cartridges that the storage management software
ejects from the partition. If all of the slots in the entry/exit pool are full,
either move newly imported cartridges to the partition’s storage pool,
leaving empty slots in the entry/exit pool, or export one or more full
magazines and replace them with magazines that have empty slots.

Important Make sure that the magazines you export are not filled with cartridges that you just
imported but did not yet move to the storage pool using your storage
management software.

You can import a magazine containing a cleaning cartridge into the

partition’s entry/exit pool and then use the Inventory screen to move the
cartridge to a drive for cleaning (see Moving Cartridges Within a Partition
on page 278). When the cleaning is complete, move the cleaning cartridge
back to the entry/exit pool and export the magazine from the entry/exit
pool.

238
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition

Storage Pool A storage partition’s storage pool contains all of the

cartridges that can be accessed by the storage management software for the
purpose of writing or reading data.
 If you are importing magazines into the entry/exit pool and using your
storage management software to move the cartridges to the storage
pool, the storage pool must have sufficient empty slots to accommodate
each cartridge imported into the entry/exit pool.
 If you are importing directly into the storage pool, the storage pool
must have sufficient empty chambers to accommodate the magazines
you plan to import.
 Any chambers in the storage pool that do not contain magazines are
inaccessible to the storage management software. You can, however,
import magazines into the empty chambers using the library’s
BlueScale user interface.
Cleaning Partition When importing cleaning cartridges into a cleaning
partition, keep the following in mind:
 Cleaning cartridges must be identified with “CLN” at the beginning of
the barcode sequence on their labels. This requirement applies to both
standard and custom barcode labels.
 Cleaning cartridges used in a cleaning partition must be in
Maintenance TeraPack magazines, which are identified by Spectra-
unique labels. The library automatically prevents importing cleaning
cartridges and magazines that are not properly labeled into a cleaning
partition.
Note: Maintenance TeraPack magazines filled with appropriately
labeled cleaning cartridges are available from Spectra Logic.
 Make sure that the Maintenance TeraPack magazine does not contain
any data cartridges. The library does not import a Maintenance
TeraPack magazine that contains cartridges that are not identified with
“CLN” at the beginning of the barcode sequence on their labels.
 Make sure that you import only cleaning cartridges that are compatible
with the drives in the storage partition associated with the cleaning
partition. To ensure that the correct type of cleaning cartridges are
stored in a cleaning partition, the library prevents you from importing
the wrong cartridge type.
 The cleaning cartridges in a cleaning partition can only be used for
drives in storage partitions configured to use that cleaning partition.
Associating a cleaning partition with drives in a storage partition
automatically enables the Auto Drive Clean feature for that partition.
 The cleaning cartridges in the cleaning partition are inaccessible to the
application software running on the host. Make sure you disable any
software-based drive cleaning to prevent repeated requests to import a
cleaning cartridge.

239
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition

 If your storage management software supports automated drive

cleaning and you plan to use this method to clean the drives instead of
the library’s Auto Drive Clean feature, refer to your software
documentation for instructions. You must import the properly labeled
cleaning cartridges into the storage partition using a TeraPack
magazine (not a Maintenance TeraPack magazine).
Additional Requirements and Restrictions See Import and Export
Overview on page 236 for information about additional requirements and
restrictions when importing magazines and cartridges.

Prepare the Storage Partition or the Cleaning Partition

Before importing magazines into a storage partition or a cleaning partition,
make sure that the partition has sufficient empty slots or chambers
available to accommodate the cartridges or magazines you plan to import.
 If you plan to import cartridges into the storage partition’s entry/exit
pool, and then use your storage management software to move the
cartridges to the storage pool, check the Inventory screen for the
partition to make sure that the storage pool has an empty slot available
to accommodate each imported cartridge (see Viewing and
Downloading the Cartridge Inventory on page 270). If there are
insufficient empty slots available in the storage pool, do one of the
following to prepare the storage pool to receive the imported
cartridges:
 If the partition’s storage pool has empty chambers, import one or
more TeraPack magazines with empty slots into the storage pool
(see Import the Magazines on page 241).
 If the partition’s storage pool does not have any magazines with
empty slots, use your storage management software to eject
cartridges from the library. The library moves the ejected cartridges
from the partition’s storage pool to magazines in its entry/exit pool.
You can then export the magazines from the library (see Export
Magazines from a Partition on page 249). The resulting empty slots
in the storage pool are now available for newly imported cartridges.
 Exchange a full magazine in the storage pool for one containing
empty slots (see Exchange Magazines or Cartridges in a Partition on
page 254).
 If you plan to import cartridges directly into the partition’s storage
pool, make sure that the storage pool has an empty chamber for each
magazine you plan to import. The partition’s Import/Export TeraPack
Magazines screen shows the number of empty chambers available in
the partition’s storage pool (see Figure 149 on page 241). If there are no
empty chambers available in the storage pool, export one or more
magazines from the storage pool (see Export Magazines from a
Partition on page 249).

240
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition

 If you plan to import cleaning cartridges into a cleaning partition, make

sure that there is an empty chamber for each maintenance magazine
you plan to import. If there are no empty chambers available in the
cleaning partition, export one or more magazines. Alternatively, you
can exchange expired cleaning cartridges for new ones in the
magazines already present in the cleaning partition without having to
import additional magazines (see Export or Exchange Expired
Cleaning Cartridges on page 257).

Import the Magazines

1. Log into the library as a user with the appropriate privileges (see User
Privilege Requirement on page 236).
2. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/
Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays, showing the information
for the last partition that was viewed on either the Import/Export
TeraPack screen or the Inventory screen.
3. Select the partition and TAP you want to use from the drop-down lists,
then click Go. The Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen refreshes
to show the current status of the chambers assigned to the selected
partition.

Figure 149 Select the partition and the TAP (storage

partition shown).

Select this TAP... If you want to use...

Center The dual TAP located in the main frame.
Left The bulk TAP located in the bulk TAP media frame on
the left end of the library if present.

241
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition

4. Click the appropriate Import button to select the destination (the

storage pool or entry/exit pool for a storage partition or cleaning for a
cleaning partition) for the imported magazines.
Notes:  If there are no empty chambers in the selected pool, the
Import button is not present. Export one or more magazines
to make space for the new magazines.
 Operators can only import into the entry/exit pool.

Import into the

Storage pool

Import into the

Entry/Exit pool

Figure 150 Click Import for the desired destination (storage

partition shown).

For a... Select Import for.... If you want to import...

Storage partition Storage: Empty Magazines into the storage pool.
Chambers
Entry/Exit: Empty Magazines into the entry/exit pool.
Chambers Note: Importing into the entry/exit pool is the
recommended method (see Import and Export Overview
on page 236).
Cleaning partition Cleaning: Empty Maintenance magazines into the cleaning partition.
Chambers

242
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition

5. The next steps in the import process depend on which TAP you
selected.
If you selected the Center TAP The top TAP door opens and a
Feedback Required screen displays instructing you to place a TeraPack
in the TAP.
a. Insert a magazine into the tray on the open TAP, making sure that it
is oriented with the textured surface on each side toward the
outside of the library, as shown in Figure 151.

Insert the magazine so that

the textured surface on
each side is toward the
outside of the library.

Figure 151 Insert a magazine into the TAP, making sure that it is correctly oriented.

b. Return to the operator panel and select the appropriate option on

the Feedback Required screen.
Note: If you wait more than 10 minutes to respond, the library times
out and displays a message on the operator panel. The TAP door
is left open.

Select... If...
Continue You plan to import another magazine after the one currently in the TAP. The
import process continues as follows:
1. The TAP door closes automatically. The library retrieves the magazine from
the TAP and moves it to a chamber in the selected destination.
2. If there are still empty chambers available in the selected destination, the
second TAP door opens, ready to accept the next magazine. The TAP doors
alternate as you continue to import magazines.
3. The import process continues as long as there are empty chambers available
or until you click Stop Importing on the Feedback Required screen. Continue
to insert magazines into the TAP, clicking Continue after each one. When
there are no empty chambers remaining in the selected destination, the
process stops automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines
screen displays.
Stop Importing The magazine you placed in the TAP is the last one you want to import.

243
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition

If you selected the Left TAP The Bulk TAP Move Confirmation screen
displays a confirmation message with instructions for performing the
import operation.

Figure 152 Read the instructions on the Bulk TAP Move

Confirmation screen, then click Continue.

a. Click Continue. The bulk TAP carousel rotates to face the outside of
the library.

Important If the carousel contains magazines from a previous export or import operation, the
library alerts you to remove those magazines. When the door release button LED is
solid green, press it to open the bulk TAP door. Remove the magazines, close the
door firmly by pressing at the top and bottom, and click Continue to restart the
import process.

b. When the door release button LED is solid green, press the button to
open the bulk TAP door.
Note: If you wait more than 10 minutes to open the door, the LED
turns off and the carousel rotates to face the interior of the
library. The library considers the import operation complete.

Press the door release button

when it is solid green to open
the bulk TAP door.

Figure 153 Press the door release button to open the door.

244
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition

c. Slide one or more magazines onto the shelves in the bulk TAP
carousel.

Important When you place a magazine in the bulk TAP, make sure that the textured surface on
each side of the magazine is toward the inside of the library and that the guides on
the sides of the magazine fit into the media guides on the media shelf, as shown in
Figure 154. Loading the magazines incorrectly or at an angle can result in damage
to the carousel or the robotics.

Notes:  The correct orientation of the magazines when inserted into

the left TAP is opposite that for the center TAP.
 You can insert up to 14 magazines at a time.

Insert the magazine

so that the textured
surface on each side
is toward the inside
of the library.

Figure 154 Insert the magazine into the bulk TAP carousel, making sure that it is correctly positioned.

245
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition

d. Close the bulk TAP door firmly by pressing at the top and bottom.
An audible click indicates that the door is latched closed. The
carousel rotates the magazines to the interior of the library and the
library robotics begin moving the magazines to open chambers in
the selected destination. The Import/Export TeraPack Magazines
screen refreshes to show that the moves are in progress.
Notes:  If you fail to close the door within 10 minutes, the import
operation times out.
 Click Stop Importing to terminate the import operation after
the magazines currently in the carousel are moved to the
selected destination. When the move is complete, the door
release button LED turns off, indicating that the operation is
complete. The Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen
redisplays.

Figure 155 The Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen

shows that the import process is underway.

e. The next step depends on the circumstances, as follows:

If... Then...
You loaded magazines into The library moves all of the magazines to the selected destination. After
the carousel and the that, one of the following actions occurs:
selected destination  If there are still empty chambers in the selected destination, the
contained enough empty carousel rotates to face the outside of the library and the door release
chambers to accommodate button LED turns solid green again, indicating that it is ready for you
all of the magazines, to load additional magazines.
The process described in this section continues as long as there are
empty chambers in the selected destination or until you click Stop
Importing on the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen (see
Figure 155). When there are no empty chambers remaining, the
process stops automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack
Magazines screen displays.
 If there are no empty chambers remaining in the selected destination,
the import operation is complete.

246
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition

If... Then...
The selected destination The extra magazines are left in the bulk TAP.
did not contain enough 1. If you imported magazines into a storage partition’s entry/exit pool,
empty chambers to use your storage management software to move the cartridges you
accommodate all of the just imported into the partition’s storage pool. This leaves empty
magazines that you loaded magazines in the entry/exit pool, which you can then export.
into the carousel, 2. Use the Advanced option to export magazines from the desired
location to provide the chambers for the magazines that could not be
imported (see Using the Advanced Import/Export Options on
page 259).
a. The library prompts you to remove the magazines currently in the
bulk TAP before you can continue. When the door release button
LED turns solid green, open the bulk TAP door and remove the
magazines that could not be accommodated in the selected
destination during the previous import operation. Close the door
firmly by pressing at the top and bottom.
b. Click Continue to restart the export operation.
Important: Make sure that you do not export the magazines that you
just imported.
3. Repeat the import process described in this section to import the
magazines left over from the first attempt.

6. If you imported magazines into a storage partition’s entry/exit pool, use

your storage management software to move the cartridges to empty
slots in the partition’s storage pool. The inventory maintained by the
software is updated during this process.

Prepare the Entry/Exit Pool

After the storage management software moves the cartridges out of the
entry/exit pool, export empty magazines to provide empty chambers for
future import operations (see Export Magazines from a Partition on
page 249). Be sure to leave at least one magazine with empty slots in it in
the entry/exit pool. These empty slots are used for the cartridges that the
library moves from the storage pool when the storage management
software ejects cartridges from the partition. Over the course of time,
normal operations typically result in the entry/exit pool containing at least
one magazine with empty slots.

Important If the entry/exit pool does not contain a magazine with sufficient empty slots, the
storage management software halts its eject operation. You must exchange the full
magazines in the entry/exit pool for empty ones, as described in Exchange
Magazines or Cartridges in a Partition on page 254, before retrying the eject
operation.

247
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges

If you plan to import additional cartridges, export empty magazines left in

the entry/exit pool after the storage management software moves all of the
previously imported cartridges to the storage pool. The resulting empty
chambers are needed for future import operations (see Export Magazines
from a Partition on page 249).

Important Make sure that the magazines you export are not filled with cartridges that you just
imported but that the storage management software has not yet moved to the
storage pool.

If there are no magazines with empty slots in the entry/exit pool, follow the
steps in Exchange Magazines or Cartridges in a Partition on page 254 to
exchange the full magazines for magazines that have empty slots.

EXPORTING OR EXCHANGING MAGAZINES AND CARTRIDGES

Overview This section provides instructions for exporting or exchanging
all of the magazines and cartridges in a storage partition’s entry/exit or
storage pool or all of the maintenance magazines in a cleaning partition.
Notes:  If you want to export or exchange a specific magazine or a
specific cartridge, use the Advanced option, as described in
Using the Advanced Import/Export Options on page 259.
 If you want to export or exchange a small number of
cartridges, you can also use the Inventory screen to move the
magazine containing the desired cartridge to the TAP so that
you can remove or exchange an individual cartridge and
then move the magazine back to its original location (see
Moving Cartridges Within a Partition on page 278).
Requirements See Import and Export Overview on page 236 for
information about requirements and restrictions when exporting or
exchanging magazines.
Export process The export process uses either the dual TAP in the main
frame or the bulk TAP to physically remove all of the magazines (and any
cartridges they contain) from the selected location (a cleaning partition or a
storage partition’s entry/exit pool or storage pool). The exported
magazines are not replaced by new magazines.
The following steps describe the process for exporting cartridges from a
storage partition using the entry/exit pool. Using this method ensures that
the media inventory maintained by the storage management software
remains accurate.
1. Use your storage management software to tell the library to eject the
cartridges from the library.

248
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges

2. The library moves each cartridge out of the partition’s storage pool and
into an empty slot in a TeraPack magazine already stored in the entry/
exit pool.
3. When all of the requested cartridges are moved to the entry/exit pool,
the library reports to the software that the export request is complete.
4. At your convenience, you can then export the magazines in the entry/
exit pool from the library using controls on the Import/Export TeraPack
Magazines screen of the user interface and either the center TAP or left
TAP.
Exchange process The exchange process moves each of the magazines in
the selected location to either the dual TAP in the main frame or the bulk
TAP so that you can exchange the magazines for others of the same type.
You can also remove or exchange one or more individual cartridges in a
magazine while leaving the other cartridges in place. Exchanging
cartridges in a magazine is especially useful when you need to temporarily
import a cleaning cartridge into the storage pool as part of drive
maintenance.

Prepare for the Export or Exchange

 If you are exchanging cartridges or magazines, have on hand the
prepared data cartridges and properly labeled magazines (see
Preparing Cartridges for Use on page 232).
 Recommended If you want to export cartridges from a storage
partition, use your storage management software to eject the desired
cartridges from the partition’s storage pool. You can then export the
cartridges from the entry/exit pool. Using this method to export
cartridges from a storage partition ensures that the media inventory
maintained by the storage management software remains accurate.
 Exporting a magazine directly from the storage pool is not
recommended unless you are exporting all of the magazines from a
partition. This process is often referred to as a “bulk export.”
If you choose to export magazines directly from the storage partition’s
storage pool, be sure to use your storage management software to
update its media inventory after completing the export (see Updating
the Storage Management Software Inventory on page 268).

Export Magazines from a Partition

1. Log into the library as a user with the privileges appropriate to the
location from which you are exporting magazines (see User Privilege
Requirement on page 236).

249
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges

2. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/
Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays showing the information
for the last partition that was viewed on either the Import/Export
TeraPack Magazines screen or the Inventory screen.
3. Select the partition and TAP you want to use from the drop-down lists,
then click Go.
The Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen refreshes to show the
current status of the chambers assigned to the selected partition.

Figure 156 Use the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines

screen to export or exchange magazines (storage partition
shown).

Select this TAP... If you want to use...

Center The dual TAP located in the center of the main frame.
Note: When exporting TeraPack magazines, using the center TAP is the most
straightforward option unless you need to export a large number of magazines.
Left The bulk TAP located in the bulk TAP media frame on the left end of the library.

4. Click the appropriate Export/Exchange button to select the location

from which you want to export or exchange magazines.
Note: If there are no full chambers in the selected location, the Export/
Exchange button is not present.

For a... Select Export/Exchange for.... If you want to export or exchange...

Storage partition Storage: Full Chambers All of the magazines in the storage pool.
Entry/Exit: Full Chambers All of the magazines in the entry/exit pool.
Entry/Exit: Populated Only the magazines in the entry/exit pool that
Chambers contain one or more cartridges.
Cleaning partition Cleaning: Full Chambers All of the magazines in the cleaning partition.

250
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges

5. The next steps depend on which TAP you selected.

If you selected the Center TAP
a. The library retrieves a magazine from the specified pool and places
it in the TAP. The TAP door opens and a Feedback Required screen
displays.
b. Remove the magazine from the open TAP and set it aside.
c. Return to the operator panel and select the appropriate option on
the Feedback Required screen.
Note: If you wait more than 10 minutes to respond, the library times
out and displays a message on the operator panel. The TAP door
is left open.

Select... If...
Continue You want to export another magazine. The process continues as follows:
1. The TAP door closes automatically when you click Continue. The library
retrieves the next magazine and delivers it to the second TAP. The TAP doors
alternate as you continue to export magazines.
2. The export process continues as long as there are magazines in the selected
location or until you click Stop Exporting on the Feedback Required screen.
Continue to remove the magazines and click Continue after each one. When
all of the magazines in the selected location are exported, the process stops
automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays.
Stop Exporting The magazine you removed from the TAP is the last one you want to export.

251
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges

If you selected the Left TAP

a. The Bulk TAP Move Confirmation screen displays a message with
instructions for performing the export operation.

Important If the carousel contains magazines from a previous export or import operation, the
library alerts you to remove those magazines. When the door release button LED is
solid green, press it to open the bulk TAP door. Remove the magazines, close the
door firmly by pressing at the top and bottom, and select Continue to restart the
import process.

Figure 157 Read the instructions on the Bulk TAP Move

Confirmation screen, then click Continue.

b. Click Continue. The library retrieves up to 14 magazines from the

specified pool and places them in the bulk TAP. The Import/Export
TeraPack Magazines screen refreshes to show that the moves are in
progress.

Figure 158 The Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen

shows that the export process is underway.

Note: Click Stop Exporting on the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines

screen to end the current export operation after the magazines
already in the carousel are processed.

252
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges

c. When all of the magazines are retrieved or when the bulk TAP is
full, the carousel rotates to face the outside of the library and the
door release button LED turns solid green. Press the button to open
the bulk TAP door (see Figure 153 on page 244).
Note: If you wait more than 10 minutes to open the door, the library
considers the export operation complete. The LED turns off and
the carousel rotates to face the interior of the library. When you
attempt the next import or export operation using the bulk TAP,
the library requires you to remove any magazines in the carousel
before you can proceed.
d. Remove the magazines from the carousel and set them aside.
e. Close the bulk TAP door firmly by pressing at the top and bottom.
An audible click indicates that the door is latched closed.
Note: If you fail to close the door within 10 minutes, the export
operation times out.
f. Depending on the circumstances, the export process proceeds as
follows:

If... Then...
The bulk TAP could not The library moves the next set of magazines from the selected location
accommodate all of the to the carousel. After the carousel rotates to face the outside of the
magazines in the selected library, the door release button LED turns solid green again, indicating
location, that it is ready for you to remove the magazines.
The process continues as long as there are magazines in the selected
location or until you click Stop Exporting on the Import/Export TeraPack
Magazines screen. When there are no magazines left in the selected
location, the process stops automatically and the Import/Export
TeraPack Magazines screen displays.
All of the magazines in the The export operation stops automatically and the Import/Export
selected location were TeraPack Magazines screen displays. The door release button LED turns
exported, off and the carousel rotates to face the interior of the library.

6. If you exported magazines directly from the storage pool, use your
storage management software to update the media inventory it
maintains (see Updating the Storage Management Software Inventory
on page 268).

253
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges

Exchange Magazines or Cartridges in a Partition

The process for exchanging a magazine or cartridges in a partition is the
same as that for exporting a magazine up to the point where the magazine
is delivered to the selected TAP.
Note: If you want to exchange only the expired cleaning cartridges in a
cleaning partition, skip to Export or Exchange Expired Cleaning
Cartridges on page 257.
1. Complete Step 1 on page 249 through Step 4 on page 250 to begin the
exchange process.
2. The next steps depend on which TAP you selected.
If you selected the Center TAP
a. When you click Export/Exchange, the library retrieves a magazine
from the selected location and places it in the TAP. The TAP door
opens and a Feedback Required screen displays.
b. Remove the magazine from the TAP and either:
 Place another magazine of the same type in the TAP.
— OR —
 Remove or exchange one or more cartridges in the magazine and
then place the magazine back in the TAP.
Note: If you are exchanging cartridges, make sure to only
exchange cartridges of the same type.
c. Return to the operator panel and select the appropriate option on
the Feedback Required screen.
Note: If you wait more than 10 minutes to respond, the library times
out and displays a message on the operator panel. The TAP door
is left open.

Select... If...
Continue You want to make additional exchanges. The process continues as follows:
1. The TAP door closes automatically. The library returns the magazine to its
original location. It then retrieves the next magazine and delivers it to the
second TAP. The TAP doors alternate as you continue the exchange process.
2. The exchange process continues as long as there are magazines in the
selected location or until you click Stop Exporting on the Feedback Required
screen. Continue to make exchanges, clicking Continue after each one. When
all of the magazines in the selected location are presented for exchange, the
process stops automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines
screen displays.
Stop Exporting The magazine or cartridge you exchanged is the last one you want to process.

254
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges

If you selected the Left TAP

a. The Bulk TAP Move Confirmation screen displays a confirmation
message with instructions for performing the export operation.

Figure 159 Read the instructions on the Bulk TAP Move

Confirmation screen, then click Continue.

b. Click Continue. The library retrieves up to 14 magazines from the

selected pool and places them in the bulk TAP.

Important If the carousel contains magazines from a previous export or import operation, the
library alerts you to remove those magazines. When the door release button LED is
solid green, press it to open the bulk TAP door. Remove the magazines, close the
door firmly by pressing at the top and the bottom, and click Continue to restart the
export process.

The Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen refreshes to show

that the moves are in progress.

Figure 160 The Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen

shows that the export or exchange process is underway.

Note: Click Stop Exporting on the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines

screen to end the current exchange operation after the
magazines already in the carousel are processed.

255
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges

c. When all of the magazines are retrieved or when the bulk TAP is
full, the carousel rotates to face the outside of the library and the
door release button LED is solid green. Press the button to open the
bulk TAP door (see Figure 153 on page 244).
Note: If you wait more than 10 minutes to open the door, the library
considers the operation complete. The LED turns off and the
carousel rotates to face the interior of the library. When you
attempt the next import or export operation using the bulk TAP,
the library requires you to remove any magazines in the carousel
before you can proceed.
d. Make the desired exchanges.

Important When you place a magazine in the bulk TAP, make sure that the textured surface on
each side of the magazine is toward the inside of the library and that the guides on
the sides of the magazine fit into the media guides on the media shelf, as shown in
Figure 154 on page 245. Loading the magazines incorrectly or at an angle can result
in damage to the carousel or the robotics.

Important To ensure that you place the magazine in the same location that it originally
occupied in the carousel, remove one magazine at a time, perform the desired
exchange, and place the magazine back in the carousel.

 If you are exchanging magazines, remove each magazine from

the carousel and replace it with another one of the same type.
 If you are exchanging one cartridge for another, remove the
magazines from the carousel one at a time, exchange the desired
cartridges, and then put the magazine back into the same
location that it originally occupied.
e. Close the bulk TAP door firmly by pressing at the top and bottom.
An audible click indicates that the door is latched closed.
Note: If you fail to close the door within 10 minutes, the exchange
operation times out.
f. Depending on the circumstances, proceed as follows:

If... Then...
The bulk TAP could not The library moves the magazines in the carousel back to the locations
accommodate all of the they originally occupied. It then retrieves the next set of magazines and
magazines in the selected delivers them to the bulk TAP. The door release button LED turns solid
location, green again, indicating that it is ready for you to remove the magazines.
The process continues as long as there are magazines that need to be
processed in the selected location or until you click Stop Exporting on
the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen. When all of the
magazines are presented for exchange, the process stops automatically
and the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays.

256
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges

If... Then...
All of the magazines in the The exchange operation is complete. The door release button LED turns
selected pool were off and the carousel rotates to face the interior of the library.
delivered to the bulk TAP,

3. If you exchanged cartridges in a storage partition’s storage pool, be sure

to update your storage management software’s media inventory (see
Updating the Storage Management Software Inventory on page 268).

Export or Exchange Expired Cleaning Cartridges

The export and exchange processes described in this section only operate
on Maintenance TeraPack magazines that contain expired cleaning
cartridges. The Maintenance TeraPack magazines are always stored in a
cleaning partition.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/
Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays showing the information
for the last partition that was viewed on either the Import/Export
TeraPack Magazines screen or the Inventory screen.
3. Select the desired cleaning partition and the center TAP, then click Go.
The Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen refreshes to show the
current status of the chambers assigned to the partition.

Important Using the bulk TAP to export or exchange expired cleaning cartridges is not
supported. The Export/Exchange Expired button does not appear on the Import/
Export TeraPack Magazines screen if you select the left TAP.

4. Click Export/Exchange Expired on the Import/Export TeraPack

Magazines screen.

Figure 161 Select Export/Exchange Expired.

257
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges

5. The library retrieves a magazine that contains expired cleaning

cartridges from the cleaning partition and places it in the TAP. The TAP
door opens and a Feedback Required screen displays, indicating which
cartridges to remove from the magazine.
a. Remove or exchange the expired cleaning cartridges indicated on
the Feedback Required screen.
b. Place the magazine back in the TAP if you removed it.
6. Return to the operator panel and click the appropriate option on the
Feedback Required screen.
Note: If you wait more than 10 minutes to respond, the library times
out and displays a message on the operator panel. The TAP door
is left open.

Click... If...
Continue You removed the expired cleaning cartridges in the magazines and did not
replace them with new cartridges. Also click Continue if you removed or
exchanged the entire magazine. The process continues as follows:
1. The TAP door closes automatically. If you exchanged magazines, the library
first moves the new magazine into the cleaning partition. It then retrieves the
next magazine from the cleaning partition and delivers it to the second TAP.
The TAP doors alternate as each magazine is retrieved.
Note: If you exchanged cartridges and clicked Continue instead of Override,
click Ok in response to a message stating that the slot containing the exchanged
cartridge should be empty.
2. The process continues as long as there are magazines with expired cleaning
cartridges in the cleaning partition or until you click Stop Exporting on the
Feedback Required screen. Remove the expired cartridges from each
magazine, place the magazine back into the TAP, and click Continue for each
one. When there are no expired cleaning cartridges left in the cleaning
partition, the process stops automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack
Magazines screen displays.
Override You exchanged the expired cleaning cartridges in the magazine for new ones.
The process continues as follows:
1. The TAP door closes automatically. The library moves the magazine in the
TAP back to the cleaning partition. It then retrieves the next magazine from
the cleaning partition and delivers it to the second TAP. The TAP doors
alternate as each magazine is retrieved.
2. The process continues as long as there are magazines with expired cleaning
cartridges in the cleaning partition or until you click Stop Exporting on the
Feedback Required screen. Exchange the expired cartridges in each
magazine, place the magazine back into the TAP, and click Override for each
one. When there are no expired cleaning cartridges left in the cleaning
partition, the process stops automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack
Magazines screen displays.
Stop Exporting The expired cleaning cartridge you removed or exchanged is the last one you
want to process.

258
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Using the Advanced Import/Export Options

USING THE ADVANCED IMPORT/EXPORT OPTIONS

Overview The Advanced option on the Import/Export TeraPack
Magazines screen lets you import a magazine into a specific chamber in a
partition or export a specific magazine from a partition.
Note: If you only need to import or export a single cartridge, you can
also use the options on the Inventory screen (see Chapter 8 –
Using the Cartridge Inventory, beginning on page 269). This
chapter also provides instructions for moving cartridges from
one location to another within a partition.
Requirements When using the advanced import/export options, keep the
following in mind:
 Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can access the
advanced import/export options.
 Refer to the following sections for additional requirements and
restrictions:
 Import and Export Overview on page 236
 Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition on page 237
 Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges on page 248
Populate the Import/Export move queue using one of the following:
 Manually Create a Move Queue on page 259
 Upload a Move Queue on page 263

Manually Create a Move Queue

1. If you want to import one or more cartridges, place the prepared
cartridges in an empty TeraPack magazine (see Preparing Cartridges
for Use on page 232).
2. Log into the library as a superuser or administrator.
3. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/
Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays showing the information
for the last partition that was viewed on either the Import/Export
TeraPack Magazines screen or the Inventory screen.

259
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Using the Advanced Import/Export Options

4. Click Advanced. The Advanced Import/Export screen displays showing

the information for the partition that was selected on the basic Import/
Export TeraPack Magazines screen.

Figure 162 Access the Advanced Import/Export options.

5. On the Advanced Import/Export screen, use the drop-down lists to

select the partition, the TAP you want to use, and the direction you
want to move the magazine, then click Go.

Figure 163 Select the partition, TAP, and the direction of the
move.

260
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Using the Advanced Import/Export Options

Select the TAP

Select this TAP... If you want to use...

Center The dual TAP located in the center of the main frame.
Left The bulk TAP located in the bulk TAP media frame on the left end of the library.
Important: When using the Left TAP, all moves in the queue must be either
imports or exports. Building a move queue that contains moves both to and
from the carousel is not supported.
Note: For moves to the Left TAP (the bulk TAP), the magazine is moved to an
available empty chamber in the carousel.

Select the direction

For a... Select... To move the magazine from...
Storage partition TAP > Storage The selected TAP to the selected chamber in the storage pool.
Storage > TAP The selected chamber in the storage pool to the selected TAP.
TAP > EE The selected TAP to the selected chamber in the entry/exit pool.
EE > TAP The selected chamber in the entry/exit pool to the selected TAP.
Cleaning partition TAP > Storage From the selected TAP to the selected chamber in the
cleaning partition.
Storage > TAP From the selected chamber in the cleaning partition to the
selected TAP.
TAP > EE For a cleaning partition, the options for moving to or from
EE > TAP the entry/exit pool are not valid.

6. Use the Chamber drop-down list to select the source chamber for the
move, then click Go to refresh the screen.
 For moves to the TAP from either the entry/exit or storage pool, the
selected chamber is the source for the move. The TeraPack Case
Contents list shows the barcodes of the cartridges in the magazine in
the selected chamber.
 For moves from the TAP to either the entry/exit or storage pool, the
selected chamber is the destination for the move. Use the Chamber
drop-down list to select an empty chamber in the selected pool.

261
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Using the Advanced Import/Export Options

7. Click Add Move. An entry listing the move you just defined appears in
the Move Queue list.

Figure 164 Add the move to the Move Queue.

8. Repeat Step 5 on page 260 through Step 7 to add more moves to the
Move Queue.
Notes:  Changing the selected partition or the selected TAP clears the
move queue.
 If you select the Center TAP, You can add moves from
different directions to the same move queue. When using the
Left TAP, all moves in the queue must be either imports or
exports.
 If you do not want to perform one or more of the moves in
the queue, do the following:
 Select the move and click Delete to remove it from the
Move Queue list.
 Click Delete All to remove all of the defined moves from
the Move Queue list.
9. Continue with Start the Moves on page 266.

262
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Using the Advanced Import/Export Options

Upload a Move Queue

1. Create a media exchange move file listing the offsets for the imports or
exports you want to initiate. You can create the file using the
mediaExchange.xml?action=prepareImportExportList
command (see the Spectra Tape Libraries XML Command Reference for
more information) or manually. If you are creating the move file
manually, keep the following in mind:
 The file must be an ASCII text file.
 Each line in the file must contain a 1-based TeraPack offset.
 All chambers indicated by the offsets in a file must be full indicating
an export, or all chambers must be empty indicating an import. You
cannot mix import and export moves in one file.
 If you are using a USB device to upload the file, the file must be
named MediaExchangeMoves.txt and the file must be saved to
the root of the USB device.
2. Log into the library as a superuser or administrator.
3. If you saved the move queue file to a USB device, connect the device to
one of the USB ports on the LCM or operator panel and allow time for
the device to mount before proceeding.
4. Access the Upload Media Exchange Move List screen.
Using RLC, from the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export.
The Upload Media Exchange Move List screen displays.
— OR—
Access the Upload Media Exchange Move List screen from the front
panel.
a. On the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The
Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays showing the
information for the last partition that was viewed on either the
Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen or the Inventory screen.
b. Click Advanced. The Advanced Import/Export screen displays
showing the information for the partition that was selected on the
basic Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen.

263
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Using the Advanced Import/Export Options

c. On the Advanced Import/Export screen (see Figure 163 on

page 260), click Upload. The Upload Media Exchange Move List
screen displays.

Figure 165 Add the move to the Move Queue.

5. Select the Partition from which you want to export, or to which you
want to import, TeraPack magazines.
6. Select whether to move magazines to, or from, the Storage pool or
entry/exit (EE) pool.
7. Select the desired option for uploading the move queue file.

Select... To...
Remote Upload the move queue file using the BlueScale web interface.
Note: This option is only available if your are logged in using the RLC.
USB Upload the move queue file from a USB device connected to the LCM or
operator panel.
Important: The move queue file must be named
MediaExchangeMoves.txt. The library does not recognize any other file
name. The file must be stored in the root of the USB device.

264
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Using the Advanced Import/Export Options

8. Click Upload.
 If you selected USB, the Advance Import/Export screen displays.
Continue with Step 9 on page 265.
 If you selected Remote, the RLC Upload Media Exchange Move File
screen displays. Use your web browser’s upload feature to find the
file, and then click Next. The Advanced Import/Export screen
displays with a new button labeled Populate.

Figure 166 The Advanced Import/Export screen with the

Populate button.

9. Click Populate to add the imports or exports in the media exchange

move file to the move queue.
10. Select a TAP for the magazines to be imported from, or exported to.

Select this TAP... If you want to use...

Center The dual TAP located in the center of the main frame.
Left The bulk TAP located in the bulk TAP media frame on the left end of the library.
Note: For moves to the Left TAP (the bulk TAP), the magazine is moved to an
available empty chamber in the carousel.

11. Continue with Start the Moves on page 266.

265
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Using the Advanced Import/Export Options

Start the Moves

1. Click Start Moves to begin processing the moves.
2. The next steps depend on which TAP you selected.
If you selected the Center TAP The TAP door opens.
a. Depending on the direction of the move, either remove the
magazine or insert a magazine.
b. Return to the operator panel and select one of the following options
on the Feedback Required screen.
Note: If you wait more than 10 minutes to respond, the library times
out and displays a message on the operator panel. The TAP door
is left open.

Select... To...
Continue Process the next move in the queue.
1. The TAP door closes automatically and the library performs the next move.
2. The TAP door opens and a Feedback Required screen displays waiting for
you to remove or insert a magazine. The TAP doors alternate as additional
moves are processed.
3. The process continues until all of the moves in the queue are processed or
until you click Stop Exporting on the Feedback Required screen. Continue to
remove or insert a magazine in the TAP, clicking Continue for each one. When
all of the defined moves are completed, the process stops automatically and
the Advanced Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays.
Stop Exporting Stop processing the move queue.

If you selected the Left TAP The Bulk TAP Move Confirmation screen
displays a confirmation message with instructions for performing the
move operation (see Figure 152 on page 244).
a. Select Continue.

Important If the carousel contains magazines from a previous export or import operation, the
library alerts you to remove those magazines. When the door release button LED is
solid green, press it to open the bulk TAP door. Remove the magazines, close the
door firmly by pressing at the top and bottom, and select Continue to restart the
import process.

The Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen refreshes to show

that the moves are in progress (for example, see Figure 155 on
page 246).
Note: Depending on the direction of the move, you can select Stop
Importing or Stop Exporting on the Import/Export TeraPack
Magazines screen to terminate the moves after the magazines
currently in the carousel are moved to the required destination.

266
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Using the Advanced Import/Export Options

b. The library begins processing the move queue as follows:

If the direction of Then...

the move is...
From the bulk TAP The bulk TAP carousel rotates to face the outside of the library and the door
to a storage release button LED is solid green.
partition pool or to 1. Press the button to open the bulk TAP door (see Figure 153 on page 244).
a cleaning Note: If you wait more than 10 minutes to open the door, the LED turns off
partition, and the carousel rotates to face the interior of the library.
2. Place the magazines on the carousel shelves.
CAUTION: When you place a magazine in the bulk TAP, make sure that the
textured surface on each side of the magazine is toward the inside of the
library and that the guides on the sides of the magazine fit into the media
guides on the media shelf, as shown in Figure 154 on page 245. Loading the
magazines incorrectly or at an angle can result in damage to the carousel or
the robotics.
3. Close the bulk TAP door firmly by pressing at the top and bottom. An
audible click indicates that the door is latched closed. The library moves the
magazines to the chambers specified in the move queue.
Note: If you fail to close the door within 10 minutes, the import operation
times out.
4. If there are additional chambers listed in the move queue, the process
continues until all of the chambers are filled or until you select the Stop
Importing option on the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen. When all
of the chambers are full, the process stops automatically and the Import/
Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays.
From a pool to the The library retrieves up to 14 of the magazines in the move queue and places
bulk TAP, them in the bulk TAP carousel. When all of the magazines in the move queue
are retrieved or when the shelves are full, the bulk TAP carousel rotates to the
unload position and the door release button LED is solid green.
Note: If you take more than 10 minutes to press the door release button to
open the door, the LED turns off and the carousel rotates to face the interior of
the library. The library considers the move complete. When you attempt the
next import or export operation, the library requires you to remove the
magazines before you can proceed.
1. Press the button to open the bulk TAP door (see Figure 153 on page 244).
2. Remove the magazines and set them aside.
3. Close the bulk TAP door firmly by pressing at the top and bottom. An
audible click indicates that the door is latched closed.
Note: If you fail to close the door within 10 minutes, the export operation
times out.
4. If there are additional chambers listed in the move queue, the process
continues until all of the magazines in the list are exported or until you select
the Stop Exporting option on the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen.
When all of the magazines are exported, the process stops automatically and
the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen displays.

267
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 7 — Importing and Exporting Cartridges Updating the Storage Management Software Inventory

3. If you imported magazines into a partition’s storage pool or exported

magazines from a partition’s storage pool, be sure to use your storage
management software to update its media inventory after completing
the export (see Updating the Storage Management Software Inventory).

UPDATING THE STORAGE MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE

INVENTORY
As the library imports magazines, it reads the barcode labels on the
individual cartridges and the magazines and automatically updates the
physical inventory that it maintains. This process does not automatically
update the media inventory maintained and used by the storage
management software.
The storage management software maintains its own media inventory,
which it uses when performing backup/restore operations and for media
management. To avoid errors when the storage management software
requests a specific cartridge, be sure to use your storage management
software to update its media inventory whenever you import cartridges
into or export/exchange cartridges from a storage partition’s storage pool
as described in this chapter. Refer to your software documentation for
more information.

268
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 CHAPTER 8
Using the Cartridge Inventory
This chapter describes using the library’s cartridge inventory to identify
and move cartridges within the library. See Chapter 7 – Importing and
Exporting Cartridges, beginning on page 231 for information about
importing and exporting magazines and cartridges.

Topic
Understanding the Cartridge Inventory page 270
Viewing and Downloading the Cartridge page 270
Inventory
View the Cartridge Inventory for a Location page 271
Download the Cartridge Inventory page 273
Locating a Specific Cartridge page 277
Moving Cartridges Within a Partition page 278
Move Cartridges Using the BlueScale page 278
Inventory Screen
Upload and Process the Move Queue File page 286

269
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Understanding the Cartridge Inventory

UNDERSTANDING THE CARTRIDGE INVENTORY

The inventory is a record of all the cartridges stored in each library
partition and their current locations (for example, in a specific slot in a
TeraPack magazine, or in a drive). As cartridges are imported into a
partition, the barcode reader on the transporter reads the barcode labels on
the individual cartridges and the magazines. The library uses this barcode
information to maintain its physical inventory, which is stored in the RCM.
The Inventory screen, available from the General toolbar, lets you interact
with the cartridge inventory in the following ways:

If you want to... The inventory screen lets you...

View information  View the cartridges located in a storage partition’s storage pool, its entry/exit
about the pool, or a drive.
cartridges in a  View the cartridges located in a cleaning partition and identify expired
partition, cartridges. An “x” appears next to the slot number if the cleaning cartridge is
expired.
 Download an XML file that lists the inventory of every location in the
selected storage partition (see Download the Cartridge Inventory on
page 273).
Locate a specific Search for a cartridge using either its barcode label information or its slot
cartridge in the location (see Locating a Specific Cartridge on page 277).
partition,
Move a cartridge  Find and select a specific cartridge within a partition and move it to another
from one location location (see Moving Cartridges Within a Partition on page 278).
to another,  Automate a series of moves in a storage partition by uploading a specially
formatted ASCII text file that contains a sequence of moves to the partition
(see Create a Move Queue File on page 283).

VIEWING AND DOWNLOADING THE CARTRIDGE INVENTORY

Overview The Inventory screen provides information about the cartridge
inventory for each of the partitions configured in the library. It also
provides options for interacting with that inventory to move cartridges
from one location to another.
Requirements When using the Inventory screen, keep the following
requirements in mind:
 Any user with operator privileges who is assigned to the partition and
all users with superuser or administrator privileges can view and
download the cartridge inventory.
 Downloading an XML file containing the current cartridge inventory
for a partition requires either a remote connection to the library using
the BlueScale web interface (RLC) or a USB device connected to the
library.

270
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Viewing and Downloading the Cartridge Inventory

View the Cartridge Inventory for a Location

Note: You can also view the cartridge inventory for a specific location
using the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen (see Using
MLM Reporting on page 321).
1. Log into the library.
2. From the toolbar menu, select General > Inventory. The Inventory
screen displays, showing the information for the last partition that was
viewed on either the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen or the
Inventory screen.
3. Select the partition for which you want to view the inventory from the
Partition drop-down list, then click Go. The screen refreshes to show the
cartridge inventory for the Source type that was selected the last time
the Inventory screen was viewed.
Note: The Destination list shows all of the empty locations of the
selected type.

Select the partition

you want to view.

Figure 167 The Inventory screen.

271
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Viewing and Downloading the Cartridge Inventory

4. Use the Source drop-down list to select the location for which you want
to view the cartridge inventory, then click Go. The Source list refreshes
to display a list of the cartridges in the requested location type.

Available sources
(storage partition
shown)

Figure 168 Select the source type for which you want to view the inventory.

Notes:  The available sources depend on the type of partition

selected.
 If the selected source does not contain any cartridges, the
source list shows “No sources found.”
 The From TAP option is only available when you access the
user interface from the operator panel.

Partition Type Available Sources

Storage  Storage — Lists the barcodes of the cartridges currently in the selected
partition’s storage pool.
 Entry/Exit — Lists the barcodes of the cartridges currently in the partition’s
entry/exit pool.
 Drives — Lists the barcode of the cartridge currently in each drive assigned to
the partition. Only drives that contain a cartridge are included in the list.
 From TAP — Configures a move that transfers the magazine containing the
destination slot to the TAP so that you can insert a cartridge (see Moving
Cartridges Within a Partition on page 278).
 All — Lists all of the cartridges in the partition, regardless of location.
Cleaning  Cleaning — Lists the cleaning cartridges currently in the selected cleaning
partition.
 From TAP — Configures a move that transfers the magazine containing the
destination slot to the TAP so that you can insert a cartridge (see Moving
Cartridges Within a Partition on page 278).
 All — Lists all of the cartridges in the partition, regardless of location.
Note: If an “x” appears next to the slot number in the source list for a cleaning
partition, the cleaning cartridge is expired.

272
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Viewing and Downloading the Cartridge Inventory

Download the Cartridge Inventory

If desired, you can download the inventory for the selected partition as an
XML file. You can use the information in the downloaded inventory when
creating a move queue file (see Create a Move Queue File on page 283).
 If you are using the BlueScale user interface from the operator panel,
the cartridge inventory is saved as an XML file on a USB device that is
connected to the LCM or the operator panel (T950B only).
 If you are accessing the library using the BlueScale web interface, the
cartridge inventory is displayed using the XML format in a new
browser window on the computer that you are using to access the
library. From there you can save the file to a convenient location for
later use. If a USB device is connected to the LCM or operator panel
(T950B only), you can also save the XML file to the USB device.
The inventory lists the following information for all magazine slots in the
partition’s storage pool and entry/exit pool and for the drives in the
partition.
 For each slot and drive, the list shows the location ID and indicates
whether or not it is full (occupied).
 For each occupied slot or drive, the list also indicates the barcode
information of the cartridge.
Note: You can also use the XML command interface to obtain the full
inventory of the partition, including both full and empty slots
and drive numbers (see inventory.xml in the Spectra Tape Libraries
XML Command Reference).
Usage Requirements Downloading an XML file containing the current
cartridge inventory requires either a remote connection to the library using
the BlueScale web interface (RLC) or a USB device connected to the LCM
or operator panel (T950B only).

273
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Viewing and Downloading the Cartridge Inventory

Download the Inventory Use the following steps to download the

inventory.
1. Log into the library.
2. If you want to save the XML file containing the cartridge inventory to a
USB device, connect the device to the USB port on the LCM or the
operator panel (T950B only) and allow time for the device to mount
before proceeding (see Connect a USB Device to the Library on
page 184).
3. From the toolbar menu, select General > Inventory. The Inventory
screen displays, showing the information for the last partition that was
viewed on either the Import/Export TeraPack Magazines screen or the
Inventory screen.
4. If you want to download the inventory for a partition other than the
one currently displayed, select the desired partition from the Partition
drop-down list, then click Go (see Figure 167 on page 271).
5. Click Advanced to display the options for uploading moves and
downloading the inventory.

Click Advanced to
display the advanced
inventory options.

Figure 169 Click Advanced to display the advanced options

for the selected partition.

274
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Viewing and Downloading the Cartridge Inventory

6. On the Advanced Inventory screen, select the Download Inventory tab.

Important The option to download the inventory file to a USB device is grayed out if the USB
device is not connected and given time to mount before you click Advanced on the
inventory screen.

Figure 170 Select the download option for the inventory file.

7. Select the desired option for downloading the inventory file. As soon as
you make your selection, the download process begins.

Click... To...
Remote Browser Automatically open the XML file on the computer accessing the library’s
BlueScale web interface.
Notes:
 This option can only be selected if you are accessing the library using the
BlueScale web interface (RLC).
 If the application associated with XML files is a web browser, the XML file
opens in a new browser window.
USB Save the XML file to the root of the USB device connected to the LCM or
operator panel (T950B only). The file name uses the following format:
[Partition Name]_[yyyy-mm-dd]_[hh_mm_ss].xml
Note: This option can only be selected if you connected a USB device to the
library before you clicked Advanced.

8. If the XML file was successfully saved to the USB device or if the library
detected errors, a Download Verification screen displays. If errors are
reported, resolve them and then repeat the download process.
Note: The Download Verification screen does not display if the file
successfully downloads to the remote computer.

275
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Viewing and Downloading the Cartridge Inventory

9. Open the XML file.

 If you selected the Remote Browser option for downloading the XML
file, the file opens automatically. You can then save the file to your
computer for later use.
Note: See inventory.xml in the Spectra Tape Libraries XML Command
Reference for a description of the fields in the XML file.

Figure 171 The cartridge inventory XML file opened in a web

browser.

 If you selected the USB option, move the USB device to a computer
and open the XML file.
 To view the XML file in spreadsheet format, use Microsoft Excel®
2007 or later, or use another spreadsheet program that supports the
XML file format.

Figure 172 Example of the cartridge inventory XML file

opened in Excel.

276
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Locating a Specific Cartridge

LOCATING A SPECIFIC CARTRIDGE

The Inventory screen provides three different methods for locating a
specific cartridge in the library.
1. Log into the library.
2. Display the cartridge inventory for the desired partition location (see
View the Cartridge Inventory for a Location on page 271).
3. Locate the desired cartridge using one of the following methods.

To locate using... Do the following...

The Source list, 1. Scroll through the list until you find the barcode for the desired cartridge.
2. Click the barcode to select the cartridge.
The slot number, 1. Enter the slot number for the cartridge you want in the View Source Slot field.
2. Click Go. The Source list refreshes to show the requested slot highlighted at
the top of the list.
3. Click the cartridge to select it.
The barcode label 1. Enter the barcode label information for the cartridge you want to locate in the
information, Find by Barcode field.
2. Click Find. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the requested
cartridge highlighted at the top of the Source list.
3. Click the barcode to select the cartridge.
Important: Only the slots below the top one displayed in the list are searched.
Scroll to the top of the source list before clicking Find. The search starts at the
second visible slot.

277
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Moving Cartridges Within a Partition

MOVING CARTRIDGES WITHIN A PARTITION

Overview During normal operations, you typically use your storage
management software to move cartridges from one location to another
within the library. However, you may occasionally need to create and
process a move queue to move cartridges manually. This can be done using
the library’s BlueScale interface to locate and move individual cartridges
(for example, to move a cleaning cartridge stored in the storage partition to
a drive if you are not using the Auto Drive Clean option) or by uploading a
series of moves to a storage partition using a specially formatted ASCII text
file. Use the instructions in one of the following sections to manually direct
cartridge moves.
 Move Cartridges Using the BlueScale Inventory Screen
 Move Cartridges Using an ASCII Move File on page 283
User Privilege Requirements The user privilege requirements when
moving cartridges in a storage partition depend on how the library is being
accessed. See Specify the Partition Users on page 213 for information about
assigning users to a partition.
 Any user with operator privileges who is assigned to the partition and
all users with superuser or administrator privileges can move
cartridges within the partition using the BlueScale interface on the
operator panel.
 Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can move
cartridges within the partition using the BlueScale web interface (RLC)
or upload a move queue file.
Usage Requirements Uploading a move queue file requires either a
remote connection to the library using the BlueScale web interface (RLC) or
a USB device connected to the LCM or operator panel (T950B only).

Move Cartridges Using the BlueScale Inventory Screen

The library uses a move queue to direct tape cartridge moves. The move
queue lists one or more source/destination pairs, with each pair
representing a single move operation.
Manually Create the Move Queue Use the following steps to create the
move queue using the BlueScale Inventory screen.
1. Log into the library as a user with the required privileges (see User
Privilege Requirements above).

278
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Moving Cartridges Within a Partition

2. Display the cartridge inventory for the desired partition location.

a. From the toolbar menu, select General > Inventory.
b. Select the partition for which you want to view the inventory from
the Partition drop-down list, then click Go.
3. Use the Source drop-down list to select the source type for the move,
then click Go.
Notes:  Selecting a specific source type instead of using All displays
fewer items through which you must scroll to locate the
desired cartridge.
 The From TAP option is only available when you access the
user interface from the front panel.
 The TAP only contains cartridges while an import or export
operation is in progress. Cartridges are not stored in the TAP.
 If you select Entry/Exit from the Source drop-down list and
there are cartridges in the entry/exit pool, a Bulk Load button
displays at the bottom of the Inventory screen. Clicking Bulk
Load automatically adds operations to the move queue for
moving each cartridge in the entry/exit pool to an empty slot
in the storage pool.

Partition Type Available Sources

Storage  Storage — Lists the cartridges currently in the selected storage partition’s
storage pool.
 Entry/Exit — Lists the cartridges currently in the partition’s entry/exit pool.
 Drives — Lists the drives in the partition that currently contain a cartridge.
 From TAP — Configures a move that transfers the magazine containing the
destination slot to the TAP so that you can insert a cartridge. The magazine is
then returned to its original location.
 All — Lists all of the cartridges in the partition, regardless of location.
Cleaning  Cleaning — Lists the cleaning cartridges currently in the selected cleaning
partition.
 From TAP — Configures a move that transfers the maintenance magazine
containing the destination slot to the TAP so that you can insert a cartridge.
The magazine is then returned to its original location.
 All — Lists all of the cartridges in the partition.

4. If you are moving a cartridge that is already in the library, locate and
select the cartridge you want to move in the Source list, as described in
Locating a Specific Cartridge on page 277.

279
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Moving Cartridges Within a Partition

5. Use the Destination drop-down list to select the type of location to

which you want to move the cartridge, then click Go. The destination
list refreshes to show all of the empty slots in the selected location.

Important You cannot use the Inventory screen to move a cleaning cartridge in a cleaning
partition to a drive in a storage partition. Instead, use the Clean button on the
Drives screen (see Manually Cleaning a Drive on page 476).

Notes:  The available destinations depend on the type of partition

you selected.
 The To TAP option is only available when accessing the
BlueScale user interface from the front panel.

Available destinations
(storage partition shown)

Figure 173 Select the Destination for the cartridge.

Partition Type Available Destinations

Storage  Storage — Lists all of the empty slots in the selected storage partition’s storage
pool.
 Entry/Exit — Lists all of the empty slots in the selected partition’s entry/exit
pool.
 To TAP — Configures a move that transfers the magazine containing the source
slot to the TAP so that you can remove the cartridge from the specified slot.
The magazine is then returned to its original location.
 Drives — Lists the drives in the partition that are currently empty.
 All — Lists all of the empty slots in the partition, regardless of the location.
Note: Selecting a specific destination type instead of using All displays fewer
items through which you must scroll to locate the desired destination slot.

280
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Moving Cartridges Within a Partition

Partition Type Available Destinations

Cleaning  Cleaning — Lists all of the empty slots in the selected cleaning partition.
 To TAP — Configures a move that transfers the maintenance magazine
containing the source slot to the TAP so that you can remove or replace the
cleaning cartridge from the specified slot. The magazine is then returned to its
original location.
 All — List all available destinations in the partition, regardless of the type.
Note: Selecting a specific destination type instead of using All displays fewer
items through which you must scroll to locate the desired destination slot.

6. If you are moving a cartridge to a slot, locate and select the desired slot
in the Destination list.
7. Click Add Move. An entry listing the move you just defined appears in
the Move Queue list.

Click Add Move to add the

defined move to the Move
Queue.

Figure 174 Add the move to the Move Queue.

8. Repeat Step 3 on page 279 through Step 7 on this page for each
additional cartridge you want to move.
Note: If you want to remove one or more of the moves in the queue:
 Select the move and click Delete to remove it from the Move
Queue list.
 Click Delete All to remove all of the defined moves from the
Move Queue list.

281
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Moving Cartridges Within a Partition

Process the Move Queue Use the following steps to process the move
queue created using the Inventory screen.
1. If you are moving cartridges into the library, prepare the cartridges as
described in Preparing Cartridges for Use on page 232.
Note: When importing cartridges, you do not need to put the prepared
cartridges into a magazine. You are prompted to insert the
prepared cartridge into the selected empty slot in the magazine
that is delivered to the TAP.
2. Choose one of the move processing modes:

Click Start Moves

or Start in
Background.

Figure 175 Click Start Moves or Start in Background to begin processing the
move queue.

Click... To...
Start Moves Begin processing the moves in the order that they are listed in the queue. A
progress screen tracks the progress of the move operations. When all of the
moves in the queue have been processed, the screen displays the status of each
move. No other operations can be started until the moves complete.
Note: If the TAP is the source for or destination for a move, a Feedback
Required screen displays.
 From TAP — The magazine containing the destination slot is moved to the TAP
so that you can insert a cartridge in the slot indicated by the Feedback
Required screen. The magazine is then returned to its original location.
 To TAP — The magazine containing the source slot is moved to the TAP so that
you can remove or replace the cartridge from the slot indicated by the
Feedback Required screen. The magazine is then returned to its original
location.

282
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Moving Cartridges Within a Partition

Click... To...
Start in Background Begin processing the moves in the background. The front panel or RLC is
available for some operations.
Notes:
 You are not able to edit the partition, import or export cartridges into the
partition, or create another move queue for the partition while background
moves are in progress.
 Start in Background is not available if the move queue includes moves to or
from the TAP.
 The library posts informational messages after every 10 moves in the move
queue and when the all moves complete.

3. When the moves complete, use your storage management software to

update the inventory it maintains, if necessary (see Updating the
Storage Management Software Inventory on page 268).

Move Cartridges Using an ASCII Move File

Create a Move Queue File If desired, you can create an ASCII text file that
lists sources and destinations for a series of moves and upload that move
queue file to the library. This option is particularly useful if you need to
move a large number of cartridges.

Important The maximum number of moves that can be configured in a single move queue is
100 source/destination pairs.

Important The barcode for a cartridge can only be used as the source in the first move of that
cartridge in a connected sequence of moves. The remaining moves in the sequence
must specify either a slot or a drive as the source. For example, in a sequence that
moves a cartridge from a storage slot to a drive and then back to the storage slot,
only the move from the slot to the drive can use the barcode as the source.

Notes:  The option to upload a move queue file is only available for
storage partitions.
 Moves to or from the TAP are not supported.
1. Use one of the following methods to obtain an inventory listing for the
partition in which you plan to move the cartridges:
 Download the partition inventory using the Advanced option on the
Inventory screen (see Download the Cartridge Inventory on
page 273).
 Download the partition inventory using the XML command
interface. See the Spectra Tape Libraries XML Command Reference for a
detailed description of each parameter in the downloaded inventory
file.
Note: Both methods return the same information.

283
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Moving Cartridges Within a Partition

2. Using an ASCII text editor, create a file containing the list of moves you
want to configure. Each line of the move queue file must specify a
source and destination separated by a delimiter.
The format of each line is:
[source_id][source_num][delimiter][destination_id]
[destination_num]

where:
Note: The slot numbers and drive numbers are assigned by the library.

For this variable... The possible values are... Description...

source_id  SLOT — The cartridge is moved Specifies the location type for the
from a slot in the storage pool. source from which you want to move
 EE — The cartridge is moved from the cartridge.
a slot in the entry/exit pool.
 DRIVE — The cartridge is moved
from the drive.
 BC — The cartridge to be moved is
identified by its barcode label
information.
Note: The values are not case-
sensitive.
source_num  A positive integer for all source_id Specifically identifies the cartridge to be
values except BC. moved, either by the ID of the slot or
 The human-readable barcode label drive where it is currently located or by
character string if the source_id is the barcode label on the cartridge.
BC.  If the source_id is SLOT or EE, this
Important: If the cartridge does value is the number assigned to the
not have a valid barcode label, slot where the cartridge is currently
then you must specify both the located. Locate the <offset>
element type for the source_id parameter for the desired cartridge in
and the number of the slot in the the downloaded inventory file and
entry/exit or storage pool or the use that value as the source_num.
number of the drive where the  If the source_id is DRIVE, this value is
cartridge is located for the the number of the drive where the
source_num. cartridge is currently located. Locate
the <offset> parameter for the drive in
the downloaded inventory file and
use that value as the source_num.
 If the source_id is BC, this value is the
human-readable barcode character
string for the cartridge to be moved.
Locate the <barcode> parameter for
the desired cartridge in the
downloaded inventory file and use
that value as the source_num.

284
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Moving Cartridges Within a Partition

For this variable... The possible values are... Description...

delimiter ; (semicolon) The character that separates the source
: (colon) from the destination.
Note: Either character is
acceptable.
destination_id  SLOT — The cartridge is moved to Specifies the location type for the
an empty slot in the storage pool. destination of the cartridge move.
 EE — The cartridge is moved to an
empty slot in the entry/exit pool.
 DRIVE — The cartridge is moved to
the specified drive.
Note: The values are not case-
sensitive.
destination_num A positive integer. Specifies the ID of the location to which
the cartridge is moved.
 An empty slot in the entry/exit or
storage pool for the partition
 The number of the drive
Locate the <offset> parameter for the
desired slot or drive in the downloaded
inventory file and use the value as the
destination_num.

Example The following lines in a move queue file specify a series of

moves.

This line in the file... Moves...

BC000618L3;Slot3 The cartridge with barcode label 000618L3 to slot 3 of the storage pool.
Slot10;EE5 The cartridge in slot 10 of the storage pool to slot 5 in the entry/exit pool.
EE10;Slot15 The cartridge in slot 10 of the entry/exit pool to slot 15 in the storage pool.
Drive3;Slot18 The cartridge in Drive 3 to slot 18 of the storage pool.
BC000618L3;Drive1 The cartridge with barcode label 000618L3 to Drive 1.

3. Examine the move queue file carefully to make sure that each line is
formatted correctly and contains both a source and a destination. When
the library parses the uploaded file, it will reject the file if it contains
any syntax errors.
4. Save the move queue file as an ASCII text file.
Note: If you plan to use a USB device to upload the move queue file,
save the file to the root of the drive using the file name
MoveQueue.txt.

285
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Moving Cartridges Within a Partition

Upload and Process the Move Queue File After you finish creating the
move queue file, use the following steps to upload and process the file.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrative
privileges.
2. If you saved the move queue file to a USB device, connect the device to
one of the USB ports on the LCM or operator panel and allow time for
the device to mount before proceeding (see Connect a USB Device to
the Library on page 184).

Important The option to upload the move queue file from a USB device cannot be selected if
the USB device is not connected and mounted before you click Advanced on the
inventory screen.

3. From the library user interface, select General > Inventory. The
Inventory screen displays showing the information for the last partition
that was viewed on either the Inventory screen or the Import/Export
TeraPack Magazines screen.
4. If you want to upload the move queue to a storage partition other than
the one currently displayed, select the desired partition from the
Partition drop-down list, then click Go.
Note: Using a move queue file is only supported for storage partitions.
5. Click Advanced to display the options for uploading and processing the
move queue file (see Figure 169 on page 274).
6. On the Advanced Inventory screen, select the Upload Moves tab.

Figure 176 Select the upload options for the move queue
file.

286
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Moving Cartridges Within a Partition

7. Select the desired option for uploading the move queue file.

Select... To...
Remote Upload the move queue file using the BlueScale web interface.
USB Upload the move queue file from a USB device connected to the LCM or
operator panel.
Important: The move queue file must be named MoveQueue.txt. The
library does not recognize any other file name. The file must be stored in the
root of the USB device.

8. Click the button that describes how you want the file processed.

Click... To...
Upload to Move Upload the file to the library. Once uploaded, you can view the parsed move
Queue queue file in the Move Queue list on the Inventory screen to review the
uploaded moves. After reviewing the Move Queue, choose one of the
following:
 Click Start Moves to begin processing the moves in the order that they are
listed in the queue. The front panel is locked while the library processes the
moves.
 Click Start in Background to begin processing the moves without locking the
front panel.
Upload and Start Upload the file to the library and begin the moves immediately. No other
Moves operations can be started until the moves complete.
Upload and Start in Upload the file and start the moves in the background. The front panel or RLC
Background is available for some operations.
Notes:
 The library posts informational messages after every 10 moves in the move
queue and when the all moves complete.
 You are not able to edit the partition, import or export cartridges into the
partition, or create another move queue for the partition while background
moves are in progress.

 If you selected the USB option, the library retrieves the move file
from the USB device.
 If you selected the Remote option, the RLC Upload Files screen
displays. Use your web browser’s upload feature to find the file, and
then click Next.

Figure 177 Locate the move queue file and select it (Internet
Explorer shown).

287
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 8 — Using the Cartridge Inventory Moving Cartridges Within a Partition

9. After the move queue file uploads, the library parses the file to create
the move queue.
The parser ignores blank lines and case where possible. It does not
determine whether the moves or the order of the moves is possible. If
the parser encounters any parsing errors which are insurmountable or
if the file contains syntax errors, the library rejects the move file and
generates a system message indicating that the move file contained
errors and listing the line numbers where the errors were detected.
For example, if line 1 in the MoveQueue.txt file uploaded from the USB
device is BC000618L3;Slot, the library posts the following message
indicating that the line did not include a value for destination_num:
--------------------------------------------
File \USB Disk\MoveQueue.txt has invalid moves in its list
Invalid Parse on line 1: BC000618L3;Slot
---------------------------------------------
If the library detected an error in the move file, correct the move file
(see Create a Move Queue File on page 283) and then repeat Step 2 on
page 286 through Step 8 on page 287.
10. The library then processes the moves based on your selection in Step 8
on page 287.

288
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 CHAPTER 9
Configuring and Using Media
Lifecycle Management
This chapter describes how to use BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management
to proactively monitor and report on the health of the cartridges in your
library. See MLM Best Practices on page 511 for information about using
Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) effectively in your environment and
ensuring that your MLM data is protected.

Topic
BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management page 290
Spectra Certified MLM-Enabled Media page 290
Automatic Media Discovery page 291
Media Tracking and Reporting page 293
MLM PreScan and PostScan page 296
Additional MLM Features page 297
Enabling MLM and Configuring Global Settings page 299
Enable MLM and Configure Settings page 299
Configure How Storage Capacity Displays page 303
Configure PostScan Blackout Periods page 304
Using Media Lifecycle Management page 306
Add Cartridges to the MLM Database page 306
Discover Cartridges Manually page 308
Stop the Discovery Process page 310
Using PreScan page 310
Using PostScan page 312
Operational Overview page 312
Address Requirements for Use page 316
Enable PostScan page 317
Request a Manual PostScan page 317
Pause the PostScan Process page 319

289
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management

Topic
Using MLM Reporting page 321
Generate MLM Reports page 321
Save an MLM Report page 326
Override a Poor Cartridge Health Report page 328
Managing the MLM Database page 329
Back Up the MLM and DLM Databases page 330
Verify the Database Backup File page 332
Delete MLM Records From the Database page 332
Download the MLM Database for Analysis and page 335
Archival

BLUESCALE MEDIA LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT

This section describes the major features of BlueScale Media Lifecycle
Management (MLM). The remainder of the chapter provides detailed
information about configuring and using MLM.
Note: MLM is supported for TS11xx technology drives and LTO-4 and
later generation drives and compatible media.
Overview BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) helps you
manage your tape media (cartridges) by giving you tools to proactively
detect potential media errors well before they happen. When used in
combination with Spectra Certified MLM-enabled media, MLM lets you
manage, track, and report all facets of tape usage from creation to
retirement. When used with media that is not MLM-enabled, MLM tracks
and reports the general health of the media.

Spectra Certified MLM-Enabled Media

Media Lifecycle Management starts with packaged, barcode labeled,
Spectra Certified MLM-enabled media (LTO-4 and later generation data
cartridges and LTO cleaning cartridges or TS11xx technology data
cartridges). Before shipment, Spectra Logic writes baseline data to the
MAM (Medium Auxiliary Memory) embedded in each cartridge.
Throughout its life, the cartridge MAM continually collects data to support
MLM tracking and reporting. See Spectra Certified Media on page 527 for
additional information.
Note: Starting with BlueScale12.7.01, TS11xx technology cleaning tapes
are always treated as MLM-enabled by the BlueScale software.

290
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management

Automatic Media Discovery

Overview The Media Auto Discovery feature is a background process that
loads MLM-enabled cartridges into a TS11xx technology drive or an LTO-4
or later generation drive, records the MLM information to the cartridge MAM,
adds the cartridge to the MLM database, and returns the cartridge to its
original location. The process is performed by the library independently from
the storage management software. Media Auto Discovery must be enabled
on the library, as described in Enabling MLM and Configuring Global
Settings on page 299, before it can be used.
Note: If you do not want to use automatic media discovery, you can
wait until the library loads and then unloads each cartridge from
an MLM-capable drive for the first time during normal
operation. When the cartridge is unloaded from the drive, the
library discovers it and records the MLM data to the cartridge
MAM and enters the data into the MLM database.
When Media Auto Discovery is enabled, MLM provides two options for
proactively discovering media in a partition:
 Media Auto Discovery — The default process that collects information
from the cartridge MAM and adds it to the MLM database. The Media
Auto Discovery process only operates on newly imported cartridges
that are not already in the MLM database.
Note: Media Auto Discovery loads and reads the MAM in the tape, but
does not thread the tape. The drive only reports the maximum
and remaining capacity for the tape after the tape is threaded.
Therefore, these statistics report as "0" until a drive reads from,
or writes to, the tape.
 PreScan — An optional process that replaces Media Auto Discovery. If
the PreScan feature is enabled in a partition, the PreScan process runs
instead of the Media Auto Discovery process and operates on all of the
media in the partition, regardless of whether it is already in the MLM
database or not.
In addition to adding information collected from the cartridge MAM to
the MLM database, PreScan performs a basic functionality test and
health check on each imported cartridge (see Using PreScan on
page 310 for more information).

291
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management

Discovery Process The discovery process can either be manually initiated

by you or set to run automatically so that the library discovers the
cartridges and adds their information to the MLM database shortly after a
cartridge is imported into the library. The discovery process is independent
of any storage management software.
The discovery process depends on whether the library is using Media Auto
Discovery or PreScan. With Media Auto Discovery the library reads the
barcode label on each new cartridge in the partition; with PreScan the
library reads the barcode label on every cartridge in the partition. If a
barcode is not already in the MLM database, the library loads the cartridge
into a drive and performs either a PreScan or the basic Media Auto
Discovery.
 If the cartridge is MLM-enabled, the library collects the available MLM
information from the cartridge’s MAM, including the born-on date. If
the cartridge was used previously, the library also collects media health
and encryption status from the MAM. The library updates the MLM
database to include the collected information and the name of the
partition where it currently resides. Any updated MLM information is
also written to the MAM in the cartridge.
 If the cartridge is not MLM-enabled, the library collects the cartridge
barcode label information, the cartridge health information, and the
name of the partition where the cartridge currently resides. It then adds
this information to the MLM database.
When the discovery process completes, the drive unloads the cartridge and
the library returns the cartridge to its original location. Each subsequent
load/unload updates the MLM database and the cartridge MAM,
providing ongoing tracking and reporting for the cartridge.
Manual Discovery If Media Auto Discovery is not enabled or if you enabled
MLM when the library already contained cartridges, you can start the
media discovery process manually to add the cartridges to the MLM
database (see Discover Cartridges Manually on page 308).
Note: After you enable Media Auto Discovery, importing a cartridge into
a partition triggers the discovery process in that partition.
Automatic Discovery During Normal Operations Automatic media
discovery cannot begin while the library is actively loading cartridges into
drives. If you import cartridges during this time, the library posts a failure
message stating that no drives are available.
To avoid this failure, either wait until the library is idle before importing
media or start the manual discovery process for the imported media when
the library is idle. See Discover Cartridges Manually on page 308 for
instructions.

292
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management

Media Tracking and Reporting

Overview MLM uses the information from the cartridge’s MAM to
maintain a database of vital information about each MLM-enabled
cartridge in the library, including the drives into which it was loaded and
any errors it encountered. The statistical and diagnostic information in the
MLM database helps you proactively manage your tape media throughout
its life. Using the information in the database, MLM can generate a variety
of reports that let you monitor important health information about every
MLM-enabled data cartridge and cleaning cartridge in your library. If
desired, you can save the reports to a USB device or email them to a
previously configured mail user. You can also download the MLM
database as a comma-separated-value (CSV) file.
Notes:  The MLM database also includes limited information about
cartridges that are not MLM-enabled.
 The cartridge inventory is separate from the MLM database
and only shows cartridges currently stored in the library. The
cartridge inventory does not differentiate between
MLM-enabled cartridges and those that are not
MLM-enabled.
Discovery Requirement Until an MLM-enabled cartridge is discovered,
either through the automatic media discovery process or when it is loaded
into and then unloaded from a drive for the first time, it is not included in
the MLM database; nor is the capacity of a non-discovered data cartridge
included on the Filled Capacity bar graph shown on the General Status
screen.
Media Health Score The initial load/unload during discovery establishes
an initial media health score for each cartridge and adds this information
to the MLM database. This initial health score may not accurately reflect
the actual health of the media. The health score stabilizes and becomes
more accurate after the first four loads/unloads as current usage statistics
are updated and used in the tape’s health scoring.
MLM Health Reports MLM reports let you review important health
information about every MLM-enabled data tape and cleaning tape in your
library. You can generate comprehensive health reports for the MLM-
enabled media in the whole library or in an individual partition. You can
also generate more detailed reports with information about compression
ratios, load counts, write errors, remaining capacity, encryption status, and
more.
The MLM reports help you identify tapes with high error rates or other
problems (for example, a dropped leader pin) that pose a risk to protecting
your data. These tapes can then be removed before they cause data
corruption or other problems. See Generate MLM Reports on page 321 for
detailed information about the types of reports you can generate.

293
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management

MLM Database Management After a cartridge is added to the MLM

database, its MLM data remains in the database even if the cartridge is
exported from the library. If the cartridge is later reimported, the MLM
database is updated to reflect any new information obtained from the
cartridge MAM. When a cartridge is permanently removed from service, it
can be manually deleted from the database.
The MLM database is restricted to a maximum of 10,000 records when the
library is using a Spectra PC as the LCM; the maximum is 75,000 records
when the library is using a Spectra LS as the LCM. When this limit is
reached, the record for the least recently exported cartridge, as determined
by the Export Date tracked by MLM, is automatically deleted. The library
does not notify you when it reaches the maximum number of records.
To ensure that you have a complete record of all the cartridges that are used
in the library, regularly generate and export a Media Health report for the
entire library (see Using MLM Reporting on page 321). When a cartridge is
retired or permanently exported from the library, its record can be deleted
from the MLM database. Records can be deleted individually or as a group
(see Delete MLM Records From the Database on page 332).
If desired, the information in the MLM database can be exported to a
comma-separated-value (CSV) file, which can then be imported into
Microsoft Excel® or other software applications that support this file type
(see Download the MLM Database for Analysis and Archival on page 335).

Data Cartridge Tracking

A primary function of MLM is to track the health and usage of the data
cartridges that are currently in or were previously in the library.
Functional Overview Each time a Spectra Certified MLM-enabled data
cartridge is loaded into a drive, MLM records over 30 data points about the
cartridge. These data points include health information, the cartridge age,
how many times it was loaded and into which drives, and how many
errors it accumulated. It also records when the cartridge is exported from
the library and by whom. Each MLM-enabled data cartridge has a unique
identifier that allows each cartridge to be tracked throughout its life, even
if its barcode label is damaged or removed.
Remaining Capacity Calculations In addition to media health, the library
uses information in the MLM database to estimate the Remaining Capacity
report for the cartridges in the selected partition. If the partition contains a
mix of MLM and non-MLM-enabled data cartridges, the report only shows
the estimated capacity on the MLM-enabled cartridges.
Note: Until a data cartridge is loaded into, threaded, and then
unloaded from a drive for the first time, its remaining capacity is
not included in the Remaining Capacity report.

294
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management

Cleaning Cartridge Tracking

Functional Overview The library tracks expired cleaning cartridges in the
cartridge inventory and does not attempt to use an expired cleaning
cartridge. Expired cleaning cartridges are identified by an “x” next to the
slot number on the Inventory screen.
When you enable MLM and use Spectra Certified MLM-enabled cleaning
cartridges, MLM tracks and reports usage information for the cleaning
cartridges. This information, which includes the number of cleans
remaining and the cartridge health (good, near expiration, or expired), is
stored in the MLM database.
When a cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life, MLM notifies you so
that you can have another on hand to replace it. This early notification
helps prevent failed cleanings resulting from using an expired cleaning
cartridge. See Enabling MLM and Configuring Global Settings on page 299
for information about setting the threshold for generating the notification.
Note: Starting with BlueScale12.7.01, TS11xx technology cleaning tapes
are always treated as MLM-enabled by the BlueScale software.
Expired MLM-Enabled Cleaning Cartridges Each time an MLM-enabled
cleaning cartridge is used in a drive, the drive decrements the number of
cleans remaining on the cartridge. When the cartridge is unloaded from the
drive, MLM reads the number of cleans remaining from the cartridge
MAM. When the number of cleans remaining reaches zero, the library flags
the cartridge as expired and does not attempt to use the cartridge again.
Because the library does not need to load a cleaning cartridge into a drive to
determine that it is expired, cleaning failures due to an expired cartridge are
eliminated (assuming the cleaning partition contains a good cleaning
cartridge). Information about an expired cleaning cartridge remains in the
MLM database even after the cartridge is exported from the library.
Expired Non-MLM Cleaning Cartridges When MLM is not enabled or if the
cleaning cartridges are not MLM-enabled, the library must load the
cleaning cartridge into a drive to determine whether it is expired. When an
expired cleaning cartridge is loaded into a drive, it is immediately ejected;
the cleaning fails. The library flags the cleaning tape as expired in the
cartridge inventory and generates system messages to notify you of the
expired cleaning tape and the failed drive cleaning. The library does not
attempt to use the expired cartridge for subsequent cleanings.
The library does not store any information about non-MLM cleaning
cartridges in the MLM database. The library retains the information about
an expired cleaning cartridge for as long as it remains in the library or until
the library is power-cycled. If an expired non-MLM cartridge is exported
and then reimported into the library, the cartridge must be loaded into a
drive in order to identify it as expired.

295
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management

MLM PreScan and PostScan

Overview MLM PreScan and PostScan are configurable background
processes that use an LTO-4 or later generation drive, or TS11xx
technology drive, to provide two levels of verification for data cartridges.
See Using PreScan on page 310 and Using PostScan on page 312 for
detailed information about configuring and using PreScan and PostScan.
Note: PostScan and Spectra SKLM or KMIP encryption key
management cannot be configured for use in the same partition.
Enable and Configure PreScan and PostScan Both PreScan and PostScan
are enabled and configured as part of the partition creation process, as
described in Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on
page 206. During configuration you set the scanning frequency and select
the types of scan you want to use.
Usage Requirements Although a Global Spare drive can be shared by
multiple partitions, assigning a separate Global Spare drive to each
partition is recommended. If you select to perform a FullScan or a
QuickScan using a Global Spare drive, each partition can then perform
PostScan operations whenever the prerequisites are met, without waiting
for PostScan in another partition to complete.
Refer to the following sections for additional information about using the
PreScan and PostScan features:

This section... Provides...

Assign Global Spare Drives Information about configuring a Global Spare drive. A Global Spare
on page 202 drive must be configured for the partition before the FullScan option
can be used.
Using PreScan on page 310 Usage requirements for PreScan.
Using PostScan on page 312 Detailed information about how the QuickScan and FullScan options
in the PostScan feature operate. This section also provides
instructions for manually adding a tape to the PostScan queue and
pausing the currently running PostScan process.

PreScan and PostScan System Messages Both PreScan and PostScan

generate system messages as possible error conditions are detected (for
example, a broken leader or a media error). The messages indicate that the
error condition was detected by the PreScan or PostScan process and not
during normal operation.
Interaction with Move Requests If a host requests a move while a
cartridge is being scanned using one of the partition drives (PreScan or
QuickScan), the move is delayed until the scan completes and the cartridge
is returned to its slot.

296
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management

Background Operations To protect you against making changes that could

negatively impact the library’s operation, the BlueScale software
automatically prevents you from performing certain operations while the
library is performing background operations, including Media Auto
Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan.
 You cannot import or export cartridges while the library is running a
Media Auto Discovery or PreScan operation, nor can you use the
BlueScale user interface to move cartridges from one location to
another in the library.
If you cannot wait for the operation to complete, you can stop Media
Auto Discovery or PreScan and then manually start it at another time
(see Stop the Discovery Process on page 310).
 You cannot perform any of the following operations while either a
FullScan or a QuickScan that uses Global Spare drives is running in a
partition:
 Import cartridges into or export cartridges from the library
 Use the BlueScale user interface to move a cartridge from one
location to another
 Use the Global Spare drive being used by PostScan to replace a
malfunctioning drive in the partition
 Change the library configuration settings
 Create or modify partitions
 Update BlueScale software or the drive firmware
If you need to perform any of these operations or if you need to reset
the library, you can pause the PostScan process for one hour (see Pause
the PostScan Process on page 319). The library returns any cartridges
currently being scanned to their original locations. After an hour
passes, the library checks the prerequisites for starting PostScan (see
Prerequisites for Starting a PostScan Operation on page 312) and when
met, restarts the PostScan operation on the tape that was being verified
at the time of the interruption.

Additional MLM Features

In addition to the features described in the previous sections, MLM
provides the following features (listed in alphabetical order):
Broadcast Capacity The Broadcast Capacity option changes the capacity
displayed on the General Status screen to show broadcast-centric hours of
programming used and hours of programming remaining instead of raw
capacity (see Configure How Storage Capacity Displays on page 303).

297
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management

Database Management Management tools let you manually delete one or

more tape records from the MLM database when the tape is retired or
permanently exported from the library. You can also download the MLM
database as a comma-separated-value (CSV) file and open the file in any
software application that supports this type of file (for example,
spreadsheet software).
Filled Capacity Information In addition to tracking media health and
generating reports, MLM displays a Filled Capacity bar graph on the
General Status screen. This graph shows the remaining uncompressed
storage capacity for the MLM-enabled media in the entire library or in a
specific partition. Click on the Filled Capacity bar graph to view the Media
Lifecycle Management Report screen (Figure 192 on page 323).
Note: Until a data cartridge is loaded into, threaded, and then
unloaded from a drive for the first time, its data capacity is not
included on the Filled Capacity bar graph shown on the General
Status screen.

Filled capacity

Figure 178 The General Status screen shows the storage capacity usage for the
selected partition.

Media Alert The Media Alert feature generates a system message when a
tape’s health is identified as poor (red) during five consecutive loads. This
message is only generated once per tape. A separate system message is
generated whenever a cartridge experiences a hard error.
Tracking Non-MLM-Enabled Media MLM tracks the basic health
information for data cartridges that are not MLM-enabled. This basic
health information is based on tape log data retrieved from an MLM-
capable drive when the cartridge is ejected. The data pertinent to media
health is stored in the MLM database and used to determine the media
health status (Usable or Impaired) included in Media Lifecycle
Management reports.

298
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Enabling MLM and Configuring Global

ENABLING MLM AND CONFIGURING GLOBAL SETTINGS

Overview This section describes enabling MLM on the library and
configuring the global MLM features. The global features are optional and
operate for every partition that is configured to use PreScan and PostScan
(see Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 206).
Notes:  MLM is enabled by default. If you do not want to use MLM,
you must disable it.
 Disabling MLM also disables DLM.

Important Before disabling (or re-enabling) Media Lifecycle Management, make sure that
none of the drives in the library contain a cartridge. Use your application software
to unload cartridges from the drives and return them to the slots in the library.

User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator

privileges can enable MLM and configure the global MLM features.

Enable MLM and Configure Settings

Use the following steps to enable MLM and Media Auto Discovery and
configure the global settings for MLM. These settings affect all partitions in
the library.
Note: Enabling MLM automatically enables Drive Lifecycle
Management (DLM) as well. See Chapter 10 – Using Drive
Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 336 for information
about DLM.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.

299
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Enabling MLM and Configuring Global

2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Media Lifecycle

Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Settings screen
displays.

Figure 179 Use the Media Lifecycle Management Settings

screen to enable MLM and configure the global configuration
settings.

3. Select the MLM features you want to use.

Select this option... To... Default

Setting
Enable Media Enable the Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) features in Selected
Lifecycle the library. MLM is enabled by default. Enabling Media (Enabled)
Management Lifecycle Management also enables Drive Lifecycle
Management (DLM), which is described in Chapter 10 –
Using Drive Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 336.
Enable Alerts for Configure MLM to generate an alert message when a Cleared
Non-Certified cartridge that is not MLM-enabled is loaded into a drive. (Disabled)
Media Notes:
 Enabling this alert is only recommended if all of the media
typically used in the library is MLM-enabled.
 Starting with BlueScale12.7.01, TS11xx technology cleaning
tapes are always treated as MLM-enabled by the BlueScale
software.

300
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Enabling MLM and Configuring Global

Select this option... To... Default

Setting
Enable Alerts for Configure MLM to generate an alert message when the load Cleared
Load Count count for the cartridge stored in the MLM database differs (Disabled)
Discrepancies from the load count stored on the cartridge’s MAM.
Minimum Cleaning Set the threshold for the minimum number of cleaning passes Zero (0)
Passes Before remaining on a cleaning cartridge. When an MLM-enabled
Warning cleaning cartridge reaches this threshold, a warning message
is generated showing that the cleaning cartridge is nearly
expired. The warning message is generated every time the
cleaning tape is used while the number of cleanings remaining
is at or below the threshold value.
Maximum Tape Set the number of times a tape can be loaded into a drive 10,000 loads
Loads Before before a load count warning message is generated. When the
Warning number of tape loads reaches the specified threshold, a
warning message is generated. Subsequent loads do not
generate additional messages.
Generate a Load Count Media Lifecycle Report to determine
the current usage status of the media in your library (see
Using MLM Reporting on page 321 for detailed information).
Note: If you began using MLM-enabled cartridges before
you enabled MLM, some of your media may already exceed
the thresholds you set.

301
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Enabling MLM and Configuring Global

Select this option... To... Default

Setting
Enable Media Auto Enable the Media Auto Discovery feature. Cleared
Discovery Media Auto Discovery must be enabled before the library (Disabled)
proactively discovers newly imported cartridges and adds
them to the MLM database.
If you enable PreScan for the partition, the Media Auto
Discovery process is replaced by the more in depth PreScan
process for that partition (see Enable and Configure MLM
PreScan and PostScan on page 206).
Requirements
 Media Lifecycle Management must be enabled.
 All cartridges must have barcode labels.
Notes:
 The Media Auto Discovery process identifies MLM-enabled
cartridges as well as those that are not MLM-enabled.
 The Media Auto Discovery process may be affected by your
storage management software. In addition, software that
polls the drives on a regular basis is affected by the
discovery process. If you encounter negative interactions
with your storage management software, you can choose to
either stop the storage management software from
accessing the library before starting the discovery process
or you can choose not to use Media Auto Discovery.
 If you do not enable Media Auto Discovery, you can start
the discovery process for a specific partition manually. See
Discover Cartridges Manually on page 308 for instructions.
— OR —
You can let the library discover cartridges and add them to
the MLM database the first time they are loaded and
unloaded from an MLM-enabled drive during normal
operations.
Minimum Idle Set the number of minutes that the library needs to be idle 5 minutes
Minutes Before before the Media Auto Discovery process begins.
Auto Discovery
Convert to Display the MLM capacity using a broadcast-centric method None
Broadcast Hours based on hours of content used and total hours of content (Disabled)
available instead of raw capacity for all MLM-enabled
cartridges. See Configure How Storage Capacity Displays on
page 303 for detailed information.
PostScan Blackout Configure time periods during which the automatic PostScan Zero (0)
Periods process does not operate. See Configure PostScan Blackout (Disabled)
Periods on page 304 for detailed information.

4. Click Save to enable the selected MLM features.

302
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Enabling MLM and Configuring Global

Configure How Storage Capacity Displays

By default, the General Status screen shows the raw storage capacity for all
MLM-enabled cartridges in the selected partition. If desired, you can
configure the library to use a broadcast-centric method for displaying the
storage capacity in terms of hours of content used and total hours of
content available.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Media Lifecycle
Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Settings screen
displays (see Figure 179 on page 300).
3. Select the method for converting to broadcast capacity from the Convert
to Broadcast Hours drop-down list.
Note: To return to displaying raw capacity, select None.

Important If you select None in the Convert to Broadcast Hours field, leave the Override
Broadcast Bit Rate value set to 0.

Figure 180 Select the conversion settings on the Convert to

Broadcast Hours drop-down list.

303
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Enabling MLM and Configuring Global

4. The choice that you make in the Broadcast Hours field automatically
selects a default Override Broadcast Bit Rate. If necessary, change the
Override Broadcast Bit Rate as required for your environment. The
default value for the broadcast bit rate depends on the Broadcast Hours
conversion you selected.
5. Click Save. The Filled Capacity bar graph on the General Status screen
changes to reflect hours of content based on the settings for Convert to
Broadcast Hours.

Figure 181 The General Status screen changes to show

capacity as Hours of Content.

Configure PostScan Blackout Periods

If desired, you can configure blackout periods during which the automatic
PostScan process does not operate. Configuring blackout periods ensures
that during your backup window, all of the cartridges in the partition are
immediately available and ensures that a Global Spare drive is available if
needed.

Important When configuring blackout periods, keep the following information in mind:
 The blackout periods you configure apply to all of the partitions in the library.
 If PostScan is actively verifying a tape at the time the blackout period starts, it
completes the current scan. No additional tapes are scanned until the blackout
period expires.

1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator

privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Media Lifecycle
Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Settings screen
displays.

304
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Enabling MLM and Configuring Global

3. In the PostScan Blackout Periods pane, use the Start and Stop drop-
down lists to set the start and end times for the blackout period for each
day of the week.
Notes:  Times are based on a 24-hour clock, where 0 is midnight.
 To disable the blackout period for a specific day, set both
Start and Stop to 0.
 By default, the blackout periods are all set to 0 (disabled). The
PostScan process runs whenever there are tapes in the
PostScan queue and a Global Spare drive is available.

Figure 182 Select the desired blackout periods for PostScan.

4. Click Save.
5. The blackout periods you set take effect when you enable PostScan for
individual partitions by configuring one or more PostScan triggers (see
Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 206).

305
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using Media Lifecycle Management

USING MEDIA LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT

Overview After you enable MLM and configure the global settings (see
Enabling MLM and Configuring Global Settings on page 299), you are
ready to begin using MLM to track and monitor the media in the library.
Note: If you want to use the PreScan and PostScan options, you must
enable and configure these options for each partition (see Enable
and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 206).
User Privilege Requirements See Specify the Partition Users on page 213
for information about assigning users to a partition.
 Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can manually
start and stop media discovery (using either Media Auto Discovery or
PreScan), manually start and pause PostScan operations, and manage
the MLM and DLM databases.
 Any user with operator privileges who is assigned to the partition and
all users with superuser or administrator privileges can generate and
save MLM reports.

Add Cartridges to the MLM Database

The cartridges used in the library are not added to the MLM database until
they are discovered. The process you use to discover cartridges and add
them to the MLM database depends on when you loaded the cartridges
into the library.

Important If a cartridge is write-protected when it is inserted into a drive, the library cannot
update the MLM information on the cartridge’s MAM.

Notes:  Media Auto Discovery cannot begin while the library is

actively loading media into drives. If you import media
during this time, the library posts a failure message stating
that no drives are available. Either wait until the library is
idle before importing media or start the discovery process for
imported media manually when the library is idle.
 If you import cartridges into the library with MLM disabled,
those cartridges are not automatically discovered and added
to the MLM database. After you enable MLM, you must use
the manual discovery process to add the cartridges to the
MLM database (see Discover Cartridges Manually on
page 308).

306
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using Media Lifecycle Management

The following table provides information about different possible

scenarios for adding cartridges to the MLM database.

If you... Do this to add the cartridges to the MLM database...

Recently purchased your 1. Make sure that MLM is enabled (see Enabling MLM and
library and are importing Configuring Global Settings on page 299).
cartridges into the library for 2. If desired, enable PreScan (see Using PreScan on page 310).
the first time,
3. Import media into the partitions to trigger the automatic
discovery process.
Important: Discovery cannot begin while the hosts are actively
loading cartridges into and unloading cartridges from drives. If you
import cartridges during this time, the library posts a failure
message stating that no drives are available. Either wait until the
library is idle before importing cartridges or manually start the
discovery process when the library is idle.

307
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using Media Lifecycle Management

If you... Do this to add the cartridges to the MLM database...

Have an existing library with 1. If you want to detect any non-MLM-enabled cartridges being
the most current BlueScale imported, temporarily enable the alert on the Media Lifecycle
version installed. Cartridges Management Settings screen (see Enable Alerts for Non-Certified
are already imported into the Media on page 300). The alert is disabled by default.
library, but you just recently 2. If desired, enable PreScan (see Using PreScan on page 310).
enabled MLM,
3. Discover the cartridges in the library using one of the following
methods:
 Import new cartridges into the partition to trigger the automatic
discovery process. If you do not have PreScan enabled, the
discovery process only checks cartridges that are not already in
the MLM database. If PreScan is enabled, all of the cartridges in
the partition are processed, regardless of whether or not they
are already in the MLM database.
Important: Discovery cannot begin while the hosts are actively
loading cartridges into and unloading cartridges from drives. If you
import cartridges during this time, the library posts a failure
message stating that no drives are available. Either wait until the
library is idle before importing cartridges or manually start the
discovery process when the library is idle.
 If you do not want to wait until you import new cartridges to
have the cartridges already in the library added to the MLM
database, manually start the discovery process (see Discover
Cartridges Manually).
 Use your storage management software to load each cartridge
into an LTO-4 or later generation drive and then unload it.
 Let the library update the MLM database as part of normal
operation. The information for each cartridge is added to the
MLM database the first time the cartridge is loaded into and
then unloaded from an LTO-4 or later generation, or TS11xx
technology, drive.
4. When the initial discovery process is complete, disable the alert
about non-MLM-enabled media, if desired.
5. To routinely verify the readability of the cartridges, configure
PostScan for each partition in the library (see Using PostScan on
page 312).

Discover Cartridges Manually

1. Make sure that Media Lifecycle Management is enabled before you
start the discovery process (see Enabling MLM and Configuring Global
Settings on page 299).
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Media Lifecycle
Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays.

308
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using Media Lifecycle Management

3. Click Discover Media to start the manual discovery process.

Note: If all of the media in the library was previously discovered, the
Discover Media button is grayed out. You do not need to perform
a manual media discovery.

Figure 183 Click Discover Media on the MLM Tools screen to

begin configuring a manual media discovery process.

4. Select the partition containing the cartridges you want to add to the
MLM database, then click Next.

Figure 184 Select the partition containing the cartridges

you want to add to the MLM database.

5. Click OK on the Start Media Discovery screen to begin the discovery

process.

Figure 185 Click OK on Start Media Discovery screen to

start media discovery.

6. When the Media Discovery Start Results screen displays, click OK to

confirm that the process started and return to the Media Lifecycle
Management Tools screen.

309
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PreScan

The discovery process continues in the background while the library

continues to operate.
Note: See Background Operations on page 297 for information about
operations that cannot be performed while the discovery process
is running.

Figure 186 The Media Discovery Start Results screen

displays when the discovery process starts.

Stop the Discovery Process

If for some reason you need to interrupt the discovery process before it is
complete, click Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools
screen. The library completes any Media Auto Discovery or PreScan
operations that are in progress and returns the cartridges to their slots.

Figure 187 Click Stop Discovery to stop the discovery

process.

To resume the discovery process, repeat the steps in Discover Cartridges

Manually on page 308 or wait until you import additional cartridges into
the partition to trigger the discovery process automatically.

USING PRESCAN
Overview The MLM PreScan feature is a background process that replaces
the default Media Auto Discovery process in partitions where it is enabled;
unlike Media Auto Discovery it does not operate globally. PreScan is
enabled when you configure the partition (see Enable and Configure MLM
PreScan and PostScan on page 206).

310
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PreScan

PreScan provides verification of data cartridges by performing a basic

functionality test and health check on each imported cartridge using
available LTO-4 or later generation drives or TS11xx technology drives in the
partition. As a part of the PreScan process, any cartridges that are not
already in the MLM database are added to the MLM database.
During the PreScan process, the library automatically inserts each
cartridge into an available LTO-4 or later generation drive or TS11xx
technology drive assigned to the partition. The drive loads the cartridge
and checks it to determine whether it has any of the following
characteristics:
 Non-MLM-enabled
 Broken or dislodged leader
 Red media health
 Write protected
 Encrypted tape with a moniker not currently stored in the library
When the PreScan process is complete, the library stores the tape health
information for the cartridge in the MLM database. It also writes the MLM
data to the cartridge MAM. When the drive ejects the cartridge, the library
returns it to its original slot.
Requirements for Use When using PreScan, make sure that you consider
the following requirements:

Consideration Requirement
Drive Firmware  LTO-4: requires 97F9 or later firmware.
 LTO-5: requires B170 or later firmware.
 LTO-6 and later generations: supported with any firmware.
 TS11xx technology: supported with any firmware.
Updating MLM Updating the cartridge MAM requires the cartridge to be write-enabled.
Data on MAM Important: If a cartridge is write-protected when it is inserted into a drive, the
information about the cartridge is added to the MLM database, but the library
cannot update the MLM information on the cartridge’s MAM.
Drive Availability The media discovery process loads the cartridges in the partition into the drives
assigned to that partition. While in use for PreScan, host moves to the drives being
used are delayed until the PreScan operation completes. Spectra Logic highly
recommends that you perform the manual media discovery process when your
storage management software is not accessing the library and the library is idle.
Auto Drive Clean Auto drive clean operations do not start while PreScan is running on any
Restrictions partition that is associated with the cleaning partition. If a drive requires cleaning,
wait until the PreScan operation is complete and then manually clean the drive.
Cleaning Partitions The PreScan feature cannot be enabled for a cleaning partition and does not
affect the operation of cleaning cartridges.

311
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan

USING POSTSCAN
This section provides detailed information about how PostScan operates,
as well as prerequisites for using PostScan and performing manual
PostScan operations.

Important PostScan is enabled and configured for each individual partition. PostScan does not
operate until the PostScan option is selected and one or more triggers are specified for
the partition (see Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 206).

Note: PostScan cannot be configured for use in the same partition as

Spectra SKLM or KMIP encryption key management.

Operational Overview
PostScan — either FullScan or QuickScan — performs a readability
verification test to verify data integrity for all of the cartridges in the MLM
database. FullScan uses an LTO-4 or later generation or TS11xx technology
Global Spare drive assigned to the partition and QuickScan uses an LTO-5
or later generation or TS11xx technology drive in the partition or Global
Spare drive assigned to the partition to check each cartridge in the partition
for media errors that can impact the ability to restore the data.
The PostScan process is performed by the library independent of the
storage management software normally used to read and write data to the
tape. You can choose to perform PostScan either automatically or manually.
For automatic scans you can set the scanning frequency and select options
to determine the type of scan performed.
Using FullScan on tapes that are written using variable-length block sizes
is not recommended.

Prerequisites for Starting a PostScan Operation

When an MLM-enabled cartridge meets the PostScan trigger criteria
configured for the partition, the cartridge is added to the PostScan queue.
The queue is processed in a first-in-first-out (FIFO) basis.
Note: The automatic PostScan triggers only apply to MLM-enabled
cartridges. Cartridges that are not MLM-enabled must be
manually added to the PostScan queue (see Request a Manual
PostScan on page 317).

312
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan

Before beginning the PostScan process, the library verifies that the
following prerequisites are met:
 The system is idle for the period of time specified for the partition (see
Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 206).
 The library is not currently in a PostScan blackout period (see
Configure PostScan Blackout Periods on page 304).
 If Full Scan is enabled, an LTO-4 or later generation or TS11xx
technology Global Spare drive assigned to the partition is available.
— OR —
If QuickScan is enabled, an LTO-5 or later generation or TS11xx
technology drive in the same partition as the cartridge that met the
PostScan trigger criteria is available.
— OR —
If QuickScan with Spare Drives is enabled, an LTO-5 or later
generation or TS11xx technology Global Spare drive assigned to the
partition is available.

Cartridge Scanning
If the PostScan prerequisites are met, the library inserts the first cartridge
in the PostScan queue into an available drive. The cartridges in the
PostScan queue are processed on a first-in-first-out (FIFO) basis.
Depending on the PostScan option selected for the partition, the drive
loads the cartridge and begins one of the following operations to check for
media errors.
Notes:  PostScan reads the data on the tape but does not process this
data into a usable form. It simply verifies that it can read the
data from the tape.

313
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan

 See Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on

page 206 for additional information about the differences
between the FullScan and QuickScan processes.

This PostScan Uses...

option...
FullScan A Global Spare drive assigned to the partition. FullScan verifies all of the data
on the tape, from the beginning of the tape (BOT) to the end of the recorded
data (EOD) or the physical end of the tape, whichever comes first.
Notes:
 If the partition uses LTO-4 drives, FullScan is the only available option.
 A Global Spare drive must be assigned to the partition.
 Partitions using SAS drives cannot use FullScan.
 The cartridge does not appear on the BlueScale inventory screens while it is
being scanned. If the cartridge is requested by the storage management
software it is immediately ejected from the drive that is performing the
verification and moved to the location requested by the storage management
software. A system message is posted to indicate that the FullScan operation
was interrupted. The cartridge is returned to the top of the PostScan queue
and is the first one processed after it is returned to its slot.
 The Global Spare drive cannot be activated while FullScan is running. You
must first pause the PostScan process (see Pause the PostScan Process on
page 319). The library immediately aborts the FullScan currently in progress
and returns the cartridge to its original location. You can then activate the
Global Spare drive (see Using a Global Spare Drive on page 410). The aborted
FullScan process resumes when the Global Spare drive is again available.
 The time to complete a FullScan depends on the type and amount of data on
the tape and whether it was written using fixed- or variable-length blocks.
 Using FullScan on tapes that are written using variable-length block sizes is
not recommended.
QuickScan One of the LTO-5 or later generation or TS11xx technology drives in the
partition. QuickScan verifies all of the data on a single wrap, from the
beginning of the tape (BOT) to the end of the wrap or the end of recorded data
(EOD), whichever comes first.
Notes:
 If a Global Spare drive is not assigned to the partition, a QuickScan using one
of the partition’s drives is the only option available.
 If possible, the library avoids using the drive in which the cartridge was most
recently unloaded to perform the QuickScan.
 A QuickScan using a partition’s drive is limited to three minutes. If the
QuickScan exceeds this time limit, the operation is aborted and the cartridge
is returned to its slot. The library posts a message stating that the QuickScan
failed. Use FullScan to verify the cartridge.
 While QuickScan is running, all moves in the partition are delayed until the
scan is complete.

314
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan

This PostScan Uses...

option...
QuickScan using a An LTO-5 or later generation or TS11xx technology Global Spare drive.
Global Spare QuickScan verifies all of the data on a single wrap, from the beginning of the
tape (BOT) to the end of the wrap or the end of recorded data (EOD), whichever
comes first.
Notes:
 A Global Spare drive must be assigned to the partition.
 Partitions using SAS drives cannot use QuickScan using a Global Spare drive.
 The cartridge does not appear on the BlueScale inventory screens while it is
being scanned. If the cartridge is requested by the storage management
software it is immediately ejected from the drive that is performing the
verification and moved to the location requested by the storage management
software. A system message is posted to indicate that the QuickScan
operation was interrupted. The cartridge is returned to the top of the
PostScan queue and is the first one processed after it is returned to its slot.
 The Global Spare drive cannot be activated while a QuickScan using Global
Spares is running. You must first pause the PostScan process (see Pause the
PostScan Process on page 319). The library immediately aborts the QuickScan
currently in progress and returns the cartridge to its original location. You
can then activate the Global Spare drive (see Using a Global Spare Drive on
page 410). The aborted QuickScan process resumes when the Global Spare
drive is again available.
 A QuickScan using a Global Spare drive is limited to 10 minutes. If the
QuickScan exceeds this time limit, the operation is aborted and the cartridge
is returned to its slot. The library posts a message stating that the QuickScan
failed. Use FullScan to verify the cartridge.

Updating the MLM Database

When the PostScan process on a cartridge is complete, the library writes
the scan date and a pass/fail test result to the cartridge MAM and updates
the MLM database with the scan date, the pass/fail test result, and when
(or if) the next scan should occur. The drive then unloads the cartridge and
the library returns it to its original slot. The library then posts a system
message showing that the cartridge was scanned. If the QuickScan used a
partition drive, the library reports that the unload move for the backup
operation that preceded the QuickScan is complete.

315
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan

Global Spare Drive Cleaning

After a cartridge is unloaded from a Global Spare drive following a
PostScan verification, the library checks to see if the drive requires
cleaning. If cleaning is required and a cleaning partition is associated with
the storage partition to which the Global Spare is assigned, the drive is
cleaned before the next cartridge is processed.
Note: If a cleaning partition is not present, periodically check the Drive
Details screen for each drive to determine whether cleaning is
required. If cleaning is required, follow the instructions
provided in Manually Cleaning a Drive on page 476.

Address Requirements for Use

As you configure and use PostScan, keep the following in mind:

Consideration Description
Drive Firmware  LTO-4: requires 97F9 or later firmware.
 LTO-5: requires B170 or later firmware.
 LTO-6 and later generations: supported with any firmware.
 TS1140 technology: requires 3A07 or later firmware.
 TS1150 technology: requires 460E or later firmware.
 TS1155 technology and later generations: supported with any firmware.
Updating MLM Updating the cartridge MAM requires the cartridge to be write-enabled.
Data on MAM Important: If a cartridge is write-protected when it is inserted into a drive, the
information about the cartridge is added to the MLM database, but the library
cannot update the MLM information on the cartridge’s MAM.
Drive Support for  LTO-4: Only the FullScan option is available when using LTO-4 drives.
PostScan  FullScan, QuickScan, and QuickScan using Global Spare are available for all
Fibre Channel LTO-5 and higher, and TS11xx technology drives.
 Partitions using SAS drives cannot use FullScan or QuickScan using a Global
Spare drive.
Note: While a drive is in use for QuickScan operations, it is unavailable to the
storage management software.
Background To protect you from making changes that could negatively impact the library's
Operations operation, the BlueScale software automatically prevents you from performing
certain operations while either a FullScan or a QuickScan that uses Global Spare
drives is running. However, you can pause the FullScan or QuickScan
operation if you cannot wait for it to complete. See Background Operations on
page 297 for detailed information.

316
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan

Consideration Description
Storage When using automatic PostScan to check your cartridges, configure your
Management storage management software to allow at least 15 minutes for a requested move
Software to complete. If a cartridge is in the process of being scanned when it is
Configuration requested for a backup or restore operation, it must be unloaded from the
Global spare and moved to another drive before the move request is reported as
complete.
Global Spare Drives Both FullScan and QuickScan using Global Spare require a Global Spare drive.
Although a Global Spare drive can be shared by multiple partitions, assigning a
separate Global Spare drive to each partition is recommended. Each partition
can then perform PostScan whenever the prerequisites are met, without waiting
for PostScan in another partition to complete.
Blackout Periods Because the storage management software can potentially request a tape that is
currently undergoing verification, you can configure blackout periods during
which the PostScan operation is suspended. Configuring blackout periods
ensures that PostScan does not operate during your normal backup window.
The blackout periods apply to all of the storage partitions in the library. See
Configure PostScan Blackout Periods on page 304 for instructions.
Cleaning Partitions The PostScan feature cannot be enabled for a cleaning partition and does not
affect cleaning tapes.

Enable PostScan
PostScan is enabled by selecting one or more trigger criteria when you
configure a partition (see Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and
PostScan on page 206). The available PostScan options depend on the drive
type and whether or not a Global Spare drive is assigned to the partition.

Important PostScan is enabled and configured for each individual partition. PostScan does not
operate until the PostScan option is selected and one or more triggers are specified
for the partition.

Request a Manual PostScan

The automatic PostScan triggers only add MLM-enabled data cartridges to
the PostScan queue. However, cartridges can also be added to the PostScan
queue manually. This is especially useful if your library contains cartridges
that are not MLM-enabled. You can also use the manual PostScan process
to verify a suspect MLM-enabled cartridge even if it was previously
scanned.
Cartridges that are manually added to the PostScan queue are processed
before cartridges that were added as a result of the trigger criteria for the
partition. They are processed using the PostScan option that was specified
for the partition.

317
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan

Use the following steps to manually start the PostScan process.

1. Enable Media Lifecycle Management if it is not already enabled (see
Enabling MLM and Configuring Global Settings on page 299).
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Media Lifecycle
Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays.

Figure 188 Click Manual PostScan on the MLM Tools screen.

3. Click Manual PostScan. The MLM Manual PostScan screen displays

showing the information for the partition that was selected the last time
the screen was viewed.

Figure 189 The MLM PostScan screen.

4. If the media is in a partition other than the one currently displayed, select
the desired partition from the Partition drop-down list, then click Go.
The Source list refreshes to display a list of the cartridges in the
requested partition. The list shows the name of the location (for
example, the slot number) and the barcode label information for the
cartridge in that location.

318
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan

5. Select the cartridge that you want to check for media errors. You can
select the cartridge either from the Source list, by entering its barcode,
or by entering the slot number where it is located.
To select a cartridge Follow these steps...
using the...
Source list Scroll through the list of available media and select the desired cartridge.
Slot number 1. Enter the slot number for the cartridge you want in the View Source Slot field.
2. Click Go. The Source list refreshes to show the requested cartridge
highlighted at the top of the list.
3. Click the cartridge to select it.
Barcode label 1. Enter the barcode label information for the cartridge you want to locate in the
information Find by Barcode field.
2. Click Find. The Source list refreshes to show the requested cartridge
highlighted at the top of the list.
3. Click the cartridge to select it.
Important: Only the slots below the top one displayed in the list are searched.
Scroll to the top of the source list before clicking Find. The search starts at the
second visible slot.

6. Click Add to add the selected cartridge to the Tape List.

7. Repeat Step 4 though Step 6 to add additional tapes to the Tape List.
Note: If you want to remove one or more cartridges from the Tape List:
 Select the cartridge and click Delete to remove it from the list.
 Click Delete All to remove all of the cartridges from the list.
8. Click Submit to add the cartridges in the Tape List to the PostScan
queue.

Pause the PostScan Process

If you need to perform any of the operations listed in Background
Operations on page 297 or if you need to reset the library, you can pause
the PostScan process. The library returns any cartridges currently being
scanned to their original locations.

Important Pausing PostScan affects all partitions that are configured to use PostScan.

319
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using PostScan

Use the following steps if you need to temporarily pause the PostScan
process.
1. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Media Lifecycle
Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays.
Note: The Pause PostScan button is only present if the PostScan
process is running.

Figure 190 Click Pause PostScan on the MLM Tools screen

to interrupt the PostScan process.

2. Click Pause PostScan to pause the PostScan operation for one hour so
that you can use the Global Spare or perform other library operations.
After an hour passes, the library restarts the PostScan operation on the
tape that was being verified at the time of the interruption, provided
the PostScan prerequisites listed on page 312 are met.

320
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using MLM Reporting

USING MLM REPORTING

After the LTO cartridges in your library are added to the MLM database,
you are ready to make use of this powerful tool to manage, track, and
report all facets of tape usage from creation to retirement.

Generate MLM Reports

1. Log into the library.
2. From the toolbar menu, select General > Media Lifecycle Management.
The Media Lifecycle Management Report screen displays.
Note: You can also click on the Filled Capacity bar graph on the
General Status screen (Figure 178 on page 298).
3. Select either Total Library or a specific partition from the Partition drop-
down list, and then click Go.
Note: By default, the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen
shows a Media Health report for all Spectra Certified MLM-
enabled cartridges in the entire library.

Figure 191 Select the partition for which you want to display
the media health report.

321
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using MLM Reporting

4. Select the type of report you want from the Report drop-down list.
Note: Information about MLM-enabled cleaning cartridges only
appears in the Exported Media, Cleans Remaining, and Born on
Date reports.
This report... Shows...
Media Health  The barcode label information, the overall health (media health), and the load
count (the number of times the cartridge was loaded into a drive) for each
MLM-enabled cartridges in the selected location.
 The barcode label information for each non-MLM-enabled cartridge and
whether the cartridge appears to be usable or impaired.
Remaining The remaining capacity and maximum capacity for each MLM-enabled data
Capacity cartridge. The capacity reflects the native capacity of the cartridge, not the
compressed capacity.
Notes:
 Until a data cartridge is loaded into, threaded, and then unloaded from a
drive for the first time, its remaining capacity and maximum capacity report
as “0”.
 The remaining capacity and maximum capacity for a cartridge are displayed
as GB or TB.
 This report is not available for non-MLM-enabled cartridges.
Load Count The load count for each MLM-enabled data cartridge in the selected location
and the born on date (the date on which Spectra Logic enabled the cartridge to
support MLM tracking and reporting).
Note: This report is not available for non-MLM-enabled cartridges.
Write Errors The number of soft errors and the load count for each MLM-enabled data
cartridge.
Note: This report is not available for non-MLM-enabled cartridges.
Cleans Remaining The number of cleanings remaining and the born on date for each MLM-
enabled cleaning cartridges.
Note: This report is not available for non-MLM-enabled cartridges.
Born on Date The date that the MLM-enabled cartridge (both data and cleaning) was created
and certified by Spectra Logic and the load count for each cartridge.
Note: This report is not available for non-MLM-enabled cartridges.
Exported Media A list of all the MLM-enabled cartridges (both data and cleaning) that were
exported from the library, sorted by the export time (oldest first). The report
also shows the user name of the person who exported the media.
Note: This report is not available for non-MLM-enabled cartridges.
Last Write Time Shows the time and date for the most recent write and read operations for each
Last Read Time MLM-enabled data cartridge.
Note: This report is not available for non-MLM-enabled cartridges.

322
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using MLM Reporting

5. Click Go. The Media Lifecycle Management Report screen refreshes to

display the selected report with a list of the barcode labels for all media
in the selected location. A media health icon indicates the overall health
of each MLM-enabled cartridge as of the last time it was loaded into a
drive.
Note: Health icons are not used with LTO media that is not MLM-
enabled Spectra Certified media.

MLM health
icons

Figure 192 Use the health icons on the Media Lifecycle Management Report
screen to quickly determine media health.

The following table describes the meaning of each media health icon.
Select the barcode next to the icon to view detailed information about
that specific piece of media.
Icon Health score Meaning
100 – 80 The media health is Good.
 Data cartridge: The media is in good condition and operating properly. The
cartridge can be used for writing new data and reading previously written
data.
 Cleaning cartridge: More than 10 cleaning cycles remain on the cartridge.
79 – 50 The media health is Average.
 Data cartridge: When the Health graph on the Details screen for the cartridge
falls below a health score of 80, the media health icon changes from green to
yellow (generally due to normal aging). For maximum reliability, only use the
cartridge for restores.
 Cleaning cartridge: The cleaning cartridge is near expiration. From one to ten
cleaning cycles remain.

323
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using MLM Reporting

Icon Health score Meaning

49 – 0 The media health is Poor.
 Data cartridge: When the Health graph on the Details screen for the cartridge
falls below a health score of 50, the media health icon changes to red. The
combination of media errors, tape age, and usage indicates that the media
reached the end of its useful life for reliable data backups and restores and
should be retired.
If you are experiencing an unexpected number of cartridges with poor media
health, you may want to investigate further:
 Review the media health data for each cartridge to see if it has a high error
rate. A high error rate can indicate either that the media health is poor and
the cartridge should be retired or that the cartridge was written to by a
drive that is having trouble.
 If multiple cartridges with high error rates were written to by the same
drive, the drive may be the source of the errors. Clean the drive or, if
necessary, replace it.
Notes:
 If the source of the high error rate is a drive, the media health icon for the
affected cartridges should return to either green or yellow after
approximately three load/read or write/unload cycles in a known good
drive.
 If your cartridge has a high error rate that cannot be attributed to a faulty
drive, environmental factors, or the end of the cartridge’s normal working
life, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for troubleshooting assistance
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
 Cleaning cartridge: The cleaning cartridge is expired. No more cleaning
cycles remain. Replace the cleaning cartridge.
The media health is Unknown. The status of the media cannot be determined.

6. If you want to view detailed information about a specific cartridge, use

one of the following methods to locate the cartridge.
To find a cartridge Follow these steps...
using the...
Cartridge list Scroll through the list of cartridges on the Media Lifecycle Management Report
screen to locate the desired cartridge.
Barcode label 1. Enter the barcode label information for the cartridge you want to locate in the
information Find by Barcode field.
2. Click Find. The list of cartridges refreshes to show the requested cartridge
highlighted at the top of the list.
Important: Only the slots below the top one displayed in the list are searched.
Scroll to the top of the source list before clicking Find. The search starts at the
second visible slot.

7. Click the barcode in the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen to

view detailed information about the cartridge. The Details screen for
the selected cartridge displays. The Details screen displays different
information for Spectra Certified media, and non-certified media.

324
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using MLM Reporting

 For Spectra Certified Media, all MLM information for the tape
cartridge displays, including
 A Health graph — Media health is based on the MLM-tracked
history of the cartridge. The health status indicated by the
Health graph may fluctuate until the cartridge is loaded six
times.
 CarbideClean status — When using CarbideClean media, the
Details screen includes additional information related to the
CarbideClean process. This information is not present for MLM
media that was not put through the CarbideClean process.
 Environmental Statistics — For LTO-9 media or LTO-8 media
used in an LTO-9 drive, environmental information for the time
the tape was in the drive displays.

Health graph

CarbideClean
data

Environmental
data

Figure 193 MLM details for Spectra Certified media.

325
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using MLM Reporting

 For media that is not Spectra Certified, only a Health graph

displays. Media health is based on the MLM-tracked history of the
cartridge. The health status indicated by the Health graph may
fluctuate until the cartridge is loaded six times.
Additionally, for LTO-9 media or LTO-8 media used in an LTO-9
drive, environmental information for the time the tape was in the
drive displays.
Note: For BlueScale12.7.06.03 and earlier, you cannot get Details for
media that is not Spectra Certified.

Figure 194 MLM details for non-Spectra Certified media.

8. Click Previous to return to the main Media Lifecycle Management

Report screen (Figure 192 on page 323).

Save an MLM Report

You can choose to save a copy of the MLM report, which is a comma-
separated text file (*.rpt), to a USB device, mail the saved report to
previously configured email recipient, or both. If desired, you can zip the
file before saving it.
Note: You can also download the MLM database as a comma-
separated-value (CSV) file (see Download the MLM Database for
Analysis and Archival on page 335).
1. Generate the desired report as described in Generate MLM Reports on
page 321.
2. If you want to save the MLM report to a USB device, connect the device
to a USB port on the LCM or operator panel (T950B only) and allow
time for the device to mount before continuing.
Note: The option to save the report to a USB device is only available if
you connect a USB device to the library before you click Save
Report on the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen.

326
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using MLM Reporting

3. Click Save Report to display the Save Media Lifecycle Management

Report screen.

Figure 195 Select the desired options on the Save Media

Lifecycle Management Report screen.

4. Select the data to include in the saved report and how you want the
report saved.
Note: If you want to email the report, the intended recipient must be a
previously configured mail user (see Configure Mail Users on
page 124).
This option... Saves...
Report All Media A report containing all of the available detailed MLM data for MLM-enabled
Lifecycle Data media in the selected location (a specific partition or the total library).
Note: Depending on the number of cartridges in the selected location, this
report can be quite large.
Report Selected Only the fields displayed in the report that you selected on the Media Lifecycle
Data Management Report screen (Figure 192 on page 323).
Note: The headings in the saved report reflect the fields displayed in the
report you selected in the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen.
Zip Report The report as a zip file. Zipping the report is especially useful when emailing
the Report All Media Lifecycle Data report.
Note: If you unzip the report using the standard format used by most file-
zipping applications, the application creates the following directory structure:
*\hard disk\lc\reports.
Mail Report to The report and attaches it to an email sent to a previously configured mail user.
Use the drop-down list to select the recipient for the report file.
Note: Do not use the default [email protected] email user. Spectra
Logic does not save emailed MLM report files unless they are specifically
requested for troubleshooting.

327
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Using MLM Reporting

This option... Saves...

Save to USB Save the report to the USB device.
Note: The USB option is only available if you connected a USB device to the
library before you clicked Save Report on the Media Lifecycle Management
Report screen.

5. Click Save to send the report to the selected destination. Click Previous
to return to the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen without
sending the report.

Override a Poor Cartridge Health Report

Under certain circumstances you may need to override the health of an
MLM-enabled cartridge that is reported as poor (a red health icon appears
next to the cartridge barcode). When the cartridge health is poor, a green
arrow button, that can be used to override the reported health, displays.
During the override process, the library progressively eliminates any
recent hard errors from the tape health calculation. If the health is still red,
all hard errors are eliminated from the tape health calculation. The library
continues to use this adjusted tape health until the cartridge health returns
to either Good or Average as part of the normal health monitoring.

Important Do not reset the cartridge health unless you believe that the reported poor health
is due to drive problems and not the cartridge or you are specifically directed to do
so by Spectra Logic Technical Support.

Use the following steps to reset the health of a single cartridge.

1. Display the Media Lifecycle Reports screen as described in Generate
MLM Reports on page 321.
2. Locate the barcode of the cartridge for which you need to reset the
health (see Step 7 on page 324).

328
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Managing the MLM Database

3. Click the green arrow button for the cartridge. The library adjusts
parameters used to calculate the tape health until the reported health is
Average.

Override MLM
health

Figure 196 Click the green override button to reset the reported health for an
MLM-enabled LTO cartridge.

4. Attempt to resolve the issues that were causing the media health to be
reported as poor.

MANAGING THE MLM DATABASE

The MLM database contains the usage history, health, and the verification
data for all of the MLM-enabled cartridges in your library. It also contains
the Drive Lifecycle Management data for all of the drives in your library
(see Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM on page 337).
Deciding when and how often you back up the MLM database depends on
many factors, including how often tapes are loaded into a drive.
 If all of the tapes are loaded into drives frequently, the MLM database
can be rebuilt relatively quickly. The database can be backed up less
frequently.
 If many of the tapes remain in the library without being loaded into a
drive for a long period of time, or if tapes are exported and stay outside
of the library for a long period of time, rebuilding the MLM database
can take a long time. Back up the MLM database more frequently.

329
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Managing the MLM Database

Back Up the MLM and DLM Databases

Based on your environment, determine how frequently backups are
needed, then use the following steps to create a backup. You can choose to
save the backup to a USB device or send it as an email attachment to a
previously configured mail recipient.
1. Use your storage management software to stop all backup or restore
operations on the library.

Important Backing up the MLM and DLM databases requires the library to be idle.

2. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator

privileges.
3. If you want to backup the MLM database to a USB device, connect the
device to the library and allow time for the device to mount before
continuing.
4. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance
Tools screen displays.
5. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
6. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.
7. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced
utilities.
8. Scroll down and select Save MLM Database. The screen refreshes to
show the details for the utility.

Figure 197 Select the Save MLM Database utility.

330
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Managing the MLM Database

9. Use the Select the Destination drop-down list to select the destination
for the saved file.
Notes:  To send the file to someone who is not already listed as a
library mail user, you must first configure that person as an
email recipient as described in Configure Mail Users on
page 124.
 The check box option at the top of the screen only relates to
the system messages indicating that the utility completed
successfully (or failed). It does not relate to the MLM
database file itself.

Select this option... To...

Save MLM Backup the MLM database to a USB device.
Database to USB
Mail MLM Database Send the MLM database file as an email attachment to the specified mail
to... recipient.
Note: Do not use the default [email protected] email recipient.
Spectra Logic does not save emailed files unless they are specifically requested
for troubleshooting.

10. If you want to compress the file to make it smaller, select On in the
Compress Files? drop-down list.
11. Click Run Utility.
After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays, showing that the
database file was either saved or sent.

331
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Managing the MLM Database

Verify the Database Backup File

After backing up the MLM database, use one of the procedures in the
following table to confirm that the backup file was generated.

If the backup was... Follow these steps...

Saved to a USB 1. Plug the USB device into a PC. The PC does not need to be connected to the
Device library.
2. Examine the list of files on the USB device and locate the SavedMLMDB
folder.
3. Open the folder to verify that it contains the following file, where <date-
time> is the time stamp for when the backup was created:
 Spectra PC — cminfo_<date-time>.dat
— OR —
 Spectra LS — xmlinfo<date-time>.db
— OR —
 Zipped file — cminfo_<date-time>.zdt
(The zip filename is the same for both the Spectra PC and the Spectra LS.)
4. Verify that the file is more than 0 bytes in size.
5. If a file with the correct filename format is present and is more than 0 bytes in
size, the database backup was successful and the file is usable. Store the USB
device in a safe location.
6. If the MLM database file is not present or if it is 0 bytes in size, repeat the
backup process (Back Up the MLM and DLM Databases on page 330) using a
different USB device.
Sent as an Email 1. Open the email attachment and verify that:
Attachment  The attachment contains a zip file called
cminfo_<date-time>.zdt
— AND —
 The file is more than 0 bytes in size.
2. If the zip file is present and is more than 0 bytes in size, the backup was
successful and is usable. Save the email attachment to a safe location from
which you can copy it to a USB device, if needed.
3. If the zip file is not present or if it is 0 bytes in size, repeat the backup process
(Back Up the MLM and DLM Databases on page 330) to generate the email
again.

Delete MLM Records From the Database

When the maximum number of records for the MLM database is reached,
the record for the least recently exported cartridge, as determined by the
Export Date tracked by MLM, is automatically deleted. The library does
not notify you when it reaches the maximum number of records.

332
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Managing the MLM Database

When a tape is retired or permanently exported from the library, you can
manually delete its record from the MLM database. Records can be deleted
individually or as a group.

Delete an Individual Record

If you only need to delete one or two cartridges from the MLM database,
you can use the Media Lifecycle Report screen to delete individual records.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. Display the Media Lifecycle Reports screen as described in Generate
MLM Reports on page 321.
3. Locate the barcode of the cartridge you want to remove from the MLM
database (see Step 7 on page 324).
Note: An asterisk (*) next to the barcode indicates that the cartridge
was exported from the library.
4. Click the trash can icon next to the barcode to delete the record.

Click the trash can icon

to delete the selected
cartridge from the
MLM database.

Figure 198 Use the trash can icon to delete individual records from the MLM database.

5. Respond to the confirmation message to delete the record.

333
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Managing the MLM Database

Delete Multiple Records

1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Media Lifecycle
Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays.

Figure 199 Click Delete Records on the MLM Tools screen to

begin removing records from the MLM database.

3. Click Delete Records. The Delete MLM Records screen displays.

Figure 200 Select the cartridges to remove from the MLM

database on the Delete MLM Records screen.

4. Select the cartridge records you want to delete from the MLM database.
Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that the cartridge was exported from the
library.
5. Click Delete Selected to remove the selected records from the MLM
database.

334
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 9 — Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management Managing the MLM Database

Download the MLM Database for Analysis and Archival

If desired, you can download the MLM database as a comma-separated-
value (CSV) file for analysis and archival. You can then open the file in any
software application that supports this type of file (for example,
spreadsheet software) and view the information it contains.

Important The MLM information contained in the CSV file cannot be used to restore the MLM
database. Always maintain a current backup of the MLM database as described in
Back Up the MLM and DLM Databases on page 330.

Note: The MLM Report button is only available when you access the
library using the BlueScale web interface (RLC). It is not
available from the operator panel.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Media Lifecycle
Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays.

Figure 201 Click MLM Report on the MLM Tools screen.

3. Click MLM Report and use your browsers Open File dialog box to open
or save the file.
4. To view the information stored in the MLM database, open the CSV file
using a software program that supports this file type.

Figure 202 An example of the downloaded MLM database

file (opened in Microsoft Excel).

335
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 CHAPTER 10
Using Drive Lifecycle Management
This chapter describes how to use BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management
to proactively monitor the health of the drives in your library.

Topic
BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management this page
Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM page 337
Using the Drive Health Icons page 339
Viewing and Saving a Detailed Drive Health page 341
Report
Downloading the DLM Database page 343

BLUESCALE DRIVE LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT

Overview BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management works in conjunction
with MLM to help you identify drives that experience a high number of
errors or other problems during operation.
Each time a cartridge is unloaded from a drive, the library collects the
media health data from the drive. This data includes read/write errors,
tape alerts, and flags generated during the time the most recent cartridge
was loaded in the drive. It also includes the current value for the drive’s
single character display (SCD) and any errors detected at the time the
cartridge is unloaded. All of this data, plus the MLM data for the 50 most
recently loaded cartridges, is stored in the DLM database. This data is used
to generate an overall drive health status for the library, as well as health
reports for each individual drive.
Enabling DLM BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) is
automatically enabled when Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) is
enabled and cannot be used without MLM. See Chapter 9 – Configuring
and Using Media Lifecycle Management, beginning on page 289 for
detailed information about enabling and using MLM.

336
Chapter 10 — Using Drive Lifecycle Management Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM

Drive Health Reports A health icon next to each drive indicates the overall
health of the drive. Detailed reports provide information about the
cartridges that were loaded into the drive and any errors reported. The
DLM database containing the health information for every drive in the
library is backed up whenever the MLM database is backed up. The
reports can also be saved and exported as XML files.
Drive Testing If a drive is experiencing problems, the DLM drive test
wizard lets you test the basic functionality of the drive. This test, when
used in conjunction with other DLM data and MLM data, can help you
determine whether a drive or the media is the source of the errors you are
investigating.
User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator
privileges can access and use the DLM features.

MONITORING DRIVE HEALTH USING DLM

When DLM is enabled, the Drives icon in the Configuration toolbar
changes to the DLM icon. Selecting DLM from the toolbar displays the
Drives screen, which uses health icons to provide at-a-glance information
about the health of each drive in the library. From the Drives screen you
can access detailed drive health reports for each drive in the library, as well
as drive management tools.

Figure 203 Enabling DLM changes the Drive icon in the

Configuration toolbar.

337
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 10 — Using Drive Lifecycle Management Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM

Each button on the Drives screen lets you perform additional operations.

This button... Lets you...

Drive Traces Collect drive traces for LTO-5 and later generation drives (see Use the Drive
Traces Button on page 415).
Note: The Drive Traces button is not supported for TS11xx technology
drives.
Update All DLM Refresh the DLM data for all of the drives in the library.
Data Note: The Update All DLM Data button only displayed if Drive Lifecycle
Monitoring is enabled (see Enabling MLM and Configuring Global Settings on
page 299).
Drive Performance Display the drive performance statistics screen (see View Drive Performance
Monitoring Statistics on page 171).
Note: The Drive Performance Monitoring button only displayed if Drive
Performance Monitoring is enabled (see Enable Drive Performance Monitoring
on page 116).
Drive Firmware Use one or more firmware update (code load) tapes stored in the partition’s
Update entry/exit pool to update the firmware for selected drives (see Updating Drive
Firmware on page 479).
Note: This button is replaced by Staged Drive Firmware Update if a drive
firmware update is staged to one or more drives.
Staged Drive Apply an update that is already staged to the drive (see Apply the Update on
Firmware Update page 492) using one of the following methods:
 Autostaging (see Modify Auto Download Options on page 147)
 Manual staging (see Update Using Drive Update through Package Update on
page 486).
Note: This button only displays if a drive update is staged to the drives.
Remove Remove or replace a drive that is already in the library . If a DBA has an empty
Replace drive bay, the Add button powers on a newly installed drive and initializes it in
Add the library (see Adding or Replacing a Drive on page 502).
Notes:
 These buttons only display on the front panel.
 The Add button only displays if a DBA location does not contain a drive.
Clean Clean the drive using a cleaning tape in an associated cleaning partition. See
Manually Cleaning a Drive on page 476.
Note: The Clean button only displays if the partition to which the drive is
assigned has an associated cleaning partition.
Detail View detailed information about the selected drive (see Viewing and Saving a
Detailed Drive Health Report on page 341).
Test Use the DLM Drive Test wizard to test a drive (see Using DLM to Test a Drive
on page 437).
Note: The Test button is not available for TS11xx technology drives.
Reset Reset the drive, which power cycles the drive, runs the internal drive
diagnostics, and reinitializes it in the library (see Resetting a Drive on page 409).

338
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 10 — Using Drive Lifecycle Management Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM

Using the Drive Health Icons

The drive health icons provide at-a-glance health status for the drives in
the library. The icons appear on the following screens, as well as in the
drive health reports (see Viewing and Saving a Detailed Drive Health
Report on page 341).
The health icon on this screen... Indicates...
General Status The overall drive health for
the selected partition.
Note: The drive health icon
on the General Status screen
reflects the lowest health
score for the drives in the
partition being viewed.

Drives The overall health of each

individual drive in the
library.

Drive Details The health of the selected

drive.

339
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 10 — Using Drive Lifecycle Management Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM

The drive health icon state is based on data collected for the drive when the
last cartridge was loaded in the drive. This data consists of the code
presented on the drive’s SCD or MCD, as well as tape alerts, and errors
detected at the time the tape is unloaded. See Interpreting the SCD and
MCD Codes on page 424 for detailed information about the SCD and MCD
codes. The following table describes the drive health status icons.
Note: Not all SCD and MCD codes have an associated DLM icon.
Icon Meaning
The drive health is Good.
The drive is operating normally.
The drive requires Attention.
Use the SCD or MCD code information on the Drive Details screen to
determine the type of action required. See Interpreting the SCD and
MCD Codes on page 424 to determine what action is needed to address
the condition.
The drive health is Poor.
The drive experienced an unrecoverable error or problem. Use the SCD
or MCD code information on the Drive Details screen to determine the
type of action required. See Interpreting the SCD and MCD Codes on
page 424 to determine what action is needed to address the condition.
The drive health is Unknown. The status of the drive cannot be
determined.

340
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 10 — Using Drive Lifecycle Management Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM

Viewing and Saving a Detailed Drive Health Report

1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > DLM to display the
Drives screen.

Figure 204 Click Detail to view detailed information about

a drive.

3. Click Detail next to the drive for which you want to view more
information. The Drive Details screen displays.

Figure 205 The Drive Details screen shows detailed

information about the selected drive.

341
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 10 — Using Drive Lifecycle Management Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM

4. Click DLM on the Drive Details screen to view a detailed Drive Lifecycle
Management report.
Note: The DLM button on the Drive Details is not present if MLM and
DLM are not enabled (see Enable and Configure MLM PreScan
and PostScan on page 206).
The Drive Lifecycle Management Report screen is divided into four
panes, which are described in the following table.
This pane... Shows...
Drive health The drive identifier and any status information. The drive health icon indicates
overview the drive’s overall health at the time the screen was displayed.

Figure 206 Check the drive health icon for the overall
health of the drive.
Summary of tapes The barcode label information and health information for the last 10 cartridges
loaded into the drive. The health icon indicates the cartridge health at the time
the cartridge was unloaded from the drive (Tape Health at Unmount) and the
current health status stored in the MLM database (Current Tape Health). Refer
to the table on page 323 of Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle
Management, beginning on page 289 for descriptions of the icons related to
media health.
Note: Depending on the drive’s history, this pane may not have any entries.

Figure 207 The Summary of tapes pane shows the

barcode label information and health information for the
last 10 cartridges loaded into the drive.

342
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 10 — Using Drive Lifecycle Management Downloading the DLM Database

This pane... Shows...

History of tapes Detailed information about the last 50 cartridges loaded into the drive as well as
any Tape Alerts and SCD or MCD codes posted by the drive while the tape was
loaded in the drive.

Figure 208 The History of tapes pane.

Notes:
 Depending on the usage history for the drive, this pane may not have entries.
 For detailed information about Tape Alerts, log on to the portal (see
Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 504), open the Knowledge
Base, and search for KBA-01769, What do the tape alert flags in the DLM pages
mean?. Refer to the tape drive documentation for additional information

5. To save the information on the Drive Lifecycle Management screen, use

the Save MLM Database utility as described in Back Up the MLM and
DLM Databases on page 330.
6. If you correct a condition that changed the drive’s health to yellow or
red, click Reset Health to reset the drive health to Good (Green). Click
Continue to complete the reset health process.
Notes:  If the condition was not truly corrected, the next tape load
sets the drive health back to the previous indication.
 Resetting the drive health deletes the drive’s Summary of
Tapes and History of Tapes data.

DOWNLOADING THE DLM DATABASE

If desired, you can open and save the DLM database as an XML file. This
file contains the same information that appears on the Drive Lifecycle
Management screen (see Step 4 on page 342).

Important The DLM database information in the XML file cannot be used to restore the DLM
database. The information required to restore the DLM database is backed up with
the MLM database. See Back Up the MLM and DLM Databases on page 330 for
information about backing up the MLM database.

Note: The DLM Report button is only available when you access the
library using the BlueScale web interface (RLC). It is not
available from the operator panel.

343
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 10 — Using Drive Lifecycle Management Downloading the DLM Database

Use the following steps to save the DLM database:

1. Log into the BlueScale web interface (RLC) as a user with superuser or
administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > MLM. The Media
Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays.

Figure 209 Click DLM Report on the Media Lifecycle

Management Tools screen to export the DLM database as an
XML file.

3. Click DLM Report. The XML file opens in the application associated
with that file type on the computer accessing the library’s BlueScale
web interface.
Note: Typically, the application associated with XML files is a web
browser. Depending on the browser, the file may open in a new
browser window.

Figure 210 The DLM database XML file opened in a web

browser.

4. Use the File > Save option in the application that opened the XML file
to save it to a known location on your computer.
5. You can open the saved XML file using Microsoft Excel 2007 or later, or
use another program that supports the XML file format.

344
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 CHAPTER 11
Configuring and Using AutoSupport
This chapter describes how to configure and use AutoSupport with your
library. All AutoSupport functionality is included with your library purchase.

Topic
AutoSupport Overview this page
Configuring AutoSupport page 348
Configure Mail Recipients page 348
Configure AutoSupport Profiles page 349
Configure Alarms page 353
Configure Log Set Forwarding page 354
Using AutoSupport page 356
Create New Support Tickets page 356
Update Existing Support Tickets page 361

AUTOSUPPORT OVERVIEW
AutoSupport configures the library to automatically notify support
personnel or others with messages or when specific events occur. It can also
be used to open or update a support ticket and send it to a specified
recipient or to Spectra Logic Technical Support. AutoSupport can be used
without configuring the library with email access by saving the ASL sets
generated by AutoSupport to a USB device and then manually sending an
email containing the stored information to Spectra Logic Technical Support.
Note: AutoSupport Log (ASL) information is only for troubleshooting
purposes. This log information is separate from the data path
and contains no customer data.

345
Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport AutoSupport Overview

Send Log Sets

This feature lets you manually generate a standard AutoSupport Log
(ASL) set (file) and email it to a pre-configured recipient or save it to a USB
device. You can use the Send Log Sets option to open or update a support
ticket and send it to a specified recipient or to Spectra Logic Technical
Support. The ASL included in the support ticket includes the following
types of information:
 Library message logs
 Library Control Module (LCM) logs
 LCM configuration (including the current physical configuration)
 A simplified report of the MLM and DLM databases
 EC data from all components
 BlueScale version
 Contact information for data center staff
 Other library information specified in the AutoSupport user profile

Log Forwarding
This feature configures the library to send monthly ASL files to
preconfigured recipients (see Configure Log Set Forwarding on page 354).

Critical Alarms
When you enable critical alarms, the library automatically generates an
ASL file whenever any of the events in the following table occurs. If you
configured one of your AutoSupport profiles as the AutoSend Profile (see
Step 4 on page 351), the library automatically sends the ASL file to the mail
recipients in the AutoSend profile.
Note: If you select [email protected] as a mail recipient in
the AutoSend profile, the library also sends the ASL file and a
ticket request to Spectra Logic Technical Support.

For this event... An AutoSupport ticket request is generated...

Motion Restart Whenever motion restarts. Each motion restart is treated as a separate event
and results in generation and submission of an AutoSupport ticket request.
Front or Side Panel If a library side panel or front panel is opened or removed three times within
Opened or thirty minutes. Only one AutoSupport ticket request is generated for each
Removed 30-minute time period.
Power Supply When a power supply fails. Each power supply is evaluated separately. Only one
Failure AutoSupport ticket request per power supply is generated for each 24-hour time
period, even if the power supply fails and then resumes operation repeatedly. If
two power supplies fail during the same 24-hour time period, two separate
AutoSupport ticket requests are generated, one per failed power supply.

346
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport AutoSupport Overview

For this event... An AutoSupport ticket request is generated...

RIM or F-QIP Failure Whenever the library detects that a RIM or an F-QIP is no longer present. Only
RIMs or F-QIPs that are configured as part of a partition generates an
AutoSupport ticket request.
The following problems can generate a RIM failure event:
 Failure of the RIM software or hardware.
 Loss of communication between the library and the RIM.
 Removal of a RIM from the library without using the BlueScale Controller
Remove or Controller Replace operation.
AutoSupport ticket requests are not generated if the RIM is removed following
a Controller Remove or a Controller Replace operation.
Each RIM is evaluated separately. Only one AutoSupport ticket request per RIM
is generated for each 24-hour time period, even if the RIM fails and then resumes
operation repeatedly. If two RIMs fail during the same 24-hour time period, two
separate AutoSupport ticket requests are generated, one per failed RIM.
Drive Failure When the library detects a drive failure that results in the percentage of failed
drives in a partition meeting or exceeding the specified threshold (see
Configure Alarms on page 353).
The following drive problems can generate a drive failure event:
 Failure of the drive software or hardware.
 Loss of communication between the library and the drive.
 Removal of a drive from the library without using the BlueScale Drive
Remove or Drive Replace operation.
AutoSupport ticket requests are not generated if the drive is removed following
a Drive Remove or a Drive Replace operation.
Library Controller If the library controller (LC) fails to properly initialize.
Fails to Initialize

347
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Configuring AutoSupport

CONFIGURING AUTOSUPPORT
If you have any questions about configuring AutoSupport, contact Spectra
Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
Note: To simplify entering the information required to configure and
use AutoSupport, use the BlueScale web interface or a keyboard
attached to the LCM.
Network and Support Contract Requirements Before you configure
AutoSupport, Spectra Logic recommends connecting the library to an
email gateway. You need to do the following:
 Connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector on the LCM (see
Figure 17 on page 45).
 Obtain the library’s IP address, subnet, and gateway address (see
Configure Network Settings on page 121).
User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator
privileges can configure the AutoSupport features.

Configure Mail Recipients

If not already completed, configure one or more mail recipients who
should receive AutoSupport information (see Configure Mail Users on
page 124). At a minimum, configure Spectra Logic Technical Support
([email protected]) as a mail recipient if you want to
automatically send AutoSupport ticket requests to Spectra Logic Technical
Support. If desired, you can configure additional recipients.
Notes:  The default [email protected] mail recipient can be
used for any ASL or HHM files that are generated by the
library. This includes those generated manually, or
automatically in response to critical events or log forwarding.
 Do not configure the [email protected] mail
recipient to receive messages that result from configuration
changes or system messages generated by the library.
 AutoSupport can be used without email access by saving the
information generated by AutoSupport to a USB device and
then manually sending the stored information to Spectra
Logic Technical Support.

348
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Configuring AutoSupport

Configure AutoSupport Profiles

Use the following steps to create or modify a profile for each person
assigned to work with Spectra Logic Technical Support to troubleshoot
problems with the library or drives.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. If not already completed, configure the mail recipients who should
receive AutoSupport information (see Configure Mail Recipients on
page 348).
3. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > AutoSupport. The
AutoSupport screen displays.
Note: If you did not yet configure an AutoSupport profile, the Send
Log Set button is grayed out. If you did not configure a profile
for AutoSend, the Configure Alarms button is grayed out.

Figure 211 Click Manage Profiles to create or edit an

AutoSupport profile.

4. Click Manage Profiles. The AutoSupport Profiles screen displays.

Figure 212 Use the AutoSupport Profiles screen to manage

profiles.

349
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Configuring AutoSupport

Create or Modify a Profile

1. Click New Profile to create a new profile or click Edit Profile to modify
an existing profile. The Company Information screen displays.

Figure 213 Enter required information for your company.

 Complete the information in this screen. The information marked

with an asterisk (*) is required.
Note: Make sure to fill in all of the required fields in each of the
following screens. You cannot advance to the next screen if
required information is missing.
 The Customer/Contract Number is no longer used. Enter any six
alpha-numeric characters.
2. Click Next. The Contact Information screen displays.

Figure 214 Enter the required information for the contact

person.

3. Enter the information for your contact person in the fields provided.
This information determines how Spectra Logic contacts this person.

350
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Configuring AutoSupport

4. Click Next. The System and Mail Information screen displays.

Figure 215 Enter information about your operating

environment.

 Enter information about your library’s operating environment and

storage management software in the fields provided.
 Select AutoSend Profile to use the current profile as the recipient for
critical alarm log sets automatically sent by the library.
Note: Only one profile can be configured as the AutoSend profile.
 Select the mail recipient(s) from the Mail To choices presented. Only
mail recipients that were previously configured are listed (see
Configure Mail Users on page 124).
Note: You must select [email protected] as one of the
recipients if you want the library to send an AutoSupport ticket
request to Spectra Logic Technical Support.

351
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Configuring AutoSupport

5. Click Next. The Save Profile screen displays. Verify that all of the
information shown is correct.
If any information needs to be changed, click Previous to display the
screen in which the changes need to be made.

Figure 216 Review the profile information.

6. When all of the information is correct, click Save.

7. The AutoSupport Profiles screen redisplays, listing the newly
completed profile.

Figure 217 All of the AutoSupport profiles are listed on

the AutoSupport Profiles screen.

8. Repeat Step 1 on page 350 through Step 6 if you want to create

additional profiles.
Note: When you create multiple profiles, they are listed in the order in
which they are created, not in alphanumeric order.
9. Click Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen.
If one of the profiles is configured as an AutoSend recipient, the
Configure Alarms button is active (see Figure 211 on page 349).

352
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Configuring AutoSupport

Delete an AutoSupport Profile

Use the following steps to delete an existing profile.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > AutoSupport. The
AutoSupport screen displays (see Figure 211 on page 349).
3. Click Manage Profiles. The AutoSupport Profiles screen displays (see
Figure 217 on page 352).
4. Click Remove next to the contact you want to delete. The Remove
Profiles screen displays, asking you to confirm the deletion.
5. Click Remove. The AutoSupport profiles screen redisplays with the
updated list of profiles.
6. Click Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen.

Configure Alarms
Use the steps in this section if you want the library to automatically
generate an ASL file in the event that any of the critical events listed under
Critical Alarms on page 346 occurs.
1. If you did not already do so, configure one AutoSupport profile as the
AutoSend recipient (see Step 4 on page 351).
2. Click Configure Alarms from the AutoSupport screen. The AutoSupport
Critical Alarm Configuration screen displays.

Figure 218 The AutoSupport Critical Alarm Configuration

screen.

353
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Configuring AutoSupport

3. Select Enable Critical AutoSupport Alarms. When enabled, the library

generates an ASL file whenever one of the critical events listed under
Critical Alarms on page 346 occurs. Any ASL file that is generated as a
result of a critical event is automatically sent to all of the recipients
selected in the AutoSend profile.
Note: The [email protected] address must be selected as a
mail recipient in the AutoSend profile if you want the library to
send critical event ASL files to Spectra Logic Technical Support.
4. If desired, select a value for the Partition Drive Failure Threshold from
the drop-down list. This is the only configurable critical event.
You can specify the threshold for the number of failed drives in a
partition that causes an AutoSupport ticket request to be generated.
The threshold is a percentage of drives assigned to the partition. You
can select 25% or 50%; the default is 50%. The threshold applies to all
partitions in the library.
5. Click Save to save your changes or click Previous to return to the main
AutoSupport screen without saving your changes.
After your changes are saved, the AutoSupport Critical Alarm
Configuration screen redisplays with a confirmation message.
6. Click Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen.

Configure Log Set Forwarding

Log forwarding is enabled by default from the factory. This is a monthly
log set that is forwarded to Spectra Logic for data collection. No action is
taken by Spectra Logic Technical Support for a particular library when the
log set is received, but the data is parsed and stored in our database to
better understand our field population and how the library is used and
how it can be improved.

354
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Configuring AutoSupport

Use the following steps to modify log set forwarding.

1. Click Log Forwarding from the main AutoSupport screen. The Configure
Log Forwarding screen displays.

Figure 219 The Configure Log Forwarding screen.

2. Select the forwarding options you want to use.

 Allow BlueScale to automatically send log sets is selected by default.
Clear the check box if you do not want the library to automatically
generate and submit monthly Auto Support Log sets to one or more
preconfigured recipients.
 The [email protected] mail recipient is automatically
selected. All ASL files generated by the library are automatically
sent to Spectra Logic Technical Support.
 Select any additional mail recipient(s) from the Mail To choices
presented. Only mail recipients that were previously configured are
listed (see Configure Mail Users on page 124).
3. Click Save.
After your changes are saved, the Configure Log Forwarding screen
redisplays with a confirmation message.
4. Click Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen.

355
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Using AutoSupport

USING AUTOSUPPORT
AutoSupport provides the easiest way to open a support ticket or incident.
The following sections describe how to open or update a support ticket
using AutoSupport.
You can also open a support incident using the Spectra Logic Technical
Support portal. For instructions on submitting a support incident through
the support portal, see Opening a Support Ticket on page 507.
User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator
privileges can open and modify support tickets using AutoSupport.

Create New Support Tickets

Notes:  If [email protected] is included in the Mail To: field
for the autosupport profile used to submit a ticket, then
Spectra Logic immediately sends a confirmation email to the
email address listed in the autosupport profile used to
submit the ticket, and a support person contacts the person
submitting the ticket during normal service contract hours.
 If it is during your service contract hours and the problems
requires immediate attention, call Spectra Logic Technical
Support after submitting the AutoSupport ticket (see
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
 Go to Spectra Logic’s website at: support.spectralogic.com/
services-and-contracts/support-offerings/ for information
about the warranty and service options for your library.
Follow these steps to open a new ticket with Spectra Logic Technical
Support.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > AutoSupport. The main
AutoSupport screen displays.

Figure 220 The main AutoSupport screen.

356
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Using AutoSupport

3. If you want to save the AutoSupport ticket information to a USB device,

connect the device to USB port on the LCM (see Figure 17 on page 45)
or operator panel (T950B only) and allow time for the device to mount
before proceeding.
Note: The option to save the ticket to a USB device is only available if you
connect a USB device to the library before you click Send Log Set.
4. Click Send Log Set. The Select Profile To Send Log Set screen displays.

Figure 221 AutoSupport Profiles screen.

5. Click Select next to the profile for the main contact person for the issue.
The Select Ticket Type screen displays.

Figure 222 The Select Ticket Type screen.

 If you are sending additional information about an existing support

ticket, select Use existing support ticket and enter the ticket number
in the Number field. See Update Existing Support Tickets on
page 361 for additional information.
 If this is a new ticket, select Create new support ticket. This option is
selected by default.
Note: The Create new Hardware Health Monitor ticket option is not
available when you use the Send Log Set option to send an
AutoSupport ticket. This option is only used to send HHM data
in response to a maintenance notification (see Respond to HHM
Notifications on page 373).

357
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Using AutoSupport

6. If you do not need to make any changes to the contact person’s

information for this support ticket, proceed to Step 7.
 If you need to temporarily change the contact person’s information
for this ticket, click Profile Data. The Profile Summary screen
displays.
Make any necessary changes in the Profile Summary screen, then
click Use Settings. The Select Ticket Type screen redisplays.

Figure 223 The Profile Summary screen.

 Click Cancel to return to the Select Ticket Type screen without

making any changes to the contact person’s information.

358
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Using AutoSupport

7. In the Select Ticket Type screen (Figure 222 on page 357), type a
detailed description of the issue in the Problem Description field,
including what happened just before the failure occurred.
Note: Supplying a detailed problem description helps support
personnel to address the issue more quickly and efficiently.
8. Click Next. The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen displays.

Figure 224 The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen.

359
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Using AutoSupport

9. Verify that all information is correct.

If... Then...
The library is not connected to Select the check box at the top of the screen (shown in Figure 224) to
a network with an SMTP save the ticket information to a USB device instead of emailing it
server, from the library.
Notes:
 The option to save the ticket to a USB device is only available if
you connected a USB device to the library before you clicked
Send Log Set to begin the ticket process.
 After saving the ticket information to the USB device, you can
upload it to the Technical Support portal (see Accessing the
Technical Support Portal on page 504).
All of the information is Click Submit. A progress screen indicates that the ticket request
correct, (with log information) is being sent. When completed, the
AutoSupport Profiles screen displays.
When Spectra Logic receives the request, a ticket is opened and an
email response is sent to the user with a ticket number.
You need to change the 1. Click Previous to return to the Select Ticket Type screen.
problem description, 2. Modify the problem description as required.
3. Click Next to return to the Confirm and Submit Ticket screen.
You need to change the contact 1. Click Previous to return to the Select Ticket Type screen.
person’s information, 2. Click Profile Data on the Select Ticket Type screen to display the
Profile Summary screen.
3. Make any necessary changes in the Profile Summary screen.
4. Click Use Settings. The Select Ticket Type screen reappears
5. Retype the problem description.
6. Click Next to return to the Confirm and Submit Ticket screen.

360
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 11 — Configuring and Using AutoSupport Using AutoSupport

Update Existing Support Tickets

Follow these steps to update a ticket that you previously opened with
Spectra Logic Technical Support. Updating a ticket is particularly useful
for mailing new logs to Technical Support.
Note: You must have the reference number for the existing ticket —
which you receive when you open the ticket — and the
information you are sending must be related to that ticket.
If you have a new issue with your library, open a new ticket to
address that issue separately.
1. If you plan to save the ticket information to a USB device, connect the
device to a USB port on the LCM (see Figure 17 on page 45) or operator
panel (T950B only) and allow time for the device to mount.
2. Follow the instructions in Step 1 on page 356 through Step 5 in Create
New Support Tickets to reach the Select Ticket Type screen (see
Figure 222 on page 357).
3. If you do not need to make any changes to the contact person’s
information for this ticket, proceed to Step 5.
If you need to temporarily change any of the contact person’s
information, click Profile Data. The Profile Summary screen displays
(see Figure 223 on page 358).
4. Make any necessary changes in the Profile Summary screen, then click
Use Settings. The Select Ticket Type screen redisplays.
5. Select Use existing support ticket.
6. Type the six-digit ticket number in the Number field. You received this
number when you originally opened the ticket.
7. Add any updated information in the Problem Description field.
8. Click Next. The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen displays (see
Figure 224 on page 359).
9. Verify that all information is correct. If all of the information is correct,
proceed to Step 10. If something needs to be changed, click Previous
and make the necessary changes.
10. To save the ticket information to a USB device instead of emailing from
the library, select the check box at the top of the screen (shown in
Figure 224 on page 359).
Note: The option to save the ticket to a USB device is only available if
you connected a USB device to the library before you clicked
Send Log Set to begin updating the ticket.
11. Click Submit. A progress screen indicates that the ticket request (with log
information) is being sent. When completed, the AutoSupport Profiles
screen displays. When Spectra Logic receives the request, the ticket is
updated and an email response is sent to the user with a ticket number.

361
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 CHAPTER 12
Library Troubleshooting
This chapter describes troubleshooting steps you can take, as appropriate,
to help resolve problems you might encounter while operating the library.
Try these troubleshooting procedures before you open a support ticket with
Spectra Logic Technical Support. If you are unable to resolve the problem
yourself, open a support ticket (see Opening a Support Ticket on page 507).
Note: The library must be under warranty or have a valid service
contract in order to qualify for support (see Service Contract
Extension on page 529 to learn about service contracts).

Topic
Troubleshooting Library Problems page 363
Troubleshooting Library Initialization Issues page 363
Troubleshooting BlueScale User Interface Issues page 364
Troubleshooting MLM Issues page 367
Troubleshooting Encryption Issues page 368
Resolving Operational Issues page 370
Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring page 372
Respond to HHM Notifications page 373
View Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) Data page 377
Capturing Traces page 378
Resetting the Library page 381
Resetting Components page 382
Reset the LCM or RCM page 383
Reset a RIM or F-QIP page 384
Reset the LCM or RCM page 386
Discovering and Setting the BlueScale Vision page 386
Camera IP Address
Testing the Robotics page 396
Restoring the Library Configuration page 398
Restore From an Auto Configuration Save File page 399
Restore the Library Configuration Using a Saved page 404
Configuration
Restore the MLM and DLM Databases page 406

362
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Library Problems

TROUBLESHOOTING LIBRARY PROBLEMS

If you have a problem with your library, use the information in this section
to obtain help with resolving the problem.

Check... To...
System Messages Review any System Messages that were posted by the library (see Check and
Respond to Messages on page 168) and take any action described in the
message(s).
Error Sense Codes Look up the definition of an error sense code referenced in a system message
using the Spectra Tape Libraries SCSI Developer Guide.
Library BlueScale Confirm that your library is at the latest released version of BlueScale software
Software Version (see Check the Library BlueScale Software Version on page 447). Some
problems with library components may be fixed by updating the component
firmware if the library is using a downlevel BlueScale version.
Technical Support Find information about the most current version of BlueScale software and
Portal additional service and support tools. You can access the Technical Support
portal at support.spectralogic.com.
Note: Accessing many of the tools available on the Technical Support portal
requires creating a user account. See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on
page 504 for instructions.
 Check the options under the Documentation and Knowledge Base menus for
additional troubleshooting information.
 Check the Service & Contracts menu to view information about the warranty
and service options available for your library as well as the Spectra Certified
Media warranty.

TROUBLESHOOTING LIBRARY INITIALIZATION ISSUES

This section provides information about potential library initialization
issues that you may experience.

Issue Resolution
Library hangs while The library gathers tasks at the beginning of the library initialization process,
gathering and displays this as its first task on the Library Initialization screen. If the
initialization tasks library is unable to gather the required initialization tasks within a few minutes
of powering on, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for assistance (see
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
Library hangs If the library cannot complete the initialization process, it generates system
during messages and enter maintenance mode. Contact Spectra Logic Technical
initialization Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). Do not power
off the library.

363
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Troubleshooting BlueScale User Interface Issues

TROUBLESHOOTING BLUESCALE USER INTERFACE ISSUES

This section provides information about potential issues that you may
experience while using the library’s BlueScale user interface, either from
the operator panel or through the web interface (RLC).

Issue Resolution
BlueScale screens Occasionally, the BlueScale interface may exhibit display problems (for
exhibit display example, one screen displays on top of another or there are multiple toolbars),
problems either in the operator panel user interface or through the web interface.
Click the refresh display button ( ) on the status bar to refresh the screen.
Important: If you have a keyboard connected to the LCM or if you are
accessing the library through the BlueScale web interface, do not use the
keyboard to refresh the screen (for example, by pressing F5). Doing so may
cause unpredictable results.
Cannot access the  Make sure that the library is connected to the network via an Ethernet cable
library using the connected to the LCM. For a library with a Spectra LS and BlueScale12.3.0 or
BlueScale web later, make sure that the Ethernet cable for web access is connected to the left-
interface (RLC) most Ethernet port. The right-most Ethernet port on the LCM is a dedicated
EtherLib port. (see Figure 17 on page 45).
 Make sure that the web server port is correctly configured for your
environment (see Web Server Port on page 115).
 Make sure that an IP address is configured for the library (see Configure
Network Settings on page 121).
 If SSL is enabled for the library, make sure that you enter the IP address using
the form: https://[library IP address].
See Connecting to the library remotely using the BlueScale web interface on
page 98 for additional information.
 Reset the LCM to make sure that the Ethernet port is not hung (see Reset the
LCM or RCM on page 383).
Cannot change a Before attempting to change configuration settings:
configuration  Recommended — Make sure that the drives in the partition are empty.
setting
 Make sure that the host is not communicating with the library.
 Make sure that no background processes are running (for example, Media
Auto Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan). If a background process is running,
the library displays a message indicating what it is.
 If the background process is Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan
and you cannot wait for the process to complete, you can stop or pause the
operation (Stop the Discovery Process on page 310 and Pause the PostScan
Process on page 319).
 For all other background processes, wait until the process is completed and
then retry the configuration change.

364
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Troubleshooting BlueScale User Interface Issues

Issue Resolution
Cannot create a Make sure that you have:
new storage  An active SLS key to support multiple partitions entered in the Option
partition Enablement panel of the System Settings screen (see Standard and upgraded
options for the library on page 111).
 Unassigned licensed chambers available for use in the new partition. If
necessary, modify an existing partition to make chambers available (see
Modifying an Existing Partition on page 224), license additional chambers
with a CoD capacity key (see Capacity-On-Demand (CoD) on page 531), or
purchase a new frame.
 One or more drives available for use in the new partition. If necessary,
modify an existing partition to make one or more drives available or install
additional drives.
 Fewer than 16 storage partitions configured.
Notes:
 Libraries running BlueScale software versions earlier than BlueScale12.6.3
are limited to eight storage partitions.
 A single RIM can export up to eight partitions; a single RIM2 can export up
to 16 partitions.
 Fewer than the maximum number of exporting controllers.
 For libraries using BlueScale12.6.3 through 12.6.45.3, the library is limited
to six drive exporters. If there are fewer than six drive exporters, additional
partitions can have RIM or F-QIP exporters until you reach the partition
limit described above.
 For BlueScale12.7.01 through BlueScale12.7.06.03, the maximum number of
exporting controllers (QIPs, RIMs, and drives) supported by the library is
six.
 For BlueScale12.8.05 and later, the maximum number of exporting
controllers (QIPs, RIMs, and drives) supported by the library is 12.
 Make sure that no background processes are running (for example, Media
Auto Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan). If a background process is running,
the library displays a message indicating what it is.
 If the background process is Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan
and you cannot wait for the process to complete, you can stop or pause the
operation (Stop the Discovery Process on page 310 and Pause the PostScan
Process on page 319).
 For all other background processes, wait until the process is completed and
then retry the partition creation.
Cannot import or Make sure that no background processes are running (for example, Media Auto
export cartridges Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan). If a background process is running, the
library displays a message indicating what it is.
 If the background process is Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan and
you cannot wait for the process to complete, you can stop or pause the
operation (Stop the Discovery Process on page 310 and Pause the PostScan
Process on page 319).
 For all other background processes, wait until the process is completed and
then retry the import or export operation.

365
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Troubleshooting BlueScale User Interface Issues

Issue Resolution
Cannot log into the Log into the library using the default superuser (su). See Configuring Library
library Users on page 104 for a list of the default user names and passwords.
Forgot the user
names or
passwords
Cannot use a  Make sure that a Global Spare drive is assigned to the partition (see Assign
Global Spare drive Global Spare Drives on page 202).
to replace a  Make sure that no background processes are running (for example, Media
malfunctioning Auto Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan). If a background process is running,
drive in the the library displays a message indicating what it is.
partition
 If the background process is Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or PostScan
and you cannot wait for the process to complete, you can stop or pause the
operation (Stop the Discovery Process on page 310 and Pause the PostScan
Process on page 319).
 For all other background processes, wait until the process is completed and
then retry activating the Global Spare.
Operator panel 1. Display the soft keyboard.
touch screen 2. Change the keyboard to display the number keypad.
displays broken
3. Depending on what is displayed on the screen, press and hold the specified
graphics or an error
number key for 10 seconds:
message
 1 — Refresh the library’s built-in web browser. Use this option if you see a
message such as “Page cannot be displayed” or if graphics on the screen
(for example, health icons) are not loading properly.
 2 — Restarts the library’s built-in web browser.
 3 — Restarts the library’s web server and the built-in web browser. Use this
option if you see a message such as “Page not found.”
System message A valid BlueScale Software Support key is required before you can update
states that the BlueScale software. Renew the key as described in Renewing the BlueScale
BlueScale Software Software Support Key on page 444.
Support key
expired
System message The library uses a secondary mirror of the operating system if it is unable to
states that the successfully start from the primary copy. Contact Spectra Logic Technical
library booted to Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
the redundant
partition
Touch screen Recalibrate the touch screen (see Calibrating the Touch Screen on page 470).
buttons and text
fields are out of
alignment

366
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Troubleshooting MLM Issues

Issue Resolution
USB device does  Make sure that you plug the USB device into the LCM or the operator panel
not appear as a (T950B only), and allow time for the device to mount, before you select the
“save to” option option that saves data to the USB device.
 Reset the LCM to make sure that the USB port is not hung (see Reset the LCM
or RCM on page 383).
 The library only recognizes FAT-formatted, not NTFS-formatted, USB
devices. Try using a different USB device.

TROUBLESHOOTING MLM ISSUES

This section provides information about potential issues that you may
experience while using MLM.

Issue Cause Resolution

An asterisk (*) The cartridge was exported from the If you do not intend to reimport
appears next to the library. the cartridge, you can delete it
barcode on the from the MLM database (see
MLM Details screen Delete MLM Records From the
or an MLM report Database on page 332).
An “x” appears The cleaning cartridge is expired. Export the expired cartridge or
next to a barcode exchange it for a new one (see
on the Inventory Export or Exchange Expired
screen Cleaning Cartridges on page 257).
The library does The discovery process (Media Auto Either wait until the library is idle
not proactively Discovery or PreScan) cannot begin while before beginning the import or
discover new the hosts are actively loading cartridges manually start the discovery
cartridges when into or unloading cartridges from the process for imported cartridges
they are imported drives. If you import cartridges during when the library is idle. See
this time, the library posts a failure Discover Cartridges Manually on
message stating that no drives are page 308 for instructions.
available to perform the discovery
process.

367
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Encryption Issues

TROUBLESHOOTING ENCRYPTION ISSUES

The information in this section may help resolve encryption-related
problems.

Issue Cause Resolution

Library can not The Spectra SKLM server’s If you are setting up Spectra SKLM on a
access the Spectra operating system firewall Windows® server, create a firewall rule on the
SKLM server does not allow the library server to allow the library to access the server.
to access the server. Use the port setting that was assigned to the
server during the BlueScale (library) portion of
the Spectra SKLM server configuration.
The default port setting is 3801. See “Configure the
Spectra SKLM Server” in the Spectra Tape Libraries
Encryption User Guide to determine your port
setting.
System message If a cartridge is left in a Use the following steps to re-enable the
states that “Load drive after the library loses encryption process:
attempted while power or you reset or 1. Move the cartridge out of the drive and return it
encryption is power-cycle the library, the to its storage location (see Exchange Magazines
enabled, but no drive is not able to receive or Cartridges in a Partition on page 254).
moniker or key list encryption monikers.
2. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on
was sent to the This can also occur if a tape page 409).
DCM” is left in a drive while the
drive is reset or reseated.

368
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Encryption Issues

Issue Cause Resolution

System message The cartridge was Depending on which BlueScale Encryption
states that a tape encrypted using an edition you are using, use the following steps to
drive requires a encryption key that is not enable the cartridge to be read:
specific moniker currently available on the BlueScale Standard Edition
library.
1. Log into the library as a superuser.
Or, if you are using
2. Log into the encryption feature.
BlueScale Professional
Edition, the required 3. Export and then delete the encryption key
encryption key is available, currently listed on the Encryption
but was not selected as one Configuration screen (see “Deleting an
of the partition’s Encryption Key from the Library” in the
decryption keys. Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide).
4. Import the required encryption key (see
“Import the Required Key into the Library” in
the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User
Guide).
5. Select Configuration > Partitions.
6. Click Edit next to the partition containing the
cartridge.
7. Navigate through the BlueScale partition
wizard to the Encryption screen.
8. Select the encryption key to be associated with
the partition.
9. Click Next to proceed to the Summary screen
of the Partition Wizard, and click Save.
BlueScale Professional Edition
1. Log into the library as a superuser.
2. Log into the encryption feature.
3. Make sure the encryption key is listed on the
Encryption Configuration screen. If it is not
listed, add the key to the library (see “Import
the Required Key into the Library” in the
Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide).
4. Select Configuration > Partitions.
5. Click Edit next to the partition containing the
cartridge.
6. Navigate through the BlueScale partition
wizard to the Encryption screen.
7. Select the required encryption key as either the
primary encryption key or as a decryption key.
Note: A maximum of eight decryption keys can
be assigned to one partition.
8. Click Next to proceed to the Summary screen
of the Partition Wizard, and click Save.

369
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Resolving Operational Issues

RESOLVING OPERATIONAL ISSUES

This section provides information about potential issues you may
encounter while operating the library.

Issue Cause Resolution

One or more When the library is 1. Open a support ticket describing the system
chambers repeatedly unable to message that was posted (see Opening a Support
marked as insert a magazine into a Ticket on page 507).
unusable chamber, it marks the 2. Continue using the library, keeping the following
chamber as unusable and in mind:
posts a system message.
 If the library has unassigned chambers,
operation is not affected. However, if you create
a new partition that uses the unassigned
chambers, you are not able to load magazines
into all of the chambers assigned to the
partition.
 If all of the chambers in the library are assigned
to partitions, the number of magazines that can
be imported into the partitions is reduced.
Element Installing additional To avoid errors after adding a new drive, make sure
addresses change drives into a partially that you reconfigure the element addresses your
after installing filled DBA, or removing storage management software uses to access drives
additional drives drives from a DBA, may when you install a new drive (refer to your software
cause the library to documentation for instructions).
reassign element
addresses.
Magazine is in If the library loses power To recover the magazine, use the Import/Export
TAP after a power while a TeraPack TeraPack Magazines screen to initiate an import or
failure magazine is in a TAP, the export operation (see Chapter 7 – Importing and
library only identifies the Exporting Cartridges, beginning on page 231 for
magazine’s presence in instructions).
the TAP the next time
media is imported or
exported.
Magazine is left The library was unable to Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for
in transporter insert the magazine into assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
following a move its original chamber and
no empty chambers are
available. The library
posts a system message
and halts.
System message A blockage is preventing Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for
indicates that the the library from moving assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
robotics are the robotics.
blocked

370
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Resolving Operational Issues

Issue Cause Resolution

Cartridge left in a If the library loses power CAUTION: When the Unload Drives utility runs,
tape drive after a during backup operations cartridges are unloaded from all drives in the
library power- or you reset or power- selected partition(s), even if they are active. This
cycle or reset cycle the library without could cause backups to fail. Do not use the
first unloading all of the Unload Drives utility when file storage operations
If the drive is a drives, cartridges may are actively running.
Global Spare, see remain in the drives. 1. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance >
Cartridge left in a Tools. The Maintenance Tools screen displays.
Global Spare tape
2. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
drive after a
library power- 3. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities
cycle or reset Confirmation screen displays.
4. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show
a list of the advanced utilities.
5. Scroll down and select Unload Drives.
6. From the Select the partition or library drop-down
list, select a partition or Total Library.
7. Click Run Utility.
8. A progress screen displays, all drives assigned to
partitions in the full library or the selected
partition are unloaded, and the cartridges are
returned to their original slots or the first
available slot if the original slot is not available.
When the operation is complete, a Utility Results
screen displays.
Note: This utility does not unload cartridges from
Global Spare tape drives being used for PostScan. If
there is a cartridge left in a Global Spare tape drive,
see Cartridge left in a Global Spare tape drive after a
library power-cycle or reset.
Cartridge left in a If the library loses power CAUTION: Make sure the drive you are sparing is
Global Spare tape or if you reset or power- not actively running a backup or restore
drive after a cycle the library while the operation. This could cause backups to fail.
library power- PostScan process is Use the following steps to return the cartridge to its
cycle or reset running, the cartridge storage location:
being scanned remains in
1. Examine the partition inventories to determine in
the drive. The library
which partition the cartridge belongs (see
generates a message to
Viewing and Downloading the Cartridge
notify you that the Global
Inventory on page 270).
Spare contains a cartridge
after it completes its 2. Substitute the Global Spare tape drive containing
initialization process. the cartridge for another drive in the same partition
(see Use the Global Spare Drive on page 411).
3. Move the cartridge out of the drive and return it
to its storage location (see Moving Cartridges
Within a Partition on page 278).
4. Return the drive back to Global Spare status. (see
Undo the Global Spare Drive on page 414).

371
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring

Issue Cause Resolution

Streaming video The software included Select one of the resolutions below.
and camera with the black camera,  Use Internet Explorer or a plugin for your
controls do not requires ActiveX to view browser that provides ActiveX support, such as
work for the the streaming video and ‘IE Tab’ for Google Chrome and Mozilla Firefox
library camera controls. or ‘Open in Internet Explorer’ for Safari. Consult
your browser's documentation for assistance
installing a plugin.
 Use a multimedia player, such as VLC Media
Player, to view the streaming video. To configure
the camera in VLC Media Player, launch the
program and navigate to Media > Open Network
Stream, select the Network tab, and enter rtsp:/
/xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/live.sdp where
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address of the
camera.
 Connect to the camera by entering the IP address
in your web browser. Ignore pop up windows
about missing plugins. Select the Configuration
tab, then select Advanced Mode. Select Media >
Video and in the Stream Settings pane select Video
settings for stream 1. Select JPEG and the enter the
desired settings, and then click Save. Return to
the Home page. Switch to Video Stream 2, and
then back to Video Stream 1. The video stream
should display.
Note: You will need to switch to Video Stream 2
and then back to Video Stream 1 each time you
return to the Home page.
Library has The EtherLib network is Navigate to Maintenance > Tools and select
EtherLib, but disconnected. EtherLib Status. If the status indicates that any of the
EtherLib options targets are not connected, check the cabling between
do not display in the components and then click Refresh.
Package Update

USING BLUESCALE HARDWARE HEALTH MONITORING

Overview BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) tracks
maintenance thresholds for key library components. When the library or
one of its components reaches its maintenance threshold the HHM icon
appears on the status bar. As with the system message icon, the color of the
icon indicates the urgency of the notification.

372
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring

When the HHM icon appears on the status bar, you can click the icon to
view information about the notification and send a Hardware Health
Monitor ticket to a contact person within your organization or to Spectra
Logic Technical Support so they can review the logs and determine if any
maintenance tasks are needed.

HHM icon
Figure 225 The HHM icon is located on the status bar.

 To send an AutoSupport log to a contact person, see Respond to HHM

Notifications, beginning on this page.
 To view a report showing the current HHM data, see View Hardware
Health Monitoring (HHM) Data on page 377.
User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator
privileges can respond to HHM notifications by creating an AutoSupport
ticket and viewing HHM data.

Respond to HHM Notifications

Use the following steps to send the Hardware Health Monitoring
notification and AutoSupport Log (ASL) file to the contact person in a
predefined AutoSupport profile. You can also choose to send the ASL files
to Spectra Logic Technical Support so they can review the logs and
determine if any maintenance tasks are needed to prevent future problems.
Note: AutoSupport Log (ASL) information is only for troubleshooting
purposes. This log information is separate from the data path
and contains no customer data.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. If not already completed, configure the mail recipients who should
receive AutoSupport information. Also configure one or more
AutoSupport profiles.
 Mail recipients — See Configure Mail Users on page 124. At a
minimum, configure Spectra Logic Technical Support as a mail
recipient if you want the library to email AutoSupport ticket
requests to Spectra Logic.
 AutoSupport profiles — See Configure AutoSupport Profiles on
page 349. You can configure one of the mail recipients to receive
critical alarm log sets automatically sent by the library.

373
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring

3. Click the HHM icon on the status bar (see Figure 225 on page 373). The
Hardware Health Monitoring screen displays.

Figure 226 The Hardware Health Monitoring screen provides

information about responding to the HHM notification.

4. If you want to save the AutoSupport ticket information to a USB device,

insert the USB device into a USB port on the LCM (see Using a USB
Device on page 183) or the operator panel (T950B only) and allow time
for the device to mount.
Note: The option to save the ticket information to a USB device is only
available if you connect a USB device to the library before you
click Send AutoSupport Ticket.
5. Click Send AutoSupport Ticket. The main AutoSupport screen displays.

Figure 227 Click Send Log Set to open a support ticket.

374
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring

6. Click Send Log Set. The Select Profile to Send Log Set screen displays.

Figure 228 Select the AutoSupport profile to use for the

support ticket.

7. Click Select next to the profile for the main contact person for HHM
issues. The Select Ticket Type screen displays.

Figure 229 Enter a problem description on the Select Ticket

Type screen.

The Create new Hardware Health Monitor ticket option is automatically

selected. The options for entering an existing support ticket number
and a problem description are not available.
8. If you do not need to make any changes to the contact person’s
information for this support ticket, skip to Step 9 on page 376.
If you need to temporarily change the contact person’s information for
this ticket, click Profile Data. The Profile Summary screen displays (see
Figure 223 on page 358). Make any necessary changes in the Profile
Summary screen. Click Use Settings to save your changes and return to
the Select Ticket Type screen.

375
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring

9. Click Next. The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen displays.

Figure 230 The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen.

10. Verify that all information is correct.

 To save the ticket information to a USB device instead of emailing it
from the library, select the box at the top of the screen.
Note: The option to save the ticket information to a USB device is only
available if you connected a USB device to a USB port on the
LCM or the operator panel (T950B only) in Step 4 on page 374.
 If all of the information is correct, proceed to Step 11.
 If something needs to be changed, click Previous to return to the
Select Ticket Type screen and make any necessary changes.
11. Click Submit to send the Hardware Health Monitor ticket to the selected
recipient.
A progress screen indicates that the ticket request (and the ASL
information) is being sent. When completed, the AutoSupport Profiles
screen displays.
12. After any required tasks are complete, the threshold can be reset. The
HHM icon disappears until the next threshold is reached.

376
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring

View Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) Data

The advanced utility called HHM: View Data generates a report showing
the current status of the HHM counters. This information includes the
following:
 Library serial number and name (if configured)
 Information about key library components monitored by HHM,
including the type of reminder generated when the component reaches
its maintenance threshold
 Robotics moves: Drive To Drive Moves, Drive To Slot Moves, Slot To
Slot Moves, Slot To Drive Moves, TAP In Moves, and TAP Out Move.

In addition to the HHM: View Data utility, two additional HHM utilities configure the
Caution HHM counters and thresholds for the monitored components. Do not change the
values for any counters or thresholds unless you are specifically instructed to do so
by Spectra Logic Technical Support.

Use the following steps to view the current HHM data.

1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance
Tools screen displays.
3. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
4. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.
5. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced
utilities.
6. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select HHM: View Data.
The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility.

Figure 231 The HHM: View Data utility.

377
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Capturing Traces

7. Click Run Utility.

After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays the current HHM
data. Scroll as necessary to view all of the data.

Figure 232 The HHM: View Data Utility Results screen.

8. Click Previous to return to the list of advanced utilities.

CAPTURING TRACES
Overview Spectra Logic uses traces to help diagnose problems with the
library. You only need to capture traces when instructed to do so by
Spectra Logic Technical Support. They tell you what type of trace you need
to capture.
Emailing Trace Results If you plan to email trace results directly from the
library, make sure that you set up the recipients as mail users (see
Configure Mail Users on page 124).
If you are connected to the library using a web browser, you can also copy
and paste the trace results into a text file and email it to Spectra Logic
Technical Support if they request it.
Saving Trace Results to a USB Device If you plan to save trace results to a
USB device, you must connect the USB device to the LCM or the operator
panel (T950B only) and allow time for the device to mount before you
select Traces on the Maintenance Tools screen (see Connect a USB Device to
the Library on page 184). If a USB device is not connected, the USB option
is not available. You can, however, still save trace results to the memory
card in the LCM. You can also view the results without saving them.
User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator
privileges can capture traces.

378
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Capturing Traces

Procedure Use the following steps to capture the desired trace.

1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools to display the
Maintenance Tools screen.

Figure 233 The Maintenance Tools screen.

3. If you want to save the traces to a USB device, connect the USB device
to the LCM or the operator panel (T950B only) and allow time for the
device to mount.
4. Select Traces. The System Traces screen displays with the trace options
that were selected the last time the screen was viewed.
5. Select the type of trace that Spectra Logic Technical Support requested.

Figure 234 Select the traces you want to capture on the

System Traces screen (Error Log trace results shown).

 LCM Trace — Captures a trace relating to a single aspect of operations

related to the LCM.
 Component Trace — Captures a trace relating to the logical library or
a single aspect of operations related to the robotics or a controller
(RIM or F-QIP).
Note: The RIMs in the library are listed as F-QIPs.

379
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Capturing Traces

6. Use the check boxes to select any combination of the options for saving
the generated trace.
Option Description
Mail results to Sends the trace report to a previously configured mail recipient. Use the drop-
down list to select the recipient for the report file.
To send the email with the attached trace file to someone who is not already
listed as a library user, you must first configure that person as an email
recipient (see Configure Mail Users on page 124).
Note: Do not use the default [email protected] email recipient.
Spectra Logic does not save emailed traces unless they are specifically
requested for troubleshooting.
Save to USB Saves the report to the USB device. The results can then be viewed from any
device that can read from USB.
Note: This option is only available if you inserted a USB device in Step 3 on
page 379.
Display Full LCM Opens a new screen that shows the entire trace.
Trace Note: The Display Full LCM Trace check box only applies to selections made in
the LCM Trace list, not selections made in the Component Trace list. If Display Full
LCM Trace is selected when you are generating a component trace, the selection
is ignored.

380
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Resetting the Library

7. Click Go next to either LCM Trace or Component Trace. The library

retrieves the requested trace, which may take several minutes.

If you... The trace results...

Did not select Display in the scrolling box on the System Traces screen (see Figure 234 on
Display Full LCM page 379).
Trace,
Selected Display Display in the Trace Results screen. Click Previous to return to the System
Full LCM Trace, Traces screen.

Figure 235 Select the Display Full LCM Trace option to view
the entire LCM trace on the Full Trace screen (Error Log trace
results shown).

8. If you chose to save the file to a USB device or mail it, a message
displays showing the filename for the trace file.

RESETTING THE LIBRARY

Many troubleshooting or error recovery operations only require resetting
the LCM as described in Reset the LCM or RCM on page 383. Because
resetting the LCM does not affect communication with hosts, servers, and
software, backups can continue while the LCM resets.
Performing some types of troubleshooting operations or recovering from
some error conditions require you to reboot (power-cycle) the entire
library. Power-cycling the library resets all of the components in the library.

Do not reset the library unless you are specifically instructed to do so. Trace data
Caution generated by the library may be lost when you reset the library or a component,
making diagnosing problems difficult.

Note: Any drives that are not assigned to a partition generate system
messages showing that the drive disappeared and then
reappeared whenever the library is power-cycled.

381
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Resetting Components

Use the following steps if Spectra Logic Technical Support instructs you to
reboot the entire library by power-cycling it.
1. If possible, pause PostScan if it is running (see Pause the PostScan
Process on page 319). Any tapes currently being scanned are returned
to their storage locations.
2. Discontinue all file storage operations to the library.
3. Power off the library (see Power Off the Library on page 165).
4. Wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Power on the library (see Power On the Library on page 163) and wait
while the library performs its initialization process.
6. If a cartridge is left in a drive after the reset is complete, see Resolving
Operational Issues on page 370 for information about returning the
cartridge to its storage location.

RESETTING COMPONENTS
If instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support or by error
messages, you can reset certain library components as described in this
section. See Resetting the Library, above, if you need to reset the entire
library.

Do not reset a component unless you are specifically instructed to do so. Trace data
Caution generated by the library or the component may be lost when you perform a reset,
making diagnosing problems difficult.

382
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Resetting Components

Reset the LCM or RCM

To reset the LCM or RCM, insert the tip of a toothpick or other similar non-
conductive object into the hole on the back of the LCM or RCM to press the
reset button.

Do not use a metallic object to press the reset button. You may inadvertently cause
Caution an electrical short inside the module.

Important Resetting the RCM resets the motion control for the robotics. Any move requests
fail until the RCM completes its initialization.

Important Resetting the LCM resets the operator panel and the web server. Any connections
to the library through the BlueScale web interface are lost. Wait five minutes for the
reset to complete and then reconnect. Backup operations are not affected.

Reset

Figure 236 The reset button on the Spectra PC.

Reset

Figure 237 The reset button on the Spectra LS.

383
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Resetting Components

Reset a RIM or F-QIP

The reset procedures for a RIM and an F-QIP are identical.

Hardware Reset
To perform a hardware reset of a RIM or F-QIP, insert the tip of a toothpick
or other similar non-conductive object into the hole in the back panel to
press the Reset button.

Do not use a metallic object to press the reset button. You may inadvertently cause
Caution an electrical short inside the module.

RIM2 RIM F-QIP

Reset

Reset Reset

Figure 238 Location of the RIM or F-QIP hardware reset button.

BlueScale Software Reset

You can also reset the RIM or F-QIP through the BlueScale user interface.
1. Determine the BlueScale identifier for the controller you need to reset.
Note: RIMs are shown as F-QIPs in the BlueScale user interface and are
identified according to their physical location in the library. See
RIM and F-QIP Identifiers on page 67 for information about
identifiers.
2. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
3. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance
Tools screen displays.
4. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.

384
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Resetting Components

5. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen

displays.
6. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced
utilities.
7. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Reset Controller.
The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility.

Figure 239 The Reset Controller utility for resetting a RIM.

8. Use the drop-down list to select the component identifier for the
controller that you need to reset.
9. Click Run Utility to reset the selected controller.
When the reset is complete, the Utility Results screen displays, showing
that the controller was reset.
Note: When the controller is reset, the library posts system messages
that the F-QIP disappeared and reappeared.
10. The controller is ready for use.

385
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Discovering and Setting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address

Reset the Power Control Module

The main frame and each drive expansion frame has a PCM. To reset the
over-current circuit that protects the power system in the event of a voltage
surge, insert the tip of a toothpick or other similar non-conductive object
into the hole on the back of the PCM to press the reset button.

Power Control
Module (PCM)

Reset
button

Figure 240 Power Control Module reset button.

DISCOVERING AND SETTING THE BLUESCALE VISION CAMERA

IP ADDRESS
If a white BlueScale vision camera is configured to use DHCP addressing,
you can use the camera’s setup wizard to find the camera on the network
and determine the current IP address. You can then enter the IP address in
the BlueScale System Settings screen (see BlueScale Vision IP Address on
page 119). You can also use the camera’s setup wizard to set a fixed IP
address, if desired.

Important If a white camera is configured with an unknown fixed IP address, you must reset it
to use DHCP before you can discover it on the network. Resetting the camera to use
DHCP requires physically accessing the camera inside the library. Contact Spectra
Logic Technical Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

For a black BlueScale Vision camera, you can use the camera’s setup wizard
to find cameras with both fixed and dynamic IP addresses.
When your library environment includes multiple cameras, the setup
wizards detect all of the compatible cameras on the network it is accessing.
When you perform the initial IP address configuration for the camera
using the wizard, you may find it helpful to connect a computer directly to
the BlueScale Vision camera connector for one camera at a time instead of
using a connection over the network.

386
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Discovering and Setting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address

Look through the libraries window panel to determine the type of

BlueScale vision camera you have, and use the appropriate section to
download software and configure the camera.
 If you have the white BlueScale vision camera, use Configure the
BlueScale Vision Camera - White on page 387.
 If you have the black BlueScale vision camera, use Configure the
BlueScale Vision Camera - Black on page 392.

Configure the BlueScale Vision Camera - White

1. Download the BlueScale vision camera software from the support
portal Downloads > Tools page or click https://
support.spectralogic.com/python/tools/Networkcamera.exe.
2. Open the folder and run NetworkCamera.exe.
3. On the wizard’s Welcome screen, click Setup Camera. The wizard
searches the network and locates any compatible network cameras
currently set to use DHCP to obtain an IP address.

Important Do not click Install Utility. This option installs the Viewing/Recording utility. It
cannot be used to configure the camera.

Note: The Network Camera Setup Wizard uses the UDP broadcast to
discover the camera on the network. You may need to disable
your network’s firewall if it blocks using UDP.

Figure 241 The Network Camera Setup Wizard start page.

387
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Discovering and Setting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address

4. If the wizard discovers multiple cameras, select the one that you want
to configure, and then click the forward arrow to continue.

Click arrow
to continue

Figure 242 The camera IP address shown in the Network Camera Setup Wizard.

Notes:  The default device name for the camera is SLnnnnnn, where
nnnnnn are the last 6 digits of the camera’s 12 digit
hexadecimal MAC address.
 If you only need to determine the IP address for the camera,
make a note of that information and then click the button in
the upper right-hand corner of the screen to close the wizard.
The camera continues to use DHCP to obtain an IP address.
 If the wizard does not discover the camera, the camera must
be reset to use DHCP addressing. Contact Spectra Logic
Technical Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra
Logic on page 7).
 If the camera is configured to use DHCP and no DHCP
server is available, the camera defaults to IP address
192.168.0.99.
5. Click the forward arrow to display the login screen. Enter the
Administrator Name and Administrator Password.
The default Administrator Name is administrator (all lower case, case-
sensitive); by default, the Administrator Password is left blank.

388
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Discovering and Setting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address

6. Click the forward arrow to display the Camera Settings screen.

Click arrow
to continue

Figure 243 Enter a description for the camera and set the date and time.

a. On the Camera Settings screen, change the Device Name to

something that helps you identify the camera in your environment.
The default name for the camera is SLnnnnnn, where nnnnnn is the
last six digits of the camera’s 12 digit hexadecimal MAC address.
b. If desired, enter a Description for the camera so that you can easily
identify it.
c. If necessary, set the correct Time Zone, Local Date, and Local Time.
7. Click the forward arrow to display the IP Address Settings screen.

Click arrow
to continue

Figure 244 Select Fixed IP Address to configure the IP address for the camera.

389
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Discovering and Setting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address

8. On the IP Address Settings screen, select Fixed IP Address or Dynamic IP

Address. Click the forward arrow.

Important If you select to use DHCP, and no DHCP server is available, the camera defaults to IP
address 192.168.0.99. If your network does not support using this IP address, you
must set the camera to a supported fixed IP address before you can enable and
access the camera’s BlueScale Vision viewer.
If you select to use DHCP addressing, be aware that if the DHCP-assigned IP address
changes, you need to use the Network Configuration Wizard to find the new IP
address for the camera in order to access it.

If you select Fixed IP Address the TCP/IP Settings screen displays. If you
selected DHCP, skip to Step 9 on page 391.

Click arrow
to continue

Figure 245 Configure the TCP/IP settings for the camera.

Set the desired IP, subnet mask, and gateway addresses as required for
your network and enter DNS (Domain Name Server) information. The
factory defaults are:

IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway

10.10.10.11 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1

Important If you set the camera to use a fixed IP address, record that address for later
reference. If you do not know the camera’s IP address, you must reset the camera to
use DHCP addressing before you can connect to it. The reset process requires
physically accessing the camera. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for
assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

Notes:  The Primary DNS address is required in order to use the

email alert or dynamic DNS features.
 The Secondary DNS is optional. If provided, it is used if the
Primary DNS is unavailable.

390
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Discovering and Setting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address

9. Click the forward arrow to display the New Settings confirmation

screen. Confirm that all of the settings are correct.

Click arrow
to continue

Figure 246 Confirm that the new settings for the camera are correct.

10. Click the forward arrow to save the updated settings. A confirmation
dialog box displays. Click OK to confirm that you want to save the new
settings.

Figure 247 Save the updated settings for the camera.

11. After saving the new camera configuration verify the settings by
attempting to access the camera at the new IP address (see Using a Web
Browser on page 180).
12. If the library has multiple cameras, repeat the steps in this section for
each camera. Make a record of the IP address for each camera and the
frame in which each camera is located.
13. Other camera settings can be configured if desired. See the BlueScale
Vision Camera User Guide for information about other available settings.

391
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Discovering and Setting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address

14. When you finish configuring the camera, click Exit to close the wizard.
15. If desired, edit the IP address for the BlueScale Vision camera icon on
the BlueScale user interface status bar.
a. From the library’s user interface, select Configuration > System. The
System Setup screen displays.
b. Scroll down until you see the Other Settings pane (see Figure 58 on
page 109).
c. Enter the camera’s updated IP address in the BlueScale Vision IP
Address field.
d. Click Save. The presence of a camera icon on the status bar indicates
that the IP address is configured.

Configure the BlueScale Vision Camera - Black

1. Download the camera software from the support portal Downloads >
Tools page or click https://support.spectralogic.com/python/tools/
IW2_Setup-v1.1.0.27.exe.
Note: The Vivotek FD8361 Fixed Dome Network Camera User’s Manual
says that the software is located on a CD shipped with the
camera. The CD is not shipped with Spectra Logic libraries.
Download the software using the link above.
2. Open the folder and run IW2_Setup-v1.1.0.27.exe. The program
searches the network for any compatible network cameras.
3. When the discovery completes, a graphic of the detected setup, similar
to Figure 248, displays. Click Next.

Figure 248 Sample detected network.

392
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Discovering and Setting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address

4. The installation wizard displays information, such as the MAC address

and IP address, for the cameras detected. Click the row for the camera
that you want to configure.

Figure 249 The camera IP address shown in the Network

Camera Installation Wizard 2.

5. The camera software should open in your default browser. If it does

not, open a browser window and type the IP address shown.
Notes:  The software for the black camera requires ActiveX to view
the streaming video and controls. You must use Internet
Explorer or see Streaming video and camera controls do not
work for the library camera on page 372 for alternate
solutions.
 If this is the first time the program is run on the computer an
add-on needs to be installed.
 Depending on the firmware of the black camera, you may
need to log into the camera to view live images or to
configure the camera. The default username is root. The
default password is Spectra123. To change the default
password or create additional users, see “Security” in the
Vivotek FD8361 Fixed Dome Network Camera User’s Manual.
6. Click Configuration to see the options for configuring the camera.

Figure 250 The viewing software home page.

393
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Discovering and Setting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address

7. Select System > General settings. On the System General Settings

screen, enter the following information:
 If desired, change the Host name for the camera so that you can
easily identify it. This name displays at the top of the screen.
 Select to Keep current date and time, Synchronize with computer time,
set the time manually, or set the time automatically by entering the
IP address or domain name for an NTP server.

Figure 251 Enter a Host name and set the date if necessary.

8. Click Save.
9. Select Network > General settings. The Network General Settings
screen displays.

Figure 252 The Network General Settings screen.

394
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Discovering and Setting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address

10. On the Network General Settings screen, select Get IP address

automatically (DHCP) or Use fixed IP address.
If you select Use fixed IP address, configure the IPv4 or IPv6 address for
the camera. The factory defaults are:

IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway

10.10.10.11 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1

Notes:  The Primary DNS address is required in order to use the

email alert or dynamic DNS features.
 The Secondary DNS is optional. If provided, it is used if the
Primary DNS is unavailable.

Figure 253 If you select Use fixed IP address, configure the

IP address for the camera.

11. Click Save.

12. After saving the new camera configuration verify the settings by
attempting to access the camera at the new IP address (see Using a Web
Browser on page 180).
13. If the library has multiple cameras, repeat the steps in this section for
each camera. Make a record of the IP address for each camera and the
frame in which each camera is located.
14. Other camera settings can be configured if desired. See the Vivotek
FD8361 Fixed Dome Network Camera User’s Manual for information about
other available settings.
15. When you finish configuring the camera, close your browser to exit the
camera setup software.

395
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Testing the Robotics

16. If desired, edit the IP address for the BlueScale Vision camera icon on
the BlueScale user interface status bar.
a. From the library’s user interface, select Configuration > System. The
System Setup screen displays.
b. Scroll down until you see the Other Settings pane (see Figure 58 on
page 109).
c. Enter the camera’s updated IP address in the BlueScale Vision IP
Address field.
d. Click Save. The presence of a camera icon on the status bar indicates
that the IP address is configured.

TESTING THE ROBOTICS

Overview If you are experiencing problems that result in system messages
indicating that there is a problem with the library’s robotics (for example,
motion failures), Spectra Logic Technical Support may instruct you to
perform basic motion tests of the robotics. You only need to perform this
test if you are instructed to do so.
The Run All Motion Basic Tests feature described in this section performs
the same series of tests on the robotics as the “Run All Motion Basic Tests”
diagnostic accessed by selecting Maintenance > Diagnostics. When the
tests are started from the Robotics Status screen, they run in the
background; you can continue to use the BlueScale interface to perform
other tasks. When the tests are started from the Diagnostics screen, you
must wait until the tests are complete before you can perform other tasks.
The library runs all of the tests, even if one or more of the tests fail. When
all of the tests are complete, the library generates a system message that
contains the status for all the tests.
Emailing Test Results If Spectra Logic Technical Support requests the
results of the test, you can email the Robotic Motion trace to Spectra Logic
Technical Support (see Capturing Traces on page 378).
User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator
privileges can test the robotics.
Start the Tests
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. If necessary, select General > General Status to display the library’s
General Status screen.

396
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Testing the Robotics

3. Click Robotics to display the Robotics Status screen.

Figure 254 Click Robotics to display the Robotics Status

screen.

4. Click Start on the Tools tab to start the Run All Motion Basic Tests.
Note: After the tests start, you can use the BlueScale interface to
perform other tasks. You only need to return to this screen if you
need to stop the tests.

Figure 255 Start the Run All Motion Basic Tests diagnostic.

If you need to end the tests before they are completed, return to the
Robotics Status screen and click Stop. If you cancel the tests, the library
completes the current test, halts further testing, and redisplays the
Robotics Status screen.

Figure 256 Click Stop to terminate the diagnostic.

397
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Restoring the Library Configuration

5. When the last test completes, the library posts a system message
showing the diagnostic results. View the system messages to see the
test results (see Check and Respond to Messages on page 168).

Figure 257 A system message shows the results of the Run

All Motion Basic Tests diagnostics (tests aborted by user).

RESTORING THE LIBRARY CONFIGURATION

Overview If you have valid backups of the library’s configuration and the
MLM database saved on a USB device or sent as an email attachment, you can
use them to restore the library in the event of a disaster. You can also use these
backups to restore the library if problems require you to replace the LCM or
the memory card in the LCM. See Backing Up the Library Configuration on
page 150 for information about backing up the library configuration.
Notes:  All backup files of the library configuration include any
BlueScale encryption keys that were stored in the library at
the time the file was created.
 The backup of the MLM database also contains the DLM
database.

To restore the... Using the... See...

Library configuration, the MLM and Auto Configuration Restore From an Auto
DLM databases, and the BlueScale Save file, Configuration Save File on
encryption keys stored in the library page 399.
Library configuration and the Saved configuration Restore the Library Configuration
BlueScale encryption keys stored in the file, Using a Saved Configuration on
library page 404.
MLM and DLM databases MLM database Restore the MLM and DLM
backup file, Databases on page 406.
BlueScale encryption keys Exported key file, See the Spectra Tape Libraries
Encryption User Guide.

398
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Restoring the Library Configuration

User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator

privileges can restore the library configuration and the MLM and DLM
databases. To restore BlueScale encryption keys, the user must also be
logged in as an encryption user. See Understanding User Groups and
Security on page 104 and the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for
information.

Restore From an Auto Configuration Save File

The advanced utility called “Restore Library Configuration from Auto
Save” uses the configuration backup file that the library generates
automatically to restore the library configuration, the MLM and DLM
databases, and any BlueScale encryption keys that were stored in the
library when the backup file was created (see Use Automatic Backup of the
Library Configuration on page 151).

Important Before restoring your system using the automatically generated backup file, check
the time stamp included in the file name to ensure that you have the most current
file.

Important The library does not automatically save a backup when you make changes to any of
the library configuration settings other than those for partitions. Any changes
made since the last backup need to be entered manually.

The library automatically generates a configuration backup file whenever

any of the following events occurs:
 When you make a change to a partition, the library immediately
generates a configuration backup file and saves it to the memory card
in the LCM. If you configured the option to email the backup file, the
backup file is sent as an email attachment to the specified recipient (see
Enable Email for the Auto Configuration Save File on page 126).
 Changes to any of the library configuration settings other than those for
partitions are automatically saved in the configuration backup file that
the library creates each week. The timing for this backup is based on the
first time the automatic backup file is generated.
 If you cannot restore from the configuration backup file on the LCM
and you have manually generated backups of the library configuration
and the MLM database that are more current than the available
automatically generated configuration backup file that is saved
elsewhere, you may want to use those backups instead of the
automatically generated configuration backup file (see Restore the
Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration on page 404 and
Restore the MLM and DLM Databases on page 406).

399
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Restoring the Library Configuration

Restore the Library

Use the following steps to restore the library configuration, the MLM and
DLM databases, and BlueScale encryption keys that were stored in the
library, using an automatically generated configuration backup file.
Note: If you cannot use the automatically generated configuration
backup file stored in the library, locate an Auto Configuration
Save file that was saved to a USB device or sent as an email
attachment.

Important The library cycles power after restoring the previous configuration.

1. If you plan to restore using the zip file containing the automatically
generated configuration backup file that was sent as an email
attachment, use the following instructions to copy it to a USB device;
otherwise, skip to Step 2.
a. Create a folder called \autocfgsave on a USB device.
b. Copy the zip file you received in the email to the \autocfgsave
folder on the USB device.
c. Connect the USB device to a USB port on the LCM or the operator
panel (T950B only) and allow time for the device to mount before
continuing.
2. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
3. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance
Tools screen displays.
4. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
5. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.
6. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced
utilities.

400
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Restoring the Library Configuration

7. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Restore Library
Configuration from Auto Save. The screen refreshes to show the details
for the utility.

Figure 258 The Restore Library Configuration from Auto

Save utility.

8. Use the Select a configuration time stamp drop-down list to select the
configuration backup file you want to use. The automatically generated
configuration backup files are named <date-time>cfg.zip, where
<date-time> is the time stamp for when the file was created.
Unless you replace the LCM or its memory card, the first file listed is
the zipped configuration backup file stored on the LCM memory card.
Note: If available, the zipped configuration backup file stored on the LCM
memory card usually contains the most recently saved library
configuration information, as well as the MLM and DLM databases.
Check the time stamp in the filename to determine whether any
manually generated backup file you have is more recent.
9. Click Run Utility.

Important Before the library is restored using the configuration backup file on a USB device,
the library’s current configuration is saved to the USB device with a time stamp
indicating when the file was created. The library is then restored using the selected
configuration backup file on the USB device.
The USB device now contains one additional Auto Configuration Save file.

After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen appears, showing that the
configuration was restored. The library then performs a power- cycle
reset.

401
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Restoring the Library Configuration

10. Once the library begins its power-on sequence, remove the USB device
if necessary.

Important If you do not remove the USB device, the library power-on sequence fails.
If the library fails to boot, power off the library as described in Power Off the Library
on page 165. Once the library is powered off, remove the USB device and power on
the library as described in Power On the Library on page 163.

Restore Other Configuration Changes

The library does not immediately generate a configuration backup file
when you make changes to any of the library configuration settings other
than those for partitions. If you made any changes to the library
configuration after the automatically generated configuration backup file
you used to restore the library was generated, you need to repeat those
changes after completing the restore.
 If you have a manual backup of the library configuration that is more
current than the automatically generated configuration backup file you
used, you can use it to restore the updated configuration (see Restore
the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration on page 404).
 If you do not have a manual backup available, you need to restore the
following changes manually:
 If you made configuration changes after the creation date of the
automatically generated configuration backup file you used, you
need to use the options in the System Setup screen to repeat those
changes after the restore is complete.
 If you entered activation keys after the creation date of the
automatically generated configuration backup file you used, you
need to use the Option Enablement pane of the System
Configuration screen to re-enter those keys (see Enter Activation
Keys on page 112).

Update the Library Inventory

When you restore the configuration, any magazines that were imported
into a partition after the configuration backup file you used was generated
are not recognized as belonging to the partition. Instead, the library
notifies you that there are unused magazines in the free pool.
Use the following instructions to update the library inventory to reflect the
correct number of magazines assigned to the partition.
1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared
Library Services screen displays.
3. Click Edit for the partition to which the unassigned magazines should
belong.

402
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Restoring the Library Configuration

4. Click Next to advance through the partition configuration screens until

you reach the Chambers and Drives screen.

Figure 259 The Chambers and Drives screen.

5. Decrease the number of storage chambers assigned to the partition by

the number of missing magazines.
6. Click Next to advance through the remainder of the screens without
making any additional changes until you reach the Save Library
Configuration screen.
7. Click Save. The Share Library Services screen redisplays.
8. Repeat Step 2 on page 402 through Step 6, this time increasing the
number of storage chambers assigned to the partition to the original
number. The magazines in the free pool are reassigned to the partition.

Important If the library has multiple partitions and you imported magazines into all of the
partitions after the configuration backup file you used to restore the library was
generated, the magazines can potentially end up in the wrong partition. Carefully
examine the cartridge inventory for each partition. Export any wrongly assigned
magazines and reimport them into the correct partition.

403
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Restoring the Library Configuration

9. Review the information on the screen and confirm that all settings are
correct for this partition’s configuration.
 If the configuration information is correct, proceed to Step 10.
 If the configuration information is not correct:
 Click Cancel and configure the partition again from the
beginning.
— OR —
 Click Previous to move backward through the configuration
screens until you reach the settings that need correction. Make
any necessary corrections, then click Next to move forward
through the screens and return to the Save Partition screen.
10. Click Save. The library requires several minutes to store the
configuration information, after which the Shared Library Services
screen redisplays.

Restore the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration

Use the following steps if you want to restore the library from a
configuration backup file that was generated manually, as described in Use
Manual Backup of the Library Configuration on page 151.
Note: The manually-generated configuration backup files do not
include the MLM and DLM databases. If you also need to restore
the MLM and DLM databases, you must use a separately
generated backup of the MLM database (see Restore the MLM
and DLM Databases on page 406).
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance
Tools screen displays.
3. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
4. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.
5. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced
utilities.

404
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Restoring the Library Configuration

6. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select one of the
following, as applicable for your situation. The screen refreshes to show
the details for the selected restore utility.
Note: The Advanced Utilities screen lists the utilities in alphabetical
order. The following table lists the utilities in most-frequently-
used order.
Use this Restore To...
Option...
Restore Library Restore using an automatically generated configuration backup file that is
Configuration from stored on a USB device or LCM memory card (see Restore From an Auto
Auto Save Configuration Save File on page 399).
Note: The automatically generated configuration backup file contains the
library configuration, as well as the MLM and DLM databases.
Restore Library Restore a library configuration file previously stored on a USB device.
Configuration from Note: Before starting this procedure, insert the USB device into a USB port on
USB the LCM or the operator panel (T950B only) and allow time for the device to
mount.
Upload Backup Upload a configuration backup file to a temporary location in the library from a
Configuration computer that has network access to the library.
Note: Upload Backup Configuration is only available when you access the
library through the BlueScale web interface.
1. Click Upload Backup Configuration at the top of the screen.

2. When the upload is complete, you must then run the Restore Library
Configuration from Uploaded File utility to restore the library configuration.
Restore Library Complete the restore process after using Upload Backup Configuration to upload
Configuration from a saved configuration file from a computer.
Uploaded File Note: This option is used in conjunction with Upload Backup Configuration,
which must be run first.

7. Click Run Utility.

Important Before the library is restored using a saved configuration file on the USB device, the
current configuration is saved to the USB device with a time stamp indicating when
the file was created. The library is then restored using the selected auto saved
configuration. The USB device now contains one additional configuration file.

After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen appears, showing that the
configuration file was uploaded and/or the configuration restored. The
library then performs a power- cycle reset.

405
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Restoring the Library Configuration

8. Once the library begins its power-on sequence, remove the USB device
if necessary.

Important If you do not remove the USB device, the library power-on sequence fails.
If the library fails to boot, power off the library as described in Power Off the Library
on page 165. Once the library is powered off, remove the USB device and power on
the library as described in Power On the Library on page 163.

9. If you imported magazines into empty chambers in a partition’s storage

pool after you generated the backup configuration file, see Restore
Other Configuration Changes on page 402.
10. If necessary, restore the MLM and DLM databases as described in
Restore the MLM and DLM Databases on page 406.

Restore the MLM and DLM Databases

Use the following steps to restore the MLM database from a previously
saved backup that was created using the Save MLM Database utility (see
Back Up the MLM and DLM Databases on page 330).

The Restore MLM Database from USB utility overwrites the existing MLM and DLM
Caution databases with the versions previously saved on the USB device.

Notes:  Restoring the MLM database also restores the DLM database.
 You can also restore the MLM and DLM databases using an
automatically generated library configuration backup file
(see Restore From an Auto Configuration Save File on
page 399).
1. Use your storage management software to stop all backup or restore
operations on the library.

Important Restoring the MLM and DLM databases requires the library to be idle.

2. If you plan to restore using an MLM database backup file that was sent
as an email attachment, use the following instructions to copy the file to
a USB device; otherwise, skip to Step 5.
a. Create a folder called SavedMLMDB at the root of a USB device.
b. Copy the xlminfo<date-time>.db or cminfo_<date-time>.zdt
file to the SavedMLMDB folder on the USB device.
3. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
4. Stop any PreScan or PostScan operations that are currently running (see
Stop the Discovery Process on page 310 and Pause the PostScan Process
on page 319).

406
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 12 — Library Troubleshooting Restoring the Library Configuration

5. Plug the USB device containing the MLM database backup file into a
USB port on the LCM or the operator panel (T950B only) and allow
time for the device to mount before continuing.
6. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance
Tools screen displays.
7. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
8. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.
9. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced
utilities.
10. Scroll down and select Restore MLM Database from USB. The screen
refreshes to show the details for the utility.

Figure 260 Select the Restore MLM Database from USB utility.

11. Use the Select a restore time stamp drop-down list to select the
xlminfo<date-time>.db or cminfo_<date-time>.zdt file
containing the MLM database backup you want to use for the restore.
12. Click Run Utility.
After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays, showing that the
database was restored.
Note: After an MLM database restore, the Discover Media button on the
Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen (Maintenance >
MLM) may be active even if all cartridges have been discovered.

407
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 CHAPTER 13
Drive Troubleshooting
This chapter describes procedures for dealing with the most common
problems encountered with the library’s drives. Try these troubleshooting
procedures before you open a support ticket with Spectra Logic Technical
Support. If you are unable to resolve the problem yourself, open a support
ticket (see Opening a Support Ticket on page 507). For additional
troubleshooting information, refer to the drive documentation (see LTO
Ultrium Tape Drives on page 20 and TS11xx Technology Drives on
page 20).
Note: The library must be under warranty or have a valid service
contract in order to qualify for support (see Service Contract
Extension on page 529 to learn about service contracts).

Topic
Resetting a Drive page 409
Using a Global Spare Drive page 410
Use the Global Spare Drive page 411
Undo the Global Spare Drive page 414
Retrieving a Drive Trace or Drive Dump File page 415
Use the Drive Traces Button page 415
Use the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to page 417
Retrieve a Drive Dump
Use the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump Utility page 418
Troubleshooting Drives page 420
Identify the Problem page 420
Interpret the Detailed Drive Information page 424
Using DLM to Test a Drive page 437
Requirements for Using the Wizard page 437
Run the DLM Drive Health Verification Wizard page 439

408
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Resetting a Drive

RESETTING A DRIVE
Overview You may occasionally need to reset a drive as part of a firmware
upgrade or for troubleshooting.

Important Drives can be reset using the Reset button on the Drives screen or using the Power
Drive On/Off utility. This utility should ONLY be run on a drive that is not assigned to
a partition. Do not use the advanced Power Drive on/off utility to reset a drive that
is assigned to a partition. Running this utility on a drive assigned to a partition
disables the host interface.

User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator

privileges can use the BlueScale software to reset a drive.
Perform the Reset The following steps describe how to reset a drive using
the Reset button on the Drives screen.
1. Determine the BlueScale identifier for the drive you want to reset.
Note: Drives are identified according to their physical location in the
library. For example, FR1/DBA2/DRV4 refers to the upper right
drive in DBA2 of frame 1. See Drive Identifiers on page 67 for
information about identifiers.
2. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
3. Select Configuration > DLM (or Drives) to display the Drives screen.

Figure 261 Click Reset on the Drives screen.

4. Identify the drive that needs to be reset and click Reset. The library
power cycles the drive.
When the drive completes its POST and becomes ready, a status screen
displays, showing that the drive was reset.
Note: When the drive resets, the library posts system messages that the
drive disappeared and reappeared.
5. The drive is ready for use.

409
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Using a Global Spare Drive

USING A GLOBAL SPARE DRIVE

Overview The Global Spare option lets you remotely replace a failed drive
using a drive that is already installed in the library. Using a Global Spare
allows you to continue your backup operations and replace the failed drive
the next time you are physically present at the library.
Usage Requirements Before you can use the Global Spare option, the
following requirements must be met.
 One or more Global Spare drives must already be configured in the
partition where the failed drive is located (see Assign Global Spare
Drives on page 202).

Important The drives that are configured as Global Spares must be connected to the same
Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric (SAN) as the drives they replace. If they are
not connected to the SAN, they are not accessible to the application software.
After the Global Spare is activated, you may need to reconfigure your switch to
access the spare drive.

 The failed drive must be idle, with no pending backup or restore

operations. Backups to the other drives in the partition can continue.
Note: You cannot use a Global Spare drive to replace a failed drive
while the library is actively running the Drive Firmware Update
wizard in the partition.
Cartridge Inventory If the failed drive contains a cartridge when it is
replaced by the Global Spare, that cartridge is removed from the partition’s
inventory. If you are able to remove the cartridge from the failed drive after
you remove it from the library, reimport the cartridge (see Importing into a
Storage or Cleaning Partition).
PostScan Requirements If a partition is configured to use either FullScan
or QuickScan using Global Spares, keep in mind that the PostScan process
“owns” the Global Spare drive it is using until it processes all of the
cartridges in the PostScan queue for the partition. As a result, a Global
Spare drive that is being used for PostScan is not available for use as a
spare.
If all of the Global Spare drives assigned to the partition are in use by the
MLM PostScan process, you must pause PostScan to make a Global Spare
drive available, as described in Pause the PostScan Process on page 319.

410
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Using a Global Spare Drive

Storage Management Software Guidelines Keep in mind the following

storage management software guidelines when using a Global Spare.
 Backup Exec™ software running on a Windows server — After
sparing or unsparing a drive, you must restart the Backup Exec Device
and Media Service for the software to function properly with the spared
drive.
 General guidelines — In a few rare cases, your backup may fail if a
cartridge is loaded into any of the other drives in the partition at the
same time that the library is in the process of activating a Global Spare
drive for use (as described in this section). Most applications retry the
backup operation, but some fail it. If your backup operation fails, wait
for the library to complete the Global Spare activation and retry the
backup.
User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator
privileges can activate or reclaim a Global Spare drive.

Use the Global Spare Drive

Follow these steps to use a Global Spare drive as a temporary replacement
for a failed drive.
1. If necessary, use your storage management software to stop any
attempts to read from or write to the failed drive. Refer to your storage
management software documentation for instructions.
2. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
3. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display the
Shared Library Services screen.

Figure 262 Click Global Spare to begin the process of

replacing a partition drive with a Global Spare drive.

411
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Using a Global Spare Drive

4. Click Global Spare for the partition that contains the failed drive to
display the Global Spare Usage screen.
Note: The Global Spare button is not present if one or more drives are
not configured as Global Spares for the partition (see Assign
Global Spare Drives on page 202).

Figure 263 Click Use Spare for the drive you want to replace.

5. Click Use Spare next to the drive for which you want to substitute an
available Global Spare drive. Wait for the library to complete the
sparing operation.
Notes:  When you select the drive to replace, the BlueScale software
disables the selected drive and configures an available Global
Spare drive to report the same WWN and serial number as
the drive it is replacing. The failed drive can then be removed
and replaced the next time you are physically at the library.
 If you have more than one available Global Spare drive, the
library automatically selects a drive in no particular order.

412
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Using a Global Spare Drive

6. If desired, select Configuration > DLM (or Drives) to view the Drives
screen. The drive icons on the screen change to indicate the failed drive
and the Global Spare that replaced it.

Failed drive

Available
Global Spare
drive

Global Spare
replacing
failed drive

Figure 264 Check the Drives screen to confirm that the failed drive was
replaced by a Global Spare drive.

7. If necessary, use your storage management software to bring the Global

Spare drive that replaced the failed drive online. Refer to your storage
management software documentation for instructions.

Important Replace the failed drive as soon as possible and reconfigure the spare drive to
return it to a Global Spare configuration.

Note: If your storage management software cannot access the Global

Spare drive, confirm that the drive is properly connected to the
same SAN as the failed drive. You may also need to reconfigure
the Fibre Channel switch.

413
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Using a Global Spare Drive

Undo the Global Spare Drive

After you physically replace the failed drive (see Replace a Drive on
page 503), use the following steps to begin using the replacement drive and
return the Global Spare to the pool of available spare drives.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. Use your storage management software to prepare the Global Spare
drive. Refer to your storage management software documentation for
information.
a. Stop all storage management software activity to the Global Spare
drive that replaced the failed drive.
b. If necessary, use your storage management software to eject the
cartridge from the drive and return it to its slot.
c. Take the Global Spare drive offline.
3. When the Global Spare drive is empty and offline, select
Configuration > Partitions on the toolbar menu to display the Shared
Library Services screen.
4. Click Global Spare for the partition that contained the failed drive to
display the Global Spare Usage screen.

Figure 265 Click Undo Spare to begin using the

replacement drive you installed.

5. Click Undo Spare next to the drive you physically replaced.

The BlueScale software stops substituting the Global Spare for the drive
it replaced and reconfigures the replacement drive back into the
partition. The Global Spare is then available to be used again, as needed.
6. Use your storage management software to bring the newly installed
drive online and resume backup operations. Refer to your storage
management software documentation for instructions.

414
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Retrieving a Drive Trace or Drive Dump File

RETRIEVING A DRIVE TRACE OR DRIVE DUMP FILE

Spectra Logic uses drive traces and drive dumps to help diagnose
problems with a drive. A drive trace is a set of logs collected by the library
to help diagnose drive errors. A drive dump is a file generated by the drive
when it encounters an error state. You only need to retrieve a drive trace or
drive dump when instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support.
There are three tools for collecting drive traces and dumps. The best tool to
use depends on the type of file requested and the ability to download and
install ITDT.
 To retrieve a drive trace from LTO-5 and later generation drives, Use
the Drive Traces Button.
 To retrieve a drive dump, if possible, Use the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool
(ITDT) to Retrieve a Drive Dump on page 417.
 To retrieve a drive dump when you cannot use ITDT, Use the BlueScale
Retrieve Drive Dump Utility on page 418.

Use the Drive Traces Button

Drive traces for LTO-5 and later generation drives can be generated and
retrieved using the Drive Traces button on the Drives screen.
Note: The Drive Traces button is not supported for TS11xx technology
drives.

Before You Begin

Before you begin generating a drive trace using the Drive Traces button,
make sure you fulfill the following prerequisites.
Emailing Results If you plan to email the drive trace file directly from the
library, make sure that you set up the intended email recipient as a mail
user (see Configure Mail Users on page 124).
Saving Results to a USB Device If you plan to save the drive trace file to a
USB device, you must connect the USB device to one of the USB ports on
the LCM or the operator panel (T950B only) and allow time for the device
to mount before you click Drive Traces (see Using a USB Device on
page 183).
Note: If a USB device is not connected to the library, the option to save
the drive trace file to a USB device is not available. You can,
however, still email the trace file or download the file.
User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator
privileges can use the BlueScale software to retrieve a drive trace file.

415
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Retrieving a Drive Trace or Drive Dump File

Generate the Trace

1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. Select Configuration > DLM (or Drives) to display the Drives screen.

Figure 266 Click Drive Traces on the Drives screen.

3. Click Drive Traces. The Generate Drive Traces screen displays.

Figure 267 The Generate Drive Traces screen.

416
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Retrieving a Drive Trace or Drive Dump File

4. Select what you want to do with the drive trace file.

Option Description
Mail results to Sends the drive trace file to a previously configured email recipient. Use the
drop-down list to select the recipient for the trace file. Only previously
configured email recipients are listed. To send the email with the attached trace
file to someone who is not listed, exit the utility, configure that person as an email
recipient (see Configure Mail Users on page 124), and then run the utility again.
Note: Do not use the default [email protected] email recipient.
Spectra Logic does not save emailed drive trace files unless they are specifically
requested for troubleshooting.
Save results to USB Saves the drive trace file to the USB device connected to the LCM.
Note: This option is only available if you connected a USB device to one of the
USB ports on the LCM before clicking Drive Traces.
Save results to local Downloads the drive trace file to your local computer. Use your web browser’s
drive download features to save the file.
Note: This option is only available if you are accessing the library through the
BlueScale web interface.

5. Select the drives from which you want to generate traces. The drive
trace file contains a subdirectory for each drive.
6. Click Go. The wizard generates the traces and saves or sends the drive
trace file as selected.

Use the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to Retrieve a Drive Dump
Download ITDT and its related documentation directly from IBM's Fix
Central website. For information about navigating IBM's website and
downloading the version of ITDT that is appropriate for your operating
system, log on to the portal (see Accessing the Technical Support Portal on
page 504), open the Knowledge Base, and search for KBA-01768,
Downloading and installing ITDT (IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool).

Important Use the latest version of ITDT to gather a drive dump from the latest generation of
drives.

1. Log into IBM’s Fix Central website at https://ibm.com/support/

fixcentral using your individual IBM ID.
2. Select the following options:
 Product Group = System Storage
 Select from System Storage = Tape systems
 Select from Tape Systems = Tape drivers and software
 Select from Tape drivers and software = IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool
(ITDT)
 Platform = Select your operating system from the drop-down list
and click Continue.

417
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Retrieving a Drive Trace or Drive Dump File

3. On the next page, select the version of ITDT that you want to
download. If desired, you can select multiple versions.
Note: If you are unsure which version to select, click Show Fix Details
to see additional information.
4. Click Continue. Choose one of the following methods to download the
selected ITDT installation files:
 Download using your browser (HTTP)
 Download using bulk FTP
 Download using Download Director
5. Download and read the ITDT documentation for assistance in using
and setting up the program.
6. Refer to the ITDT documentation for information about using ITDT to
retrieve drive dump files. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support if
you need assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

Use the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump Utility

If for some reason you cannot install and use ITDT in your environment,
use the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump utility to collect the dump file from
a drive.
Note: The Retrieve Drive Dump Utility is not supported for TS11xx
technology drives.

Before You Begin

Before you begin the utility, make sure you fulfill the following
prerequisites.
Insert USB Device This utility saves the drive dump file to a USB device
connected to the LCM or the operator panel (T950B only). You must plug
the USB device into one of the USB ports on the LCM or the operator panel
(T950B only) and allow time for the device to mount before you access the
Utilities screen (see Using a USB Device on page 183).
User Privilege Requirements Only a user with superuser or administrator
privileges can use the BlueScale software to retrieve a drive dump file.

Run the Utility

1. Determine the BlueScale identifier for the drive from which you want to
retrieve the dump file.
Note: Drives are identified according to their physical location in the
library. For example: FR1/DBA2/DRV4 refers to the upper right
drive in DBA2 of frame 1. Refer to Drive Identifiers on page 67
for information about identifiers.

418
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Retrieving a Drive Trace or Drive Dump File

2. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator

privileges.
3. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance
Tools screen displays.
4. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
5. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.
6. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced
utilities.
7. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Retrieve Drive
Dump. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility.

Figure 268 The Retrieve Drive Dump utility.

8. Select any combination of the check boxes at the top of the screen to
choose where to send the utility results text.
Note: The check boxes indicate where to send the utility results text
(pass or fail), not where to send the drive dump file. The drive
dump file is always saved to the USB device. Do not send the
utility results to the default [email protected] email
recipient.
9. Use the drop-down list to select the drive from which you want to
retrieve the dump.
10. Click Run Utility to retrieve the dump file from the selected drive.

Important Do not use the drive from which you are retrieving the dump file for any other
purpose while the utility runs.

When the dump is saved, the Utility Results screen displays, showing
that the utility ran successfully.

419
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

TROUBLESHOOTING DRIVES
The following sections provide information about troubleshooting drive
problems.

Identify the Problem

1. When you encounter problems with drive operation while using the
library’s BlueScale user interface, begin troubleshooting by checking the
following:
Check... To...
System messages Review any system messages that were posted by the library (see Check and
Respond to Messages on page 168) and take any action described in the
message(s).
Error sense codes Look up the definition of an error sense code referenced in a system message
using the Spectra Tape Libraries SCSI Developer Guide.
Drive Find detailed troubleshooting information for the drive. See Additional
documentation Publications on page 19 for information about obtaining drive documentation.
Technical Support Find information about the most current version of BlueScale software and
Portal additional service and support tools. You can access the Technical Support
portal at support.spectralogic.com.
Note: Accessing many of the tools available on the Technical Support portal
requires creating a user account. See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on
page 504 for instructions.
 Check the options under the Documentation and Knowledge Base menus for
additional troubleshooting information.
 Check the Service & Contracts menu to view information about the warranty
and service options available for your library as well as the Spectra Certified
Media warranty.

420
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

2. Display the Drive Details screen for the drive you suspect is having
problems and review the information about the drive (see View Drive
Status Information on page 175). Use the following table and the
information in Interpret the Detailed Drive Information on page 423 to
determine how to proceed.
Detail Field Description
POST Status Indicates whether the drive successfully completed its power-on self-tests (POST).
When a drive is power-cycled or reset, it automatically runs self-diagnostic tests
(POST), which check the drive’s memory and sensors, performs motor and
servo tests, and tests the data channels, to make sure that the drive is
functioning within normal parameters.
Cleaning Status Indicates whether the drive requires cleaning (see Cleaning a Drive on page 472).
LED Status Corresponds to the status LED on the drive. See Interpreting the Status LED
Information on page 424 for detailed information.
Display Character Corresponds to the single-character display (SCD) on an LTO drive or the
or Display Message display message (MCD) on a TS11xx technology drive. See Interpreting the SCD
and MCD Codes, beginning on page 424 for detailed information.
Cartridge Status Indicates whether a cartridge is currently loaded in the drive, tape motion, and
other information related to reading and writing data.

3. If you successfully operated the storage management software and

library in the past, but are now experiencing problems reading and
writing data, check the following:

Check this... If...

Write-protect You are having trouble writing data to a cartridge. Make sure that the cartridge
switch setting is write-enabled (see Preparing Cartridges for Use on page 232) before
importing it into the library.
Cartridge age A tape cartridge was in use for a long time or if it was used frequently, try using
a new cartridge.
Drive cleaning The drive indicates that a cleaning is required. Follow the instructions in
Cleaning a Drive on page 472 to clean the drive.
Note: If the storage partition is associated with a cleaning partition and the
cleaning partition contains a usable cleaning cartridge, drives are automatically
cleaned whenever necessary.

421
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

4. If you experience problems accessing the drives in the library from the
storage management software on the host, check the following:

Check... To...
Interface Make sure that the Fibre Channel connections to the drives are secure.
connections Important: After you power on the library and the Fibre Channel arbitrated
loop or fabric completes its initialization, avoid disconnecting the Fibre
Channel drives from the network. If you need to disconnect a drive from the
network, use the utility provided with your switch or hub to bypass the
affected ports before breaking the connection. The bypass sets the port to a
non-participating state on the network. After you reconnect the drive to the
library, use the utility to return the port to a participating state.
Software Make sure that your host application is installed and configured correctly (refer
installation to your software documentation). Pay special attention to steps that describe
how to configure the software for use with the drive(s).
Drive addressing Make sure that the drive address configured in the host application is the same
one you specified when you configured the partition containing the drive (see
Creating a Storage Partition on page 196).
Host and software Determine whether a device driver is required. Some operating environments
requirements require you to install device drivers before the application software can
correctly communicate with the drives. When you update the drive firmware,
you may also need to update the device driver for the drive. See Updating
Drive Device Drivers on page 501 for instructions.

422
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

Interpret the Detailed Drive Information

The Drive Details screen includes information about the drive and drive
sled firmware versions, the location-based Spectra serial number, and the
manufacturer’s serial number. It also shows additional detailed status
information, including the state of the status LED and the single-character
display (SCD) for an LTO drive or the display message (MCD) for a TS11xx
technology drive. See View Drive Status Information on page 175 for
information about accessing this screen.

Figure 269 Use the information on the Drive Details screen to

help troubleshoot drive problems.

The following sections describe how to use information on the Drive

Details screen to help troubleshoot drive problems.

Responding to the Drive Cleaning Notification

Whenever a tape is loaded or unloaded, the read/write heads are
physically cleaned by a brush located within the drive. However, after
reading and writing a large amount of data (the exact amount varies by
drive type and generation) or if read or write errors occur, the drive
requests to be cleaned with a cleaning cartridge. The request is made by
sending a Tape Alert message to the host, and displaying a C on the SCD
for an LTO drive or CLEAN* on the MCD for a TS11xx technology drive.
The notification is also posted to the library’s Drive Details screen
(Figure 269 on page 423) and the DLM drive health icon for the drive
changes to yellow (see Using the Drive Health Icons on page 339 for
additional information).
If needed, clean the drive as described in Cleaning a Drive on page 472.
Use only a certified cleaning cartridge. To order cleaning cartridges, see
Media and Media Accessories on page 527.

423
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

Interpreting the Status LED Information

The Drive Details screen shows the state of the drive’s status LED. The LED
states are the same for all generations of drives. Refer to the tape drive
documentation about interpreting the LED (see LTO Ultrium Tape Drives
on page 20 or TS11xx Technology Drives on page 20).
Notes:  The LED status information shown on the Drive Details
screen always indicates that the LED is off for LTO-4 Fibre
Channel drives running firmware version 8940 or later, all
firmware versions for LTO-5 and later generation Fibre
Channel drives, and all firmware versions for TS11xx
technology drives. If you need to determine the state of the
LED, use the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT). Download
and install the software as described in Use the IBM Tape
Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to Retrieve a Drive Dump on
page 417.
 Make sure you install ITDT on a computer that is connected
to the same SAN as the drives in the library.
 For TS11xx technology drives, use the MCD to determine the
status of the drive (see Interpreting the SCD and MCD
Codes).
Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support if you need assistance (see
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

Interpreting the SCD and MCD Codes

Overview The Drive Details screen displays the state of the single-
character display (SCD) on LTO drives (see LTO SCD Codes on page 426)
or the display message (MCD) on TS11xx technology drives (see TS11xx
Technology MCD Codes on page 432).

Figure 270 An LTO drive’s SCD information on the Drive

Details screen.

424
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

Permanent Errors If the drive detects a permanent error and displays an

SCD or MCD error code other than zero (0), it automatically performs a
drive dump. If you force a drive dump, the existing drive dump is
overwritten and data is lost. You might also lose the dump data if you turn
off power to the drive. See Retrieving a Drive Trace or Drive Dump File on
page 415 for information about retrieving the trace data or dump from the
drive.
Notes:  Some of the solutions listed in the following table include
testing the drive. See Using DLM to Test a Drive on page 437
for instructions.
 In some cases, additional tests using ITDT are required.
Download and install the software as described in Use the
IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to Retrieve a Drive Dump
on page 417. Refer to the ITDT documentation for
information about using this utility. Contact Spectra Logic
Technical Support if you need assistance (see Contacting
Spectra Logic on page 7).
Multiple Errors If multiple errors occur, the code with highest priority
(lowest number) displays first. Once corrected, the code with the next
highest priority displays, until none remain.
Note: The drive may need to be reset in order to clear the error code.
WORM Media LTO-4 and later generation drives and TS11xx technology
drives support using WORM media. To learn more about WORM media,
see WORM Media on page 556.
The following conditions cause WORM media errors to occur:
 Information in the servo manufacturer’s word on the tape must match
information from the cartridge MAM. If it does not match, the drive’s
SCD displays error code 7.
 Inserting a WORM tape cartridge into a drive that is not compatible
with WORM media causes the cartridge to be treated as an
unsupported medium. The drive’s SCD displays error code 7.

425
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

LTO SCD Codes

SCD Code Descriptions for LTO-4 and Later Generations The following
table shows the SCD codes and, where applicable the associated DLM
Drive Health icon, for LTO-4 and later generations of LTO drives. See the
table on page 340 for a description of what the Drive Health icons indicate.
For TS11xx technology MCD codes, see TS11xx Technology MCD Codes on
page 432.
Note: The single-character display does not use the characters B, D, G,
I, O and Z to prevent misinterpretation as the characters 8, 0, 6, 2,
and 1.

Code DLM Cause and Solution

Health
Icon
0 No error occurred. No action is required.
The power was cycled or diagnostics finished with no errors.
1 Cooling problem.
The recommended operating temperature was exceeded. Perform one or more of
the following:
 Make sure that the cooling fan is rotating and is quiet.
 Remove any blockage that prevents air from flowing freely through the drive.
 Make sure that the operating temperature and airflow is within the specified
range (refer to the tape drive documentation for these specifications).
If the operating temperature is within the specified range and the problem
persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic
on page 7).
Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the drive or when
you place it in maintenance mode.
2 Power problem.
The externally supplied power is approaching the specified voltage limits (the
drive is still operating) or is outside the specified voltage limits (the drive is not
operating).
If the problem is only exhibited by one drive in the library:
 Make sure that the library’s power connector is properly seated.
 If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the drive or when
you place it in maintenance mode.
If the problem is exhibited by multiple drives in the library:
The power throughout the library needs to be checked. Contact Spectra Logic
Technical Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

426
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

Code DLM Cause and Solution

Health
Icon
3 Firmware problem.
Important: Do not force a dump; one already exists.

The drive determined that a firmware error occurred. Perform the following:
1. If possible, use ITDT to collect the existing drive dump (see Use the IBM Tape
Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to Retrieve a Drive Dump on page 417).
If you cannot use ITDT, use the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump utility (see Use
the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump Utility on page 418).
2. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 409), then retry the operation
that produced the error.
3. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support and send the
drive dump to them, if requested (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the drive or when
you place it in maintenance mode.
4 Firmware or drive problem.
Important: Do not force a dump; one already exists.

A firmware or drive hardware failure occurred. Perform the following:

1. If possible, use ITDT to collect the existing drive dump (see Use the IBM Tape
Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to Retrieve a Drive Dump on page 417).
If you cannot use ITDT, use the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump utility (see Use
the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump Utility on page 418).
2. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 409), then retry the operation
that produced the error.
3. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support and send the
drive dump to them, if requested (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the drive or when
you place it in maintenance mode.

427
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

Code DLM Cause and Solution

Health
Icon
5 Drive hardware problem.
Do not force a dump; one already exists.

The drive determined that a tape path or read/write error occurred. To prevent
damage to the drive or tape cartridge, the drive does not allow you to insert a
cartridge if the current cartridge was successfully ejected. Perform the following:
1. If possible, use ITDT to collect the existing drive dump (see Use the IBM Tape
Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to Retrieve a Drive Dump on page 417).
If you cannot use ITDT, use the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump utility (see Use
the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump Utility on page 418).
2. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 409), then retry the operation
that produced the error.
3. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support and send the
drive dump to them, if requested (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the drive or when
you place it in maintenance mode.
6 Drive or media error.
See Chapter 9 – Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management, beginning
on page 289 for information about using MLM to determine the health of the
cartridge. See Chapter 10 – Using Drive Lifecycle Management, beginning on
page 336 for information about using DLM to determine the health of the drive.
The drive determined that an error occurred, but it cannot isolate the cause.
Ensure the tape cartridge is the correct media type:
 See LTO Read/Write Compatibility on page 555 for information about which
media is compatible with each LTO drive generation.
 Drive does not accept an expired cleaning cartridge.
 Drive does not accept a WORM cartridge when running diagnostic tests in
Maintenance Mode.
 Drive does not write over existing data sets on a WORM cartridge. Ensure you
are appending data sets on WORM media rather than attempting to write over
existing data sets.

428
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

Code DLM Cause and Solution

Health
Icon
6 (cont.) Confirm that the cartridge is the correct media type. If it is, determine whether
the problem is associated with writing or reading data to a single cartridge or
multiple cartridges.
Problems Writing Data on a Cartridge with a Known Barcode
Retry the operation with a different cartridge.
 If the operation succeeds, the original cartridge was defective. If possible, copy
data from the defective cartridge and set the original cartridge aside. If additional
tests confirm that the cartridge was the source of the error, you can discard it.
 If the operation fails and another drive is available, insert the original
cartridge into the other drive and retry the operation.
 If the operation fails, discard the defective cartridge.
 If the operation succeeds, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test
the original drive (see Using DLM to Test a Drive on page 437).
 If the drive fails the DLM drive test, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
 If the drive passes the DLM drive test, the error was temporary.
 If the operation fails and another drive is not available, use the Drive Health
Verification wizard to test the drive.
 If the drive fails the DLM drive test, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support.
 If the drive passes the DLM drive test, retry the operation to determine whether
the error was temporary. If the operation fails again, discard the cartridge.
Problems Reading Data on a Cartridge with a Known Barcode
Perform one of the following procedures:
 If another drive is available, insert the cartridge into the other drive and retry
the operation.
 If the operation fails, discard the defective cartridge.
 If the operation succeeds, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test
the original drive (see Using DLM to Test a Drive on page 437).
 If the drive fails the DLM drive test, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
 If the diagnostics succeed, the error was temporary.
 If another drive is not available, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to
test the drive.
 If the drive fails the DLM drive test, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support.
 If the drive passes the DLM drive test, retry the operation to determine whether
the error was temporary. If the operation fails again, discard the cartridge.
Problems with One or More Cartridges with Unknown Barcodes
If the problem occurs with multiple tape cartridges or if you do not know the
tape cartridge’s barcode, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the
drive (see Using DLM to Test a Drive on page 437).
 If the drive fails the DLM drive test, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
 If the drive passes the DLM drive test, the problem is not related to the drive.

429
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

Code DLM Cause and Solution

Health
Icon
7 High probability of media error. An error occurred because of a faulty tape
cartridge.
 Ensure the tape cartridge is the correct media type:
 See LTO Read/Write Compatibility on page 555 for information about which
media is compatible with each LTO drive generation.
 Drive does not accept an expired cleaning cartridge.
 Drive does not accept a WORM cartridge when running diagnostic tests in
Maintenance Mode.
 Drive does not write over existing data sets on a WORM cartridge. Ensure
you are appending data sets on WORM media rather than attempting to
write over existing data sets.
 If another drive is available, insert the cartridge into the other drive and retry
the operation.
 If the operation fails, discard the defective cartridge.
 If the operation succeeds, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test
the original drive (see Using DLM to Test a Drive on page 437).
 If the drive fails the DLM drive test, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
 If the diagnostics succeed, the error was temporary.
 If another drive is not available, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to
test the drive.
 If the drive fails the DLM drive test, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support.
 If the drive passes the DLM drive test, retry the operation to determine whether
the error was temporary. If the operation fails again, discard the cartridge.
Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the drive or when
you place it in maintenance mode.
8 SCSI interface or Fibre Channel failure.
A failure occurred in the drive hardware or in the SCSI bus. The error code clears
after 10 seconds if the error does not recur. If the error persists, contact Spectra
Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
9 RS-422 error.
The drive determined that a drive interface or library interface failure occurred.
The error code clears after 10 seconds if the error does not recur. If the error
persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic
on page 7).

430
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

Code DLM Cause and Solution

Health
Icon
A Degraded operation.
The drive determined that a problem occurred that degraded the operation of
the drive, but it did not restrict continued use.
The drive is usable, though the single-character display (SCD) continues to
indicate an error and the status light flashes amber. The error code may clear
when you cycle power to the drive.
1. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 409) to clear the error code.
2. Confirm that the drive is using the current firmware version (see Updating
Drive Firmware on page 479) and update the firmware if necessary.
3. Use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the drive (see Using DLM to
Test a Drive on page 437).
4. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
C Cleaning indicator.
The drive needs to be cleaned, or is in the process of loading the cleaning
cartridge or being cleaned. The error code clears when you clean the drive and
unload the cleaning cartridge. See Cleaning a Drive on page 472 for instructions.
d Two drives on the Fibre Channel loop have the same Arbitrated Loop Physical
Address.
E The Fibre Channel port connection is off-line.

e The drive detected a configuration error during an encryption operation.

1. Make sure that you are using LTO-4 or later generation data cartridges.
Encryption is only supported for LTO-4 and later generation cartridges.
2. Retry the encryption operation with the suspect cartridge in another
encryption enabled drive.
3. Replace the cartridge if you see the same problem in multiple drives.
F Drive Fiber Cable error.
The Fibre Channel drive does not detect light or a related diagnostic failed to
detect light through the fiber optic connection to the drive.
 Verify the fiber cables and connections between the drive and the host are the
correct type and are working properly. Verify all equipment and devices are
powered ON.
 Verify the configuration settings for the drive are set correctly and are
compatible with the topology of the network.
 Verify that the host fiber adapter and port are working properly and are
compatible with the topology of the network.
 Verify that the Fibre Channel switch ports are working properly and are
compatible with the topology of the network.
 Verify that the fiber cable is connected to Port A (0) of the drive.
 Verify that Port A (0) on the Fibre Channel drive is working properly by using
ITDT to run the “Function Code 6: Run Host Interface Wrap Test.”

431
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

Code DLM Cause and Solution

Health
Icon
J Incompatible Media.
The drive determined that incompatible media was loaded into the drive.
P The cartridge in the drive is write-protected. The storage management software
cannot write data to a write-protected cartridge. The library cannot update the
cartridge MAM when the cartridge is write-protected.
u Firmware update is in progress.
b, c, H, h, N/A Reserved or not actively in use, or no error or message assigned.
n, o There may be a problem with the SCD. Reset the drive and determine whether
all segments on the SCD are lit.
 If they are all lit, confirm that the drive is using the current firmware version
(see Updating Drive Firmware on page 479) and update the firmware if
necessary.
 If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
… N/A The message display lost communication with the drive. This message appears
on Line 2 of the message display. The three dots may occasionally display during
normal processing.

TS11xx Technology MCD Codes

MCD Code Descriptions for TS11xx Technology Drives A variety of
messages that indicate the current drive status can be displayed on the
drive’s 8-character panel. In the case of an error, a Failure ID message is
displayed. A Failure ID has the format FIDx yy, where x indicates the
severity of the failure and yy indicates the error code. The following tables
shows the status codes for TS11xx technology drives. The table on page 434
shows the Failure ID Code descriptions for these drives.

Status Code Description

<blank> The following are possible reasons for the display to be blank:
 The drive is not powered on
 The drive is ready
 There is no status
 No cartridge is mounted
<all 8 elements The reset/power-on process is in progress. The diagnostic test is verifying that
fully lit> all elements are working.

432
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

Status Code Description

AJAR* A cartridge is in the opening of the drive and is not in a loadable position, or if
(TS1140 and some no cartridge or other obstruction is in the drive, the sensor may not be
TS1150 drives only) functioning correctly, and the hardware may be defective. If no cartridge or
other obstruction is in the drive, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
If you cannot insert a tape cartridge in the drive, perform the following steps:
1. Make sure that you have the proper cartridge type.
2. Inspect the tape cartridge for damage.
3. Make sure that there is no other cartridge already in the drive.
4. Try to load another cartridge into the drive. Use a scratch cartridge to avoid
possible damage to a data cartridge.
If the new cartridge can be inserted in the drive, the original cartridge may be
defective. Inspect the cartridge again for damage.
If the cartridge is not damaged but it cannot be inserted, contact Spectra
Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
CLEAN* Drive cleaning is in progress.
CODELOAD Microcode is being loaded. This process takes a few minutes. The drive should
not be powered off or reset during this process.
DIAGS* Diagnostics are running.
EMPTY* There is no cartridge in the opening of the drive. Alternatively, if a cartridge is
in the drive, the sensor may not be functioning correctly, and the hardware may
be defective. If a cartridge is present in the drive, contact Spectra Logic
Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
ERASE* Data erase is in progress.
LOAD* A load is complete. The cartridge is at the load point.
LOCATE* A locate is in progress.
MIDTAPE* The drive was reset or powered on with a tape loaded, and is in the process of
bringing the drive and tape to a recovered state. This process may take up to
15 minutes.
NEW CODE Codeload is complete. The drive is in process of resetting to apply the new code.
READ* A data read is in progress.
READY* The drive is in ready state. (The panel can also be blank in ready state)
RESET* and RESET!!! The drive is in the process of resetting.
REWIND* A rewind operation is in progress.
UNLOAD* An unload was requested, or is in progress.
@UNLOAD* An unload is complete, the cartridge is in the unloaded position.
Note: The display goes blank when the cartridge is removed.
WRITE* A data write is in progress.

433
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

The following table lists the Failure ID codes for the TS11xx technology
drives.

Failure ID Code Description Action

5F A function was This code is not related to a drive or microcode
attempted which is problem. It is related to the operating environment
prohibited due to the and requires additional investigation. Contact
current security Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting
settings. Spectra Logic on page 7).
81-85 Drive problem. Perform the following:
1. If possible, use ITDT to collect a drive dump file
(see Use the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to
Retrieve a Drive Dump on page 417).
If you cannot use ITDT, use the BlueScale user
interface to collect a drive trace file (see Use the
Drive Traces Button on page 415).
2. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 409),
then retry the operation that produced the error.
3. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic
Technical Support and send the drive trace file to
them, if requested (see Contacting Spectra Logic on
page 7).
Note: The error code clears when you reset or
power cycle the drive.
86 Cartridge or drive See Failure ID code FE on page 436.
problem.
87 Cartridge problem. See Failure ID code FE on page 436.
8A Drive performance Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
problem. (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
90 Drive problem. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
9C Hardware or Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
configuration problem. (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
AA, AB, AC, AD Configuration Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
problem. (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
AE, AF Hardware problem. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
BF Hardware problem. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
C1 Drive problem. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
D8 Drive problem. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

434
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

Failure ID Code Description Action

E4 Drive problem. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
E5, E6 Drive or microcode Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
problem. (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
ED Informational message. A microcode dump exists in flash memory. Contact
Spectra Logic Technical Support
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
F2, F4 Cartridge or Drive Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
problem. (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
F5 Fibre Channel error.  Verify that the fiber cables and the connections
between the drive and the host are the correct type
and are working properly. Verify that all
equipment and devices are powered ON.
 Verify that the configuration settings for the drive
are set correctly and are compatible with the Fibre
Channel topology being used.
 Verify that the host fiber adapter and port are
working properly and are compatible with the
Fibre Channel topology being used.
 Verify that the Fibre Channel switch ports are
working properly and are compatible with the
Fibre Channel topology being used.
 Verify that the fiber cable is connected to Port A (0)
of the drive.
F6 The drive needs to be See Cleaning a Drive on page 472 for instructions.
cleaned.
F7 Fibre wrap test failure. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

435
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Drives

Failure ID Code Description Action

FE Cartridge or drive Verify that the tape is the correct media type. If the
problem. tape cartridge is the correct media type, perform the
following action:
Problems Writing Data on a Cartridge with a Known
Barcode
Retry the operation with a different cartridge.
 If the operation succeeds, the original cartridge
was defective. If possible, copy data from the
defective cartridge and set it aside. If additional
tests confirm that the cartridge was the source of
the error, you can discard it.
 If the operation fails and another drive is available,
insert the original cartridge into the other drive
and retry the operation.
 If the operation fails, discard the defective
cartridge.
 If the operation passes, contact Spectra Logic
Technical Support.
 If the operation fails and another drive is not
available, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support.
Problems Reading Data on a Cartridge with a Known
Barcode
Perform one of the following procedures:
 If another drive is available, insert the cartridge
into the other drive and retry the operation.
 If the operation fails, discard the defective
cartridge.
 If the operation succeeds, contact Spectra Logic
Technical Support.
 If another drive is not available, contact Spectra
Logic Technical Support.
Problems with One or More Cartridges with
Unknown Barcode
If the problem occurs with multiple tape cartridges
or if you do not know the tape cartridge’s barcode,
contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
FF Operator procedure or This error code is presented for an invalid or
host problem. unsupported SCSI command or parameter. It is a
SCSI application program software problem. Sense
data exists at the host.

436
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Using DLM to Test a Drive

USING DLM TO TEST A DRIVE

Overview BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) lets you monitor
the DLM health information of each drive in the library and helps you
identify drives that experience a high number of errors or other problems
during operation. See Chapter 10 – Using Drive Lifecycle Management,
beginning on page 336 for detailed information about using DLM to
monitor the health of drives.
If you suspect that a drive is experiencing problems or if the Drive
Lifecycle Management report indicates that a drive is experiencing
repeated errors, you can use the DLM Drive Health Verification wizard to
test the drive. This test, when used in conjunction with other DLM data
and MLM data, can help you determine whether a drive or the media is the
source of the errors you are investigating.
Note: The DLM Drive Health Verification test takes approximately 15
minutes to complete.

Requirements for Using the Wizard

Before you can run the DLM Drive Health Verification wizard, the
following requirements must be met:
 The drive must not contain a cartridge.
 A scratch tape must be available in the partition’s entry/exit pool. The
scratch tape must have the following qualities:
 It must be the same media type and generation as the drive being
tested.
 It must have a cartridge health of Good (green) for an MLM-enabled
cartridge or Usable for a cartridge that is not MLM-enabled.
 It must have a barcode label.
 If the scratch cartridge is encrypted with BlueScale encryption, the
key must be stored in the library

Make sure that the scratch tape does not contain data that you need to retain. The
Caution test process overwrites all data on the tape.

Important The test fails if the scratch tape does not meet the conditions listed above.

Note: If the cartridge health is unknown (that is, it is not currently

listed in the library’s MLM database), the library loads the
cartridge into a drive to determine the health before beginning
the test.

437
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Using DLM to Test a Drive

 If a cleaning partition is associated with the partition containing the

drive, make sure the cleaning partition contains a cleaning cartridge
with Good (green) or Usable health. You can use MLM to determine the
health of the cleaning cartridges currently in the cleaning partition (see
Generate MLM Reports on page 321). If necessary, import a known
good cleaning cartridge into the cleaning partition (see Importing into a
Storage or Cleaning Partition on page 237).
If the partition does not use a cleaning partition, a cleaning cartridge
with Good or Usable health must be in the partition’s entry/exit pool.
Import a known good cleaning cartridge into the entry/exit pool (see
Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition on page 237).

Important When importing a cleaning cartridge into the partition’s entry/exit pool, it must be
in a regular TeraPack magazine; it cannot be in a Maintenance TeraPack magazine.

Notes:  Both the scratch tape and the cleaning cartridge can be
imported into the entry/exit pool in the same magazine.
 The test aborts (fails) if the cleaning cartridge health is not
Good or Usable.
 The cleaning cartridge must have a barcode label.
 If the entry/exit pool contains only one chamber, both the
cleaning cartridge and the scratch cartridge must be in the
same magazine.
 Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can perform a
DLM Drive Health test. See Understanding User Groups and Security
on page 104 for information about the three types of user groups and
what types of privileges each has.

438
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Using DLM to Test a Drive

Run the DLM Drive Health Verification Wizard

Use the following steps to launch the DLM Drive Health Verification wizard.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrative privileges.
2. If necessary, import a scratch tape and a cleaning cartridge into the
library (see Requirements for Using the Wizard on page 437).
3. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > DLM to display the
Drives screen.
Note: The Test button is not present if DLM is not enabled.

Figure 271 Click Test on the Drives screen to launch the

wizard.

4. Click Test next to the drive you want to test to start the DLM Drive
Health Verification wizard.
The wizard determines whether all of the requirements for the test are
met.
All Requirements Met If all of the requirements for performing the test
are met, the Drive Health Verification screen displays a warning about
the upcoming test process. Proceed to Step 5 on page 440.

Figure 272 Click Next on the Drive Health Verification screen

to begin the verification process.

439
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Using DLM to Test a Drive

Requirements Not Met If one or more requirement needs attention, the

Drive Health Verification screen displays information about what
needs to be done.

Figure 273 Address all of the requirements on the Drive

Health Verification screen.

Note: If you are accessing the library remotely using the BlueScale web
interface and either the scratch cartridge or the cleaning
cartridge is not available, then Cancel is the only option
available.
Use the following steps to address the requirements listed on the Drive
Health Verification screen.
a. Click Move or Import/Export, as required, to move a cartridge out of
the drive or import a scratch cartridge and a cleaning cartridge into
the partition.
b. After you complete the necessary actions, begin the entire process
again, starting with Step 3 on page 439.
c. When all of the requirements are met, proceed to Step 5.
5. Click Next to display the DLM Select Scratch Cartridge screen.

440
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 13 — Drive Troubleshooting Using DLM to Test a Drive

6. On the DLM Select Scratch Cartridge screen, select the scratch cartridge
you want to use for the test.
Note: Only data cartridges located in the partition’s entry/exit pool are
listed and available for selection.

If the entry/exit pool contains multiple data cartridges, make sure that you select a
Caution cartridge that does not contain data that you want to retain. The test process
overwrites all data on the tape.

Figure 274 The DLM Select Scratch Cartridge screen.

7. Click Next to begin the automatic test process. A series of status screens
lets you know how the test is progressing. The test process requires
approximately 15 minutes to complete.
8. When the test is complete, review the DLM Test Results screen to
determine the outcome of the test and respond as required.
 If the drive passes the test, the drive health is set to Good (green).
You can continue using the drive.

Figure 275 The DLM Test Results screen (test successful).

 If the drive fails the test, the drive health is set to Poor (red). Contact
Spectra Logic for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on
page 7).

Figure 276 The DLM Test Results screen (test failed).

9. Click Continue to return to the Drives screen.

441
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 CHAPTER 14
Maintaining the Library
This chapter describes the common maintenance tasks for the Spectra T950
library. See Chapter 15 – Maintaining the Drives, beginning on page 471
for detailed information about maintaining the library’s drives.

Important Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support before making any changes to your library
hardware or performing any maintenance operations.

Topic
Updating, Servicing, or Moving the Library page 443
Renewing the BlueScale Software Support Key page 444
Updating the BlueScale Software and Library page 446
Firmware
Check the Library BlueScale Software Version page 447
Check Component Firmware Versions (Optional) page 448
Check the Currently Released BlueScale Version page 450
Download the BlueScale Package page 450
Prepare for the BlueScale Package Update page 451
Install the Update Package page 453
Manage Update Packages page 465
Replacing the Air Filter page 466
Installing Cord Locks page 469
Calibrating the Touch Screen page 470

442
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating, Servicing, or Moving the Library

UPDATING, SERVICING, OR MOVING THE LIBRARY

Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support before making any changes to
your library hardware or performing any service operations.

Installing Additional Drives

Installing an additional drive into a partially filled DBA causes the library
to reassign element addresses. To avoid errors, reconfigure your storage
management software after adding a new drive (refer to your software
documentation for instructions).

Servicing the Library

In the event that it is necessary to replace a component, make sure that you
have instructions for performing the procedure and you either:
 Are instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support,
— OR —
 Have a support contract such as Assisted Self-Maintenance (ASM).

Moving the Library

The library hardware is configured to ensure proper thermal control, air
flow, and dust filtering. After the library is installed, do not move the
library. Do not remove the doors from the back of the library or any library
components (except the TeraPack magazines).

Important Moving the library without assistance from a Spectra Certified Field Engineer voids
your service contract. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for assistance if you
need to relocate your library (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

443
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Renewing the BlueScale Software Support Key

RENEWING THE BLUESCALE SOFTWARE SUPPORT KEY

You must have a current support agreement and corresponding BlueScale
Software Support key entered in the library before you can update the
library’s BlueScale software and the component firmware. You are able to
download updated BlueScale packages from the Technical Support portal
without a key; however, without a valid BlueScale Software Support key
installed on the library, you are not able to apply the updates to the library.
Notes:  Spectra Logic sends you an email notification before your
current support key expires.
 The library also generates informational messages to let you
know that the support key is about to expire.
If your BlueScale Software Support key expires, you see the following
screen when you attempt to update the library.

Figure 277 The BlueScale Software Support Key Expired screen.

You must renew the BlueScale Software Support key before you can
continue. You must have a current service contract to generate a new
BlueScale Software Support key, if you do not have a current service
contract, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra
Logic on page 7).
If your library is covered by warranty or a service contract, and you need a
BlueScale Software Support key, follow these steps:
1. Log into your account on the Technical Support portal at
support.spectralogic.com.
Note: See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 504 for
information about creating an account and accessing the
Technical Support portal.
2. Select Downloads > Service Key Generation.

444
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Renewing the BlueScale Software Support Key

3. The Service Key Generation page displays with a list of the products
you own. In the Product Name column, click the product for which you
want to generate a service key.

Figure 278 The Service Key Generation screen.

4. On the Software Support Keys Generator page, the Product Name,

Product Type, and Serial Number fields are populated with the
information for your library. Click Generate Key. The page refreshes to
display the new Product Service Key.

Figure 279 The Software Support Key Generator page.

5. After you generate your key, enter it into the library as described in
Enter Activation Keys on page 112.

445
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

UPDATING THE BLUESCALE SOFTWARE AND LIBRARY FIRMWARE

Overview The BlueScale software and library firmware are updated
regularly to provide new functionality and resolve issues. Spectra Logic
recommends that you keep your library up-to-date at all times. If your
library is not using the most current BlueScale software version, updating
it to the most current version is strongly recommended.

Important Your library must either still be under warranty or you must have a current service
contract with Spectra Logic Technical Support before you can perform BlueScale
package updates, including firmware updates for library components. The
BlueScale Software Service key associated with your service contract must be
entered into the System Configuration screen before you can update the library.
 For instructions on how to renew and enter your BlueScale Software Support
key, see Renewing the BlueScale Software Support Key on page 444.
 If you have questions about your service agreement, contact Spectra Logic
Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

New Package Availability The most currently released version of the

BlueScale package for the library is available on the Product Software page
on the Technical Support portal.
If Auto Download is configured (see Configure a Package Server on
page 144), the library checks configured package servers once a week for a
library update package newer than what the library is currently running. If
a new package is available, the library downloads it, posts a system
message, and displays an icon on the status bar to indicate the update is
available (see Auto Download Icon on page 92). If the library already
downloaded an update package, you can continue with Prepare for the
BlueScale Package Update on page 451.
Package Support Packages are groupings of program code that contain
the BlueScale software and firmware for the library components. Spectra
Logic provides complete support for the two most recently released
BlueScale packages. If your library is not running the most current
BlueScale software version, you may be required to update your library to
resolve an issue or to verify that the problem still exists.
The Spectra T950 Library Release Notes and Documentation Updates, available
on the Technical Support portal, provides information about the updates in
the current BlueScale package, as well as updates to this guide and other
documentation.
User Privilege Requirements All users can view the BlueScale software
version that the library is using on the status bar at the bottom of each
screen (see Figure 45 on page 91). Only a user with superuser or
administrator privileges can update the library. See Understanding User
Groups and Security on page 104 for information about the three types of
user groups and what types of privileges each has.

446
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

Check the Library BlueScale Software Version

Use the following steps to determine the BlueScale software version
currently running on the library.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. Determine the BlueScale software version currently running on the
library.
 The status bar at the bottom of each BlueScale screen shows the
BlueScale version running on the library.

BlueScale version
Figure 280 The BlueScale version shown on the status bar.

— OR —
 Select Maintenance > Package Update from the toolbar menu to
view the current BlueScale package version on the Package Update
screen.
Note: If the library notifies you that your BlueScale Software
Support key expired, see Renewing the BlueScale
Software Support Key on page 444.

Figure 281 The BlueScale version shown on the Package

Update screen.

447
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

Check Component Firmware Versions (Optional)

Note: This is typically only useful when recommended by Spectra
Logic Technical Support.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance
Tools screen displays.

Figure 282 The Maintenance Tools screen.

3. If you want to save the information about the firmware versions to a

USB device, connect a USB device to a USB port on the LCM or the
operator panel (T950B only) and allow time for the device to mount.
Note: The option to save the information to a USB device is only
displayed if you connect a USB device before you select Utilities
(see Using a USB Device on page 183).
4. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
5. Select Display Firmware Versions. The Utilities screen refreshes to show
a description of the Display Firmware Versions tool.

Figure 283 Select the Display Firmware Versions utility.

448
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

6. If you want to save the output from the utility, use the check boxes at
the top of the screen to select the location; otherwise skip to Step 7.
Selecting this Saves the output...
location...
Mail results to: As an attachment to an email sent to the specified mail recipient. Use the drop-
down list to select the recipient for the report file.
To send the email with the output to someone who is not already listed as a
library user, you must first configure that person as an email recipient (see
Configure Mail Users on page 124).
Note: Do not use the default [email protected] email recipient
unless Spectra Logic Technical Support specifically instructs you to do so.
Spectra Logic does not save emailed results files unless they are specifically
requested for troubleshooting.
Save to USB To a USB device connected to a USB port on the LCM or the operator panel
(T950B only).
Note: This option is only available if you inserted a USB device in Step 3 on
page 448.

7. Click Run Utility. The Utility Results screen displays, showing a list of
the firmware levels for all installed components.

Figure 284 The results screen for the Display Firmware

Versions utility.

8. If requested to do so, send this information to Spectra Logic Technical

Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7) for advanced
troubleshooting.

449
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

Check the Currently Released BlueScale Version

Follow these steps to check the currently recommended BlueScale version:
1. Log into your user account on the Technical Support portal at
support.spectralogic.com.
Note: See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 504 for
information about creating an account and accessing the
Technical Support portal.
2. Select Downloads > Product Software.
3. On the Product Software page, locate your library type in the Spectra
Product column. The currently released BlueScale version is listed in the
Current Version column.

Figure 285 The Product Software screen.

4. Compare the Current Version available for the library to the version
installed on the library.

Download the BlueScale Package

If Auto Download is configured (see Configure a Package Server on
page 144) or your library has Internet access and you plan to download the
BlueScale package directly to the library from the Spectra Logic package
server, skip to Prepare for the BlueScale Package Update on page 451.
If your library cannot access an outside website because of security or
firewall restrictions, use the following steps to download the BlueScale
package from the Technical Support portal. You can save the BlueScale
package to a USB device or a previously configured package server.
1. Log into your account on the Technical Support portal at
support.spectralogic.com.

450
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

2. Select Downloads > Product Software. The Product Software page

displays.

Figure 286 The Product Software screen.

3. Locate your library type in the Spectra Product column. The currently
released BlueScale version is listed in the Current Version column.
Note: If you are updating a library running BlueScale12.7.02 or later,
select a package ending with the letter “s”, which indicates a
digitally signed package. If you are updating a library running a
BlueScale version prior to 12.7.02, select a package ending with
the letter “z”, which indicates an unsigned zip package.
4. Click the name of the BlueScale package next to your library type. The
BlueScale package begins downloading through your web browser.
5. When the download completes, do not unzip the downloaded file.
Copy the file to one of the following locations:
 The root directory of a USB device.
Notes:  The library only recognizes FAT-formatted, not NTFS-
formatted, USB devices.
 Not all USB devices are compatible with the library. If you
are unable to access a USB device from the library, remove it
and use a different one.
— OR —
 A previously configured package server.

Prepare for the BlueScale Package Update

Use the following sections to prepare to update the BlueScale software and
library component firmware.

Make Sure Your BlueScale Software Support Key Is

Current
Updating the BlueScale software and the firmware for the library
components requires a current service contract with Spectra Logic
Technical Support. If your service contract expires, renew it as described in
Renewing the BlueScale Software Support Key on page 444.

451
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

Prepare the Library

1. Stop all library- and host-based operations.
Note: If you are updating a library running BlueScale 12.7.02 or later,
at the start of a package update that includes RCM or LCM
updates, the library shuts down all exporters, (QIP, RIM, RIM2,
and drive) so that they do not accept additional moves and then
waits for any moves in progress to complete before starting to
update the selected components. At the start of a package
update that includes QIP, RIM, or RIM2 updates only, the library
shuts down the exporters needing an update so that they do not
accept additional moves and then waits for any moves in
progress to complete before starting to update the selected
components. The exporters are re-enabled to accept moves when
the package update completes.

Important Confirm that all of the following conditions are met before beginning the update
process:
 All backup processes are complete
 All storage management software daemons are stopped
 All drives are empty
To ensure that no commands are sent to the controllers, Spectra Logic suggests
disconnecting Fibre Channel cables to the F-QIPs, RIMs, and any tape drives used as
robotic exporters.

 Back up your MLM database (see Back Up the MLM and DLM
Databases on page 330).
Note: Backing up the MLM database also backs up the DLM database.
 Back up all of your BlueScale encryption keys (see the Spectra Tape
Libraries Encryption User Guide).
 Download and read the T950 Library Release Notes and Documentation
Updates for the most current information about updated BlueScale
packages.

Important If the release notes provide special procedures or requirements for updating the
library, make sure that you follow them.

452
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

Install the Update Package

Select the BlueScale Package and Update Options

1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. If you downloaded the BlueScale package to a USB device or if you
plan to update the RCM control modules or RIM2 controllers using a
USB device, connect the USB device to the USB port on the LCM and
wait for the device to mount before continuing (see Using a USB Device
on page 183).
3. If you receive an error message stating that your disk is full when the
library attempts to unzip a BlueScale package, you need to delete
downlevel packages before you can continue. See Manage Update
Packages on page 465.
4. Select Maintenance > Package Update. The Package Update screen
displays.
Note: If the library notifies you that your BlueScale Software Support
key expired, see Renewing the BlueScale Software Support Key
on page 444.

Figure 287 Click Begin Library Update to start the process.

5. Click Begin Library Update. If the License Agreement screen displays,

read the license agreement, then click Accept.
Note: If you decline the agreement, you are not able to update the
library.

453
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

6. The Select Library Package screen displays, listing the file names for the
available BlueScale packages.
Note: The file names begin with the BlueScale version number,
followed by the date of release in YYYYMMDD format.

Figure 288 Select the BlueScale package.

7. Select the appropriate BlueScale package.

Notes:  If the Package does NOT display in the USB or Package
server section, you may have downloaded the package for
the wrong library type or the wrong signed/unsigned
package type.
 BlueScale packages may be found on the sources described in
the table below.
Source Description
Spectra Logic Select and download the desired BlueScale package from Spectra Logic’s
package server to the memory card in the LCM and then install it.
Notes:
 The library must have a connection to the Internet before you can use this
option (see Configure Network Settings on page 121).
 If directed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support, update the IP address
and package directory for the Spectra Logic package server (see Configure a
Package Server on page 144).
Memory Card Select the desired BlueScale package from packages already stored on the
memory card in the LCM.

454
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

Source Description
USB Device Select the desired BlueScale package from packages stored on a USB device.
There is a brief delay while the library accesses the USB device when you select
this option.
Notes:
 The USB Device option is only available if you connected a USB device
containing the BlueScale package in Step 2 on page 453.
 The BlueScale package must be stored in the root directory of the USB device.
Configured Select the desired BlueScale package stored on a previously configured package
Package Server server, if you have one available.
(server name varies) Note: This option is only available if you previously configured a package
server. See Configure a Package Server on page 144 for information about
configuring a package server.

8. Click Next. The Library Package Update Options screen displays.

The Library Package Update Options screen only lists options that are
applicable based on your library configuration.
Note: Clicking Update immediately starts the update process. Spectra
Logic recommends that you select using a USB device to update
RIM2 controllers (see Step 11 on page 458) and, if the library
does not have EtherLib, using a USB device to update RCM
control modules (see Step 9 on page 456) before clicking Update.

Figure 289 The Library Package Update Options screen.

455
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

9. If the library includes drive expansion frames, determine the

appropriate update method for your library’s configuration:
EtherLib EtherLib is an Ethernet network that connects Spectra LS
control modules to each other to increase communication speed. Using
EtherLib significantly reduces the time required for RCM firmware
updates.
Select the appropriate EtherLib completion option for your library’s
environment. The library uses this option if the update cannot
successfully complete over EtherLib.

Figure 290 Select the appropriate EtherLib completion

strategy.

Note: EtherLib completion options are not present if the library does
not detect the EtherLib network.
If your library uses EtherLib and this option does not display,
see Library has EtherLib, but EtherLib options do not display in
Package Update on page 372.

Selection Action
Automatically restart The library restarts the update, but performs it over the library’s
update over the library’s internal communication network. This increases the amount of time
internal network the update requires, up to 45 minutes per RCM.
Do not automatically restart If the update fails, the library does not automatically restart the update.
update The BlueScale update is incomplete.
Note: If the update fails, examine any system messages and the
package update log to determine the cause of the failure. If the library
is power-cycled, there may be a system message that refers to an
“RCM firmware mismatch”. Resolve the problems that caused the
failure and retry the update.
If the update cannot be performed using EtherLib, retry the update
using the Update RCM controllers using USB device method.

456
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

Update RCM Controllers Using USB Device If your library has drive
expansion frames and does not use EtherLib, you can choose to update
the RCM controllers using a USB device. This option can be used to
update either Spectra LS or Spectra PC control modules. This shortens
the time required to complete the update.
Note: If your library is configured to use EtherLib, performing the
update using EtherLib is faster than using the USB device
option.
Select Update RCM controllers using USB device on the Library Package
Update Options screen.

Figure 291 Select Update RCM controllers using USB

device.

Note: If your library has an EtherLib network, and you select Update
RCM controllers using USB device, the library uses the USB device
method to update the RCMs.
10. If the library includes RIM2 controllers, determine whether or not to
update them using a USB device. This significantly shortens the time
required to complete the update, but requires manual intervention.
Note: You can only update RIM2 controllers, not RIM controllers,
using the USB option.

Figure 292 Select Update RIM2 controllers using USB

device.

Select Update RIM2 controllers using USB device on the Library Package
Update Options screen.

457
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

11. On the Library Package Update Options screen, select whether and
where you want to backup the library configuration before performing
the update.
Notes:  Spectra Logic highly recommends that you save the library
configuration before updating.
 The backup of the library configuration does not include the
MLM or DLM databases.

Figure 293 Select whether and where you want to backup

the library configuration.

Choice Action
Save to USB device Saves a backup of the library configuration to a USB device. Using this option is
highly recommended to ensure that you can easily restore the library if
necessary.
Note: The Save to USB device option is only available if you connected a USB
device in Step 2 on page 453.
Email to... Emails a backup of the library configuration file to an already-configured mail
recipient.
Note: The Email to option is only available if you previously configured mail
recipients (see Configure Mail Users on page 124).
Do not save Updates the library without saving a backup of the library configuration.
This is not recommended unless you backed up the library configuration right
before starting the package update procedure.

12. On the Library Package Update Options screen, select whether or not
an email is sent to Spectra Logic Technical Support to update the
library’s support records.
Notes:  Sending a notification to Spectra Logic Technical Support is
highly recommended.
 This notification does not include the configuration backup file.
 This option is only available if you previously configured the
[email protected] mail user’s SMTP IP address (see
Create or Modify a Profile on page 350).

Figure 294 Select whether or not you want to send an

update to Technical Support.

458
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

13. (Optional) To view a list of components affected by the BlueScale

package, click Details to view the Library Package Details screen. A
Library Package Details screen, similar to the one shown, displays.
Any items that need to be upgraded or downgraded to match the
BlueScale package you chose are automatically selected. Components
with auto-staged firmware are marked with an asterisk (*).

Figure 295 The Library Package Details screen.

14. (Optional) Use the advanced firmware update procedure to limit which
components get upgraded or downgraded.

Use the advanced firmware update procedure only when directed to do so by

Caution Spectra Logic Technical Support.

a. Click Advanced on the Library Package Details screen. An Advanced

Package Update screen, similar to the one shown, displays.

459
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

b. Select or clear the check box next to the library components:

 Clear the check box to prevent the component from upgrading
or downgrading.
 Select the check box to force a component to update to the
firmware level supplied by the BlueScale package. Depending
on the firmware, this could be an upgrade, downgrade, or
reapplying the current firmware.
For example, clear everything except LC Server to update just the LC
Server firmware.

Figure 296 The Library Package Advanced screen.

Notes:  Updating all of the automatically selected components is

highly recommended.
 Occasionally, Spectra Logic Technical Support may instruct you
to update a firmware component even if it is already at the
same level as the component in the selected BlueScale package.
 Components with auto-staged firmware are marked with an
asterisk (*).

460
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

Begin the Update

1. Click Update to begin the update process.

Important Once the update process starts, it cannot be canceled.

Do not turn off power to the library or power-down any component being updated
during the update process.

2. The process depends on whether you chose the Update RCM controllers
using USB device option in Step 9 on page 456 or the Update RIM2
controllers using USB device option in Step 10 on page 457.
Note: Depending on which components you selected to update, some
steps may be skipped.

Update using USB device Update Process

options selected
Both options cleared or The library begins the update process and displays a progress screen,
not applicable which remains for the duration of the update. Depending on what
(The library has an components are updated, the process can take from several
EtherLib network or does minutes to an hour or more.
not have any drive
expansion frames, and
does not have any RIM2
controllers.)

461
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

Update using USB device Update Process

options selected
Update RCM controllers The library starts the update wizard, which guides you through the
using USB device selected update process. Based on your selections, the wizard instructs you to
connect and remove the USB device from various components.
or Notes:
 Each time you connect the USB device to a component, wait at least 10
Update RIM2 controllers seconds for the USB device to mount, and then click Continue.
using USB device selected
 If you do not respond to the Feedback Required screen within 10
or minutes, the request times out and the component update fails.
 Each component takes 5-10 minutes to update.
Both If you selected both Update RCM controllers using USB device and
Update RIM2 controllers using USB device, the process is as follows:
1. On the Feedback Required screen, confirm that you connected a USB
device to a USB port on the LCM (in Step 2 on page 453). The library
copies a file containing the appropriate RCM firmware to the device.
2. A Feedback Required screen prompts you to remove the USB device
from the LCM and connect it to the specified RCM.
3. When the RCM update is complete, a Feedback Required screen
prompts you to remove the USB device and connect it to the next
RCM. This is repeated until all RCM control modules are updated.
4. When all of the RCM updates are complete, a Feedback Required
screen prompts you to move the USB device back to the LCM. The
library copies a file containing the appropriate RIM2 firmware to the
USB device.
5. A Feedback Required screen prompts you to remove the USB device
from the LCM and connect it to a RIM2. This is repeated until all RIM2
controllers are updated.

3. When complete, the Package Update Results screen displays, showing that
the update completed successfully or that a component failed to update.
Note: If the update fails, examine any system messages and the
package update log to determine the cause of the failure. Resolve
the problems and perform the update again. For further
information, see Troubleshooting below.
4. If you used a USB device during the update process, disconnect it.

462
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

5. Click Finish to complete the update. Updates do not take effect until the
library completes the update process.

Important Always click Finish to complete the BlueScale update process. Do not manually
reboot the LCM, power-cycle the library, or perform any other operations on the
library when you see the Package Results screen. Doing so may cause the update
process to fail.

Note: If you are using the BlueScale web interface to perform the
update, the connection to the library is lost when the LCM
reboots. Allow sufficient time for the LCM to complete its
initialization, then enter the library’s IP address in your web
browser to reconnect.
6. When the update completes, the library automatically sends an email to
Spectra Logic Technical Support if it is configured as a mail recipient
and you selected this option in Step 12 on page 458.
7. After the update completes, use your storage management software to
restart any backup processes.

Troubleshooting
If you encounter problems while performing a package update, examine
any system messages and the package update log to determine the cause of
the failure. Resolve the problems and retry the update.
LCM does not automatically reboot If the update package includes
updates to software running on the LCM (LC server, WebServer, etc.) or
RCM the LCM reboots when you click Finish. Wait at least five minutes for
the LCM to complete its initialization. If the LCM does not reboot correctly,
reseat the LCM and perform the Package Update process again.
Component failed to update Click Finish to complete the update. When
the LCM resets, reseat the component that failed to update, and perform
the Package Update process again. If the component fails to update a
second time, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support. See Contacting
Spectra Logic on page 7.

463
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

Library configuration is corrupted during the update process Use the

following steps to restore the library’s configuration if it becomes
corrupted during the package update process.

The Restore Configuration from Checkpoint utility should only be used

Caution immediately after a package update is performed.
Any library configuration or inventory changes made between the time that the
package update is performed and the utility is run are lost.

Note: The library automatically saves a Checkpoint Configuration

Backup file prior to beginning a package update.
1. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance
Tools screen displays.
2. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
3. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.
4. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced
utilities.
5. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Restore
Configuration from Checkpoint. The screen refreshes to show the details
for the utility.

Figure 297 The Advanced Utilities screen.

6. Click Run Utility to restore the library to the Checkpoint library

configuration.
7. After the library configuration restores, perform the Package Update
process again.

464
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware

Manage Update Packages

The BlueScale packages downloaded to the library reside on the memory
card in the LCM. Over time, the packages (one per update) accumulate on
the card and the library may post an error message notifying you that the
memory card is full. You must delete downlevel packages before you can
continue; you can also choose to delete downlevel packages at other times.
Deleting a package file does not delete the BlueScale software or component
firmware already applied to the library; it simply removes the package file
from local storage on the LCM.
Note: There is no confirmation request before the selected package is
deleted. Make sure that you no longer need access to a package
file before you delete it.
The following steps describe how to delete unwanted BlueScale packages
from the memory card in the LCM.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Package Update. The
Package Update screen displays (see Figure 287 on page 453).
3. Click Manage Packages. The Manage Packages screen displays with a list
of all the package files currently stored on the memory card in the LCM.

Figure 298 Select the BlueScale packages you want to delete.

4. Select the package(s) that you want to delete, then click Delete Selected.
The package delete process begins.

465
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Replacing the Air Filter

REPLACING THE AIR FILTER

A set of fans mounted in the lower front of each main frame, drive frame,
and bulk TAP frame pull cool air into the library and circulate it to
maintain the temperature within an acceptable range. The air filters ensure
that the air pulled into the library is free of contaminants. A clogged air
filter can cause operational problems due to excessive temperatures inside
the library.
You should inspect the filters at least once every three months as part of
your preventive maintenance procedures. If a filter appears to be clogged,
continue with the steps in this section.

Important Some environments may require more frequent filter inspection and replacement.
If an air filter gets clogged quickly, consider moving the library to a more dust-free
location or improve the environment where it is located.

Spectra Logic recommends keeping one or more new air filters on site to
use for replacement as often as is necessary. To purchase replacement air
filters, contact your sales representative (see Contacting Spectra Logic on
page 7).

Before You Begin...

Confirm that the Filter Needs To Be Replaced Because dust primarily
collects at the bottom of the air filter, it can be rotated 180°, top to bottom,
one time before it needs to be replaced.
Gather the Following Tools and Supplies Gather these supplies before
beginning the procedure:
 A new filter from Spectra Logic
 A flat blade screwdriver
Continue Library Operations While Replacing the Filter It is safe to
continue normal library operations, such as backups, while rotating or
replacing the air filter.

466
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Replacing the Air Filter

Rotate or Replace the Filter

1. Remove the filter cover from the bottom front of each frame by pulling
outward on the handle at the top left of the panel (A) and the bottom
right corner of the panel (B).
Note: The fans stop running when you remove the filter cover and
resume running after the filter and filter cover are replaced.

Figure 299 Remove the filter cover.

2. Set the cover aside.

3. Use a flat head screwdriver to loosen the four captive screws on the air
filter (circled in Figure 300).

You can rotate the air

filter 180° one time
before replacing it.

Figure 300 Loosen the four captive screws that secure the air
filter to the frame.

467
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Replacing the Air Filter

4. Determine whether the filter can be rotated.

 If the filter was not previously rotated, rotate it 180°, top to bottom
(see Figure 300 on page 467).

Make sure that you do not flip the filter over. Doing so places the dirty side of the air
Caution filter toward the interior of the frame and results in the trapped contaminates being
blown into the library interior.

Note: When you rotate the filter, mark it in some way so that you can
tell at a glance the next time you inspect the filter.
 If the filter was already rotated once, you must replace it.
5. Place the air filter over the opening in the bottom front of the frame.

Important Make sure that the tab on the filter is pressing in on the filter sensor switch.

Switch
Tab

Figure 301 Install the filter, making sure that the tab on the
filter presses the filter sensor switch.

6. Use a flat head screwdriver to tighten the four captive screws to secure
the filter to the frame (see Figure 300 on page 467).
7. Use a dry cloth to wipe any accumulated dust off the inside of the filter
cover.
8. Position the filter cover over the fan assembly and push firmly inward
on the sides of the cover to snap it onto the ball studs extending from
each side of the frame. As soon as the cover is in position, the fans
restart.
9. If necessary, repeat Step 1 through Step 8 for each additional main
frame, drive frame, or bulk TAP frame in the library.

468
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Installing Cord Locks

INSTALLING CORD LOCKS

Install the cord locks included with each frame to prevent the power cords
from being inadvertently disconnected from the dual AC input connectors.
Note: The photos in this section show installing the cord locks on a
dual AC2 power module. The parts and the procedure are the
same for the dual AC with convenience outlet or the dual AC
power modules.
1. Pause PostScan if it is running (see Pause the PostScan Process on
page 319). Any tapes currently being scanned are returned to their
storage locations.
2. Discontinue all file storage operations to the library.
3. Power off the library (see Power Off the Library on page 165).
4. Set the AC breaker switches on the dual AC module to the “off”
position.
5. If the power cords are plugged into wall plugs, unplug them. Also
unplug them from the dual AC module where you plan to install the
cord locks.
6. Using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, remove the two screws securing each
of the two input plugs to the dual AC module (circled in Figure 302).

Figure 302 Remove the screws securing the input plugs to the
AC power module (Dual AC2 shown).

7. Place a cord lock over the connector on the end of the power cord that
connects to the library. Orient the cord lock as shown in Figure 303.

Cord lock
clamp screw

Figure 303 Install the cord locks on the power cords.

8. Push the power cord into the input plug and reinstall the screws that
secure the input plug to the dual AC module. Make sure that the cord
connector is fully seated in the input plug.

469
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 14 — Maintaining the Library Calibrating the Touch Screen

9. Tighten the cord lock clamp screws (shown in Figure 303).

10. Repeat Step 7 through Step 9 for the other power cord.
11. Plug the free end of each power cord into an appropriate power source.
12. Repeat the entire process for the power cords attached to the dual AC
module in each drive expansion frame.
13. After cord locks are installed on all of the power cords, set the AC
breaker switches to the “on” position and power on the library.

CALIBRATING THE TOUCH SCREEN

If the touch points on the library’s touch screen do not properly align with
the user interface graphics, perform the following procedure to recalibrate
the position of the touch points.
Note: You must perform this procedure while standing in front of the
touch screen. The utility is not available when accessing the
library through the BlueScale web interface (RLC).
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools to display the
Maintenance Tools screen (Figure 282 on page 448).
3. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
4. Select Calibrate Touch Screen.
5. Click Run Utility. The touch screen displays a series of calibration target
points.
6. Touch each point as it displays with either the stylus or your finger to
recalibrate the touch points on the screen.
Note: Touch each point at a straight-on angle as close to the center of
the target as possible.
7. When the calibration routine is complete, the Utilities screen
redisplays.

470
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 CHAPTER 15
Maintaining the Drives
This chapter describes the common maintenance tasks for drives in the
Spectra T950 library. See Chapter 14 – Maintaining the Library, beginning
on page 442 for information about maintaining the library.

Topic
Cleaning a Drive page 472
Determine Whether Cleaning is Required page 473
Prepare the Library for Drive Cleaning page 474
Determine the Cleaning Method page 475
Manually Cleaning a Drive page 476
Track Cleaning Cartridge Use page 478
Updating Drive Firmware page 479
Prepare for the Update Process page 480
Update Using ITDT page 483
Update Using Drive Update through Package page 486
Update
Update Using the Drive Firmware Update Wizard page 494
Update Using the Update Drive Firmware Utility page 497
Updating Drive Device Drivers page 501
Adding or Replacing a Drive page 502
Add a Drive to the Library page 502
Replace a Drive page 503

471
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Cleaning a Drive

CLEANING A DRIVE
Overview Whenever a tape is loaded or unloaded, the read/write heads
are physically cleaned by a brush located within the drive. However, after
reading and writing a large amount of data (the exact amount varies by
drive type and generation) or if read or write errors occur, the drive
requests to be cleaned with a cleaning cartridge. The request is made by
sending a Tape Alert message to the host, and displaying a C on the SCD
for an LTO drive or CLEAN* on the MCD for a TS11xx technology drive.
The notification is also posted to the library’s Drive Details screen
(Figure 305 on page 474) and the DLM drive health icon for the drive
changes to yellow (see Using the Drive Health Icons on page 339 for
additional information).
Using drives with dirty heads can reduce drive performance, decrease
usable tape capacity, and result in read/write failures which can eventually
interrupt data storage.
If you have Auto Drive Clean enabled and the drive is in a partition with
an associated cleaning partition, these cleanings are performed
automatically. See Creating a Cleaning Partition on page 194 for
information about configuring a cleaning partition.
It may also be possible to configure the host software to automatically
clean the drives, with a cleaning tape stored in the partition, when the
software is notified that drive cleaning is necessary.
If no automatic cleaning process is configured, you must manually clean
the drive. If you ignore a cleaning request for too long, the library
generates a warning system message.
User Privilege Requirements When Auto Drive Clean is enabled for the
storage partition and a cleaning cartridge is available in the cleaning
partition, cleanings are performed automatically and do not require user
intervention.
If Auto Drive Clean is not enabled, any user with operator privileges who is
assigned to the partition and all users with superuser or administrator
privileges can manually clean a drive without an associated cleaning
partition by importing a cleaning cartridge into the storage partition’s entry/
exit pool, if necessary, and using the Inventory screen to manually move the
cleaning cartridge to the drive (see No Cleaning Partition Present on
page 477).
Only a user with superuser or administrator privileges can move a cleaning
cartridge stored in the partition using the BlueScale web interface (RLC).

472
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Cleaning a Drive

Determine Whether Cleaning is Required

Clean the library’s drives when any of the following occurs:
 The drive indicates that it needs cleaning (see Chapter 13 – Drive
Troubleshooting, beginning on page 408) by sending a message to the
storage management software.
 The Drive Details screen indicates that the drive needs cleaning or
displays a C on the SCD for an LTO drive or CLEAN* on the MCD for a
TS11xx technology drive (see Figure 305 on page 474).
Note: In order for the library to monitor drive status, the drive must be
configured in a partition.
Use the following steps to use the Drives screen to determine whether a
drive requires cleaning.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. Select Configuration > Drives or Configuration > DLM if MLM is
enabled. The Drives screen displays.

Figure 304 Click Detail on the Drives screen.

473
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Cleaning a Drive

3. Click Detail next to the drive you want to check. The Drive Details
screen displays.
If the Cleaning Status displays Drive Cleaning Required, clean the drive
as described in the following sections.

Figure 305 The Cleaning Status indicates that cleaning is

required.

Prepare the Library for Drive Cleaning

Before you can clean the drive, you must address the following
requirements:
Required Tools and Materials You must have a cleaning cartridge for the
type of drive(s) to be cleaned. Cleaning cartridges can be purchased from
Spectra Logic. If the cartridge has a barcode label, be sure to note the
barcode, including any leading zeros. This information helps you locate
the cleaning cartridge after it is loaded into the library.

Important Using only Spectra Certified cleaning cartridges to clean your drives is highly
recommended. For information on ordering these cartridges, see Media and Media
Accessories on page 527.
Carefully follow all instructions and recommendations provided with the cleaning
cartridge. Do not rewind and reuse the material in a cleaning cartridge. Reusing the
material may redistribute contaminants previously removed from the tape path. If
all of the cleaning material is used, discard the cartridge and use a new cleaning
cartridge.

Continuing Backups A drive is unavailable for use while it is being

cleaned. However, the library’s other drives remain available for use.

474
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Cleaning a Drive

Determine the Cleaning Method

The method you use to clean the drive depends on the following factors:

If... Then...
Auto Drive Clean is The library automatically cleans the drives, including any Global
enabled and a cleaning Spares, as needed. See Chapter 6 – Configuring and Managing
partition is associated with Partitions, beginning on page 186 for information about configuring a
the storage partition, cleaning partition and associating it with one or more storage partitions.
You can also clean the drive manually using a cleaning cartridge in the
cleaning partition (see Cleaning Partition Present on page 476).
A cleaning partition is not Use your storage management software to perform regularly scheduled
associated with the storage drive cleanings. Refer to your storage management software user
partition; your software manual or vendor for instructions on how to set up scheduled
package includes features automatic cleanings.
that allow for scheduled You may choose to leave a cleaning cartridge in each storage partition,
drive cleanings, particularly if you can configure your storage management software to
perform regular automated cleanings.
Important: Make sure that the cleaning cartridge has a barcode label.
Your software must be able to identify the cleaning cartridge and use it
only for cleaning drives. Any attempts to use a cleaning cartridge for
data storage causes backup failures.
A cleaning partition is not Import a cleaning cartridge into the partition and clean the drive
associated with the storage manually as described in No Cleaning Partition Present on page 477.
partition and your You may choose to leave a cleaning cartridge in each storage partition
software package does not so that it is available whenever you need it.
have features that allow
Important: Make sure that the cleaning cartridge has a barcode label.
for scheduled drive
Your software must be able to identify the cleaning cartridge and use it
cleanings,
only for cleaning drives. Any attempts to use a cleaning cartridge for
data storage causes backup failures.

A Global Spare drive Prepare and clean the drive as follows:

requires cleaning and a 1. Pause the PostScan operation if it is using the Global Spare drive that
cleaning partition is not needs cleaning (see Pause the PostScan Process on page 319).
present,
2. Temporarily substitute the Global Spare drive for a drive in a
partition that is associated with the Global Spare drive (see Use the
Global Spare Drive on page 411).
3. Clean the drive manually (see No Cleaning Partition Present on
page 477).
4. Reclaim the Global Spare drive so that it is again available for use as a
spare (see Undo the Global Spare Drive on page 414).

475
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Cleaning a Drive

Manually Cleaning a Drive

The process for loading a cleaning cartridge into the drive depends on
whether or not a cleaning partition is associated with the storage partition
containing the drive you need to clean.

Cleaning Partition Present

If a cleaning partition is present and contains a cleaning cartridge, you can
use the Clean feature on the Drives screen to manually clean a drive. See
Creating a Cleaning Partition on page 194 for information about
configuring a cleaning partition.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges, or as an operator assigned to the partition.
2. If necessary, import a magazine containing one or more cleaning
cartridges into the cleaning partition (see Importing into a Storage or
Cleaning Partition on page 237).
3. Select Configuration > Drives or Configuration > DLM if MLM is
enabled. The Drives screen displays.

Figure 306 The Drives screen.

4. Click Clean next to the drive that needs cleaning. The library retrieves a
cleaning cartridge from the cleaning partition and inserts it into the
drive. The Drive Cleaning Progress screen displays while the cleaning
is in progress.
5. When the cleaning is complete, the library returns the cleaning
cartridge to the cleaning partition and displays a status message.
If the cleaning cartridge is MLM-enabled, the cartridge health and
Cleans Remaining are updated in the MLM database.

476
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Cleaning a Drive

No Cleaning Partition Present

If a cleaning partition is not associated with the storage partition
containing the drive you need to clean, a cleaning cartridge must be
present in the storage partition's storage pool or entry/exit pool. If you do
not permanently store a cleaning cartridge in the storage pool for each
partition, you must import one in order to clean a drive.
 If you have an empty chamber in either the entry/exit pool or the
storage pool for the partition, import a TeraPack magazine containing a
cleaning cartridge.
— OR —
 If you have a TeraPack magazine with one or more empty slots in the
entry/exit pool or the storage pool for the partition, you can exchange a
magazine or cartridge to import the cleaning cartridge (see Exporting
or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges on page 248).
Use the following steps to clean the drive.
1. Log into the library.
2. If you keep a cleaning cartridge stored in the storage pool for the
partition, use its barcode label information to determine its location, as
described in Locating a Specific Cartridge on page 277.
3. If necessary, import the TeraPack magazine with the cleaning cartridge
into either the entry/exit pool or the storage pool for the partition
containing the drive that needs cleaning, as described in Importing into
a Storage or Cleaning Partition on page 237.
Note: If an empty chamber is not available in either the entry/exit pool
or the storage pool, exchange the magazine containing the
cleaning cartridge for a magazine in one of those pools (see
Exporting or Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges on
page 248). When the cleaning is complete, you can exchange the
magazines again.
4. Move the cleaning cartridge from the magazine to the drive needing
cleaning, as described in Moving Cartridges Within a Partition on
page 278.
The drive automatically performs the cleaning, which takes
approximately one minute, and ejects the cartridge when finished.
5. Move the cleaning cartridge from the drive back to the magazine from
which it came.

477
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Cleaning a Drive

6. Check the Drive Details screen to confirm that the cleaning was
successful.
If the cleaning cartridge is expired, the drive automatically ejects the
cartridge and does not perform the cleaning. The Drive Details screen
still indicates that the drive needs cleaning. Perform the following steps
before retrying:
a. Export the expired cleaning cartridge.
b. Import an unexpired cleaning cartridge.
c. Repeat Step 3 through Step 6 to clean the drive.
7. If you have additional drives to clean, repeat Step 3 through Step 6 for
each drive.
8. If you do not want to store the cleaning cartridge in the library, export
the magazine containing it, as described in Exporting or Exchanging
Magazines and Cartridges on page 248.
9. Make sure that you track the number of times the cleaning cartridge
was used (see Track Cleaning Cartridge Use, below).
Note: If you used an MLM-enabled LTO cleaning cartridge, the
cartridge usage is tracked in the MLM database.

Track Cleaning Cartridge Use

Cleaning cartridges are valid for a minimum of 50 uses. If you enabled
MLM and use MLM-enabled cleaning cartridges, the library tracks the
number of cleanings remaining on the cartridge and notifies you when a
cleaning cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life. See Chapter 9 –
Configuring and Using Media Lifecycle Management, beginning on
page 289 for detailed information about using MLM-enabled cleaning
cartridges.
If you are not using a Spectra certified cleaning cartridge with MLM
enabled in your library, Spectra Logic recommends marking the cleaning
cartridge label after each use so that you know when it is near the end of its
life cycle.
To purchase MLM-enabled Spectra Certified cleaning cartridges, contact
your sales representative or visit the Spectra Logic website at
https://spectralogic.com/shop.

478
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

UPDATING DRIVE FIRMWARE

Overview Whenever you update your library software, confirm that your
drives are using the latest firmware version (see Determine the Drive
Generation and Firmware Version on page 480). Drive firmware updates
are also occasionally required to resolve drive issues. When updated drive
firmware is available, schedule a drive firmware update at your earliest
convenience.
The method you use to update the drives depends on the type of drives
you are updating and your operating environment.
Notes:  If Auto Download is configured (see Configure a Package
Server on page 144) and a system message indicates that the
library downloaded a new drive firmware package, use
Update Using Drive Update through Package Update on
page 486 to install the firmware.
 If you cannot use any of the methods described in the
following sections, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support
for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
LTO-4 and LTO-5 and Later TS11xx
Earlier Generations Technology
Generations
IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) Recommended Recommended Recommended
To use, install the ITDT utility on a Solaris,
Linux, or Windows host connected to the
drives to be updated. The update takes 1-2
minutes per drive.
Drive Update through Package Update Not Available Available
Firmware stages in the background (with no Recommended a Recommended Recommended
impact to library operations) for up to 8 hours if you cannot if you cannot
for LTO drives and up to 16 hours for TS11xx use ITDT or if use ITDT or if
technology drives; then, when initiated by the the firmware the firmware
user, the drives are updated in parallel. The was auto was auto
actual update takes up to 30 minutes for all downloaded. downloaded.
LTO-5 or later generation and all TS11xx
technology drives.
Drive Firmware Update Wizard Available Available Not Available
Requires one or more firmware update tapes.
The update takes about 5 minutes per drive.
Multiple drives can be updated in parallel if
multiple firmware tapes are used. One
partition is processed at a time.
Update Drive Firmware Utility Available Available Not Available
Requires a firmware update tape. The update
takes about 5 minutes per drive. Updates are
performed serially, one partition at a time.
a. Contact Technical Support before using this wizard to update LTO-4 drives. These drive types must remain empty and idle during the
update, which may take up to 8 hours per drive.

479
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

User Privilege Requirements The user privileges required to perform a

drive firmware update depend on the method used.
 ITDT — A user with appropriate permissions to use the host computer
on which ITDT is installed.
 Drive Update through Package Update — Only a library user with
superuser or administrator privileges.
 Drive Firmware Update wizard — Only a library user with superuser or
administrator privileges.
 Drive Update Firmware utility — Only a library user with superuser or
administrator privileges.

Prepare for the Update Process

Before you begin the update procedure, make sure you fulfill the
prerequisites described in this section.

Important Always download drive firmware from the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal to
ensure that the firmware was qualified by Spectra Logic.

Important After the drive firmware update is complete, you may need to reset the hosts
accessing the drives.

Important Some operating environments require you to install device drivers before the
application software can correctly communicate with the drives. When you update
the drive firmware, you may also need to update the device driver for the drive (see
Updating Drive Device Drivers on page 501 for further instructions).

Important DO NOT downgrade the firmware on a drive unless specifically instructed to do so

by Spectra Logic Technical Support.

Determine the Drive Generation and Firmware Version

Use the following steps to determine the generation and current firmware
version for each drive you plan to update.
1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.

480
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

2. Select Configuration > DLM (or Drives) to view a list of all the drives
currently installed in the library.

The drive
identifier

The drive type, generation,

and interface

Figure 307 Determine the drive type, generation, and interface.

3. For each drive, make a note of the following information:

Note: If the library contains many drives, it may be easier to use the
drivelist.xml?action=list command to obtain this
information. See the Spectra Tape Libraries XML Command
Reference for more information.
 Drive type and generation — LTO-4 and later generation drives are
listed as IBM Ultrium-TDn, where n is the generation. TS11xx
technology drives are listed as IBM 3592Enn, where nn=07 indicates
TS1140 technology, nn=08 indicates TS1150 technology, nn=55
indicates TS1155 technology, and nn=60 indicates TS1160
technology.
 Form factor — Full-height or half-height.
 Interface — Shown in both the Drive Type field and in the Drive
Identifier field. Fibre Channel or SAS.
4. For each drive, click Detail to view information about the current status
of the selected drive, including its firmware version.

The drive firmware version

Figure 308 Locate the drive firmware version on the Drive

Details screen.

481
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

5. Make a note of the firmware version the drive is currently using.

Determine Whether an Update is Available

Use the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal to check the currently
recommended firmware version for the drives in your library and
download updated firmware if it is available.

Important Always download drive firmware from the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal
to ensure that the firmware was qualified by Spectra Logic.

1. Log into your account on the Technical Support portal at

support.spectralogic.com.
Note: See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 504 for
information about accessing the Technical Support portal and
setting up an account associated with your library.
2. Select Downloads > Tape Drive Firmware.
3. On the Tape Drive Firmware page, locate the appropriate drive
firmware with respect to drive type (LTO or TS11xx), generation (for
example, LTO-7), interface type (for example, SAS or Fibre), and form
factor (full-height or half-height).

Figure 309 A portion of the Tape Drive Firmware page.

4. Compare the recommended drive firmware version for each of the

drives in your library with the version currently in use (see Determine
the Drive Generation and Firmware Version on page 480).

482
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

Update Using ITDT

The easiest way to update your LTO or TS11xx technology tape drive
firmware is with the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT).
Note: If your operating system is not supported by ITDT, or you
cannot use ITDT in your environment, choose another firmware
update method:
 Update Using Drive Update through Package Update on
page 486
 Update Using the Drive Firmware Update Wizard on
page 494
 Update Using the Update Drive Firmware Utility on
page 497
After you check the firmware on the Technical Support portal for the
currently recommended firmware version (see Determine Whether an
Update is Available on page 482), follow the instructions in this section to
update your drive firmware using ITDT.

Download and Install ITDT

Download ITDT and its related documentation directly from IBM's Fix
Central website. For information about navigating IBM's website and
downloading the version of ITDT that is appropriate for your operating
system, log on to the portal (see Accessing the Technical Support Portal on
page 504), open the Knowledge Base, and search for KBA-01768,
Downloading and installing ITDT (IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool).

Important Use the latest version of ITDT to update the latest generation of drives.

Use the following steps to download and install ITDT on a computer that is
connected to the same Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric as the drives
in the library.
1. Log into IBM’s website (https://ibm.com/support/fixcentral/), using your
individual IBM ID.
2. Select the Select product tab.
3. Select the following options:
 Product Group = System Storage
 Select from System Storage = Tape systems
 Select from Tape Systems = Tape drivers and software
 Select from Tape drivers and software = IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)
 Platform = Select your operating system from the drop-down list and
click Continue.

483
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

4. On the next page, select the version of ITDT that you want to
download. If desired, you can select multiple versions.
Note: If you are unsure which version to select, click Show Fix Details
to see additional information.
5. Click Continue. If you did not log into the website yet, it prompts you to
do so now.
6. Choose one of the following methods to download the selected ITDT
installation files:
 Download using your browser (HTTP)
 Download using bulk FTP
 Download using Download Director
7. Refer to the ITDT documentation for information about using ITDT.
Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support if you need assistance (see
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

Download the Drive Firmware

1. After installing ITDT, launch the program so that it creates the Input
and Output folders required during the firmware update process.
2. Log into your account on the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal at
support.spectralogic.com.
3. Select Downloads > Tape Drive Firmware.
4. On the Tape Drive Firmware page (see Figure 309 on page 482), locate
the appropriate drive firmware with respect to drive type (LTO or
TS11xx), generation (for example, LTO-7), interface type (for example,
SAS or Fibre), and form factor (full-height or half-height).
5. Click the firmware version name in the column labeled Current FW File.
Note: The links in the columns labeled Zipped Package File and
Digitally Signed Package File are for using Package Update to
update the drive firmware (see Update Using Drive Update
through Package Update on page 486) do not select these files if
you are updating drive firmware using ITDT.
6. Use your web browser to save the file to the ITDT Input folder on the
computer where ITDT is installed.

484
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

Discontinue Background Operations

You cannot update drive firmware if the library is actively running any
background operations, including Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, and
PostScan.
If you do not want to wait for a Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or
PostScan operation to complete, you can stop the Media Auto Discovery or
PreScan operation, or pause the PostScan operation. For other background
operations, you must wait for the process to complete.
 Click Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen
to stop a Media Auto Discovery or PreScan operation (see Stop the
Discovery Process on page 310).
 Click Pause PostScan on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen
to pause the PostScan operation for one hour (see Pause the PostScan
Process on page 319).

Discontinue Backups and Empty the Drives

Before beginning the drive firmware update process, discontinue all
backup operations and remove any cartridges from the drives.

Attempting to update the firmware while the library is busy or when the drives
Caution contain tapes may result in the update failing, failed backup jobs, or permanent
damage to the drives. If you did not already do so, stop all backup operations and
remove all tapes from the drives you are updating.

 If possible, use your storage management software to move any

cartridges that are currently in drives back to their storage locations.
 If you cannot use your storage management software, then move
the cartridges as described in Moving Cartridges Within a Partition
on page 278.

Update Drives Using ITDT

1. Follow the instructions in the ITDT documentation to update the drive
firmware.
2. Reset the updated drives as described in Resetting a Drive on page 409
to restore their configuration settings.
3. After the update is complete, use your storage management software to
restart any backup processes.

485
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

Update Using Drive Update through Package Update

(

Important Your library must either be under warranty or you must have a current service
contract with Spectra Logic Technical Support before you can update the drive
firmware using Package Update. The BlueScale Software Service key associated
with your service contract must be entered into the System Configuration screen
before you can use Package Update.
 If you have questions about your service agreement, contact Technical Support
(see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
 For instructions on how to renew and enter your BlueScale Software Support
key, refer to Service Contract Extension on page 529.

Drive firmware is downloaded and staged to each drive as a background

process. The firmware staging process takes up to 8 hours for LTO -5 and
later generations drives, and up to 16 hours for TS11xx technology drives.
Backups can continue during this process. This does not affect library
operation. The update is then applied to all selected drives in parallel. This
takes between 15 and 30 minutes, during which time the drives must be
empty and idle.

Requirements
 The library must be running BlueScale12.3.1 or later generation
software.
 The drives must be LTO-5 and later generation drives or TS11xx
technology drives.
Note: Contact Technical Support before using this wizard to update
LTO-4 drives. These drive types must remain empty and idle
during the entire update, which may take up to 8 hours per
drive.
 The drives to update must be configured in a storage partition.
 To update the firmware of a Global Spare, first substitute the Global
Spare drive for a drive assigned to a partition. After the Global Spare
drive completes the firmware update process, it can be removed from
the partition and returned to the pool of spare drives (see Use the
Global Spare Drive on page 411 for more information).

486
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

Download the Drive Firmware

If your library has Internet access, you can download the drive firmware
update directly from the Spectra Logic package server. The drive firmware
package is downloaded during the update process, and does not need to
be downloaded beforehand.
— OR —
Download the recommended drive firmware from the Spectra Logic
Technical Support portal, and save it to a USB device or a package server.
1. Connect to the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal.
2. Select Downloads > Tape Drive Firmware.
3. On the Tape Drive Firmware page (see Figure 309 on page 482), locate
the appropriate drive firmware with respect to drive type (LTO or
TS11xx), generation (for example, LTO-7), interface type (for example,
SCSI or Fibre), and form factor (full-height or half-height).
4. Click the firmware version name in the column labeled Package File
(For Staging).
Notes:  The link in the column labeled Current Firmware Version is for
updating the drive firmware using ITDT (Update Using
ITDT on page 483) do not select this file if you are updating
drive firmware using Package Update.
 If you are updating drive firmware in a library running
BlueScale12.7.02 or later, select a package ending with the
letter “s”, which indicates a digitally signed package. If you
are updating drive firmware in a library running a BlueScale
version prior to 12.7.02, select a package ending with the
letter “z”, which indicates an unsigned zip package.
5. Use your web browser’s download features to save the file to one of the
following locations:
 The root directory of a USB device.
Notes:  The library only recognizes FAT-formatted, not NTFS-
formatted, USB devices.
 Not all USB devices are compatible with the library. If you
are unable to access a USB device from the library, remove it
and use a different one.
 Do not unzip the downloaded file.
— OR —
 A previously configured package server.
Note: The package server option is only available if you previously
configured a package server. Refer to Configure a Package
Server on page 144 for more information.

487
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

Stage the Firmware

1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. If you downloaded the drive firmware package to a USB device,
connect the USB device to a port on the LCM or the operator panel
(T950B only) and allow time for the device to mount before continuing.
3. Select Maintenance > Package Update to display the Package Update
screen.
4. Click Begin Drive Update.

Figure 310 The Package Update screen.

5. If the License Agreement screen displays, read the license agreement,

then click Accept.
Note: If you decline the agreement, you are not able to update the
drive firmware using this method.

488
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

6. The Select Package screen lists the filenames for the firmware update
packages.

Figure 311 Select the package for the drive firmware update.

7. Select the correct drive firmware package from the list.

Note: If the package does NOT display in the USB or Package server
section, you may have downloaded the wrong signed/unsigned
package type.
Update packages may be found on the sources described in the table
below. Each drive firmware package contains firmware for only one
drive generation.
Source Description
Spectra Logic Select and download the desired drive firmware package from Spectra Logic’s
package server to the memory card in the LCM.
Notes:
 The library must have a connection to the Internet before you can use this option
(see Configure Network Settings on page 121 for instructions for configuring
network settings).
 If directed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support, update the IP address
and package directory for the Spectra Logic package server (see Configure a
Package Server on page 144 for instructions for configuring a package server).
Configured Select the desired drive firmware package stored on a previously configured
Package Server package server, if you have one available.
(server name varies) Note: This option is only available if you previously configured a package server
(see Configure a Package Server on page 144 for instructions for configuring a
package server).
Memory Card Select the desired drive firmware package from packages already stored on the
memory card in the LCM.

489
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

Source Description
USB Device Select the desired drive firmware package from packages stored on a USB
device. There is a brief delay while the library accesses the USB device when
you select this option.
Notes:
 The USB Device option is only available if you connected a USB device
containing the update package in Step 2 on page 488.
 The update package must be stored in the root directory of the USB device.

8. Click Next. The Drive Staging Details screen displays.

9. On the Drive Staging Details screen, each drive displays either in the
Update or Unchanged section, depending on whether the drive firmware
in the update package is different from the drive’s current firmware.

Figure 312 The Drive Staging Details screen.

Notes:  Depending on the location of the file, there may be a few

minutes of delay before the information displays.
 If no installed drives match the selected firmware, the Drive
Package Details screen displays, instead of the Drive Staging
Details screen.

Figure 313 The Drive Package Details screen.

490
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

10. Click Begin Staging. The Package Update Results screen displays.

Figure 314 The Package Update Results screen.

All drives that require an update begin staging automatically. This can
take up to 8 hours for LTO drives and up to 16 hours for TS11xx
technology drives.
Notes:  Staging only prepares the drive for the update process. After
staging is complete, you can choose which drives to update
in Step 2 on page 493.
 There may be a few minutes of delay before the Package
Update Results screen displays.
11. Click Finished on the Package Update Results screen. The firmware
staging runs in the background, allowing the library to perform other
tasks.
The Drives screen displays the staging status while the process is active.

The Drives screen displays... when...

The drive firmware is staging to the drive. The drive
icon changes to the staging drive icon, and the staging
status line displays.
Note: A Global Spare icon does not change to the
Drive Staging icon while firmware is staging to it.
However, the staging status line displays.
The drive firmware is finished staging to the drive, and
is available to be used to update the drive.

12. When the staging process completes, a system message displays.

Note: If there are any failures in staging the firmware to the drives, a
system message informs you of the failure. Follow the remedy
instructions on the system message and then reset the drive to
restart the staging process.

491
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

Discontinue Background Operations

You cannot update drive firmware if the library is actively running any
background operations, including Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, and
PostScan.
If you do not want to wait for a Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or
PostScan operation to complete, you can stop the Media Auto Discovery or
PreScan operation or pause the PostScan operation. For other background
operations, wait for the process to complete.
 Click Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen
to stop a Media Auto Discovery or PreScan operation (see Stop the
Discovery Process on page 310).
 Click Pause PostScan on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen
to pause the PostScan operation for one hour (see Pause the PostScan
Process on page 319).

Discontinue Backups and Empty the Drives

Before applying the drive firmware update, discontinue all backup
operations and remove any cartridges from the drives.

Attempting to update the firmware while the library is busy or when the drives
Caution contain tapes may result in the update failing, failed backup jobs, or permanent
damage to the drives. If you did not already do so, stop all backup operations and
remove all tapes from the drives you are updating.

 If possible, use your storage management software to move any

cartridges that are currently in drives back to their storage locations.
 If you cannot use your storage management software, then move
the cartridges as described in Moving Cartridges Within a Partition
on page 278.

Apply the Update

1. On the Drives screen, click Staged Drive Firmware Update. The Staged
Drive Firmware Update screen displays.

Figure 315 Click Staged Drive Firmware Update.

492
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

2. Select or clear each drive’s check box to indicate whether or not to

update the drive.
Note: If a drive is not empty, it is still included in this list; however, its
check box is disabled, with a note indicating that a tape is loaded
in the drive.

Figure 316 Select the drives to update.

3. Click Next. The drive firmware update process begins updating the
selected drives in parallel. A progress screen displays until the process
completes, in approximately 15 to 30 minutes.

The Drives screen displays... when...

The library starts the firmware update process.
The staging status line changes to “Committing”.

The drive firmware update process is complete.

The staging drive icon changes back to the drive icon,
and the staging status line disappears.

4. After the drive firmware update completes, the Staged Firmware

Update Result screen displays the results of the update process. Click
OK to return to the Drives screen.

Figure 317 Click OK to return to the Drives screen.

5. After the update is complete, use your storage management software to

restart any backup processes.

493
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

Update Using the Drive Firmware Update Wizard

The Drive Firmware Update wizard lets you use one or more firmware
tapes to update multiple drives within a partition, without interrupting
normal library operations in other partitions. The updates are performed
as a background operation whenever the library determines that one of the
drives selected for update is empty.
Notes:  You cannot use a Global Spare drive to replace a failed drive
while the library is actively running the Drive Firmware
Update wizard in the partition.
 You cannot use the Drive Firmware Update wizard to update
a TS11xx technology drive.

Requirements
 DLM must be enabled (see Enabling DLM on page 336).
Note: Enabling MLM automatically enables DLM.
 The drives to be updated must be configured in a storage partition.
 The drives to be updated must be offline to the host.
 The firmware update tape must be in a magazine stored in the storage
partition’s entry/exit pool.
Note: The partition must have entry/exit chambers configured to use
this wizard.
 The drives are updated one partition at a time.
 To update the firmware of a Global Spare, first substitute the Global
Spare drive for a drive assigned to a partition. After the Global Spare
drive completes the firmware update process, it can be removed from
the partition and returned to the pool of spare drives (see Use the
Global Spare Drive on page 411 for more information).

Discontinue Backups and Empty the Drives

Before beginning the drive firmware update process, you must discontinue
all backup operations and remove any cartridges from the drives you are
updating.

Attempting to update the firmware when the drives contain tapes may result in the
Caution upgrade failing, failed backup jobs, or permanent damage to the drives. If you did
not already do so, stop all backup operations and remove all tapes from the drives
you are updating.

 If possible, use your storage management software to move any

cartridges that are currently in drives back to their storage locations.
 If you cannot use your storage management software, then move
the cartridges as described in Moving Cartridges Within a Partition
on page 278.

494
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

Import the Firmware Update Tapes

1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator
privileges.
2. Insert a firmware update tape into a TeraPack magazine (see Figure 148
on page 235). Make a note of the barcode label on the cartridge so that
you can identify it after it is imported.
Note: If the cartridge is not labeled with a barcode, pay attention to
which slot you use (as viewed from the TAP door, slot 1 is at the
back of the magazine; slot 10 is at the front).
3. Import the magazine into the library’s entry/exit pool as described in
Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition on page 237.
Notes:  If necessary, export a magazine from the entry/exit pool to
provide an empty chamber for the magazine containing
firmware update tapes (see Exporting or Exchanging
Magazines and Cartridges on page 248).
 Some backup software atomically moves tapes from entry/
exit slots into the storage partition. If this cannot be disabled
in the software or you cannot shutdown the software to
prevent this, you cannot use this process.

Perform the Update

1. Select Configuration > DLM to display the Drives screen.

Figure 318 Click Drive Firmware Update on the Drives screen.

2. Click Drive Firmware Update to launch the update wizard. The Drive
Firmware Update screen displays showing the information for the last
partition that was viewed.

495
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

3. Select the partition containing the drives you want to update from the
drop-down list, then click Go. The Drive Firmware Update screen
refreshes to show the drives assigned to the selected partition.

Figure 319 Select the partition for the drives you want to
update.

4. Select the drives that you want to update.

Important If you have multiple drive generations in the same partition, make sure that you
only select one generation at a time. Each drive generation uses different firmware.

5. Click Next. The Drive Firmware Update Tape Selection screen displays
with a list of the cartridges currently in the entry/exit pool for this
partition. Select the firmware tapes you want to use for the update.

Important If you have firmware update tapes for multiple drive generations in the same
magazine, make sure that you select the firmware update tapes that correspond to
the generation of the drives you selected in Step 4 on page 496 or the update fails.

Figure 320 Select the firmware tapes you want to use for the
update.

496
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

6. Click Start Update to begin the background operation to update the

selected drives. The Drive Firmware Update screen refreshes to show
that the update operation is running.

Figure 321 Drive Firmware Update screen showing an

update running.

After each drive is updated, the library posts a system message

indicating whether or not the update was successful.
Note: Once the update process begins, you cannot start any additional
Drive Firmware Update operations until the currently running
process either completes or is stopped.
7. If you need to change the library configuration, modify a partition, or
make other changes that are restricted while background operations are
running, click Stop Update. The library completes any updates that are
currently in progress and then returns the firmware tape to the magazine.
8. Export the firmware update tape from the library (see Exporting or
Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges on page 248) and store it for
future use.
9. Use your storage management software to restart backup processes.

Update Using the Update Drive Firmware Utility

The Update Drive Firmware utility uses a firmware tape to update a single
drive or all of the drives in a single partition.
Note: You cannot use the Update Drive Firmware Utility to update a
TS11xx technology drive.

Requirements
 The drives to be updated must be configured in a storage partition.
 The firmware update tape must be in a magazine stored in the storage
partition’s entry/exit pool.
Note: The partition must have entry/exit chambers configured to use
this wizard.
 The drives are updated one partition at a time.
 To update the firmware of a Global Spare, first substitute the Global
Spare drive for a drive assigned to a partition. After the Global Spare
drive completes the firmware update process, it can be removed from
the partition and returned to the pool of spare drives (see Use the
Global Spare Drive on page 411 for more information).

497
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

Discontinue Background Operations

You cannot update drive firmware if the library is actively running any
background operations, including Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, and
PostScan.
If you do not want to wait for a Media Auto Discovery, PreScan, or
PostScan operation to complete, you can stop the Media Auto Discovery or
PreScan operation, or pause the PostScan operation. For other background
operations, wait for the process to complete.
 Click Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen
to stop a Media Auto Discovery or PreScan operation (see Stop the
Discovery Process on page 310).
 Click Pause PostScan on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen
to pause the PostScan operation for one hour (see Pause the PostScan
Process on page 319).

Discontinue Backups and Empty the Drives

Before beginning the drive firmware update process, discontinue all
backup operations and remove any cartridges from the drives.

Attempting to update the firmware while the library is busy or when the drives
Caution contain tapes may result in the update failing, failed backup jobs, or permanent
damage to the drives. If you did not already do so, stop all backup operations and
remove all tapes from the drives you are updating.

 If possible, use your storage management software to move any

cartridges that are currently in drives back to their storage locations.
 If you cannot use your storage management software, then move the
cartridges as described in Moving Cartridges Within a Partition on
page 278.

Import the Firmware Update Tapes

1. Log into the library as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
2. Insert a firmware update tape into a TeraPack magazine (see Figure 148
on page 235). Make a note of the barcode label on the cartridge so that
you can identify it after it is imported.
Note: If the cartridge is not labeled with a barcode, pay attention to
which slot you use (as viewed from the TAP door, slot 1 is at the
back of the magazine; slot 10 is at the front).

498
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

3. Import the magazine into the library’s entry/exit pool as described in

Importing into a Storage or Cleaning Partition on page 237.
Notes:  If necessary, export a magazine from the entry/exit pool to
provide an empty chamber for the magazine containing
firmware update tapes (see Exporting or Exchanging
Magazines and Cartridges on page 248).
 Some backup software atomically moves tapes from entry/
exit slots into the storage partition. If this cannot be disabled
in the software or you cannot shutdown the software to
prevent this, you cannot use this process.

Perform the Update

1. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance
Tools screen displays.
2. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
3. Click Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen
displays.
4. Click Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced
utilities.
5. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Update Drive
Firmware. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility.

Figure 322 Select the drive to update and the location of the
firmware tape.

499
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Firmware

6. Use the Select drive or partition to update drop-down list to select the
drive(s) that you want to update. You can choose to:
 Update all of the drives in a partition.
–OR–
 Update a single drive (selected by its BlueScale identifier).
Note: Drives are identified according to their physical location in the
library. For example: FR1/DBA2/DRV4 refers to the upper right
drive in DBA2 of frame 1. See Drive Identifiers on page 67 for
additional information about identifiers.
7. Use the Select EE slot of the firmware tape drop-down list to select the
slot in the magazine where the firmware update tape is located.
Note: If you use the wrong firmware tape or try to update a drive that
is not compatible with the firmware tape, the update operation
fails.
8. Click Run Utility to start the update process.

Important  Once the firmware update process starts, it cannot be canceled.

 Do not power off the library or any component being updated during the
firmware update process.

 The library retrieves the firmware tape and inserts it into the first
drive. When the drive completes the update, it ejects the tape. The
library then either returns the tape to the entry/exit pool or inserts it
in the next drive to be updated.
 A progress screen displays for the duration of the update. When
completed, a Utility Results screen displays, showing the results of
the update process.
9. Repeat the steps, as needed, for the remaining drives in the library.
10. Export the firmware update tape from the library (see Exporting or
Exchanging Magazines and Cartridges on page 248) and store it for
future use. You can use the tape to update the firmware in a
replacement drive if it is at a lower firmware level.
11. Use your storage management software to restart backup processes.

500
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Updating Drive Device Drivers

UPDATING DRIVE DEVICE DRIVERS

Overview Some operating environments require you to install device
drivers before the application software can correctly communicate with the
drives. When you update the drive firmware, you may also need to update
the device driver for the drive.
Use the following instructions to locate and download the IBM LTO drive
device driver on the IBM Support Fix Central website.
Notes:  You must have an IBM account to log in and download the
drivers.
 You can connect to the Fix Central website either from the
Spectra Logic Technical Support portal or directly at
https://ibm.com/support/fixcentral. If you connect directly,
skip to Step 4 in the following instructions.
1. Log into your account on the Technical Support portal at
support.spectralogic.com
Note: See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 504 for
information about accessing the Technical Support portal.
2. Select Downloads > Device Drivers.
3. On the Device Drivers page, click IBM LTO-3, -4, -5, -6, -7, and -8 (IBM
TotalStorage 3580 Ultrium 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8) to open IBM Fix Central
in a new web page.
4. Log in to the IBM Fix Central web page.
5. Click the Select Product tab.
6. Select the following options:
 Product Group = System Storage
 Select from System Storage = Tape systems
 Select from Tape Systems = Tape drivers and software
 Select from Tape drivers and software = Tape device drivers
 Platform = Select your operating system from the drop-down list
Click Continue. A list of the available drivers displays on the Select fixes
page.
7. Click Show Fix Details to view information about each driver.
8. Select the driver you want to download and click Continue. If required
by your IT department, select the WHQL certified driver, if available.
9. Complete the remaining pages to begin the download process.
10. Save the file containing the driver to a known location on the server
that is using the drive.
11. Install the device driver following the instructions in the
documentation for your operating environment.

501
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Adding or Replacing a Drive

ADDING OR REPLACING A DRIVE

Only use drives obtained from Spectra Logic in the library. When replacing
a drive that is assigned to a partition, the new drive must be the same
technology and generation as the one you replace.
Note: Half-height drives may be replaced by full-height drives and
full-height drives can be replaced by half-height drives as long
as they are the same technology and generation.

Add a Drive to the Library

Important Adding drives to an existing partition can cause the library to reassign element
addresses. To avoid errors, make sure that when you install a new drive, you
reconfigure the element addresses your storage management software uses to
access the drives (refer to your software documentation for instructions).

If your library has unused drive bays, you can purchase additional drives
from Spectra Logic and add them to the library.
1. Log into the library as either a superuser or administrator.
2. Select Configuration > DLM (or Drives) to view a list of all the drives
currently installed in the library.

Figure 323 The Drives screen.

3. Click Add next to a drive location that does not have a drive installed.
4. Follow the Spectra T200, T380, T680, T950, and TFinity Drive Installation
or Replacement procedure to install the drive.
5. If the drive has a Fibre Channel interface, connect it to an arbitrated
loop or fabric where the hosts reside.

502
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 15 — Maintaining the Drives Adding or Replacing a Drive

6. After you add the drive to the library, you must create or modify a
partition to assign it to the partition or configure it as a Global Spare
drive before you can use it. See Chapter 6 – Configuring and Managing
Partitions, beginning on page 186 for information about creating and
modifying partitions.

Replace a Drive
To replace a drive that failed, follow the instructions in the Spectra T200,
T380, T680, T950, and TFinity Drive Installation or Replacement procedure.
Use the cable you disconnected from the failed drive to connect the new
drive to a switch on the arbitrated loop or fabric where the hosts that use
the drives reside.

Figure 324 The Drives screen.

Important Do not click Remove. This option removes the drive from the partition. When the
replacement drive is installed, it is not assigned to the partition from which the
malfunctioning drive was removed.
If you click Remove and the selected drive is the only drive in the partition, the
partition is deleted.

After you replace the drive, do the following to resume operation:

 If you used the Global Spare option to temporarily replace the
malfunctioning drive, you can now reclaim the Global Spare drive so
that it is again available for use (see Undo the Global Spare Drive on
page 414). The library automatically switches all incoming
communications to the new drive.
 If you did not use the Global Spare option, use your storage
management software to restart any backup processes that were
running to the replaced drive. This restart ensures that the software
recognizes the drive as working and available.

503
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 CHAPTER 16
Technical Support
Spectra Logic Technical Support provides a worldwide service and
maintenance structure, refined over many years to provide timely,
professional service.

Important A valid BlueScale Software Support key is required in order to obtain technical
support (see Service Contract Extension on page 529).

Topic
Accessing the Technical Support Portal this page
Create an Account page 505
Log Into the Portal page 507
Opening a Support Ticket page 507
Returns page 510

ACCESSING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT PORTAL

The Spectra Logic Technical Support portal provides access to the
Knowledge Base, the current version of BlueScale software for the library,
drive firmware, drive device drivers, and additional service and support
tools. You can also open or update a support incident and upload ASL files.

504
Chapter 16 — Technical Support Accessing the Technical Support Portal

Create an Account
Access to User Guides and compatibility matrices does not require you to
create an account. You must create a user account and log in to access
Release Notes or repair documents, to download the latest version of
BlueScale software, or to open a support incident.
Note: If you have multiple Spectra Logic products, the serial numbers
for all products are associated with your account. If you do not
see the serial numbers for all of your products when you log in,
contact Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on
page 7).
1. Access the Technical Support portal login page at
support.spectralogic.com.
2. On the home page, click sign up.

Figure 325 The Spectra Logic Technical Support portal home page.

505
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 16 — Technical Support Accessing the Technical Support Portal

3. Enter your registration information. Your account is automatically

associated with the serial numbers of all Spectra Logic products owned
by your site.
 If you have an invitation, follow the link and enter the invitation
code.

Figure 326 Follow the link to enter your invitation code or

enter your registration information.

 If you do not have an invitation, enter the requested information to

create your account. When you are finished, click Sign Up.
When the account is approved, you receive an email with an initial
password. Use your email address and the password provided in the email
to log in to your account. After you log in, you can change your password
if desired.

506
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 16 — Technical Support Opening a Support Ticket

Log Into the Portal

Use your email address and password to log into the Technical Support
Portal.

OPENING A SUPPORT TICKET

AutoSupport provides the easiest way to open a support ticket or incident.
See Chapter 11 – Configuring and Using AutoSupport, beginning on
page 345 for detailed information about configuring and using
AutoSupport.
You can also open a support incident using the Spectra Logic Technical
Support portal or telephone. Use the following instructions to open a
support incident through the portal.
1. Make notes about the problem, including what happened just before
the problem occurred.
2. Gather the following information:
 The serial number of the affected library (see Determine the Library
Serial Number on page 113)
 Type of host system being used
 Type and version of host operating system being used
 Type and version of host storage management software being used
3. Submit a support incident.
 To use the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal:
a. Log into your account on the Technical Support portal at
support.spectralogic.com.
Note: See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 504 if you
did not previously create an account on the Technical Support
portal.

507
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 16 — Technical Support Opening a Support Ticket

b. Select Incidents & Inventory > Open or View Incidents, or on the

Home page, click Open a Support Incident.

Figure 327 Select Incidents & Inventory > Open or View Incidents to open a
support incident.

c. On the Open or View Incidents page, you are given an

opportunity to search for existing support content that may help
you solve your problem immediately. If the search does not
provide an answer, click Open a New Incident.

Figure 328 Click Open a New Incident.

508
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 16 — Technical Support Opening a Support Ticket

d. On the Create Incident page, enter the requested information

providing as much detail as possible. When you are finished,
click Create Incident.
Notes:  If you have multiple libraries and need to determine the
serial number of the affected library, see Determine the
Library Serial Number on page 113.
 If the serial number of the affected library is not listed in the
Product drop down, contact Technical Support (see
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
 If you do not have AutoSupport enabled, you can upload any
ASL logs generated by the library from the Create Incident
page.

Figure 329 The Create Incident page.

 To contact Spectra Logic Technical Support by telephone see

Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7.

509
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Chapter 16 — Technical Support Returns

RETURNS
Your Technical Support representative may ask you to return a problem
component to Spectra Logic for analysis and servicing. After you complete
a replacement procedure, return the defective part using ALL of the
packaging that the replacement part arrived in (including any anti-static
bags or foam inserts).

Severe damage can occur if the component is not packaged correctly. You may be
Caution invoiced if it is damaged due to improper or insufficient packaging.

Use the return label and instructions that were included with the
replacement part when preparing to ship the component you are
returning. If you cannot locate these, contact Spectra Logic for another
copy (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7). The return label and Return
Merchandise Authorization (RMA) printed on it are used to associate the
returned component with your account. To avoid being invoiced for failure
to return the component, do not ship the component back to Spectra Logic
without the RMA return label.

510
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 APPENDIX A
Best Practices
This appendix reviews best practices for using Media Lifecycle
Management, protecting library configuration data, and working with
media.

Topic
MLM Best Practices this page
Implementation Guidelines page 512
Usage Policy Guidelines page 512
Disaster Recovery Planning page 515
Back Up and Protect the Library Metadata page 515
Back Up the Library Metadata page 516
Verify and Protect the Metadata Backup page 518
Using Cartridges page 520
Labeling Cartridges page 520
Handling Cartridges page 521
Storing Cartridges page 522
Using Cartridges in the Library page 523
Cartridge Rotation page 524

MLM BEST PRACTICES

To effectively use MLM and ensure MLM and DLM data protection, plan a
strategy based on your data center needs and develop policies and
procedures to support that strategy. Having sound management policies
and procedures for media rotation and management is essential for
consistent, effective implementation.

511
Appendix A — Best Practices MLM Best Practices

Implementation Guidelines
Consider the following best practice guidelines as you prepare to
implement MLM in your environment.

Guideline Description
Identify the people The people who perform data backup at your site are typically the
responsible for backing up ones who are responsible for implementing and following MLM
data backup procedures.
Identify the users who have It may be wise to have more than a single user familiar with policies,
responsibilities that involve depending on the size of your organization, so that if one person is
MLM not available, another can take over.
Be consistent with partition Using consistent naming simplifies identifying a specific partition.
names Spectra’s suggested naming practice is to list the location, followed
by the library name, followed by the storage management software.
For example, Dallas/T950/NetBackup.
On an organizational level, The level of media management depends on the requirements for
determine the level of your environment. For example, you may choose to use Spectra’s
management your media guidelines for retirement for all media, or you may choose to retire
requires tapes that hold financial or legal data sooner than recommended.
See the Error and Warning health scores in Generate MLM Reports
on page 321 for information on when cartridges should be retired.

Usage Policy Guidelines

Consider the following guidelines when establishing your Media Lifecycle
Management policies.

Guideline Description
Choose a retirement guideline When implementing MLM, decide at the beginning on the criteria to
be used when determining when to retire a cartridge.
Spectra suggests using the Media Lifecycle Management health
icon, visible on the MLM Reports screen and on the Details screen
(Figure 192 on page 323 and Figure 193 on page 325, respectively)
for each tape, to assess the overall health of individual tapes. See
Generate MLM Reports on page 321 for information about using the
health icon to assess media health.
Only use MLM-enabled media For the most accurate tracking, do not import your MLM-enabled
and cleaning cartridges in media into non-Spectra Logic libraries or drive generations earlier
MLM-compatible libraries and than LTO-4. The cartridge MAM is not updated with information
drives about usage in those locations. As a result, the information about
usage in those locations is not recorded in the MLM database when
the cartridge is returned to your library.

512
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix A — Best Practices MLM Best Practices

Guideline Description
Use only Spectra Certified To ensure the best possible performance, use Spectra Certified
Media with MLM support (both Media. Check the Spectra Logic website for the most up-to-date
data and cleaning cartridges) media availability. Do not use any media that is not approved by
in the library Spectra Logic for use in the library.
The library uses information in the MLM database to monitor the
health of the media in the library. For MLM-enabled media, the
detailed health reports let you determine whether a particular data
cartridge is past its useful threshold or determine whether a
particular cartridge is experiencing high errors rates or retries. For
MLM-enabled cleaning cartridges, you are notified when a cartridge
is approaching the end of its useful life.
Although MLM tracks the general health of media that is not MLM-
enabled, detailed health information is not available for this media.
Do not routinely share LTO-4 Beginning with BlueScale12.0.7, after an LTO-4 cartridge is loaded
media between LTO-4 and into an LTO-5 or later generation drive, the algorithm used to
LTO-5 or later generation calculate the media health score whenever the cartridge is
drives subsequently loaded in an LTO-4 drive is adjusted to maintain
consistent media health reporting regardless of the generation drive
used with the cartridge.
As a best practice for your LTO-4 media, Spectra Logic recommends
that you configure LTO-4 drives in separate partitions from LTO-5
and later generation drives and that you do not routinely share
LTO-4 media between LTO-4 and LTO-5 or later generation drives.
Always operate the library If you disable and then re-enable Media Lifecycle Management, any
with Media Lifecycle loads, reads, writes, errors, and any other tape related events that
Management enabled occur while MLM is disabled are not recorded in the MLM database.
Enable load count alerts Load count alerts, used in combination with the media health icon,
let you monitor the health of individual tapes. Tapes with low load
counts, but with a yellow or red health icon are vulnerable to high
errors rates or retries.
For higher levels of notification, configure a threshold for the
maximum number of times a data cartridge can be loaded before an
alert is generated (see Enable and Configure MLM PreScan and
PostScan on page 206). When the number of loads exceeds this
threshold, MLM generates a system message listing the barcode of
the tape.
You can also enable an alert to notify you when the load count
recorded on the cartridge MAM differs from the load count stored
in the MLM database but none of the other data changed. This type
of discrepancy can indicate that the tape was loaded into a non-
Spectra Logic library. Use this alert as a security feature to let you
know when a tape was removed and loaded into a drive in a
different library.

513
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix A — Best Practices MLM Best Practices

Guideline Description
Regularly back up your MLM Determine how frequently to export the MLM database for storage.
database You can save the MLM database to a USB device or email it to a
previously configured mail recipient. The database can be loaded
back into the library in the event of an error. See Disaster Recovery
Planning on page 515 and Restore the MLM and DLM Databases on
page 406 for detailed information.
Backing up the MLM database produces a point-in-time snapshot of
the MLM database. Based on the number of tapes you routinely
import into and export from the library, determine how frequently
backups are needed to ensure that you can easily restore the MLM
database.
Enable non-MLM media alerts Alerts for non-MLM-enabled media notify you when a cartridge
that is not MLM-enabled is loaded into a drive.
Track exported cartridges When a cartridge is exported from the library, an asterisk (*) next to
the barcode indicates that it is currently out of the library. However,
all of the MLM data for the cartridge is still available. Define the
frequency with which you export the complete MLM report and
make a note of all exported tapes.
Choose relevant information When you save an MLM report (see Generate MLM Reports on
for saved reports page 321), you can choose between saving all MLM data or just the
data from the most recently viewed report.
You can save a copy of the MLM report as a comma-separated text
file (*.rpt) to a USB device, mail the saved report to previously
configured email recipient, or both. If desired, you can zip the file
before saving it (see Save an MLM Report on page 326).

514
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix A — Best Practices Back Up and Protect the Library Metadata

Disaster Recovery Planning

As a part of best disaster recovery planning and practices, Spectra Logic
strongly recommends backing up the MLM database to a USB device or
emailing it to a preconfigured mail recipient automatically after using
MLM for some period of time. In the event of a disaster, you can use the
backup to restore the MLM database information for the media in your
library instead of rebuilding it by loading each cartridge into a drive (see
Restore the MLM and DLM Databases on page 406).

Important The automatic weekly auto-save file reflects the state of the MLM database at the
time the backup was created. If MLM-enabled media is imported into or exported
from the library during the period between the automatic weekly auto-save
operations, the backup of the MLM database may not accurately reflect the library’s
inventory.
If you plan to import or export a large number of MLM-enabled cartridges, back up
the MLM database using the procedure described in Back Up the MLM and DLM
Databases on page 330 when you are finished to ensure that you have a backup
that accurately reflects the information in the database.

Notes:  Backing up the MLM database also backs up the DLM

database.
 For extra security, the library’s Auto Configuration Save
feature automatically backs up its configuration and the MLM
and DLM databases to the LCM memory card once a week
and whenever a partition is created or modified (see Use
Automatic Backup of the Library Configuration on page 151).
 If email for the auto-save backup is configured, the backups
are emailed to the designated recipient (see Enable Email for
the Auto Configuration Save File on page 126).
 See Back Up and Protect the Library Metadata on page 515
for additional disaster planning information.

BACK UP AND PROTECT THE LIBRARY METADATA

To ensure the availability of your library and encrypted data, protect
library metadata by following the procedures described in this section.
Library metadata includes library configuration data, the MLM and DLM
databases, and all BlueScale encryption key-related data.
Note: The DLM database is included in any operations that backup or
restore the MLM database.

515
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix A — Best Practices Back Up and Protect the Library Metadata

Having reliable backups of the library metadata is very important in the

case of disaster recovery and other situations where you need to restore the
library.

Losing your library’s metadata can have catastrophic effects — as can losing keys in
Caution any encryption key management system, especially when related to encrypted
data. If you lose all copies of all metadata:
 Your encrypted data is lost — you are unable to decrypt encrypted data without
the encryption keys.
 You need to completely reconfigure your library.
 You lose stored data about your media that is time-consuming to recover.

Back Up the Library Metadata

Use the following methods to create backup copies of all of your library’s
metadata. The following table shows the file names and locations of the
data saved during each type of backup operation.
This backup Creates...
method...
Auto Configuration A time-stamped zip file containing the library configuration, the MLM
Save Option database, and the DLM database. The file is stored on the memory card in the
LCM and can be sent as an email attachment to a previously configured mail
recipient. The zip file is named <date-time>cfg.zip, where <date-time>
is the time stamp for when the zip file was created.
 See Enable Email for the Auto Configuration Save File on page 126 for
information about configuring the Auto Configuration Save feature so that
the library automatically sends an email with the current Auto Configuration
Save file to a pre-configured mail recipient once a week and whenever you
create or modify a library partition.
 See Use Automatic Backup of the Library Configuration on page 151 for
information about using this method to back up the library configuration and
the MLM and DLM databases.
Note: The Auto Configuration Save feature does not automatically create a
backup when you make other configuration changes to the library.

516
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix A — Best Practices Back Up and Protect the Library Metadata

This backup Creates...

method...
Save MLM A time-stamped file containing the current MLM and DLM databases. The file
Database is saved to a USB device or emailed to a previously configured mail recipient.
Advanced Utility The filename depends on whether the LCM is a Spectra PC or a Spectra LS and
includes the time stamp <date-time> to indicate when the backup was
created. If the backup file was saved to a USB device, it is located in a folder
called \SavedMLMDB.
 Spectra PC — cminfo_<date-time>.dat
— OR —
 Spectra LS — xmlinfo<date-time>.db
— OR —
 Zipped file — cminfo_<date-time>.zdt
(The zip filename is the same for both the Spectra PC and the Spectra LS.)
Back Up the MLM and DLM Databases on page 330 provides instructions for
using the utility.
Important: To ensure that you always have a current backup of the MLM and
DLM databases, back them up regularly.
Partition Wizard Multiple configuration files with the format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is a
and number between 0 and 9. You can choose to save the library configuration data
Save Library to a USB device or email it to a previously configured mail recipient.
Configuration  If the backup files are saved to a USB device, they are located in a folder
Utility called SavedConfigs\<date-time>, where <date-time> is the time
stamp for when the backup was created.
 If the backup was sent as an email attachment, the files are in a file named
<date-time>cfg.zip, where <date-time> is the time stamp for when
the zip file was created.
Important: The backup file of the library configuration does not include the
MLM and DLM databases.
Important: Backing up the library configuration also backs up any BlueScale
encryption keys that are stored in the library at the time the file is created.
 Partition Wizard — The partition wizard prompts you to save the library
configuration whenever you create or modify a partition. See Chapter 6 –
Configuring and Managing Partitions, beginning on page 186 for detailed
information about creating and modifying partitions.
 Save Library Configuration Utility — Use the Save Library Configuration
utility to back up the updated library configuration whenever you make a
configuration change to the library. This is especially important when you
make configuration changes that do not result in an Auto Configuration Save
file. See Use Manual Backup of the Library Configuration on page 151 for
instructions.

517
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix A — Best Practices Back Up and Protect the Library Metadata

This backup Creates...

method...
Export Key Option A key file containing the exported BlueScale encryption key. The file is named
name.bsk or name.bss, where name is the moniker you assigned to the key
when you created it. You can choose to save the exported key file to a USB
device or email it to a previously configured mail recipient.
Use the BlueScale Export Key option to export BlueScale encryption keys to a
USB device as soon as you create them. The exported keys are encrypted and
password protected. See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for
instructions.
CAUTION: As a matter of best practice, Spectra Logic recommends exporting
BlueScale encryption keys to a USB device instead of using email.
Although emailing BlueScale encryption keys is supported by the library,
doing so presents security issues, including the following:
 Copies of encryption keys may be left on the email servers used for sending
and receiving email and are thus subject to compromise.
 The difficulty in verifying where all the copies of emailed encryption keys
may be located can make security audits more challenging.

Verify and Protect the Metadata Backup

Do the following to ensure that your metadata is protected and available
when you need it:
1. As soon as you create and export the backup files, check the exported
data to make sure the correct files are present and accessible.
 Plug the USB device into a computer or laptop.
 If you emailed the metadata (the data is sent as an attachment), save
the data to a USB device, and then check the data in the email
attachment and the data on the USB device.

518
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix A — Best Practices Back Up and Protect the Library Metadata

The following figures show examples of the files you see when you
check your USB device or the email attachment.
Saved Data Details
Encryption key
(T950_SF2.bsk)

Note: The screen shown here also includes the SavedMLMDB and
SavedConfigs folders.
MLM and DLM
data

Note: In this example the file has a .zdt extension because you chose to zip the
file when you created it.
Configuration data

Note: The files are located in the \SavedConfigs\<date-time> folder, where

<date-time> in this example is 2011-08-11 11_14_06.

2. Store at least one USB device containing the backup files off-site. After you
have several weeks of backups stored off-site, rotate back through them.
3. When you run through disaster recovery exercises, test restoring the
library using the backup files from both your USB devices and your
saved email attachments. See Restoring the Library Configuration on
page 398 for instructions.

519
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix A — Best Practices Using Cartridges

USING CARTRIDGES
The following sections describe best practices for using cartridges and for
managing your media inventory. All library user groups have privileges
that allow them to use the library’s user interface to perform the cartridge
handling and media management operations described in this appendix.
Because handling cartridges requires physical interaction with the library,
much of the information in this appendix is not applicable when you are
accessing the library using the BlueScale web interface.
Note: See MLM Best Practices on page 511 for additional guidance
when using Spectra Certified Media with MLM support.

Labeling Cartridges
If you are not using pre-labeled Spectra Certified Media (both data and
cleaning cartridges), be sure to label all cartridges with the appropriate
barcode labels. Position each label in the indented area on the cartridge, as
illustrated in Figure 330. See Barcode Label Specifications on page 556 for
detailed information about preparing and using barcode labels.

Do not place labels on any surface of the cartridge except the area shown in Figure 330.
Caution A loose label can become dislodged and damage the drive.

CAUTION: Do not place

labels on any surface of the
cartridge except the front!

Barcode label

Figure 330 Properly barcode label all cartridges (LTO cartridge shown).

520
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix A — Best Practices Using Cartridges

Handling Cartridges
Incorrect handling or an incorrect environment can damage the LTO
cartridge or the magnetic tape inside it. To avoid damage to your
cartridges and to ensure the continued high reliability of your drives, use
the following guidelines:
 Do not drop the cartridge. If the cartridge drops, slide the cartridge
door back and ensure that the leader pin is properly seated in the pin-
retaining spring clips. Inspect the rear of the cartridge (the part that you
load into the tape drive first) and ensure that there are no gaps in the
seam of the cartridge case.
 Do not open any part of the cartridge other than the cartridge door. Do
not open any other part of the cartridge case. The upper and lower
parts of the case are held together with screws; separating them
destroys the usefulness of the cartridge.
 Do not handle tape that is outside of the cartridge. Handling the tape
can damage the tape’s surface or edges, which may interfere with read
or write reliability. Pulling on tape that is outside of the cartridge can
damage the tape and the brake mechanism in the cartridge.
 If tape is outside of the cartridge, slide the cartridge door back and turn
the hub to gently spool the tape back into the cartridge. Test the tape by
using your storage management software to write to the tape, and then
run a PostScan.
 Before you use a cartridge, let it acclimate for at least 24 hours to the
normal operating environment.
 Ensure that all surfaces of a cartridge are dry before inserting it into a
magazine.
 Do not stack more than six cartridges.
 Do not expose the tape cartridge to moisture or direct sunlight.
 Do not degauss a tape cartridge that you intend to use/reuse.
Degaussing makes the tape unusable.
 Do not expose recorded or blank tape cartridges to stray magnetic
fields (such as terminals, motors, video equipment, X-ray equipment,
or high-current cables or power supplies). Such exposure can cause the
loss of recorded data or make the blank cartridge unusable.
 Maintain the environmental conditions specified in Tape Media
Specifications on page 554.

521
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix A — Best Practices Using Cartridges

Storing Cartridges
While in use, cartridges are stored in TeraPack magazines inside the
library. When the cartridges are outside of the library, Spectra Logic
recommends storing them in magazines with dust covers.

Figure 331 TeraPack magazines with barcode labeled cartridges and plastic
dust cover (LTO magazines shown).

Storing and handling cartridges in magazines helps to eliminate errors

resulting from mishandling individual cartridges, which is the leading
cause of cartridge damage. An optional clear plastic dust cover snaps onto
the magazine to protect the cartridges.
Whenever you remove cartridges from your library, be sure to store them
properly to maximize archival life and ensure data integrity. Follow these
guidelines for proper cartridge storage:
 Store cartridges in a suitable environment (see Tape Media
Specifications on page 554).
 Keep the storage location as free of airborne particulates as possible. To
eliminate obvious sources of particulates, do not permit anyone to
smoke, eat, or drink near the storage area, and do not store cartridges
near a copier or printer that may emit toner and paper dust.
 Store cartridges with the write-protect switch in the protected position
(see Preparing Cartridges for Use on page 232).
 Store cartridges as soon as possible after you remove them from the
library. Immediate storage helps avoid many of the conditions that can
damage tapes, such as temperature and humidity fluctuations,
particulate contamination, and excessive handling.
 If you plan to ship a TeraPack magazine, make sure that you have a
proper shipping container and that you use adequate packing material.
The TeraPack carrying cases available from Spectra Logic are designed
for safely transporting TeraPack magazines off site and are compatible
with Iron Mountain.

522
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix A — Best Practices Using Cartridges

Using Cartridges in the Library

This section describes the best practices for using cartridges in the library.
 Use only cartridges from approved vendors in the library. See
Appendix B – Media & Upgrades, beginning on page 527 for more
information about Spectra Certified Media.
 Make sure that the entry/exit pool contains one or more empty
TeraPack magazines. This is particularly important when your storage
management software ejects tape cartridges from a partition.
If the entry/exit pool does not have any empty slots available for the
ejected media, then the storage management software must wait until
empty slots become available. The simplest way to avoid this delay is to
import one or more empty TeraPack magazines after you export media
from the library.
Alternatively, always make sure that you import full TeraPack
magazines into the library, then use your storage management software
to move (import) all of the new media into the storage pool for the
partition. After all of the media is moved to the storage pool, you will
end up with one or more empty magazines in the entry/exit pool.
 Make the entry/exit pool large enough to accommodate all of the
cartridges typically imported or exported during a single operation. For
example, if you run a nightly backup that uses 48 cartridges which are
then exported each morning, create an entry/exit pool of 50 LTO slots (5
chambers) or 54 TS11xx technology slots (6 chambers).
 After your library is in use for a period of time, and at least one set of
cartridges completes a round trip (exported from the library, stored off
site, then re-imported), the following rule of thumb applies: if you
remove a TeraPack magazine from the entry/exit pool, replace it with
either an empty magazine to accommodate future eject operations or a
full magazine whose cartridges are then imported into the storage pool
using your storage management software.
 During an import or export operation, do not leave the library
unattended for more than a few minutes. If you do, the import or
export operation times out so that the library can continue automated
backup tasks. To continue, restart the operation when you are ready.
 Enable Auto Drive Clean and configure a cleaning partition to clean
drives whenever required to help ensure optimal performance. If you
do not use the Auto Drive Clean feature, periodically check the Drives
screen to determine whether the drives require cleaning (see Cleaning a
Drive on page 472).
 Confirm the quality of your media and verify data integrity by
occasionally running restores using different drives.
 Confirm the quality of both media and drives by running periodic
disaster recovery drills. These drills test the overall ability to recover all
of your data using your backups.

523
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix A — Best Practices Using Cartridges

Cartridge Rotation
During normal backup operations, tapes are rotated into and out of the
library. This section provides a simple example of the library’s media life
cycle functionality to manage tape rotation. Using a backup plan similar to
the one described in the following example for a period of time establishes
a media rotation schedule for the library. The example assumes the
following:
 The library has a total of 17 licensed chambers and uses LTO media.
 2 chambers are assigned to the entry/exit pool (20 slots, or
2 TeraPack magazines).
 15 chambers are assigned to the storage pool (150 slots, or
15 TeraPack magazines).
 The library contains 15 full TeraPack magazines and two empty
TeraPack magazines.
 Two magazines containing 20 cartridges worth of backup data are sent
off site every Friday.
 After the data ages two weeks, the media is returned to the library and
re-used.
 The site adheres to the following best practices:
 Whenever a TeraPack magazine is exported, another magazine
(either full or empty) is imported.
 The library has enough empty TeraPack magazines to fill the entry/
exit pool.
This example shows that, by Week 3, the backup plan results in a full
media rotation in which the operator performed the following:
1. Removed and stored two full TeraPack magazines of media. Full
magazines were exported from the entry/exit pool and removed
through the TAP, resulting in an empty entry/exit pool.
2. Imported two full TeraPack magazines into the entry/exit pool through
the TAP and then used the storage management software to move the
media in the entry/exit pool into the storage pool.
Moving the media to the storage pool leaves two empty magazines in
the entry/exit pools, ready to accept media as the storage management
software identifies media as ready to be ejected from the library.
The following sections describe and illustrate the rotation process in more
detail.

524
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix A — Best Practices Using Cartridges

Initial Installation of Cartridges

The library is configured with a single partition and has a total of
17 licensed chambers assigned to either the entry/exit pool or storage pool.
When the library is initially installed, chambers are filled with TeraPack
magazines as described in the following illustration.

Library: Data center:

 Entry/Exit pool: 2 chambers 4 empty TeraPack
contain empty TeraPack magazines available.
magazines.
 Storage pool: 15 chambers
contain full TeraPack magazines.

End of Week 1
The storage management software ejects cartridges from the storage pool.
The library moves the cartridges to empty magazine slots in the entry/exit
pool, making them ready to be removed from the library and stored off
site.

Operator tasks: Results of operator tasks:

 Export 2 full TeraPack Off-site storage:
magazines from the 2 full TeraPack magazines.
entry/exit pool.
 Import 2 empty Entry/Exit pool:
TeraPack magazines into 2 chambers, each contains an
the entry/exit pool. empty TeraPack magazine.

Storage pool:
 13 chambers contain
full TeraPack
magazines.
 2 chambers contain
empty TeraPack magazines.
Data Center:
2 empty TeraPack magazines.

525
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix A — Best Practices Using Cartridges

End of Week 2
The storage management software ejects cartridges from the storage pool.
The library moves the cartridges to empty magazine slots in the entry/exit
pool, making them ready to be removed from the library and stored off site.

Operator tasks: Results of operator tasks:

 Export the 2 full TeraPack Off-site storage:
magazines from the entry/ 4 full TeraPack magazines
exit pool.
 Import 2 empty TeraPack Entry/Exit pool:
magazines into the entry/ 2 chambers, each contains an
exit pool. empty TeraPack magazine.

 Storage pool:
11 chambers contain
full magazines
 4 chambers contain
empty TeraPack
magazines.
Data Center: No reserved media or
magazines.

End of Week 3
The storage management software ejects cartridges from the storage pool.
The library moves the cartridges to empty magazine slots in the entry/exit
pool, making them ready to be removed from the library and stored off
site. The two full magazines stored off site in Week 1 are ready for re-use.
After importing the full magazines into the entry/exit pool, the storage
management software is used to move the cartridges to the storage pool,
leaving two empty magazines in the entry/exit pool.

Operator tasks: Results of operator tasks:

 Export the 2 full Off-site storage:
TeraPack magazines 4 full TeraPack magazines
from the entry/exit pool.
 Import 2 full TeraPack Entry/Exit pool:
magazines into the 2 chambers, each contains an
entry/exit pool. empty TeraPack magazine.
 Use storage
management software to  Storage pool:
move cartridges to the 11 chambers contain
storage pool. full magazines
 4 chambers contain
empty magazines
Data Center: No reserved media or
magazines.

526
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 APPENDIX B
Media & Upgrades
This appendix describes media, accessories, and upgrades that can be
purchased for use with the Spectra T950 library. It also describes how to
renew or extend the service contract for the library.

MEDIA AND MEDIA ACCESSORIES

Spectra Logic offers a variety of media and media accessories for the library.

Spectra Certified Media

The library supports LTO-4 and later generation tape media.
Media formulations There are two distinct formulations for LTO media:
Metal Particle (MP) and Barium Ferrite (BaFe). LTO-4 and LTO-5 media are
only available in the Metal Particle formulation. LTO-6 media can be
purchased in either the Metal Particle or the Barium Ferrite formulation.
LTO-6 drives are designed to run both MP and BaFe media. The two
formulations can be used in the same partition. LTO-7, LTO-8, and LTO-9
media is only available in the Barium Ferrite formulation.
TS11xx technology media (3592JC) is only available in the Barium Ferrite
formulation.
Certification process Spectra Certified Media begins with the highest
quality data cartridges received directly from the manufacturer. During
certification, each cartridge is MLM-enabled. In addition, LTO data
cartridges undergo the unique CarbideClean process, which removes
embedded particles and smooths the imperfections in the tape surface that
are a result of the manufacturing process. By cleaning the tape of the debris
that exists on all new media, CarbideClean reduces signal loss and
excessive tape head wear, thereby increasing the reliability, availability,
and longevity of the drives and media.

527
Appendix B — Media & Upgrades Media and Media Accessories

Barcode labels For your convenience, all Spectra Certified Media is

available pre-labeled with sequential barcode labels. Optional custom
barcode sequences can be ordered, if desired. Using Spectra sequential pre-
labeled media ensures that you will never have to deal with the problem of
duplicate barcodes. Spectra Logic’s barcode labels carry the same lifetime
guarantee that protects each Spectra Certified Media cartridge.
Media Storage Spectra Logic offers both TeraPack magazines and
Maintenance TeraPack magazines pre-loaded with Spectra Certified Media
data cartridges or cleaning cartridges, respectively. The magazines are
available with or without a protective dust cover to protect the cartridges
when they are not stored in the library. Empty magazines are also
available.
Check the Spectra Logic website at https://spectralogic.com for the most
up-to-date media availability.

Media and Media Accessories

Spectra Logic offers the following media and accessories:

Media or Accessory Description

Certified media Each pack contains one TeraPack magazine filled with Spectra Certified Media
packs (ten LTO data cartridges or nine TS11xx technology data cartridges) with
standard barcode labels. The media packs are available with or without a
protective dust cover.
Note: With the exception of WORM media, all Spectra Certified media is
MLM-enabled.
Certified media Each pack contains one TeraPack magazine filled with Spectra Certified Media
pack with custom (ten LTO data cartridges or nine TS11xx technology data cartridges) with custom
barcode labels barcode labels. The media packs are available with or without a protective dust
cover. You must order a minimum of four custom-labeled packs at a time.
Cleaning cartridges Spectra Certified cleaning cartridges are available in Maintenance TeraPack
magazines containing either five or ten LTO cleaning cartridges, or five or nine
TS11xx technology cleaning cartridges. The cleaning cartridges have “CLN” at
the beginning of the barcode sequence on their labels.
Notes:
 All Spectra Certified LTO cleaning cartridges are MLM-enabled. The
cleaning cartridges are stored in Spectra Maintenance TeraPack magazines,
which are identified by unique labels.
 Starting with BlueScale12.7.01, TS11xx technology cleaning tapes are
always treated as MLM-enabled by the BlueScale software.
Barcode labels (in High-contrast, high-resolution labels for reliable operation. Labels are available
series of 300) either with a standard barcode numbering sequence or with a custom barcode
numbering sequence. Barcode labels for cleaning cartridges are also available.
The barcode labels for cleaning cartridges have “CLN” at the beginning of the
barcode sequence.

528
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix B — Media & Upgrades Library Support and Upgrades

Media or Accessory Description

TeraPack Empty TeraPack magazines and Maintenance magazines are available. Each
magazines magazine holds ten LTO cartridges or nine TS11xx technology cartridges. The
magazines are available with or without a protective dust cover.
TeraPack magazine Carrying cases are designed for safely carrying TeraPack magazines off site.
carrying cases Cases are compatible with Iron Mountain.

How To Order
Check the Spectra Logic website at .spectralogic.com for the most up-to-
date media availability.
To purchase Spectra Certified Media and media accessories, contact your
sales representative (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7) or use the
Spectra Logic online store at https://.spectralogic.com/shop.

LIBRARY SUPPORT AND UPGRADES

The library ships with the service contract and options purchased with the
library. You can renew your service contract or purchase more capacity or
additional options described in this section at a later date.

Service Contract Extension

Your initial library purchase includes a BlueScale Software Support key
that is valid for the duration of the warranty period, or for the duration of
any uplifted or extended service contract you purchased with the library,
whichever is longer. A valid BlueScale Software Support key is required in
order to update the library’s BlueScale software and the firmware for
library components, and to obtain technical support.

Important When you renew or extend your service contract, you must generate a new
BlueScale Software Support key and enter the new key into the library to allow
continued access to updates (see Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options,
and Upgrades on page 110). If you have questions about your service agreement,
contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

When the original warranty or service contract expires, a renewal contract

can be purchased to continue service. Contact Spectra Logic to purchase a
renewal contract (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

529
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix B — Media & Upgrades Library Support and Upgrades

BlueScale Software Updates

Updates to the library’s BlueScale software are free of cost to customers
who have a current service contract with Spectra Logic Technical Support.
When a service contract is renewed, you must generate a new BlueScale
Software Support key and enter it into the library to allow continued access
to updates. See Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and
Upgrades on page 110 for information.

Important Updating the BlueScale software and the firmware for the library components
requires a current service contract with Spectra Logic Technical Support. The
BlueScale Software Support key associated with your service contract must be
stored in the library by entering it into the System Configuration screen. See
Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades on page 110 for
additional information.
If you have questions about your service agreement, contact Spectra Logic
Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

See Updating the BlueScale Software and Library Firmware on page 446
for update instructions.

Library Upgrades
Upgrades available for purchase include BlueScale software options and
library hardware upgrades. You can purchase options and upgrades from
your sales representative (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

Options
The following table describes the BlueScale software options that are
available. See Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and
Upgrades on page 110 for information about enabling these options.
Library Option Description
BlueScale BlueScale Encryption Standard Edition, included free on the T950 library,
Encryption provides a strong, easy to use method of encrypting data using a single key on
Standard Edition the library, letting you add encryption without adding complexity.
See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for more information about
BlueScale Encryption.
BlueScale In addition to the features of the standard edition, BlueScale Encryption
Encryption Professional Edition supports multiple keys on a library and additional security
Professional features so that you can implement more customized data encryption regimens.
Edition See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for more information about
BlueScale Encryption.

530
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix B — Media & Upgrades Library Support and Upgrades

Library Option Description

Spectra SKLM Spectra Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager (Spectra SKLM) is a centralized key
Encryption Key management system that allows you to manage the lifecycle of the encryption
Management keys and security certificates for your library. Spectra SKLM provides role-
System based access control, based on user privileges, for tasks that range from creating
and assigning encryption keys to the backup and restoration of data.
See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for more information about
the Spectra SKLM Encryption key management system.
KMIP Encryption The Key Management Interoperability Protocol (KMIP) using the HP
Kay Management Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM) is a centralized key management
using the HP system that allows you to manage the lifecycle of the encryption keys and
Enterprise Secure security certificates for your library. The library software uses the HP ESKM
Key Manager server to generate, store, and retrieve security keys used by tape drives for data
(ESKM) encryption.
See the Spectra Tape Libraries Encryption User Guide for more information about
the KMIP Encryption key management.
Capacity-On- The Capacity-On-Demand (CoD) feature lets you purchase a library that meets
Demand (CoD) your current storage needs and then purchase additional capacity later as
required. CoD reduces up-front costs, because users only pay for what they
currently need. As more capacity is required, it can be added in increments by
purchasing activation codes to license additional chambers in the library and
additional TeraPack magazines to fill the added chambers.
Note: If you purchase CoD capacity that exceeds the number of unlicensed
chambers available in the current library configuration, purchase another TBA
or add another frame. These upgrades and their installation by a certified
Spectra Logic field technician are priced separately from the CoD capacity
upgrade.
Rotation Manager Rotation Manager is a keyed option to simplify identifying tapes that were
moved off site. With Rotation Manager installed, the library sends an email
containing the barcode information for every piece of media and its off-site
location to a specified email address.
See Configure Rotation Manager on page 148 for additional information about
Rotation Manager.
Shared Library Shared Library Services (SLS) partitioning logically divides the library into
Services (SLS) multiple virtual libraries. With SLS, one library can support multiple media
types and provide dedicated library services to multiple user groups. The
default library configuration includes support for a single storage partition. If
you need additional storage partitions, you must purchase a Shared Library
Services (SLS) activation key.
See Library Partitions on page 59 for more information about using partitioning
in the library using SLS.

531
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix B — Media & Upgrades Library Support and Upgrades

Hardware Expansion and Upgrades

The Spectra T950 library is designed to expand to meet changing storage
requirements, as well as to achieve storage consolidation goals. These
expansion and upgrade options can be purchased through a sales
representative (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).
The following table describes the types of hardware expansion and
upgrades that are available.
Hardware Description
BlueScale Vision The web-based BlueScale Vision camera lets you visually monitor the interior of
Camera the library. In multi-frame libraries, additional BlueScale Vision cameras can be
installed in the expansion frames to provide monitoring of the entire library.
Each camera can view the interior of the frame where it is mounted and one
frame to either side. A BlueScale Vision camera is standard in the main frame.
You can purchase additional cameras when you order your library or as an
upgrade at a later date.
Note: Cameras must be installed by a certified Spectra Logic field technician.
Drive Bay Assembly If all of the currently installed DBAs in the library are fully populated with
(DBA) drives and your library includes one or more TeraPack Bay Assemblies (TBAs)
or shelves in the back of a main or drive frame, you can replace a TBA or
shelves with a DBA.
Note: Replacing a TBA or shelves with a DBA reduces the storage capacity of
your library.
TeraPack Bay If all of the currently installed chambers in the library are fully populated with
Assembly (TBA) or TeraPack magazines and your library includes more than one Drive Bay
Shelves Assembly (DBA), you can replace a DBA with a TBA or shelves (depending on
the age of your library).
Note: Replacing a DBA with a TBA or shelves can reduce data throughput.
Drives Each Drive Bay Assembly (DBA) holds up to four drives. If a DBA is not full,
additional drives can be installed to increase data throughput.
Important: Do not attempt to install drives purchased from other vendors in
the library. The drives used in the library are specifically configured for use in
the library and must be purchased from Spectra Logic.
Expansion Frames The storage capacity or performance of the library can be increased by adding
media or drive expansion frames, respectively.
See Drive and Media Frames on page 63 for information about the number and
types of expansion frames that can be added to the library.
Power Supplies The library requires a minimum of one 5/12 VDC power supply module per
populated DBA. It also requires a minimum of one 24 VDC robotics power
supply module in the main frame. Optionally, you can purchase an additional
supply per frame, which in combination with the dual AC power inputs,
provides redundancy and failover protection. The power supply modules
needed for the power redundancy configuration are an option you can
purchase separately or when you order the library.

532
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix B — Media & Upgrades Replaceable Components

Hardware Description
Robotics Interface A RIM can be used to provide the robotic control path for a partition. One RIM
Module (RIM) can support up to eight library partitions; one RIM2 can support up to 16
partitions.
Two or more RIMs are required if you want to use the BlueScale controller
failover feature for enhanced availability. A RIM2 can only be in a failover
pair with another RIM2.
USB Device You can use a USB device for saving backups of the library configuration and
MLM database, when you are updating the library’s BlueScale software, or as a
troubleshooting tool for use as instructed by Spectra Logic Technical Support.
USB devices are available for purchase from Spectra Logic for a nominal charge.
Note: The library only recognizes FAT-formatted, not NTFS-formatted, USB
devices.

How to Order
To purchase library upgrades, including a renewed or extended service
contract, determine your library Hardware ID (see Determine the Library
Serial Number on page 113) and then contact your sales representative (see
Contacting Spectra Logic on page 7).

REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS
Some library components are easy to remove and install. They are
classified as customer-replaceable units (CRUs) and they are available for
purchase based on your service contract with Spectra Logic Technical
Support (see Chapter 16 – Technical Support, beginning on page 504).
CRUs include:
 Air filters
 Drives
 RIMs and F-QIPs
 Library Control Module (LCM)
 Robotics Control Module (RCM)
 Power supply modules
 Power Control Module (PCM)
 Transporter (not the VAX column)
 Memory card in an LCM or RCM
Depending on your service contract, you may also be able to replace
certain additional components that are classified as field-replaceable units
(FRUs).

533
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 APPENDIX C
Specifications
This appendix provides specifications for the Spectra T950 library, as well
as the drives and media used in the library:

Topic
Library Specifications page 535
Data Storage Capacity page 535
Size and Weight page 537
Service Access Requirements page 538
Shipping and Storage Size and Weight page 539
Power Specifications page 539
Environmental Specifications page 543
Shock and Vibration Specifications page 544
Interoperability and Software Compatibility page 544
Interface Specifications page 544
Component Interface Connectors page 545
Network Interface Cable Requirements page 545
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Support page 546
NDMP Support page 546
Tape Drive and Media Specifications page 546
LTO Tape Drive Specifications page 546
TS11xx Technology Tape Drive Specifications page 551
Drive-Based Encryption Highlights page 553
Tape Media Specifications page 554
Barcode Label Specifications page 556

Notes:  The specifications in this chapter are subject to change

without notice.
 Discontinued components are not included in this chapter.
See Discontinued Components on page 56 for additional
information.

534
Appendix C — Specifications Library Specifications

LIBRARY SPECIFICATIONS
The following sections provide detailed specifications for the library
including data storage capacity, library size and weight, space
requirements, power specifications, environmental specifications, and
shock and vibration specifications.

Data Storage Capacity

The T950 library provides flexible storage capacity that expands from a
minimum of one media pack up to the maximum storage capacity of the
library. The capacity specifications in this section assume that only one type
of drive and media is installed in the library. When using mixed drives and
media, the library’s capacity depends on the number of frames in the
library, the number of drives and slots inside each frame, and the type(s) of
drives and media used. See Drive and Media Frames on page 63 for an
explanation of the different types of frames that can comprise the library.

T950 Main Frame

The following table shows the capacity of the T950 main frame in its two
basic configurations.

Frame Type Maximum Number of Native Capacity (TB)

T950 Number of Chambers
Main - LTO Drives (Slots)a LTO-5 LTO-6 LTO-7 LTO-M8 LTO-8 LTO-9
3 DBAs/ 12 95 (950) 1425 2375 5700 8550 11400 17100
3 TBAs
6 DBAs 24 83 (830) 1245 2075 4980 7470 9960 14940
a. A chamber contains a TeraPack magazine with 10 slots.

T950B Main Frame

The following tables show the capacity of the T950B main frame in its
available configurations.

Frame Type Maximum Number of Native Capacity (TB)

T950B Number of Chambers
Main - LTO Drives (Slots) a LTO-5 LTO-6 LTO-7 LTO-M8 LTO-8 LTO-9
1 DBA/ 4 100 (1000)b 1500 2500 6000 9000 12000 18000
shelves
3 DBAs/ 12 92 (920)c 1380 2300 5520 8280 11040 16560
3 TBAs or
shelves
6 DBAs 24 80 (800) 1200 2000 4800 7200 9600 14400
a. A chamber contains a TeraPack magazine with 10 slots.
b. 110 chambers (1100 slots) are accessible if there is a bulk TAP to the left of the main frame.
c. 98 chambers (980 slots) are accessible if there is a bulk TAP to the left of the main frame.

535
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Library Specifications

Frame Type Native Capacity (TB)

T950B Main - Maximum Number
TS11xx Number of Number TS1140 TS1150 TS1155 TS1160
Technology of Drives Chambers of Slots a Tech Tech Tech Tech
1 DBA/shelves 4 82 b 738 2952 7380 11070 14760
3 DBA/shelves 12 76 c 684 2736 6840 10260 13680
6 DBA/shelves 24 66 594 2376 5940 8910 11880
a. A chamber contains a TeraPack magazine with 9 slots.
b. 90 chambers (810 slots) are accessible if there is a bulk TAP to the left of the main frame.
c. 81 chambers (729 slots) are accessible if there is a bulk TAP to the left of the main frame.

Expansion Frames
The capacity of an expansion frame depends on the type of frame and its
configuration. For each expansion frame, add the frame’s capacity to that
of the main frame to calculate the capacity of the entire library.

Number Native Capacity (TB)

Maximum of
Frame Type LTO Number Chambers LTO-
Libraries of Drives (Slots) LTO-5 LTO-6 LTO-7 M8 LTO-8 LTO-9
Drive expansion 12 101 (1010) 1515 2525 6060 9090 12120 18180
 3 DBAs/
3 TBAs
 3 DBAs/ 12 107 (1070) 1605 2675 6420 9630 12848 19260
shelves
 6 DBAs 24 89 (890) 1335 2225 5340 8010 10680 16020
Media expansion None 130 (1300) 1950 3250 7800 11700 15600 23400
Bulk TAP None 91 (910) 1365 2275 5460 8190 10920 16380
expansion

Native Capacity (TB)

Frame Type Maximum Number Number
TS11xx Number of of TS1140 TS1150 TS1155 TS1160
Technology of Drives Chambers Slots a Tech Tech Tech Tech
Drive expansion 12 90 810 3240 8100 12150 16200
 3 DBAs/shelves
 6 DBAs 24 75 675 2700 6750 10125 13500
Media expansion None 110 990 3960 9900 14850 19800
Bulk TAP None 77 693 2772 6930 10395 13860
expansion
a. A chamber contains a TeraPack magazine with 9 slots.

536
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Library Specifications

Size and Weight

The following table shows the size and weight specifications for the library
frames and other components.
 All dimensions and weights are approximate.
 To calculate the approximate weight of a loaded library, calculate the
total weight for all of the frames and then add the weight for each drive,
RIM, and power supply, plus the weight of each full TeraPack
magazine.
 To calculate the dimensions of the entire library, total the dimensions
for each frame and add 1.625 inches to account for the outer cover
panels on each side of the library.
 When calculating space requirements, include the service access
requirements described in Service Access Requirements, below.
Parameter Main Frame Drive Expansion Frame Media Expansion Frame
Height a 79.125 to 82 in. (201.0 to 208.3 cm)
Width 29 in. (73.7 cm)
Depth b 43.25 in. (109.9 cm)
Weight c T950 6D0T: 720 lb (327 kg) T950
6D0T: 954 lb (433 kg) 3D3T: 750 lb (340 kg) 547 lb (248 kg)
3D3T: 933 lb (423 kg)
T950B T950B
6D0T: 895 lb (406 kg) 538 lb (244 kg)
3D3T: 876 lb (397 kg)
Each tape drive  LTO-4: 11.5 lb (5.2 kg) N/A
 LTO-5 and LTO-6: 11.6 lb (5.3 kg)
 LTO-7 FH: 11.2 (5.1 kg), HH: 9.5 lb (4.3 kg)
 LTO-8: FH: 11.0 (5.0 kg), HH: 9.6 lb (4.4 kg)
 LTO-9: FH: 11.1 (5.0 kg)
 TS11xx technology: 17.5 lb (8 kg)
Each TeraPack  with ten LTO cartridges: 5.1 lb (2.3 kg)
magazine  with nine TS11xx technology cartridges: 5.6 lb (2.5 kg)
Each RIM 5.0 lb (2.3 kg) N/A
Each power supply 4.0 lb (1.8 kg) N/A
Fully loaded T950 6D0T: 1,510 lb (685 kg) T950
maximum weight 6D0T: 1,722 lb (781 kg) 3D3T: 1,447 lb (656 kg) 1,210 lb (549 kg)
3D3T: 1,608 lb (729 kg)
T950B T950B
6D0T: 1,648 lb (748 kg) 1,201 lb (545 kg)
3D3T: 1,535 lb (696 kg)
a. The height of each frame can be adjusted to allow frame-to-frame leveling on uneven floors.
b. These dimensions represent the frames with the front and back cover panels installed.
c. These weights are with no drives, RIMs, power supplies, or media installed.

537
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Library Specifications

Service Access Requirements

Recommended clearance Providing 3 ft (0.9 m) of clearance on each side
of the library is highly recommended.
T950 minimum clearance A minimum of 2 ft (0.6 m) of clearance is required
on every side of the library for air flow and service access. If data center
equipment is on rolling racks and can be easily moved to provide 2 ft (0.6 m)
of clearance on each end of the library, then having equipment adjacent to the
ends of the library is acceptable. The 2 ft (0.6 m) of space at the front and rear
of the library must remain clear at all times to allow proper air flow.
T950B minimum clearance A minimum of 2 ft (0.6 m) of clearance is
required on the left and right ends of the library to provide service access
to the library. If data center equipment is on rolling racks and can be easily
moved to provide 2 ft (0.6 m) of clearance on each end of the library, then
having equipment adjacent to the ends of the library is acceptable. In
addition, a minimum of 2 ft (0.6 m) of clearance at the front and back of the
main frame, each drive expansion frame, and the bulk TAP frame is
required for airflow and service and operator access.

Important Providing 3 ft (0.9 m) of clearance on each side of the library is highly recommended.

Refer to the Spectra T950 Library Site Preparation Guide for detailed
information about space and access requirements.

538
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Library Specifications

Shipping and Storage Size and Weight

The following table provides the approximate dimensions and weights of
the pallet and boxes used to ship the library.

Height Width Depth Weight a

Crated Frame b 7.2 ft (2.2 m) 3.5 ft (1.1 m) 4.6 ft (1.4 m) 1,200 to 1,300 lb
(544 to 590 kg)
Crated VAX Column c 8 ft (2.4 m) 2.6 ft (0.8 m) 2.1 ft (0.6 m) 200 lb (91 kg)
Crated HAX Rail c
 2-frame 6.1 ft (1.9 m) 2.3 ft (0.7 m) 1.0 ft (0.3 m) 110 lb (50 kg)
 3-frame 7.7 ft (2.3 m) 3.0 ft (0.9 m) 1.4 ft (0.4 m) 150 lb (68 kg)
 5-frame 12.5 ft (3.8 m) 1.8 ft (0.5 m) 0.7 ft (0.2 m) 120 lb (54 kg)
 6-frame 15.0 ft (4.6 m) 1.8 ft (0.5 m) 1.1 ft (0.3 m) 120 lb (54 kg)
 8-frame d 7.3 ft (2.2 m) 2.0 ft (0.6 m) 1.4 ft (0.4 m) 85 lb (39 kg)
Component Pallet e 1.8 to 5.0 ft 3.5 to 14.9 ft 1.8 to 5.0 ft 200 to 400 lb
(0.6 to 1.5 m) (1.1 to 4.6 m) (0.6 to 1.5 m) (91 to 181 kg)
a. The weight does not include drives, media, RIMs, transporter, or power supply modules.
b. Each frame is shipped in a separate crate.
c. A single frame library ships with the VAX column and HAX rail installed in the frame.
d. Shipped in a palletized package rather than a crate.
e. The size and weight of the component pallet depends on the number and type of components shipped. To calculate the
approximate weight of all the components, add the weights for the drives, TeraPack magazines, RIMs, and power supplies listed in
Size and Weight on page 537. Components may also be shipped individually.

Power Specifications
This section describes the power specifications for the library. For
information about the different types of AC power modules, see Dual AC
Power Module on page 38.

Input Power Requirements

The main frame and drive expansion frames include dual AC power
modules. When using a redundant power configuration, connect each
input on the dual AC power module to a separate branch circuit, which
allows for failover in the event of a power failure in one of the circuits. I

If you are installing or moving the library and connecting new power cords to it, see
Caution the Spectra T950 LIbrary Site Preparation Guide for important information about
testing the power cords.

539
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Library Specifications

Power Rating
Each library frame is rated at 200 – 240 VAC at 16 amps (3840 watts
maximum). This power rating is based on a main frame with 24 LTO drives
and 6 RIMs, which is the configuration for maximum power consumption
by a single frame. The frames are not rated at 120 VAC due to the high
current required to supply the product.

Power Cord Specifications

The power cords included with the library are considered part of the
library and are not intended for use with any other equipment. See Supply-
End Connector Types on page 541 for the different types of cords available
from Spectra Logic.
Notes:  The supply-end connector is considered the disconnect for
the unit. Make sure that the socket-outlet for the AC
connection is in an accessible location near the library.
 The power cord must meet the specifications for the country
where the library is to be installed.
North America and Korea 200 – 240 VAC Power Cord The criteria for a
200-volt to 240-volt AC power cord in North America and Korea are as
follows:
Parameter Specification
Power cordage SJT type, three-conductor, 14 AWG minimum
Power input connectors  Male: Connector must be of the proper type,
rating, and safety approval (see Supply-End
Connector Types on page 541).
 Female: IEC 60320 C19

International 200 – 240 VAC Power Cord The criteria for an international
200-volt to 240-volt AC power cord are as follows:
Parameter Specification
Power cordage Flexible, HAR (harmonized) type H05VV-F, three
conductor, cord with minimum conductor size of
1.7 square millimeters (0.0026350 square inches).
Power input connectors  Male: Connector must be of the proper type,
rating, and safety approval for the intended
country (see Supply-End Connector Types on
page 541).
 Female: IEC 60320 C19

540
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Library Specifications

Supply-End Connector Types

The supply-end connector on the cord depends on the country where the
library is to be installed. The following table shows the supply-end
connector types used in each country.

Part Country of Use Plug Style Length Appearance

Number
9594 North America, NEMA L6-20P 14.8 ft (4.5 m)
Korea
7029 North America, NEMA L6-30P 14.8 ft (4.5 m)
Korea
6807 Japan NEMA L6-20P 13.9 ft (4.25 m)

8665 United Kingdom, IEC 60309 15 ft (4.6 m)

Continental
Europe

Grounding Requirements
Due to electromagnetic interference (EMI) filtering in each dual AC power
supply, the leakage current for main frames and drive frames is such that
they require a secure connection from the frame chassis to an earth ground.
Use one or more of the following methods for securing a ground
connection when installing a main frame or drive frame:
Note: Cord lock brackets and cords with locking connectors are not
compatible and cannot be used simultaneously.
 Add cord lock brackets (Spectra Logic part number 5497) to all drive
frames. See Installing Cord Locks on page 469 for more information.
 Use a cord with locking connectors at both ends, such as L6 20P to
locking C19 (Spectra Logic part number 9594).

Power Consumption and Cooling Requirements

The power and cooling requirements for the library depend on the number
and type of drives installed. The following table provides the maximum
power consumption and heat load for the base library and for each
additional component added to the base library. Use this information to
calculate the total maximum power consumption and heat load values,
which can be used to build a power budget for the library.

541
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Library Specifications

All values are measured at the AC input and include power supply
efficiency. The values are averages of observed hardware. In general, the
lighter the load on the power supplies, the less efficient they are. The
power supply efficiency in turn affects the power draw of all components.
Component Power Consumption Heat Load, Continuous
(watts) (BTU/hour)
Main frame a 183 625
Drive frame a 139 475
Media frame with fan 110 376
Media frame without fan 14 48
Bulk TAP frame 125 427
5/12 VDC power supply 33 113
24 VDC power supply 29 99
RIM 12 41
LTO-9 Fibre Channel  Read/write: 35 Read/write: 119
Full-Height
LTO-9 Fibre Channel or  Read/write: 35 Read/write: 119
SAS Half-Height
LTO-8 Fibre Channel  Read/write: 40 Read/write: 136
Full-Height  Idle: 15 b
LTO-8 Fibre Channel or  Read/write: 43 Read/write: 164
SAS Half-Height  Idle: 14 b
LTO-7 Fibre Channel  Read/write: 31 Read/write: 106
Full-Height  Idle: 20 b
LTO-7 Fibre Channel or  Read/write: 31 Read/write: 106
SAS Half-Height  Idle: 20 b
LTO-6 Fibre Channel  Read/write: 28 Read/write: 95
 Idle: 8 b
LTO-5, Fibre Channel  Read/write: 37 Read/write: 126
 Idle: 19 b
LTO-4, Fibre Channel  Read/write: 37 Read/write: 123
 Idle: 17.5 b
TS1160 technology  Read/write: 67 Read/write: 229
 Idle: 35 b
TS1155 technology  Read/write: 60 Read/write: 205
 Idle: 19b
TS1150 technology  Read/write: 55 Read/write: 188
 Idle: 38 b
TS1140 technology  Read/write: 53 Read/write: 181
 Idle: 30 b
a. Assumes one 5/12 volt power supply and one 24 volt power supply; no drives or RIMs installed.
b. No cartridge loaded.

542
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Library Specifications

Environmental Specifications
This section describes environmental specifications for the library. Do not
place the library on a carpeted floor or anywhere else that poses risk for
static discharge that could damage the library and its drives.

The library must be installed on a level, hard-surfaced floor such as cement or tile.
Caution Never install it on carpeted flooring.

The library is equipped with internal fans that operate as much as is

necessary for the number of DBAs installed. The fans keep the library’s
internal temperature within specifications as long as the data center
environment is within specifications.

When the library is moved from a cold environment to a warm environment, it

Caution should not be powered on for at least 24 hours. This adjustment period prevents
condensation damage.

The following tables list the general environmental specifications for the
library.
Operating Environmental Specification
Humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing)
Humidity gradient Less than 10% per hour
Ambient temperature a LTO: 50° F to 90° F (10° C to 32° C)
TS11xx Technology: 61° F to 90° F
(16° C to 32° C)
Maximum temperature change rate b 18° F per hour (10° C per hour),
non-condensing
Maximum wet bulb temperature 77° F (25° C)
Altitude Sea level to 10,000 ft (3,048 m)
a. The maximum ambient temperature must not exceed 86º F (30º C) when G2 F-QIPs are installed in the
library.
b. The temperature and humidity must be allowed to stabilize in the specified ambient environment for
24 hours.

Storing a and Shipping (Non-Operating) Environment Specification

Humidity 10% to 95% (non-condensing)
Temperature –40° F to 149° F (–40° C to 65° C)
Altitude Sea level to 40,000 ft (12,192 m)
a. The library is in its original packaging. The packaging is designed to protect the library from
condensation caused by extreme temperature variations of 27° F (15° C) or more. When the library is
moved from a cold storage environment to a warm operating environment, it must be acclimated in its
packaging for at least 24 hours before opening to prevent serious condensation damage from occurring.

543
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Interoperability and Software Compatibility

Shock and Vibration Specifications

The library operates normally after experiencing shock loads as specified in
the following table. The operating shock levels indicate how much shock
the library can withstand while the enclosed drives are reading and writing
data. The non-operating and storage shock levels indicate how much shock
the library can withstand when it is not operating. After experiencing this
amount of shock, the library continues to operate normally.

Storing and Shipping

Specification Operating (Non-Operating Environment) a
Shock 2 g pk ½ sine wave for 10 msec 2 g pk ½ sine wave for 10 msec
(3 axes, 2 shocks per axis, minimum) (3 axes, 2 shocks per axis, minimum)
Vibration 5 Hz – 500 Hz – 5 Hz 5 Hz – 500 Hz – 5 Hz
(Swept Sine) 5 – 22 Hz, 0.01-inch DA displacement 5 – 31 Hz, 0.02-inch DA displacement
22 – 500 Hz, 0.25G pk @ ½ octave 31 – 500 Hz, 1G pk @ ½ octave
(minimum three axes) (minimum three axes)
Vibration 0.5 Grms, 0 – 3000 Hz (single axis) 1 – 200 Hz @ 1.156 Grms.
(Random) Bottom face only for 60 minutes.
a. Specifications are for the library in its original packaging.

INTEROPERABILITY AND SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY

You can find complete interoperability listings, as well as a list of the types
of software that were tested and proven compatible with the library on the
Spectra Logic website at https://spectralogic.com/compatibility.

INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
This section provides information about the interfaces used to connect the
library and tape drives to the host systems. It also provides information about
the Ethernet interface used to access the library’s BlueScale web interface.
The Robotics Interface Module (RIM) supports a Fibre Channel host
interface. The RIM does not provide connectivity for SCSI drives. Direct-
attached tape drives have a native Fibre Channel interface; direct-attached
SCSI drives are not supported.

Important The option to connect SCSI drives through an F-QIP is no longer available for
purchase with new libraries. The library continues to support partitions configured
to use QIP-attached SCSI drives.

For information about how IBM drives support Fibre Channel

communications, refer to the tape drive documentation, available from
IBM at https://storage.ibm.com/tape/lto/oem/index.html.

544
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Interface Specifications

Component Interface Connectors

Component Physical Interface
Drive, Fibre Channel Two dual port multimode optical LC connectors a
Drive, SCSI Requires an F-QIP to provide Fibre Channel connectivity.
Direct-attached to a SCSI bus is not supported. b
RIM, Fibre Channel Two dual port optical SFPs with LC connectors
QIP, Fibre Channel (F-QIP) c Two dual port optical SFPs with LC connectors
a. Only one port at a time can be used to connect the drive to a Fibre Channel network. If desired, the two ports can be used to create a
failover configuration.
b. The drive sled has one Ultra-3 SCSI “LVD” 68-pin Micro D female connector with a wide Ultra320 SCSI Active SCSI terminator installed.
c. QIPs are no longer available for purchase and are only supported as legacy devices.

Network Interface Cable Requirements

The type of cables required to connect the library and its drives to the
network depend on the type of interface being used.

Interface Type Cable Requirements

Fibre Channel The Fibre Channel interface in the F-QIPs, RIMs, and direct-attached Fibre
(RIMs, F-QIPs, and Channel tape drives support the Fibre Channel Protocol (FCP). Connecting
direct-attached these components to the host network requires multimode optical cables with
drives) dual LC connectors.
Depending on the wavelength, the cables must comply with the following
specifications in the Fibre Channel standard (FC-PI-2):
 50 micron — 400-M5-SN-I classification
 62.5 micron — 400-M6-SN-I classification (not supported for LTO-6 and later
generation drives, or TS11xx technology drives)
Ethernet The Ethernet port on the LCM provides the connection to an Ethernet network
for accessing the library using a standard web browser on a remote computer.
 The Spectra PC has a 10/100BaseT connection.
 The Spectra LS has a 10/100/1000BaseT connection.
An additional Ethernet port may be present on the drive and media expansion
frames if a BlueScale Vision camera is installed in the frame.
Each Ethernet port is a pin-through-hole RJ-45 shielded connector. To comply
with EMC requirements, use shielded Category 5 or 5e data-grade cables for all
Ethernet connections.
Serial Attached SAS tape drives support the point-to-point Serial Attached SCSI protocol.
SCSI (SAS) Connecting these drives to the host network requires a SFF-8088 SAS cable
rated for 6 Gb/second that does not exceed 13 feet (4 m).

545
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Tape Drive and Media Specifications

Universal Serial Bus (USB) Support

Spectra Logic supports using the USB ports on the library operator panel,
the LCM, and the RCM for the following:
 Keyboards
 Pointer devices (for example, a computer mouse)
 External Drives (HD, CD, DVD, and Flash) with a USB interface

Important The library only recognizes FAT-formatted, not NTFS-formatted, USB devices.

NDMP Support
Spectra Logic tape libraries are compatible with local, remote, and three-way
NDMP (Network Data Management Protocol) topologies, where the tape
library is connected to the NDMP data mover host over Fibre Channel.

TAPE DRIVE AND MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS

This section provides the basic specifications for the tape drives and media
supported by the library.
Notes:  SCSI drives are discontinued and are no longer available for
purchase. If your library includes these drives, refer to the
documentation that accompanied your library when you
received it for specification information.
 The specifications in this section are provided for
convenience only. Refer to the tape drive documentation for
the most current specifications (see LTO Ultrium Tape Drives
on page 20 and TS11xx Technology Drives on page 20).

LTO Tape Drive Specifications

This section provides specifications for the LTO drives supported by the
library. See Tape Media Specifications on page 554 for information about
the media used in the library.
Note: LTO drives and media are also referred to as Ultrium or LTO
Ultrium drives and media.

546
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Tape Drive and Media Specifications

LTO-9 Drive
When connecting to a Fibre Channel network, LTO-9 Fibre Channel drives
will attempt to connect at 8 Gb/second, but will auto-negotiate down to
4 Gb/second, or 2 Gb/second, depending on the requirements of the port to
which the drive is connected.
LTO-9 SAS drives attempt to connect at 12 Gb/second, but auto-negotiate
down to 6 Gb/second, or 3 Gb/second, depending on the requirements of
the port to which the drive is connected
Parameter Specification
Maximum sustained transfer rate a, b 400 MB/second, native
900 MB/second, compressed SAS
700 MB/second, compressed Fibre
Speed matching range 177 MB/second to 400 MB/second
Average space record time TBD
Encryption capability AES 256-GCM
WORM capability Yes
MTBF 250,000 hours at 100% duty cycle
Uncorrected error rate, calculated 1 x 10 –20 bits
Power consumption Read/write: 34 watts typical
Idle: TBD
a. Assuming a 2.5:1 compression ratio. Compression throughput depends on the type of data.
b. This is a per-drive value. Total sustained transfer rate for the library depends on the number of drives
installed in the library.

547
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Tape Drive and Media Specifications

LTO-8 Drive
When connecting to a Fibre Channel network, LTO-8 Fibre Channel drives
will attempt to connect at 8 Gb/second, but will auto-negotiate down to
4 Gb/second, or 2 Gb/second, depending on the requirements of the port to
which the drive is connected.
LTO-8 SAS drives attempt to connect at 6 Gb/second, but auto-negotiate
down to 3 Gb/second or 1.5 Gb/second, depending on the requirements of
the port to which the drive is connected.
Parameter Specification
Maximum sustained transfer rate a, b 360 MB/second, native c
750 MB/second, compressed
Speed matching range 112 MB/second to 360 MB/second
Average space record time 59 seconds
Encryption capability AES 256-GCM
WORM capability Yes
MTBF 250,000 hours at 100% duty cycle
Uncorrected error rate, calculated 1 x 10 –19 bits
Power consumption Full-height:
 Read/write: 40 W Idle: 15 W
Half-height:
 Read/write: 43 W Idle: 14 W
a. Assuming a 2.5:1 compression ratio. Compression throughput depends on the type of data.
b. This is a per-drive value. Total sustained transfer rate for the library depends on the number of drives
installed in the library.
c. A 1.5 Gb interface speed does not stream an LTO-8 drive at 360 MB/second.

LTO-7 Drive
When connecting to a Fibre Channel network, LTO-7 Fibre Channel drives
attempt to connect at 8 Gb/second, but auto-negotiate down to
4 Gb/second, or 2 Gb/second, depending on the requirements of the port to
which the drive is connected.
LTO-7 SAS drives attempt to connect at 6 Gb/second, but auto-negotiate
down to 3 Gb/second or 1.5 Gb/second, depending on the requirements of
the port to which the drive is connected.
Parameter Specification
Maximum sustained transfer rate a, b 300 MB/second, native
750 MB/second, compressed
Speed matching range 100 MB/second to 300 MB/second
Average space record time 56 seconds
Encryption capability AES 256-GCM

548
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Tape Drive and Media Specifications

Parameter Specification
WORM capability Yes
MTBF 250,000 hours at 100% duty cycle
Uncorrected error rate, calculated 1 x 10 –19 bits
Power consumption  Full-height:
Read/write: 31 W Idle: 20 W
 Half-height:
Read/write: 36 W Idle: 20 W
a. Assuming a 2.5:1 compression ratio. Compression throughput depends on the type of data.
b. This is a per-drive value. Total sustained transfer rate for the library depends on the number of drives
installed in the library.

LTO-6 Drive
When connecting to a Fibre Channel network, LTO-6 Fibre Channel drives
attempt to connect at 8 Gb/second, but auto-negotiate down to
4 Gb/second, 2 Gb/second, or 1 Gb/second, depending on the requirements
of the port to which the drive is connected.
Parameter Specification
Maximum sustained transfer rate a, b 160 MB/second, native c
400 MB/second, compressed
Speed matching range 40 MB/second to 160 MB/second
Average space record time 77 seconds
Encryption capability AES 256-bit
WORM capability Yes
MTBF 250,000 hours at 100% duty cycle
Uncorrected error rate 1 x 10 –17 bits
Power consumption Read/write: 28 watts typical
Idle: 8 watts
a. Assuming a 2.5:1 compression ratio. Compression throughput depends on the type of data.
b. This is a per-drive value. Total sustained transfer rate for the library depends on the number of drives
installed in the library.
c. A 1.5 Gb interface speed does not stream an LTO-6 drive at 160 MB/second.

549
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Tape Drive and Media Specifications

LTO-5 Drive
When connecting to a Fibre Channel network, LTO-5 Fibre Channel drives
attempt to connect at 8 Gb/second, but auto-negotiate down to
4 Gb/second, 2 Gb/second, or 1 Gb/second, depending on the requirements
of the port to which the drive is connected.
Parameter Specification
Maximum sustained transfer rate a, b 140 MB/second, native c
280 MB/second, compressed
Speed matching range 30 MB/second to 140 MB/second
Average space record time 75 seconds
Encryption capability AES 256-bit
WORM capability Yes
MTBF 250,000 hours at 100% duty cycle
Uncorrected error rate 1 x 10 –17 bits
Power consumption b Read/write: 27 watts typical
Idle: 7.5 watts
a. Assuming a 2:1 compression ratio. Compression throughput depends on the type of data.
b. This is a per-drive value.
c. A 1 Gb interface speed does not stream an LTO-5 drive at 140 MB/second.

LTO-4 Drive
LTO-4 drives are not supported in T950B libraries. When connecting to a
Fibre Channel network, LTO-4 Fibre Channel drives attempt to connect at
4 Gb/second, but auto-negotiate down to 2 Gb/second or 1 Gb/second,
depending on the requirements of the port to which the drive is connected.
Note: LTO-4 drives are not supported in T950B libraries.
Parameter Specification
Sustained transfer rate a, b 120 MB/second native c
240 MB/second compressed
Average space record time 70 seconds
Encryption capability AES 256-bit
WORM capability Yes
MTBF 250,000 hours at 100% duty cycle
Uncorrected error rate 1 x 10 –17 bits
Power consumption b Read/write: 29.5 watts typical
Idle: 12.5 watts
a. Assuming a 2:1 compression ratio. Compression throughput depends on the type of data.
b. This is a per-drive value.
c. A 1 Gb interface speed does not stream an LTO-4 drive at 120 MB/second.

550
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Tape Drive and Media Specifications

TS11xx Technology Tape Drive Specifications

This section provides specifications for the TS11xx technology drives.
Notes:  The specifications in this section are provided for convenience
only. Refer to the tape drive documentation for the most current
specifications (see TS11xx Technology Drives on page 20).
 TS11xx technology drives are only supported in T950B libraries.

TS1160 Technology Drive

When connecting to a Fibre Channel network, TS1160 technology Fibre
Channel drives attempt to connect at 8 Gb/second, but auto-negotiate
down to 4 Gb/second, 2 Gb/second, or 1 Gb/second, depending on the
requirements of the port to which the drive is connected.
Parameter Specification
Maximum sustained 400 MB/second, native
transfer rate with JE 900 MB/second, compressed
mediaa, b
Speed matching range JE: 112 MB/second to 365 MB/second
JD: 112 MB/second to 365 MB/second
JC (Gen 5 format): 99 MB/second to 303 MB/second
JC (Gen 4 format): 90 MB/second to 252 MB/second
Average file access time 45 seconds
Encryption capability AES 256-GCM
WORM capability Yes
MTBF 250,000 hours at 100% duty cycle
Uncorrected error rate 1 x 10 –20 bits
Power consumption Read/write: 67 watts maximum
Idle: 35 watts
a. Assuming a 2.5:1 compression ratio. Compression throughput depends on the type of data.
b. This is a per-drive value.

551
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Tape Drive and Media Specifications

TS1155 Technology Drive

When connecting to a Fibre Channel network, TS1155 technology Fibre
Channel drives attempt to connect at 8 Gb/second, but auto-negotiate
down to 4 Gb/second, 2 Gb/second, or 1 Gb/second, depending on the
requirements of the port to which the drive is connected.
Parameter Specification
Maximum sustained 360 MB/second, native
transfer rate a, b 700 MB/second, compressed
Speed matching range JD: 112 MB/second to 365 MB/second
JC (Gen 5 format): 99 MB/second to 303 MB/second
JC (Gen 4 format): 90 MB/second to 252 MB/second
Average file access time 55 seconds
Encryption capability AES 256-GCM
WORM capability Yes
MTBF 237,000 hours at 100% duty cycle
Uncorrected error rate 1 x 10 –20 bits
Power consumption Read/write: 60 watts maximum
Idle: 19 watts
a. Assuming a 2.5:1 compression ratio. Compression throughput depends on the type of data.
b. This is a per-drive value.

TS1150 Technology Drive

When connecting to a Fibre Channel network, TS1150 technology Fibre
Channel drives attempt to connect at 8 Gb/second, but auto-negotiate
down to 4 Gb/second, 2 Gb/second, or 1 Gb/second, depending on the
requirements of the port to which the drive is connected.
Parameter Specification
Maximum sustained 360 MB/second, native
transfer rate a, b 700 MB/second, compressed
Speed matching range JD: 112 MB/second to 365 MB/second
JC (Gen 5 format): 99 MB/second to 303 MB/second
JC (Gen 4 format): 90 MB/second to 252 MB/second
Average file access time 55 seconds
Encryption capability AES 256-GCM
WORM capability Yes
MTBF 237,000 hours at 100% duty cycle
Uncorrected error rate 1 x 10 –20 bits
Power consumption Read/write: 46 watts maximum
Idle: 22.3 watts
a. Assuming a 2.5:1 compression ratio. Compression throughput depends on the type of data.
b. This is a per-drive value.

552
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Tape Drive and Media Specifications

TS1140 Technology Drive

When connecting to a Fibre Channel network, TS1140 technology Fibre
Channel drives attempt to connect at 8 Gb/second, but auto-negotiate
down to 4 Gb/second, 2 Gb/second, or 1 Gb/second, depending on the
requirements of the port to which the drive is connected.
Parameter Specification
Maximum sustained 250 MB/second, native
transfer rate a, b 650 MB/second, compressed
Speed matching range 76 MB/second to 251 MB/second
Average file access time 54 seconds
Encryption capability AES 256-GCM
WORM capability Yes
MTBF 237,000 hours at 100% duty cycle
Uncorrected error rate 1 x 10 –20 bits
Power consumption Read/write: 51 watts maximum
Idle: 24 watts
a. Assuming a 2.5:1 compression ratio. Compression throughput depends on the type of data.
b. This is a per-drive value.

Drive-Based Encryption Highlights

Key AES-256 data encryption with a secret 256-bit encryption key is used
to encrypt and decrypt data. The key is not retrievable from the encryption
core and is automatically erased during the unload process; software is
required to extract the key, keep it secure, and provide management tools
to track, store, use, and delete keys as appropriate.
Notes:  The encryption performed by encryption-enabled LTO-4 or
later generation drives is not compatible with the encryption
performed by an encryption-enabled F-QIP.
 Spectra SKLM key management, KMIP encryption, and
BlueScale encryption are not compatible with each other.
Data encrypted using one type of encryption key
management cannot be decrypted using another. For more
information about encryption, see the Spectra Tape Libraries
Encryption User Guide.
For more information about encryption, see the Spectra Tape Libraries
Encryption User Guide.

553
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Tape Drive and Media Specifications

Tape Media Specifications

This section provides specifications for the tape media supported by the
library. See Media and Media Accessories on page 528 for information
about ordering media for your library.

Environmental Requirements
The following table lists the specifications for storage temperature and
other environmental requirements for tape media. Do not allow the
temperature and humidity in the storage environment to fluctuate.

Specification Operating a Operational Archival Storage Shipping b

Storage
Temperature LTO: 61° F to 90° F 61° F to 77° F –9° F to 120° F
50° F to 113° F (16° C to 32° C) (16° C to 25° C) (–23° C to 49° C)
(10° C to 45° C)
TS11xx
technology:
61° F to 90° F
(16° C to 32° C)
Relative humidity 10% to 80% 20% to 80% 20% to 50% 5% to 80%
Wet bulb 79° F (26° C) 79° F (26° C) 79° F (26° C) 79° F (26° C)
temperature
a. The upper limit applies to the media, not the library. Be sure there is adequate air flow around the library at all times.
b. When media is moved from a cold shipping/storage environment to a warm operating environment, it must be acclimated in its
packaging for at least 24 hours before opening to prevent condensation damage from occurring.

LTO Media Specifications

The following table shows the capacities of the different generations of
LTO Ultrium data cartridges.
LTO Media Generation Native Capacity
(Compressed Capacity)
LTO-4 and LTO-4 WORM 800 GB (1.6 TB a)
LTO-5 and LTO-5 WORM 1.5 TB (3 TB a)
LTO-6 and LTO-6 WORM 2.5 TB (6.25 TB b)
LTO-7 and LTO-7 WORM 6 TB (15 TB b)
LTO-M8 c 9 TB (22.5 TB b)
LTO-8 and LTO-8 WORM 12 TB (30 TB b)
LTO-9 and LTO-9 WORM 18 TB (45 TB b)
a. Assuming a 2:1 compression ratio. The compressed capacity depends on the type of data.
b. Assuming a 2.5:1 compression ratio. The compressed capacity depends on the type of data.
c. See M8 Media on page 235 for more information.

554
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Tape Drive and Media Specifications

LTO Read/Write Compatibility

The following table shows the media read/write compatibility for each
LTO drive generation supported by the library.

Drive Gen LTO-4 LTO-5 LTO-6 LTO-7 M8 Media LTO-8 LTO-9

Media Media Media Media Media Media
LTO-4 Read/ Not Not Not Not Not Not
write supported supported supported supported supported supported
LTO-5 Read/ Read/ Not Not Not Not Not
write write supported supported supported supported supported
LTO-6 Read only Read/ Read/ Not Not Not Not
write write supported supported supported supported
LTO-7 Not Read only Read/ Read/ Not Not Not
supported write write supported supported supported
LTO-8 Not Not Not Read/ Read/ Read/ Not
supported supported supported write write write supported
LTO-9 Not Not Not Not Not Read/ Read/
supported supported supported supported supported write write

TS11xx Technology Media Specifications

The following table shows the capacities of TS11xx technology cartridges.
Media Generation Native Capacity
(Compressed Capacity a )
JC / JY (WORM) (TS1140 technology format): 4 TB (10 TB)
(TS1150 technology format): 7 TB (17.5 TB)
JD / JZ (WORM) (TS1150 technology format): 10 TB (25 TB)
(TS1155/60 technology format): 15 TB (37.5 TB)
JE / JV (WORM) (TS1160 technology format): 20 TB (50 TB)
a. Assuming a 2.5:1 compression ratio. The compressed capacity depends on the type of data.

TS11xx Technology Read/Write Compatibility

The following table shows the media read/write compatibility for each
TS11xx technology drive generation supported by the library.
Drive Generation JC Media JD Media JE Media
TS1140 Read/write Not supported Not supported
TS1150 Read/write Read/write Not supported
TS1155 Read/write Read/write Not supported
TS1160 Read only Read/write Read/write

555
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Tape Drive and Media Specifications

WORM Media
Certain records retention and data security applications require a Write
Once, Read Many (WORM) method for storing data on tape. LTO-3 and
later generation drives and TS11xx technology drives enable WORM
support when a WORM tape cartridge is loaded into the drive.
WORM Media Requirements Because standard read/write media are
incompatible with the WORM feature, a specially formatted WORM tape
cartridge is required. Each WORM cartridge has a unique, worldwide
cartridge identifier (WWCID), which comprises the unique CM chip serial
number and the unique tape media serial number.
Data Security on WORM Media Certain built-in security measures help
ensure that the data written on a WORM cartridge does not become
compromised, for example:
 The format of a WORM tape cartridge is unlike that of standard read/
write media. This unique format prevents a drive that lacks WORM-
capable firmware from writing on a WORM tape cartridge.
 When the drive senses a WORM cartridge, the firmware prohibits the
changing or altering of user data already written on the tape. The
firmware keeps track of the last appendable point on the tape.

Cleaning Cartridges
Cleaning cartridges are valid for 50 uses. Do not rewind and reuse the
material in a cleaning cartridge. Reusing the material may redistribute
contaminants previously removed from the tape path. If all of the cleaning
material is used, discard the cartridge and use a new cleaning cartridge.

Barcode Label Specifications

Symbology The barcode labeling scheme used on Spectra Logic certified
media uses the barcode symbology of USS-39. You can obtain a complete
description and definition of this symbology from the Automatic
Identification Manufacturers (AIM) specification, the Uniform Symbol
Specification (USS-39), and the ANSI MH10.8M-1993 ANSI Barcode
specification.
Application and Orientation The barcode label must be applied to the
cartridge so that it fits within the label recess on the edge of the cartridge
without curling up on the sides or ends. The label must be oriented so that
the barcode characters are along the edge closest to the hub side of the
cartridge.

556
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Tape Drive and Media Specifications

Printed Characters The label can have human-readable alphanumeric

characters printed along the top or bottom edge of the label provided there
is no conflict or interference with the automation code. This text must
include the barcode data, but can also include additional text. The format
and colors of the human readable characters is up to the customer and
label vendor. For location restrictions, see Detailed Specifications for LTO
Cartridge Barcodes on page 558 and Detailed Specifications for TS11xx
Technology Cartridge Barcodes on page 559.
Note: When using barcode labels with alphanumeric characters along
the bottom edge, the label must be positioned so that barcode is
at least 13.72 mm below the top edge of the cartridge to ensure
that the barcode reader can read the label.
Barcode Data The library supports barcode data strings consisting of from
1 to 16 characters, including an optional checksum character. Quiet zones
precede and follow the start and stop characters.
The barcode data string on standard Spectra Logic barcode labels consists of a
start character, eight alphanumeric characters, a checksum character, and the
stop character. Quiet zones precede and follow the start and stop characters.
 The first six (6) characters following the start character can be any
combination of upper case A-Z or 0-9 (for example, ABC123) to identify
the cartridge Volume Serial Number. The use of “CLN” and
“DG{space}” at the beginning of the volume identifier is reserved.
 The volume identifier “CLNvnn” is reserved for cleaning cartridges.
When a drive requires cleaning, it requests a specific type of
cleaning cartridge.
 The “v” field is an alphanumeric field to identify cleaning
cartridge applications, “U” for Universal Cleaning Cartridges or
a drive unique identifier.
 The “nn” alphanumeric field is used to track individual cleaning
cartridge activity (that is, usage and life).
 The volume identifier “DG{space}vnn” is reserved for diagnostic
and service cartridges.
 The last two (2) characters are the media identifier and indicate the
cartridge Media Type (for example, “L” for LTO and “6” for an LTO-6
cartridge or JD for a TS11xx technology cartridge). In IBM LTO tape
drives, the value of the media identifier on cleaning cartridges is
ignored, although a valid value must be present.
 The barcode string can be printed in either direction on the label and
must begin and end with a valid start/stop character ( * ).
 The label must be printed so that barcode data is positioned along the
edge of the label that is closest to the hub side of the cartridge.
The AIM Uniform Symbol USS-39 specification provides detailed information
about the format of the start character, the series of characters that make up the
barcode data, the optional checksum character, and the stop character.

557
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Tape Drive and Media Specifications

Detailed Specifications for LTO Cartridge Barcodes

Figure 332 shows the dimensional specifications for LTO labels with the
alphanumeric characters above the barcode.

Alphanumeric
Barcode start character characters Barcode stop character

17 mm
+0/–0.8 11.1 mm,
minimum

74.088 mm, nominal

Quiet Zone 79 mm +0/–.8 Quiet Zone

4.32 mm, 4.32 mm,
minimum minimum
Figure 332 Barcode specifications for LTO media; alphanumeric characters on top.

Note: When using barcode labels with alphanumeric characters along

the bottom edge, the label must be positioned so that barcode is
at least 13.72 mm below the top edge of the cartridge to ensure
that the barcode reader can read the label.

LTO Barcode Element Specifications

For the official IBM barcode label specification, see https://ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S7000429. Unless otherwise specified,
tolerances are X.XXX ± 0.127 mm, X.XXX ± 0.762 mm.
 Minimum symbol height is 11.1 mm, measured to the inside of the
label’s edge.
 The wide-to-narrow ratio is 2.75.
 The narrow element width is 0.432 mm +0.03 mm or –0.076 mm.
 The nominal width of the wide spaces and bars is 1.188 mm.
 The inter-character gap is 0.432 mm +0.03/–0.076 mm.
 The minimum quiet zone at the beginning and end of a printed barcode
string is 4.32 mm (10 times the narrow element width).
 The total nominal barcode string length (including quiet zones) is
74.088 mm.
 The edge of the barcode is the edge of the printed area associated with
the bar. The edge roughness is the transition encountered as a
horizontal line is moved vertically from all black to all white. The edge
roughness maximum is 0.038 mm.
 Variation between all bars, white and black, must be less than ±0.0381 mm.

558
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Tape Drive and Media Specifications

LTO Physical Label Specifications

 Label stock must fit within the label recess on the face of the cartridge
without curling up on the sides or ends (79 mm X 17 mm +0/–0.8).
 Minimum length sufficient for the quiet zones, start-stop, and data
characters (nominal 74.088 mm).
 Minimum width no less than 1.5 mm narrower than the cartridge label
recess width. Corners are cut with a 1.5 mm radius.
 Maximum label thickness, including the RFID tag, if present, together
with any associated layers and adhesives cannot exceed 0.40 mm.
 The label and adhesive must have an environmental performance to
match or exceed the environmental specifications of the cartridge to
which it is applied.

Detailed Specifications for TS11xx Technology

Cartridge Barcodes
Figure 333 shows the dimensional specifications for TS11xx technology
labels with the alphanumeric characters above the barcode.

Figure 333 Barcode specifications for TS11xx technology media; alphanumeric characters on
top. All measurements are in millimeters.

Note: When using barcode labels with alphanumeric characters along

the bottom edge, the label must be positioned so that barcode is
at least 13.72 mm below the top edge of the cartridge to ensure
that the barcode reader can read the label.

559
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix C — Specifications Tape Drive and Media Specifications

TS11xx Technology Barcode Element Specifications

For the official IBM barcode label specification, see https://ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S7000727. Unless otherwise specified,
tolerances are X.XXX ± 0.127 mm, X.XX ± 0.76 mm.
 Minimum symbol height is 7.1 mm, measured to the inside of the label’s
edge.
 The wide-to-narrow ratio is 2.75.
 The narrow element width is 0.500 mm + 0.03/- 0.07 mm.
 The nominal width of the wide spaces and bars is 1.375 mm.
 The inter-character gap is 0.500 mm + 0.03/- 0.07 mm.
 The minimum quiet zone at the beginning and end of a printed barcode
string is 5.0 mm (10 times the narrow element width).
 The total nominal barcode string length (including quiet zones) is
85.75 mm.
 The edge of the barcode is the edge of the printed area attached to the
bar. The edge roughness is the transition encountered as a horizontal
line is moved vertically from all black to all white. The edge roughness
maximum is 0.04 mm.
 Variation between all bars, white and black, must be less than
±0.04 mm.

TS11xx Technology Physical Label Specifications

 Label stock must fit within the label recess on the face of the cartridge
without curling up on the sides or ends (88.5 mm X 11.9 mm +0/–0.4).
 Minimum length sufficient for the quiet zones, start-stop, and data
characters (nominal 85.75 mm).
 Minimum width no less than 1.5 mm narrower than the cartridge label
recess width. Corners are cut with a 1.5 mm radius.
 Maximum label thickness, including the RFID tag, if present, together
with any associated layers and adhesives cannot exceed 0.75 mm.
 The label and adhesive must have an environmental performance to
match or exceed the environmental specifications of the cartridge to
which it is applied.

560
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 APPENDIX D
Regulatory & Safety Standards
The Spectra T950 library complies with the safety and regulatory agency
standards listed below when installed by a Spectra Logic certified engineer
or third-party provider.

561
Appendix D — Regulatory & Safety Standards EU Declaration of Conformity

EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

Document # 99100001 V6.0

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
According to ISO/IEC 17050-1:2004

Manufacturer’s Name: Spectra Logic Corporation

Manufacturer’s Address: 6101 Lookout Road, Boulder CO,80301

Declares under sole responsibility that the product as delivered

Product Name: TFinity

Model Number: TFinity, T950, T95e, T950V

Product options: This declaration covers all options of the above product(s)

Complies with the essentials of the following European Directives, and carries the CE
marking accordingly:

Safety Electromagnetic Compatibility

Directive: 2014/35/EU Directive 2014/30/EU

IEC 62368-1:2014 (Second Edition) EN55032: 2012, Class A

EN55024: 2010
EN 60950-1:2006 +A11:2009 +A1:2010
EN 61000 3-2:2014
+A12:2011 +A2:2013
EN 61000 3-3:2013
EN 62479:2010

562
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix D — Regulatory & Safety Standards EU Declaration of Conformity

Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances

IEC 63000 / EN 50581-2012

EN 62321

(EC)1907/2006 REACH

2011/65/EU RoHS

2012/19/EU WEEE

April 29, 2021

Nicole Gallego
Vice President of Operations

563
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix D — Regulatory & Safety Standards Emission Standards

EMISSION STANDARDS
The Spectra T950 library complies with the following domestic and
international emission standards.

Country Standard
United States - FCC CFR Title 47, FCC Part 15 (see FCC Notice)
Australia/New Zealand AS/NZS CISPR 32: 2015
Canada ICES-003
Japan VCCI
Korea KN 22
Taiwan CNS 13438

FCC NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to CFR 47, Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely
to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at the user’s own expense.

SAFETY STANDARDS AND COMPLIANCE

Product Safety Standards The Spectra T950 library complies with the
following domestic and international product safety standards.
 Directive: 2014/35/EU
 EN 60950-1:2006 +A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011 +A2:2013
 EN 62479:2010
 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03 (Canada: cNemko Mark)

564
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix D — Regulatory & Safety Standards Nemko Accreditation

Laser Warning

IBM Tape Drives

A Class 1 laser assembly, in the optical transceiver, is mounted on each IBM
tape drive Fibre Channel electronics card. This laser assembly is registered
with the DHHS and is in compliance with IEC825.
These products contain components that comply with performance
standards that are set by the U.S. Food and Drug administration. This
means that these products belong to a class of laser products that do not
emit hazardous laser radiation. This classification was accomplished by
providing the necessary protective housings and scanning safeguards to
ensure that laser radiation is inaccessible during operation or is within
Class 1 limits. External safety agencies have reviewed these products and
have obtained approvals to the latest standards as they apply to this
product type.

Spectra Logic QIP and RIM Controllers

The optical transceiver is a Class 1 Laser Product as defined by the
international standard IEC 60825-1:1993+A1:1997+A2:2001 and by USA
regulations for Class 1 products per CDRH 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11.
Laser emissions from Class 1 laser products are not considered hazardous
when operated according to product specifications. Operating the product
with a power supply voltage exceeding 4.0 volts may compromise the
reliability of the product, and could result in laser emissions exceeding
Class 1 limits.

NEMKO ACCREDITATION
The safety issues of this information technology equipment type have been
evaluated by a government-accredited European third-party organization,
such as Nemko.
This Mass Storage Device has been evaluated and determined to comply
with the Safety Requirements of the International Standard for Information
Technology Equipment, IEC/EN 60950-1, Second Edition. The evaluation
was conducted by Nemko. Nemko participates in the CB Scheme as a
National Certification Body certified by the IECEE.

565
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix D — Regulatory & Safety Standards Environmental Regulations

ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS
The Spectra T950 library complies with the following domestic and
international environmental regulations and directives.

Waste of Electronic and Electrical Equipment (WEEE) Directive

Note: For information on recycling your Spectra library, please check
the Spectra Logic website. European Union users should contact
their local waste administration for WEEE collection instructions
for this product.
The WEEE symbol on the back of this product indicates that
this product meets the European Directive 2012/19/EU on
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment, known as the
WEEE directive. This directive, only applicable in European
Union countries, indicates that this product should not be
disposed of with normal unsorted municipal waste.
Within participating European Union countries, special collection,
recycling, and disposal arrangement have been established for this
product. At the end of life, the product user should dispose of this product
using special WEEE collection systems. These special systems mitigate the
potential affects on the environment and human health that can result
from hazardous substances that may be contained in this product.

Restriction of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic

Equipment (RoHS)
The RoHS marking indicates that this product is in
compliance with European Council Directive 2011/65/EU
RoHS, on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

566
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix D — Regulatory & Safety Standards Environmental Regulations

Measures for the Administration of the Control of

Pollution by Electronic Information Products (China)

T950 㦘㹡✛㦘⹂䓸德♙⏒侯
杔 㻭 柘 ⏼ↆ杻 ⮩䅃勣啾 ⮩䅃勣啾搩
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr(VI)) (PBB) (PBDE)
1 2
䭐サㄢ X O X O O O
1,4
䭐サ洀┷⣷ X O O O O O
IBM LTO-3
1,8
䭐サ洀┷⣷ X O O O O O
IBM LTO-4
1
䭐サ洀┷⣷ X O O O O O
IBM LTO-5
㛓⍞㧉 X O O O O O
Camera

1. 䟄恾㨎䎙㠨⚺㦘杔ᇭ㦜┰⣷᧨ⷧ⌷⣷✛ⷧ⌷棄⒦侊兮᧨䞷ℝ懻㘴ᇬ≰⚆✛↯戢䤓几八⪉䫏幍㡌
幍⮖᧨ⅴ♙䟄≰几八丰䚕幍⮖䤓䎙㠨掌⚺㦘杔ᇭ

2. 䟄㺣屵䍈✛柘柏⻑᧨ₜ▔㕻 76/769/ECC 㖖ⅳ䤓≽帱㖖ⅳ 91/338/EE 㓏䰐㷱䤓ㄣ䞷᧨㷳䷘㖖ⅳ

⺈㩟K☀棸䓸德䤓嚴枏✛∎䞷⒦㦘啴㄁棟Ⓟ㧰㷍ᇭ

3. 㩣㊶䟄冕⚺㦘◐䅃勣啾搩᧤Deca-PBDE᧥ᇭ啴㄁勩⚗䓸ㄣ䞷䤓 Deca-PBDE 䞷摞怔扖㦏⮶㿢ㄵ

棟⸩⋋᧤MCV᧥ᇭ

4. 杔⚺摞♾厌浧才 3.2 ⏚ᇭ

5. 朱㧟₼䤓杔⚺摞⃉ 0.35%᧨杬⚗摠₼⃉ 0.4%᧨槡杫䷘杫⚗摠₼⃉ 4.0%ᇭ

6. 䟄⷟椅䞆榅ↅ᧤√Ⱁ☚䟄㆞孔函᧥♾厌⚺㦘杔ᇭ

7. 䟄⷟捷ↅ♾厌⚺㦘杔䙊䜒ᇭ

8. 杔⚺摞♾厌浧才 5.0 ⏚ᇭ

Recycling Your Library

For information on recycling your Spectra library, check the Spectra Logic
website at: spectralogic.com/environment.

567
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
Appendix D — Regulatory & Safety Standards Conflict Minerals Policy

CONFLICT MINERALS POLICY

Spectra Logic is committed to complying with the OECD Due Diligence
Guidance for Responsible Supply Chains of Minerals from Conflict-
Affected and High-Risk Areas, as well as the applicable requirements of
Section 1502 of the Dodd-Frank Act, which aims to prevent the use of
minerals that directly or indirectly finance or benefit armed groups in the
Democratic Republic of the Congo (DRC) or in adjoining countries
(“conflict minerals”).
Affected suppliers to Spectra Logic will be required to commit to being or
becoming “conflict-free” (which means that such supplier does not source
conflict minerals) and sourcing, where possible, only from conflict-free
smelters. Each affected supplier to Spectra Logic will be required to
provide completed EICC-GeSI declarations evidencing such supplier's
commitment to becoming conflict-free and documenting countries of
origin for the tin, tantalum, tungsten, and gold that it purchases.
For more information on Spectra Logic's conflict minerals program contact
[email protected].

568
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 INDEX
agency declarations Auto Drive Clean (continued)
A EU Declaration of requirements for using 62,
Conformity 562 to 567 188, 189
AC power FCC notice 564 restrictions when running
breakers, main or drive RoHS 566 PreScan 311
frame 38, 39 RoHS, China 568 using to manually clean a
connecting to library 163 safety 564 drive 476
cord and connector types 540 WEEE 566 auto saved configuration file
cord locks, air filter description 126, 151
installing 469 to 470 enable email 126 to 127
location 28
main breaker switches 163 filename 151
replacing 466 to 468
specifications 539 using to restore
alarms, configuring in
activation key AutoSupport 353 to 354 library 399 to 404
entering 112 to 113 architecture automatic media discovery, See
entering BlueScale Software MLM, Media Auto Discovery
cleaning partitions and Auto
Support key 112 to 113 Drive Clean 62 to 63 AutoSend profile
obtaining for BlueScale controller failover 79 to 80 [email protected]
options 113 to 114 351
entry/exit pool 58
renewing BlueScale Software configuring 351
Fibre Channel
Support key 444 AutoSupport log (ASL)
connectivity 68 to 75
adding a new user 105 description 346
Fibre Channel drive
address, Ethernet IP address failover 81 sending automatically 354
camera 155 to 159, 160 to 161 free pool 58 sending manually 356 to 360
library (LCM) 120, 121 to 123 redundant network See also log set forwarding
address, Fibre Channel ports connectivity 78 to 81 AutoSupport, configuring
direct-attached drives 212 SCSI drive AutoSend profile 351
exporting connectivity 76 to 77 create or modify
controller 215 to 217 storage partitions 61 profiles 349 to 352
F-QIP, SCSI drive storage pool 58 critical alarm
partition 215 to 217 asterisk (*) notification 353 to 354
address, SMTP 125 in MLM record 334 deleting profiles 353
Administrator group in MLM reports 514 log set forwarding
default user name and in password field 107 recipient 354
password 105 mail recipients 348
attention required notification
privileges 105 requirements 348
drive health 340
advanced import/export AutoSupport, using
media health 324
create move queue 259 to 262 creating a new HHM
system 91
processing move ticket 373 to 376
Auto Drive Clean
queue 266 to 268 creating a new support
affect of a failed cleaning 188
requirements for using 259 ticket 356 to 360
configuring a cleaning
using bulk TAP 266 to 267 overview 345 to 347
partition 194 to 196,
using center TAP 266 ?? to 197 updating a ticket 361
description 62 to 63 average status, media health 323
frequency 188

569
 Index – B

barcode reader description 32 BlueScale web interface, See web

B best practices interface
cartridge use 520 to 526 born on date for MLM-enabled
background operations, restrictions drive cleaning 523 media, definition 322
during MLM operations 297 entry/exit pool 523 breakers, AC power
import, export, or exchange handling cartridges 521 description, main or drive
media 237 frame 38, 39
MLM 511 to 514
backup location 33
protecting library’s saved
library configuration, data 515 to 519 power on library 163
automatic 151 broadcast capacity
blackout period for
library configuration, PostScan 304 to 305 configuring 303 to 304
manual 150 to 154 description 303
BlueScale Drive Lifecycle
MLM and DLM Management bulk load 279
databases 330 to 332
description 24 bulk TAP
backup software
See also DLM See also TAP
cleaning cartridge accessibility
BlueScale EnergyAudit bulk TAP, overview
in cleaning partition 240
description 25 media expansion frame
compatibility 544
See also power consumption description 40 to 41
drive cleaning without Auto
BlueScale Hardware Health operation 44
Drive Clean 233
Monitoring bulk TAP, using
importing cartridges into new
partition 237 description 25 advanced import/
See also HHM export 266 to 267
PostScan blackout periods
during backup BlueScale Media Lifecycle correct orientation for
window 317 Management magazines 245
time-out requirements 317 description 26 door operation 244 to 246
backups, continuing while See also MLM exchange
BlueScale software magazines 255 to 257
cleaning drives 474
overview 23 to 27 export magazines 252 to 253
resetting the RCM or LCM 383
See also software, BlueScale import magazines 244 to 247
updating drive firmware 485,
492, 494, 498 See also user interface buttons
updating library BlueScale Software Support key do not use keyboard Enter
firmware 452 key 101
enabling 112 to 113
barcode labels in status bar 91
expired key 444
asterisk (*) in MLM library power 164
overview 110 to 114
record 334 refresh display 91
renewing 444 to 445, 529
asterisk (*) in MLM reset, LCM or RCM 383
required for firmware
reports 514 updates 110
checksum character 142 See also software, BlueScale
CLN prefix for cleaning
cartridges 233
BlueScale user interface C
access options 84 to 85
configuring reporting 139 cables
features 86 to 94
custom sequences 528 AC connector types 540
See also touch screen interface
determining type 142 to 143 Ethernet, requirements 545
See also user interface
placement on cartridges 234 Fibre Channel,
See also web interface
requirements for cleaning requirements 545
touch screen interface
partition 239 camera, configuring
See also user interface
role in maintaining the library default device name 388
inventory 270 BlueScale Vision camera
enable/disable status bar
specifications 556 to 560 description 54
icon 119
"x" in Inventory screen 272 purchasing 532
See also camera

570
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – C

camera, configuring (continued) cartridges, general information cartridges, using

resetting to DHCP barcode labels, barcode label requirements 233
addressing 386 purchasing 528 best practices 520 to 526
setting a fixed IP Certified Media, data cartridge capacities 555
address 155 to 159, 160 description 527 environmental specifications,
setup wizard administrator purchasing 528 tape 554
name 388 Spectra Certified Media, locating in library 277
UDP broadcast discovery 387 MLM-enabled 290 media pool locations 57 to 58
using DHCP with no DHCP TeraPack magazines 55 media type for cleaning
server 390 cartridges, importing partition 195
using the setup into storage or cleaning media type for storage
wizard 386 to 392, partition 237 to 247 partition 200
392 to 396 overview 236 to 237 rotation example 524 to 526
camera, using requirements 236, 238 to 240 storage guidelines 522
access viewer using restricted during background See also cleaning cartridges
BlueScale 179 operations 237 See also magazines
access viewer using web cartridges, inventory
browser 180 cartridges, using with MLM
during FullScan 314 adding to MLM database 293,
BlueScale Vision viewer
during QuickScan using Global 306 to 308
application 179
Spare 315 asterisk (*) in MLM
connecting to network 179
overview 270 record 334
Ethernet connector,
update backup software asterisk (*) in MLM
location 179
inventory 268 report 514
overview 179
See also inventory 270 available reports 322
viewing documentation 181
cartridges, moving best practices 511 to 514
capacity
create a move queue capacity shown in Filled
adding 111 file 283 to 285 Capacity bar graph 298
hardware ID to purchase create move queue enable MLM 300
additional 113 manually 278 to 281 enabling automatic
in broadcast view 303 process manual move discovery 302
library specifications 535 queue 282 generating MLM reports 321
on-demand, description 56, cartridges, moving within library health score 323
111, 531 See move queue, cartridges health status icons 323
TeraPack magazines 233 See move queue, magazines MAM, description 290
upgrades 111, 531 cartridges, preparing manually add to PostScan
Capacity-on-Demand (CoD) guidelines and queue 317 to 319
See capacity requirements 232 to 234 MLM alerts 300
See upgrades label placement caution 234 Remaining Capacity
CarbideClean, description 527 labeling guidelines 520 report 294
carrying cases for magazines 529 loading into magazines 235 requirements 290
cartridges, exporting or exchanging set write-protect switch 234 requirements for updating
exchange from storage or cartridges, troubleshooting MAM 311, 316
cleaning partition 254 MLM Load Count report 322 saving MLM reports 326
export from storage or cleaning MLM Media Health start manual MLM
partition 249 to 253 report 322 discovery 308 to 310
overview 236 to 237, MLM Write Errors report 322 stop MLM discovery
248 to 249 process 310
overriding red MLM
preparation 249 health 328 to 329 track health and usage 294
requirements 236 usage information in DLM
restricted during background report 342
operations 237 See also MLM

571
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – C

cautions cleaning cartridges, using cleaning partitions, using

deleting partitions 229 (continued) cleaning Global Spare
do not rewind cleaning barcode label drives 189
cartridges 474 requirements 239 exchange maintenance
hardware cleaning partition present 476 magazines 254 to 257
reconfiguration 443 CLN barcode prefix 233 export maintenance
label cleaning cartridges 475 do not rewind 474 magazines 249 to 253
labeling cartridges 234 exchange 254 to 257 export or exchange expired
packaging components for expired 63, 272 cartridges 257 to 258
shipping 510 export from cleaning import maintenance
reset after firmware partition 249 to 253 magazines 237 to 247
update 463 export or exchange import requirements 239
resetting library expired 257 to 258 maintenance magazine
components 382 import into cleaning requirement 233
use approve cleaning partition 237 to 247 manual drive cleaning 476
cartridges 474 label when stored in overview 62 to 63
center TAP, using library 475 prepare for
advanced import/export 266 no cleaning partition imports 240 to 241
exchanging magazines 254 present 477 to 478 See also export or exchange
exporting magazines 251 software-based drive media
importing magazines 243 cleaning 240 See also import media
operational overview 43 tracking use 478 Cleans Remaining, MLM
See also cartridges report 322
Certified Media
cleaning cartridges, using with CoD, See capacity
description 527
MLM command processing, progress
for use with MLM 290
available reports 322 bar 94
MLM alert 300
health score 323 compatibility
purchasing 529
track number of cleans host interface 545
See also cartridges
remaining 295 host software 544
chambers
"x" next to slot number 272 host software, using
assigning to cleaning emulation 221
See also MLM
partition 196
cleaning drives LTO read/write 555
assigning to storage
automatic 475 compliance
partition 204 to 205
manual, no cleaning FCC notice 564
description 32
partition 477 to 478 hazardous materials
editing partitions 226
manual, using cleaning directives 566 to 567
marked as unusable 370
partition 476 regulatory agency 562 to 567
modify number in a
overview 472 safety agency 564
partition 226
See also drives, cleaning component identifiers
changing users 100
cleaning notification on Drive controllers 67
checksum character,
Details screen 473 drives 67 to 68
definition 142
cleaning partitions, configuring components
cleaning cartridges, general
information assign chambers 196 bulk TAP media expansion
LTO drives 556 for automatic drive frame 40 to 41
cleaning 194 to 196, discontinued, using 56
Maintenance TeraPack
?? to 197 front panel 27
magazines 528
initial settings 194 to 195 interior 31 to 32
purchasing 528
name and media type 195 rear panel, bulk TAP media
cleaning cartridges, using
requirements 188 expansion frame 40 to 41
automatic drive cleaning 475
slot requirements 188 rear panel, drive
availability in cleaning
partition 189 frame 33 to 39

572
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – C

computer module, See LCM and See configuration, library (continued) configuration, system settings
RCM library name, as identifier for changing 114 to 129
configuration remote access 115 defaults 115 to 120
users 104 list of enabled options 112 conflict minerals policy 568
configuration backup file mail recipients 124 to 125 connectivity
auto saved, using to restore package servers 144 to 146 Fibre Channel drives ?? to 75
library 399 to 404 renewing BlueScale Software redundancy 78 to 81
creating 151 to 153 Support key 444 to 445 robotics, through
manual, using to restore restore using auto-save backup controller 69 to 74
library 404 to 406 file 399 to 404 SCSI drives 76 to 77
Configuration toolbar, options 88 restore using manual backup See also controller failover
configuration, AutoSupport file 404 to 406
connectors
configuring alarms 353 to 354 Rotation Manager 148 to 150
AC power, main or drive
create or modify routine maintenance frame 38, 39
profiles 349 to 352 option 132
Ethernet, camera 179
deleting profiles 353 SNMP 133 to 135
Ethernet, LCM 46
log set forwarding 354 Syslog server IP address 118
F-QIP 50
mail recipients 348 user-based security 95, 104
international power 541
requirements 348 verifying backup file 154
LCM and RCM 45
configuration, camera IP web server port 115
network cables 545
address 155 to 159, 160 to 161, configuration, MLM
RIM 50
386 to 392, 392 to 396 alerts 300
specifications, AC power 540
configuration, DLM, enable or broadcast capacity 303
disable 300 USB port 45
configure PostScan blackout
configuration, encryption contacting Spectra Logic 7
periods 304 to 305
assign a BlueScale key to controller
enable or disable MLM 300
partition 209 component identifiers 67
Media Auto Discovery 302
assign Spectra SKLM server to descriptions 48 to 51
non-certified media 300
partition 209 functional
See also MLM
See also encryption description 69 to 74
configuration, partitions
configuration, library controller failover
confirm and save settings 218
accessing the System Setup configuring 136 to 138
creating cleaning
screen 108 description 79 to 80
partitions 194 to 196,
back up, manual 151 to 154 ?? to 197 disabling 138
backing up, automatic 151 creating storage controller
controller failover 136 to 138 partitions 196 to 217 See also F-QIP
date and time 127 drive visibility through See also RIM
display refresh rate 115 F-QIP 214 cooling requirements 541
emulation 222 emulation mode 222 cord locks, installing 469 to 470
enable and configure encryption mode 209 corporate headquarters, Spectra
SNMP 117 entry/exit pool 204 to 205 Logic 7
enable email for auto saved exporting controller port cover, TeraPack magazine 522
configuration addressing 215 to 217 creating move queue
file 126 to 127 F-QIP port file 283 to 285
enable or disable metrics addressing 215 to 217 Critical Alarms
monitoring 116 modifying 224 AutoSend profile 351
enable or disable Soft overview 187 to 194 configuring in
Power 117 AutoSupport 353 to 354
robotic control path
enable SSL 117 visibility 214 description 346 to 347
IP address 121 to 123 storage pool 204 to 205 custom barcode labels,
user access 213 purchasing 528

573
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – D

accessing the Run All Motion drive sled

D Basic Tests 87 description and connector
overview 24 locations 53
data running the Run All Motion drive component identifier 67
library capacity 535 Basic Tests 396 to 398 See also DCM
data cartridges, See cartridges discontinued components, drive trace files
storage partitions, moving using 56 retrieving 415 to 419
cartridges DLM database saving 417
See move queue, magazines backing up 330 to 332 Drives screen, accessing 87
databases, MLM and DLM download as XML drives, cleaning
See DLM database file 343 to 344
automatic cleaning 62 to 63,
See MLM database information stored 341 475
date restore from backup on USB configure Auto Drive
in status bar 91 device 406 Clean 194 to 196,
setting 127 restore using auto-save backup ?? to 197
file 399 to 404 determine cleaning
DBA
DLM, enable or disable 300, 336 method 475
description 34
DLM, overview determine if cleaning is
location 33
description 24 required 473 to 474
power supply modules,
description 36, 37 how it works 336 manual, no cleaning
DLM, using partition 477 to 478
purchasing 532
drive health status 342 manual, using cleaning
QIP-attached drives 77
generating reports 341 to 343 partition 476
DCM firmware
health status icons 339 to 340 prepare library 474
current version 175
requirements for drive test 437 required materials 474
default settings
saving report 343 drives, configuring
system
testing a drive 437 to 441 as Global Spare 202 to 203
configuration 115 to 120
viewing tape usage 342 assigning to partitions 205
user names and
passwords 105 documentation drive-based encryption 209
default users related to drive use 20 element addresses after
installing additional 370,
passwords 104 related to library use 19
443
privileges 104 typographical conventions 21
Fibre Channel loop IDs 212
deleting updated information in release
port visibility description 77
individual MLM records 333 notes 446
port visibility, F-QIP 214
library users 108 door, bulk TAP,
operating 244 to 246 replacing 503
multiple MLM records 334
Drive Bay Assembly, See DBA Spectra SKLM encryption key
partitions 229 management 209
device drivers, updating for LTO drive cleaning notification on Drive
Details screen 474 drives, firmware
drives 501
drive component identifier 67 check for update 482
DHCP, using
Drive Control Module, See DCM current version 175, 480
camera IP address, no DHCP
drive expansion frame, device drivers 209, 210, 213,
server 390
description 63 480, 501
library (LCM) IP
Drive Firmware Update wizard discontinue backups & empty
address 121 to 123
drives before update 485,
set camera IP using 494 to 497
492, 494, 498
address 386 to 392, Drive Lifecycle Management, See
requirements for firmware
392 to 396 DLM
update using Package
diagnostics Drive Performance Monitor Update, LTO-5 and later
accessing 89 enable/disable 116 generation drives 486
using 171 to 172

574
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – E

drives, firmware (continued) drives, troubleshooting (continued) encryption

requirements for using returning Global Spare to spare performed by F-QIP 51
firmware update pool 414 Spectra SKLM encryption key
tape 494, 497 sense code lookup 363, 420 management 209
update using firmware tape serial number 175 using direct-attached
with update test using DLM 437 to 441 drives 209
utility 497 to 500 using partitions to manage 61
drives, using
update using firmware tape encryption key, BlueScale
activating Global Spare
with update
drive 410 to 413 assigning to a partition 209
wizard 494 to 497
DLM health status stored in auto save
update using ITDT 485
icons 339 to 340 configuration file 150
drives, general information
DLM monitoring 337 to 343 encryption, overview
component
Fibre Channel WWN 75, 177 drive-based features 553
identifiers 67 to 68
Global Spare icons 413 EnergyAudit
descriptions 52 to 54
installing new 502 description 25
Fibre Channel
connectivity ?? to 75 returning Global Spare to spare See also power consumption
pool 414 entering information
Fibre Channel port
location 52 viewing performance using external keyboard 102
metrics 171 to 172 using soft keyboard 101
F-QIP-attached SCSI 76 to 77
viewing status 175 using the web interface 101
purchasing 532
dual AC power module entry/exit pool
related documentation 20
location 33
SCSI terminator location 52 best practices 523
dual main frame TAPs, See center
supported types 52 configuring 204 to 205
TAP
drives, monitoring with DLM description 58
generating reports 341 to 343 exchange
saving a report 343 magazines 254 to 257
drives, specifications
E export magazines 249 to 253
heat dissipation 541 import magazines 237 to 247
EE chambers, See entry/exit pool
LTO 546 to 550 loading empty
EE pool, See entry/exit pool magazines 247 to 248
power consumption and heat EE port, See TAP
dissipation 542 minimum number of
email chambers 205
read/write compatibility, LTO
configuring minimum requirement 58
generations 555
recipients 124 to 125 preparing for use 247 to 248
TS11xx technology 551
drive trace results 417 space requirements for imports
drives, troubleshooting
enabling for auto saved and exports 238
activating Global configuration
Spare 410 to 413 view inventory 270 to 272
file 126 to 127
DLM tape usage 342 entry/exit port
Spectra Logic offices 7
host cannot access drive 422 See entry/exit pool
trace results 380
host cannot read/write See TAP
See also mail recipients
data 421 environmental specifications
emulation
identify problem 420 to 422 library, operating 543
configuring 222
LTO WORM media library, shipping and
description 221 storing 543
errors 425
enabling options tape media 554
LTO, status LED 424
enter activation E-QIP, See discontinued
power-cycling 409
key 112 to 113 components, using 56
resetting 409
overview 110 to 114
retrieving trace
files 415 to 419

575
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – F

error codes exporting controller filenames

for drive troubleshooting 363, definition 69 auto saved configuration
420 port addressing for file 516
LTO-3 through LTO-6 partition 215 to 217 downloaded DLM
drives 424 to 432 See also controller database 344
TS11xx technology See also F-QIP library configuration
drives 432 to 436 See also RIM backup 517
error condition MLM and DLM database
HHM threshold, status backup 517
notification 372 MLM report 326
media health 324 F move queue file 285
system, status notification 91 traces 381
fabric address settings
EtherLib 25 filter, replacing 466 to 468
exporting controller (RIM or
Ethernet connector F-QIP) 215 to 217 firmware tape
camera 179 Fibre Channel drives 212 using Upgrade Drive Firmware
description 46 utility 497 to 500
failover
LCM and RCM, location 45 using with Drive Firmware
configuring for exporting
using on RCM 46 Update wizard 494 to 497
controller 136 to 138
Ethernet network firmware, drives
configuring for Fibre Channel
camera IP address 155 to 159, drives 81 check for update 482
160 to 161 controller failover current version 480
configuring library web server process 79 to 80 discontinue backups & empty
port settings 115 power supplies, main and drives 485, 492, 494, 498
library (LCM) IP drive frames 82 firmware update tape,
address 121 to 123 See also controller failover requirements for use 494,
EU Declaration of 497
fax numbers, Spectra Logic 7
Conformity 562 to 567 firmware update using
features
events, configuring Package Update, LTO-5
BlueScale user interface and later generation drives,
alarms 353 to 354 overview 23 to 27 requirements for use 486
expansion frames hardware prepare for update 479 to 482
description 63 components 27 to 39
update using ITDT 485
purchasing 532 user interface 86 to 94
update using update
export or exchange Fibre Channel wizard 494 to 497
using advanced import/export cable requirements 545 update using upgrade
options 259 to 268 connectivity 68 to 75 utility 497 to 500
export or exchange media protocol support 545 firmware, library
overview 236 to 237, Fibre Channel drives for individual
248 to 249
connection requirements 53 components 448
remote access restrictions 237
drive sled connectors 53 See also BlueScale Software
requirements and Support key
loop IDs 212
restrictions 236 to 237
sled connector locations, See also software, BlueScale
See also cartridges, exporting or
TS11xx technology 52 flash codes
exchanging
WWN 75, 177 LTO-3 through
See also cleaning cartridges,
Fibre Channel partitions, LTO-6 424 to 432
using
WWN 72, 178 permanent errors on LTO-2
See also magazines, exporting
Fibre Channel port locations through LTO-6 425
or exchanging
drive sleds 52 F-QIP
Exported Media report, MLM 322
F-QIP or RIM 50 component identifier 67
connectivity for
robotics 69 to 74

576
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – G

F-QIP (continued) Global Spare drive HHM

controller failover activating during creating an AutoSupport
operation 79 to 80 PostScan 314 ticket 373 to 376
description 51 backup software description 25
fabric mode in partition guidelines 411 icon 93
configuration 216 cartridge in drive following using to monitor library
Fibre Channel port reset 371 health 373
locations 50 cleaning 189 viewing library health
Fibre Channel port cleaning during PostScan data 377 to 378
usage 73 to 74 operations 316 host software
for SCSI drive configuration compatibility 544
connectivity 76 to 77 requirements 202 using emulation for
hardware reset 384 configuring 202 to 203 compatibility 221
location 33 description 81
port visibility, robotics 214 partition requirements 202
reset button 384 PostScan requirements 202,
reset using Reset Controller 203
I
utility 384 to 385 returning to spare pool 414 IBM LTO, See LTO
See also controller status icons 413 icons
See also discontinued use requirements 410 camera 92, 94
components, using 56 using 410 to 413 DLM drive health 339 to 340
See also RIM good status enable/disable the camera
F-QIP, partition configuration drive health 340 icon 119
port addressing 215 to 217 media health 323 Error condition 91
port visibility, drives 214 system 91 Global Spare drive 413
frames groups Information 91
description 63 library users 104 keyboard 99
maximum number 64, 536 security 104 Maintenance 93
numbering in component groups, library users 95, 104 MLM media health 323
identifiers 65 guidelines network settings 92
free pool MLM 511 to 514 Notice 91
contains magazines after protecting library’s saved refresh display button 91
configuration restore 402 data 515 to 519 status bar 91
description 58 using cartridges 520 to 526 Switch User 100
front panel components 27
system messages 91
bulk TAP 44
System OK 91
bulk TAP carousel 41
center TAP 43
H system status 91
identifiers
FullScan Hardware Health Monitoring, See controllers (RIM or F-QIP) 67
description 314 HHM
drives 67 to 68
enable/disable 208 hardware ID
import media
locating 113
into cleaning or storage
required to purchase partition 237 to 247
G options 113
See also serial number
overview 236 to 237
remote access restrictions 237
gateway address hardware, reconfiguration
requirements and
camera 390 caution 443
restrictions 236 to 237
setting for library 122, 123 hazardous materials directives,
See also cartridges, importing
General toolbar options 87 compliance 566 to 567
See also magazines, importing
heat dissipation 541

577
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – K

Import/Export TeraPack Cases IP address (continued) LC server

screen library (LCM), description 41
use for advanced import/ configuring 121 to 123 web server 48
export operations 260 Syslog server IP address 118 See also operator panel
Import/Export TeraPack viewing 120 See also user interface
Magazines screen ITDT See also web interface
using 241 installing 483 See also LCM
using to export using to retrieve drive dump LCM
magazines 250 files 417 Auto-Save Configuration 23
using to import using to test drives 425
magazines 242 capturing traces 378 to 381
using to update LTO drive configuration data on memory
importing magazines firmware 485 card 46, 47
using advanced import/export using to view status LED
options 259 to 268 configuring IP address 121
state 424
improper packaging, charges for connecting a USB device 184
damage 510 connector locations 45
Ethernet connection 46
initialization, library power-
on 163
K functional description 48
interfaces key location 33, 47
Ethernet requirements 545 entering to activate resetting 383
Fibre Channel 68 to 75 option 112 to 113 routine maintenance
Fibre Channel renewing for BlueScale option 132
requirements 545 Software See also LC server
library connections, F-QIP 51 Support 444 to 445 LEDs
library connections, RIM 51 See also options bulk TAP, using
supported for host 545 See also encryption key door status 41
USB 546 keyboard LTO status 424
interior lights, controlling 185 do not use the Enter key 84 power supply module status,
interoperability, host LCM connector 45 drive frame 36, 37
software 544 supported characters 102 power supply status,
inventory touch screen 101 robotics 35
backup software, updating using Enter key 102 left TAP, See bulk TAP
after an import 268 using external 102 library configuration
downloading as XML using the web interface 101 back up settings 150 to 154
file 273 to 276 Knowledge Base list of enabled options 112
during FullScan 314 library troubleshooting 363, restore using auto-save backup
during QuickScan using Global 420 file 399 to 404
Spare 315 restore using manual backup
expired cleaning file 404 to 406
cartridge 272 L security, configuring
locating a specific users 104
cartridge 277 labels library control module
moving cartridges within a placement on cartridges 556 description 44 to 48
partition 278 to 288 labels, barcode See also LCM, RCM
overview 270 best practices 520 Library Control Module, See LCM
requirements for cleaning cartridges 233 library controller, See LC server
downloading 270 label placement caution 234 library hardware upgrades 532
viewing 270 to 272 ordering custom barcode library messages
IP address sequences 528 checking 168
camera 155 to 159, 160 to 161 placement on cartridges 234 forwarding to a Syslog
displayed on status bar 92 specifications 556 to 560 server 118

578
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – L

library serial number, library, configuring (continued) library, overview

locating 113 Global Spare BlueScale features 23 to 27
library, BlueScale software, See drives 202 to 203 hardware features 27 to 39
software, BlueScale IP address 121 to 123 user interface 86 to 94
library, components mail recipients 124 to 125 library, specifications
AC power breakers and package server 144 to 146 data capacity 535
connectors, main or drive Rotation Manager 148 to 150 environmental 543
frame 38, 39
routine maintenance host interfaces supported 545
bulk TAP media expansion option 132
frame 40 to 41 recycling 566
setting name 115 shock and vibration limits 544
front panel 27 to 30
setting Syslog server IP size and weight, installed 537
interior 31 to 32 address 118
rear panel 33 to 39 size and weight, shipping 539
setting web server port 115
using discontinued 56 library, troubleshooting
SNMP 133 to 135
library, configuring BlueScale interface
library, firmware, See software, issues 364 to 367
activation key BlueScale
overview 110 to 114 calibrate touch screen 470
library, general information
add, modify, or delete capturing traces 378 to 381
documentation updates in
users 104 to 108 cartridge in Global Spare
release notes 446
adding capacity 111 following a reset or power-
host software cycle 371
auto saved configuration file, compatibility 544
description 126 cartridge left in tape drive 371
purchasing
back up settings 150 to 154 chambers marked as
upgrades 530 to 533
unusable 370
changing system related documentation 19
settings 114 to 129 configuration restore
library, import, export, exchange options 398
controller failover 136 to 138 media
encryption 368
date and time 127 exchange
encryption issues 368 to 369
default IP address 121 magazines 254 to 257
encryption moniker 368
default system export magazines 249 to 253
settings 115 to 120 encryption server 368
export or exchange expired
emulation 222 cleaning general 363
enable and configure cartridges 257 to 258 magazines in free pool after
SNMP 117 import magazines 237 to 247 configuration restore 402
enable email for auto saved import magazines, first magazines in TAP after a
configuration time 237 power failure 370
file 126 to 127 preparing entry/exit MLM issues 367
enable firmware pool 247 to 248 recovering media after power
updates 112 to 113 library, installation failure 370
enable Media Auto connect AC power 163 resetting a RIM or
Discovery 302 F-QIP 384 to 385
installing AC cord
enable or disable metrics locks 469 to 470 resetting library 381
monitoring 116 moving 443 resetting the LCM/RCM 383
enable or disable Soft library, maintaining restore using auto-save backup
Power 117 file 399 to 404
BlueScale package update
enable SSL 117 procedure 446 to 463 restore using manual backup
enable/disable camera file 404 to 406
prepare to update
icon 119 BlueScale 446 to 452 running the Run All Motion
enable/disable performance Basic Tests 396 to 398
replace air filter 466 to 468
monitoring 116 Spectra SKLM
updating RCM using USB
enable/disable power requirements 368
device 457
consumption using Knowledge Base 363,
monitor 116 420

579
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – M

library, users library, using (continued) magazines (continued)

deleting 108 switching or logging out processing import/export
modifying existing 107 user 100 move queue 259 to 268
library, using Syslog messaging 169 purchasing 528
activating Global Spare view cartridge inventory 270 See also Maintenance TeraPack
drive 410 to 413 view status 87 magazine
backing up viewing drive status 175 See also TeraPack magazine
metadata 516 to 518 viewing metrics 167 to 174 magazines, exporting or
best practices, saved viewing robot utilization exchanging
data 515 to 519 information 174 to 175 during PreScan or
BlueScale software version on viewing status 91, 97 PostScan 485, 492, 498
status bar 447 WWN for partitions 72, 178 during QuickScan using Global
bulk TAP status 41 Spare 315
license agreement, software 3
connectivity exchange from storage or
Load Count report, MLM 322
overview 68 to 77 cleaning
local interface, See touch screen partition 254 to 257
controlling the interior interface
lights 185 export from storage or cleaning
log set forwarding partition 249 to 253
download cartridge inventory
configuring recipient 354 export requirements 236
as an XML file 273 to 276
description 346 overview 236 to 237,
entering an SSL security
certificate 131 See also AutoSupport 248 to 249
IP address displayed on status logging into library, security prepare to export or
bar 92 certificate warning 129 exchange 249
locating a specific loop ID restricted during background
cartridge 277 exporting F-QIP 215 to 217 operations 237
logging in 95 to 100 Fibre Channel drives 212 using advanced
logging in from Library F-QIP-attached SCSI options 259 to 268
Controller Login drives 215 to 217 magazines, importing
screen 99 RIM or F-QIP 215 to 217 cleaning cartridge into storage
logging in from pre-login LTO partition 477 to 478
General Status screen 97 cartridge capacities 554 during FullScan 314
logging in with SSL cartridge MAM 290 during PreScan or
enabled 98 cartridges per TeraPack PostScan 485, 492, 498
logging out or switching magazine 55 during QuickScan using Global
users 100 drive Spare 315
name displayed in email specifications 546 to 550 maintenance magazines for
messages 115 read/write compatibility 555 cleaning partitions 233
name displayed on status supported drive overview 236 to 237
bar 92 generations 52 requirements 236, 238 to 240
power-off procedure 165 troubleshooting requirements for importing
power-on sequence 163 drives 420 to 441 into entry/exit pool 238
requirements for downloading WORM media 556 requirements for importing
cartridge inventory 270 See also drives into storage pool 239
restrictions while PostScan restricted during background
runs 316 operations 237
returning Global Spare to spare storage or cleaning
pool 414 M partition 237 to 247
security, users and groups 95, using advanced
104 M8 media 235 options 259 to 268
SNMP 133 to 135 magazines magazines, moving within library,
Soft Power to power inserting into bulk TAP 245 See move queue, cartridges
off 165 to 166 media pool locations 57 to 58

580
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – M

magazines, using maintenance, library MLM database (continued)

barcode label BlueScale package update backing up 330 to 332
requirements 233 procedure 446 to 463 deleting individual
carrying cases 529 prepare to update records 333
inserting cartridges 235 BlueScale 446 to 452 deleting multiple records 334
inserting into TAP 243 replace air filter 466 to 468 description 293
mail recipients updating RCM using USB download as a CSV file 335
AutoSupport 348 device 457 maximum number of
configuring 124 to 125 MAM, description 290 records 294
See also email MCD codes restore from backup on USB
mailing address, Spectra Logic 7 TS11xx technology device 406
drives 432 to 436 restore using auto-save backup
main frame, description 63
Media Auto Discovery, See MLM, file 399 to 404
Maintenance TeraPack magazine
Media Auto Discovery tracking non-MLM-enabled
See also TeraPack magazine
media expansion frame, cartridges 298
maintenance magazines description 63 MLM records, asterisk (*) next to
barcode label media, M8 235 barcode label 334
requirements 233, 239
media, See cartridges MLM reports
create import/export move
Medium Auxiliary Memory, See asterisk (*) next to barcode
queue 259 to 262
MAM label 514
exchange from cleaning
memory card Born on Date 322
partition 254 to 257
configuration data stored 46, Cleans Remaining 322
export from cleaning
47 Exported Media 322
partition 249 to 253
location in LCM or RCM 45 Last Write/Read Time 322
export or exchange expired
cartridges 257 to 258 message types, definitions 125 Load Count 322
for cleaning partitions 233 messages Media Health 322
import into cleaning date and time stamp 127 Remaining Capacity 322
partition 237 to 247 HHM notification 373 Remaining Capacity, for MLM-
processing import/export icons, MLM media health 323 enabled cartridges 294
move queue 266 to 268 icons, system status 91 saving 326 to 328
using advanced import/export library name 115 Write Errors 322
options 259 to 268 LTO cleaning notification 423 MLM, configuring
See also magazines types 91 broadcast capacity 303
See also Maintenance TeraPack metadata enable or disable 300
magazine backing up 516 to 518 enable PostScan for a
Maintenance TeraPack magazine best practices 515 to 519 partition 317
identifying 233 definition 515 global settings 299 to 302
Maintenance toolbar, options 89 See also DLM database PostScan blackout
maintenance, drives See also encryption keys periods 304 to 305
cleaning 472 to 478 See also library configuration PreScan and
device driver 501 PostScan 206 to 208
See also MLM database
prepare to update PreScan, enabling 310
metrics
firmware 479 to 482 MLM, Media Auto Discovery
drive performance 171 to 172
update firmware using configuring 302
power consumption 173
ITDT 485 description 291
storage density 173
update firmware using update overview 291
wizard 494 to 497 MLM database
restricted operations while
update firmware using adding cartridges 293,
running 297
upgrade utility 497 to 500 306 to 308
running during import, export,
See also drives, cleaning backed up in auto saved
or exchange
configuration 151
operations 237

581
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – N

MLM, Media Auto Discovery move queue, cartridges (continued) operator panel (continued)
(continued) requirements for See also user interface
start manual uploading 270 See also web interface
discovery 308 to 310 start processing manually 282 options
stop discovery process 310 supported moves using move activation key
using to add cartridges to MLM queue file 283 overview 110 to 114
database 306 to 308 move queue, magazines capacity upgrades 111, 531
MLM, PreScan and PostScan create import/export move enabling with activation
manually add a tape to queue 259 to 262 code 112 to 113
PostScan processing moves 266 to 268 obtaining activation
queue 317 to 319 key 113 to 114
pause PostScan operation 319 requirements when
PostScan, functional purchasing 113, 533
description 312 to 316 N viewing currently
PreScan, functional enabled 112
names
description 310
as identifier used in library
restricted operations while
messages 115
running 237
MLM, using
cleaning partitions 195 P
library identifier for remote
adding cartridges to the
access 115 package server,
database 306 to 308
library, displayed on status configuring 144 to 146
best practices 511 to 514
bar 92 package, See firmware, library
generating reports 321 to 326
library, used in email packaging, improper when
media alert, description 298 messages 115 shipping 510
operational NDMP support 546 partitions
overview 290 to 298
network See also cleaning
options for saved reports 327 partitions 270
interface cable
overriding red cartridge requirements 545 See also storage partitions
health 328 to 329
IP address, library partitions, configuring
preparing to (LCM) 121 to 123 assign a BlueScale encryption
implement 306 to 308
Network Camera Setup Wizard, key 209
Spectra Certified media 290 using 386 to 392, 392 to 396 assign a Spectra SKLM
track cleans remaining on network settings, configuring for server 209
cleaning cartridges 295 library 121 to 123 assign drives 205
track data cartridge health and Network Time Protocol (NTP), confirm and save
usage 294 configuring servers 127 settings 218 to 220
tracking non-MLM-enabled
create automatically 195, 198
cartridges 298
delete existing 229
troubleshooting issues 367
monitor, LCM connector 45 O enable BlueScale
encryption 209
mouse, LCM connector 45 On/Off, main or drive frame AC enable Spectra SKLM
move queue, cartridges breakers 38, 39 encryption key
create manually 278 to 281 operating environment management 209
create move queue library 543 fabric mode 216
file 283 to 285 tape media 554 F-QIP port visibility for
move queue file example 285 Operator group, default user name drives 214
move queue file naming and password 105 F-QIP requirements for
requirement 285 operator panel controller failover with
move queue file syntax 284 SCSI drives 201
connecting a USB device 184
processing move queue minimum number of chambers
description 41
file 286 to 288 for entry/exit pool 205
See also touch screen

582
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – P

partitions, configuring (continued) partitions, using (continued) PostScan (continued)

MLM PreScan and requirements for downloading Global Spare configuration
PostScan 206 to 208 cartridge inventory 270 requirements 202, 203
modify an existing 224 view cartridge Global Spare drive
modify number of inventory 270 to 272 cleaning 316
chambers 226 view WWN 178 Global Spare use
PostScan requirements for WWN format 72 requirements 410
Global Spares 202, 203 passwords interaction with moves 296
precautions before default 99 library operation
deleting 229 enter or change 107 restrictions 316
prepare to delete a PCM, description 37 manually add cartridge to
partition 229 queue 317 to 319
permanent errors, LTO-2 through
prepare to modify a LTO-6 drives 425 operations not permitted while
partition 226 running 319
phone numbers, Spectra Logic
requirements offices 7 overview 296, 312 to 316
overview 187 to 194 pausing operation 319
policies, RMA 510
robotic control path 200 prerequisites for starting 313
pools
run PreScan or PostScan while queue processing 312, 313
description 58
creating, modifying, or QuickScan time limit, Global
deleting 187 See also entry/exit pool
Spare drive 315
storage, new 196 to 217 See also free pool
QuickScan time limit, partition
user access 213 See also storage pool
drive 314
partitions, general information poor status
restricted operations while
advantages 61 drive health 340 running 297
cleaning, overview 62 to 63 media health 324 running during import, export,
conceptual overview 59 port visibility or exchange
example of use 60 description 77 operations 237
storage partition overview 61 port visibility, F-QIP-attached system messages 296
drives 214 triggers, setting 208
partitions, moving cartridges
portal updating drive firmware
See move queue, cartridges
accessing for technical during 485, 492, 498
See move queue, magazines
support 504 to 506 using blackout periods during
partitions, using
creating an account 505 backup window 317
Auto Drive Clean restrictions
See also technical support power
with PreScan 311
PostScan AC inputs 163
download cartridge inventory
as an XML file 273 to 276 automatic triggers 312 cord and connector types 540
exchange configure blackout cord locks, installing 469
magazines 254 to 257 periods 304 to 305 enabling or disabling Soft
export magazines 249 to 253 configure for partition, LTO-4 Power 117
or LTO-5 206 to 208 input specifications 539
import magazines 237 to 247
create or modify partitions main breaker switches 163
import magazines, first
while running 187 requirements 539 to 541
time 237
drive firmware Soft Power
inventory overview 270
requirements 316 confirmation 165 to 166
move cartridges using manual
enabling for partition 317 Soft Power, description 165
move queue 282
export or exchange magazines turn library on/off 165
PostScan requirements for
during 237, 485, 492, 498
Global Spares 410 turn off library using Soft
FullScan option, Power control 165 to 166
prepare entry/exit
description 314
pool 247 to 248 power button
functional
processing move queue description 42
description 312 to 316
file 286 to 288 location 28

583
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – Q

power consumption PreScan (continued) rebooting library 381

enable/disable start an manual scan 308 redundancy
monitoring 116 system message 296 drive connectivity 81
library 541 updating drive firmware network connectivity 78 to 81
LTO-5 drives 550 during 485, 492, 498 power supplies 82
LTO-6 drives 549 privileges, security 104 robotic connectivity 79 to 80
LTO-7 drives 549 privileges, user groups 95, 104 refresh display
LTO-8 drives 548 profiles in AutoSupport setting refresh rate 115
LTO-9 drives 547 create or modify 349 to 352 status bar button 92
TS1140 technology drives 553 deleting 353 time of last update 92
TS1150 technology drives 552 progress bar 94 updating information 92
TS1155 technology drives 552 protocol support regulations, safety
TS1160 technology drives 551 Fibre Channel 545 compliance 564
viewing metrics 173 purchasing regulatory agency
power control module, See PCM cleaning cartridges 528 compliance 562 to 567
Power Drive On/Off utility, use custom barcode labels 528 remaining capacity
with caution 409 drives 532 in MLM reports 322
power supply bay, main or drive library upgrades 530 to 533 reported for MLM-enabled
frame 33 purchasing Spectra Certified Media cartridges 294
power supply module and magazines 529 shown on General Status
DBA, description 36, 37 screen 298
purchasing 532 remote access, See web interface
robotics, description 35 Q Remote Library Controller (RLC),
See web interface
robotics, location 33
status LEDs 35, 36, 37 QIP, See F-QIP and See remote support, description 93
power, AC breaker switches, main discontinued components, using remove/replace
or drive frame 38, 39 QuickScan drive 503
PreScan enabling 208 repair, RMA policy 510
Auto Drive Clean time limit, Global Spare reports, DLM
restrictions 311 drive 315 generating 341 to 343
configure for partition, LTO-4 time limit, partition drive 314 saving for DLM 343
or LTO-5 using a Global Spare drive, reports, MLM
drives 206 to 208 description 315 Born on Date 322
create or modify partitions Cleans Remaining 322
while running 187
Exported Media 322
drive firmware R generating 321 to 326
requirements 311
RCM Last Write/Read Time 322
enable 208
configuration data on memory Load Count 322
enabling 310
card 46, 47 Media Health 322
export or exchange magazines
during 237, 485, 492, 498 connector locations 45 Remaining Capacity 322
functional description 310 functional description 48 saving 326 to 328
interaction with moves 296 location 33, 47 Write Errors 322
library firmware resetting 383 requirements
requirements 206 updating using USB barcode labels 556 to 560
overview 296 device 457 environmental, library 543
restricted operations while rear panel components environmental, tape
running 297 descriptions, bulk TAP media media 554
running during import, export, expansion frame 40 to 41 network cables 545
or exchange rear panel components, drive power 539 to 541
operations 237 frame 33 to 39

584
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – S

Reset Controller utility, robotics (continued) security certificate, creating for use
using 384 to 385 control path, configuring 200 with SSL 129
resetting power, status LED 35 Security toolbar, options 89
camera to DHCP 386 RIM port visibility 214 security, provided by configuring
caution after firmware selecting control path 200 users 95, 104
update 463 Robotics Control Module, See RCM Send Log Sets
caution, trace data 382 Robotics Status screen, configure 349 to 352
drives 409 accessing 87 description 346
LCM or RCM 383 Rotation Manager sense codes
library 381 configuring 148 to 150 drives, lookup on
RIM or F-QIP 384 to 385 description 148 website 363, 420
restore routine maintenance option, serial number
library configuring 132 drive 175
configuration 398 to 406 Run All Motion Basic Tests library 113
MLM & DLM databases 406 diagnostic See also hardware ID
Retrieve Drive Dump utility for accessing 87 servers, update
retrieving drive dump file 419 running 396 to 398 packages 144 to 146
returns, using an RMA 510 service access, space
RIM requirements 538
component identifier 67 service contract
connectivity for
S BlueScale Software Support,
robotics 69 to 74 renewing 444
safety agency compliance 564
controller failover entering BlueScale Software
sales, contacting 7
operation 79 to 80 Support key 112 to 113
SAS
description 51 extending or
connector specification 545 renewing 444 to 445, 529
fabric mode in partition
Save Library Configuration utility, required for BlueScale
configuration 216
using 151 to 153 update 530
Fibre Channel port
SCD codes See also BlueScale Software
locations 50
displayed on the Drive Details Support key
Fibre Channel port
screen 424 setup wizard, camera
usage 73 to 74
LTO-3 through LTO-6 default administrator
hardware reset 384
drives 424 to 432 name 388
location 33
multiple errors 425 using 386 to 392, 392 to 396
port visibility, robotics 214
permanent errors 425 Shared Library Services, See SLS
reset button 384
WORM media errors 425 shipping
reset using Reset Controller
SCSI bus, drive library environment 543
utility 384 to 385
connectivity 76 to 77
See also connectivity RMA on return label 510
SCSI drives
See also controller failover shock and vibration limits,
connection requirements 53 library 544
RLC
drive sled connectors 53 slots
description 85
terminator location 52 description 32
See also remote access
SCSI terminator, description 53 upgrading capacity 111, 531
See also web interface
SD memory card, See memory card SLS
RMA numbers, using 510
security activation key
robotics
configuring users 104 requirements 111, 191
configuring robotic control
default users 104 description 61
path 200
groups 104 purchasing 531
connectivity through
controller 69 to 74 privileges 104 See also partitions
control path provided by SMTP address, setting 125
RIM 70, 71

585
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – S

SNMP specifications status

enable and configure 133 AC power connectors 540 attention required, system 91
enabling and configuring 117 AC power cord 540 attention, drive health 340
version implemented in barcode labels 556 to 560 average, media health 323
library 117 cooling requirements 541 error, system 91
soft keyboard data capacity 535 for drives 175
description 84 environmental, library 543 General Status screen 87
on touch screen 101 environmental, tape media 554 good, drive health 340
using 99 heat dissipation 541 good, media health 323
using to troubleshoot operator LTO media capacity 554 information notification 91
panel display
LTO tape drives 546 to 550 library messages 168
problems 366
multi-frame space on General Status screen 87
Soft Power
requirements 537 on pre-login General Status
description 165
power 539 to 541 screen 97
enabling or disabling 117
power consumption 541 poor, drive health 340
using 165 to 166
SAS connector 545 poor, media health 324
software
service access space System OK 91
license agreement 3 requirements 538 unknown, media health 324,
software support key, See BlueScale
shipping size and weight 539 340
Software Support key
shock and vibration limits, using status bar 91
software, BlueScale
library 544 status bar
backup configurations before
size and weight 537 BlueScale software
updating 452
TS11xx technology media version 447
BlueScale Software Support
capacity 555 description 91
key requirement 110
TS11xx technology tape enable/disable the camera
BlueScale Software Support
drives 551 icon 119
key, renewing 444
Spectra Certified Media refresh display 91
check release notes for updated
information 446 CarbideClean 527 remote access icon 93
configuring a package cleaning cartridges 528 system status icon 91
server 144 to 146 description 527 time of last refresh 92
current version 92 MLM-enabled 290 status icons, descriptions 91
download to USB device 451, purchasing 529 status LED
487 Spectra Logic LTO drives 424
expired BlueScale Software contacting 7 power supply module, drive
Support key 444 Spectra Logic Technical Support frame 36, 37
managing packages 465 portal, See portal power supply, robotics 35
package update Spectra PC and Spectra LS storage density, viewing
procedure 446 to 463 description 44 to 48 metrics 173
renewing BlueScale Software memory cards 46, 47 storage partitions, architecture 61
Support key 444 to 445
See also LCM storage partitions, configuring
support requirements for
See also RCM assign chambers and
updates 530
Spectra SKLM key management drives 204
supported browsers 85
assigning to a partition 209 Auto Drive Clean icon 220
supported packages 446
SSL creating automatically 197
updating RCM using USB
creating a security initial settings 196 to 198
device 457
certificate 129 minimum drive and slot
upgrade policy 530
enabling 117 requirements 61
upgrading from a USB
entering security certificate name and media type 199
device 455, 490
into library 131 new 196 to 217
viewing current version 92,
447 logging into the library 98

586
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – T

storage partitions, moving subnet mask tape media

cartridges camera 390 environmental
create move queue library 122, 123 specifications 554
manually 278 to 281 setting for library 122, 123 MLM-enabled 290
processing move queue superuser See also cartridges
file 286 to 288 tape rotation
default user name and
using move queue password 105 example 524 to 526
file 283 to 285
deleting last 108 using Rotation Manager 148
See move queue, cartridges
privileges 105 target, visibility 77
storage partitions, using
support ticket TBA, description 34
exchange
opening 507 technical support
magazines 254 to 257
sending 507 accessing the Technical
export magazines 249 to 253
Switch User, using to change users Support portal 504 to 506
import magazines 237 to 247
or log out 100 BlueScale software
import magazines, first updates 530
Syslog messaging
time 237
configuring server IP contacting 7
prepare for
address 118 creating a portal account 505
imports 240 to 241
enabling/disabling 118 service options 363, 420
requirements for importing
into entry/exit pool 238 message format 170 using
using 169 AutoSupport 356 to 361
requirements for importing
into storage pool 239 system using Knowledge Base 363,
change global 420
software-based drive
cleaning 240 settings 114 to 129 See also portal
user privilege to import or configuration TeraPack Access Port, See TAP
export cartridges 236 defaults 115 to 120 TeraPack Bay Assemblies, See TBA
See also export or exchange system messages TeraPack case or container
media date and time stamp 127 See magazines
See also import media generated by PreScan and See TeraPack magazine
storage pool PostScan 296 TeraPack magazine
configuring 204 to 205 HHM notification 373 capacity 233
description 58 icons 91 cover 522
empty chambers 238, 239 icons, MLM media health 323 description 55
exchange severity definitions 169 inserting cartridges 235
magazines 254 to 257 System OK icon 91 pre-loaded media 528
export magazines 249 to 253 System Setup screen, storage density 32
import magazines 237 to 247 accessing 88, 108 See also cartridges
importing media for first See also magazines
time 238 See also Maintenance TeraPack
prepare for
imports 240 to 241
T magazine
See also media
requirements for TAP throughput
importing 239 correct orientation for a See also transfer rate
view inventory 270 to 272 magazine 243 throughput, See transfer rate
storing cartridges, best description 42 time
practices 522 location 28 in status bar 91
storing the library, environmental See also bulk TAP
requirements 543 setting 127
See also center TAP toolbar options map 90
stylus, location 42
tape drives, See drives
su, See superuser

587
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – U

toolbars troubleshooting, drives (continued)

Configuration options 88 retrieving drive trace U
General, options 87 files 415 to 419
Maintenance 89 TS11xx technology 432 to 436 UDP broadcast, using to discover
using DLM drive camera 387
Security 89
test 437 to 441 Ultrium, See LTO
touch screen
troubleshooting, library Universal Serial Bus (USB)
calibrating 470
BlueScale interface See USB device
description 42
issues 364 to 367 See USB port
location 28
calibrate touch screen 470 unknown status
touch screen interface
capturing traces 378 to 381 drive health 340
description 84
chambers marked as media health 324
features 86 to 94
unusable 370 update drive firmware,
logging in 95 to 100
check firmware preparation 479 to 482
logging out 100
levels 447 to 449 Upgrade Drive Firmware Utility
soft keyboard description 84
collect trace data before using 497 to 500
using 95 to 101 resetting 382 upgrades to BlueScale software,
using soft keyboard 101 encryption 368 policy 530
traces encryption issues 368 to 369 upgrades, library
capturing 378 to 381 encryption moniker 368 adding capacity 111
displaying in a separate encryption server 368 BlueScale software
screen 380
general 363 options 530
emailing results 380
general information 362 hardware components 532
saving to USB device 380
magazine in TAP after power how to order 533
transfer rate failure 370 purchasing capacity 111, 531
LTO-4 drive 550 MLM issues 367 requirements when
LTO-5 drive 550 power-cycle reset 381 purchasing 113, 533
LTO-6 drive 549 recovering media in TAP after USB device
LTO-7 drive 548 power failure 370 connecting to operator panel or
LTO-8 drive 548 resetting a RIM or LCM 184
LTO-9 drive 547 F-QIP 384 to 385 saving traces to 380
TS1140 technology drive 553 resetting the camera to using for BlueScale
TS1150 technology drive 552 DHCP 386 upgrade 455, 490
TS1155 technology drive 552 resetting the LCM or using to save drive trace
TS1160 technology drive 551 RCM 383 files 417
transporter running the Run All Motion USB port
description 32 Basic Tests 396 to 398 description, operator
power supply modules, Spectra SKLM panel 42
description 35 requirements 368 interface support 546
troubleshooting, drives using Knowledge Base 363, location, LCM and RCM 45
420
host cannot access drive 422 location, operator panel 42
TS11xx technology
host cannot read/write data 421 using for BlueScale
cartridge capacities 555 upgrade 451, 487
identify problem 420 to 422
drive specifications 551 user groups
library error sense codes 363,
420 troubleshooting overview 95, 104
drive 432 to 436
LTO status LED 424 privileges 104, 105
typing
LTO WORM media 425 user interface
using external keyboard 102
LTO-3 through accessing 84 to 85
LTO-6 424 to 432 using soft keyboard 101
attention required
permanent errors, LTO-2 using the web interface 101 notification 91
through LTO-6 425 typographical conventions 21

588
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – V

user interface (continued) user privileges required to users

camera icon to access the (continued) adding new 105
BlueScale Vision configure MLM 306 changing logged in 100
viewer 179 configure Rotation configure partition access 213
command processing progress Manager 149 configuring 104 to 108
bar 94 configure soft load 223 configuring for library
Configuration toolbar control interior lights 185 security 95, 104
options 88 create HHM AutoSupport deleting 108
error notification 91 ticket and view HHM deleting last superuser 108
feature overview 23 to 27 data 373
logging in 95 to 100
features 86 to 94 create or modify storage and
logging out 100
General toolbar options 87 cleaning partitions 187
modifying existing 107
HHM notification 93 delete MLM database
records 333 overview 95, 104
information notification 91
download MLM database 335 types of privileges 105
logging in 95 to 100
enable and configure utilities
logging out 100
MLM 299 calibrate touch screen 470
Maintenance toolbar
enable options or change current firmware levels 448
options 89
system configuration HHM: View Data 377 to 378
map of toolbar options 90
settings 109 overview 24
moving cartridges within a
enable/disable Soft Power 117 Reset Controller, to reset
partition 278 to 288
export MLM database 344 RIM 384 to 385
refreshing displayed
information 92 generate MLM reports 306 Restore Library
manage firmware packages 465 Configuration 404 to 406
Security toolbar options 89
manually back up the library Restore Library Configuration
setting date and time 127
configuration 152 from Auto
soft keyboard 84 Save 400 to 402
modify barcode reporting 140
status bar 91 Retrieve Drive Dump, to
monitor the library 167
System OK notification 91 retrieve drive dump
move cartridges within a
typing, soft keyboard 101 file 419
partition 278
typing, using external Save Library
open or modify support tickets
keyboard 102 Configuration 151 to 153
through AutoSupport 356
typing, web browser 101
perform a DLM Drive Health
using 95 to 102 test 438
web 48
XML 48
reset a drive using V
BlueScale 409
user privileges required to reset RIM using verifying configuration backup
access DLM 337 BlueScale 384, 411 file 154
access drives screen 473 restore library virtual library, See partitions
activate or reclaim Global configuration 399 virtualization
Spare drive 411 restore MLM and DLM description 61
add, modify, or delete databases 399 See also partitions
users 104, 105 restore MLM database 406 See also SLS
back up MLM database 330 retrieve a drive trace file 416 visibility
calibrate touch screen 470 update BlueScale firmware and description 77
capture traces 378, 396 software 446 ports on F-QIPs, drives 214
configure a firmware package update drive firmware 480 visibility, robotic control path on
server 144, 147 use advanced import/export RIM ports 214
configure AutoSupport 348 options 259 voltage, AC input for library 539
configure controller use Soft Power 165
failover 136 view or download cartridge
configure emulation 221 inventory 270

589
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library
 Index – W

W
warnings
security certificate 129
warranty and service options 363,
420
web interface
available functions when
using 101
creating a security
certificate 129
description 85
entering information 101
features 86 to 94
logging in 95 to 100
logging in using SSL 98
logging out 100
supported browsers 85
use toolbar to navigate through
screens 85
using 95 to 102
See also user interface
web server
communication port 115
in LCM 48
reserved port number 115
website
drive sense code lookup 363,
420
host software interoperability
tables 544
Spectra Logic 7
World Wide Name, See WWN
WORM media
description 556
SCD codes for media
errors 425
write errors, reported by
MLM 322
write-protect switch, setting for
cartridges 234
WWN
assigned to partition 178
Fibre Channel drives 75, 177
partition 72
partitions, when using both
controller Fibre Channel
ports 72

590
May 2021 User Guide—Spectra T950 Library